Victory 2012-2013 Service Manual

SPECIFICATIONS / GAUGE / AUDIO
CHAPTER 1 1
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
TRADEMARKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
SERVICE RULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
SAFETY INFORMATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5
2012-2013 CROSS ROADS CLASSIC™ / HARD-BALL™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5
2012-2013 CROSS COUNTRY® / CROSS COUNTRY TOUR® / NESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7
VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9
GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT RATING (GVWR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9
VEHICLE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10
MODEL NUMBER DESIGNATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) DESIGNATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10
VIN NUMBER / MANUFACTURER LABEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10
VECI / NECI / TIRE INFORMATION LABELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.11
ENGINE NUMBER LOCATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.11
KEY IDENTIFICATION NUMBER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.11
SADDLEBAG WARNING LABEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.11
REAR SHOCK AIR PRESSURE LABEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.11
PUBLICATIONS & TECHNICAL LITERATURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.12
REFINISHING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.12
PAINT COLORS BY MODEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.12
PAINT COLOR CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.13
BREAK IN PERIOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.14
EMISSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.15
SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.16
TRANSPORTING, ELEVATING, AND SECURING THE MOTORCYCLE . . . . . . . . . . . 1.19
KEY SWITCH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.20
CROSS ROADS SPEEDOMETER / INSTRUMENTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.21
SPEEDOMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.21
MULTI-FUNCTION DISPLAY - CROSS ROADS (MFD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.21
SPEEDOMETER GEAR POSITION INDICATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.21
CROSS ROADS INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.22
CROSS COUNTRY INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.23
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY - CROSS COUNTRY (MFD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.24
ENGINE ERROR CODES (CROSS COUNTRY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.24
CLOCK (CROSS COUNTRY). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.25
TRIP INFORMATION (CROSS COUNTRY). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.25
GEAR POSITION (CROSS COUNTRY). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.25
TRIP ODOMETER (CROSS COUNTRY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.25
TEMPERATURE (CROSS COUNTRY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.26
ODOMETER (CROSS COUNTRY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.26
CHANGING INFORMATION DISPLAY UNITS (CROSS COUNTRY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.26
CONSOLE SWITCHES (CROSS COUNTRY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.26
HAND GRIP HEATER SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.26
SEAT HEATER SWITCH (CROSS COUNTRY TOUR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.26
LEFT HANDLEBAR SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.27
MODE BUTTON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.27
HAZARD SWITCH (EMERGENCY FLASHERS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.27
HEADLAMP HIGH / LOW BEAM SWITCH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.27
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.27
TURN SIGNAL MOMENTARY FEATURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.28
STARTER INTERLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.28
9924047 - 2012-2013 VICTORY Cross Roads / Cross Country Service Manual 1.1
© Copyright 2012 Polaris Sales Inc.
RIGHT HANDLEBAR CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.28
ENGINE STOP SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.28
ENGINE STARTER BUTTON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.28
FRONT BRAKE LEVER REACH ADJUSTMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.28
AUDIO / COM / CRUISE CONTROL BUTTONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.29
AUXILIARY DRIVING LIGHT SWITCH (CROSS ROADS CLASSIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.29
RADIO / AUDIO SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.29
CB RADIO / ICOM SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.38
AUX / IPOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.42
XM RADIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.44
NAV MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.46
REFERENCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.49
SAE TAP DRILL SIZES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.49
METRIC TAP DRILL SIZES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.49
DECIMAL EQUIVALENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.49
FAHRENHEIT TO CELSIUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.50
MEASUREMENT CONVERSION CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.50
1.2 9924047 - 2012-2013 VICTORY Cross Roads / Cross Country Service Manual
GENERAL INFORMATION 1
Trademarks
The following are REGISTERED trademarks of Polaris Industries Inc.:
VICTORY MOTORCYCLES, VICTORY, VICTORY PERFORMANCE, VICTORY VISION, NESS SIGNATURE SERIES
VICTORY VISION, FREEDOM, POLARIS; VEGAS; VEGAS JACKPOT; HAMMER; KINGPIN; NESS SIGNATURE
SERIES VEGAS JACKPOT.
Polaris acknowledges the following products mentioned in this manual:

LOCTITE, is a registered trademark of the Henkel Corporation
DUNLOP, is a registered trademark of the Dunlop Tire Corporation.
STA-BIL, is a registered trademark of Gold Eagle
NYOGEL, trademark of Gold Eagle
FLUKE, registered trademark of the Fluke Corporation
XM, a registered trademark of XM Satellite Radio, Inc.

Garmin is a registered trademark of Garmin, Ltd.
Service Rules
In order to perform service work efficiently and prevent costly errors, technicians should read the text in this manual and
familiarize themselves with the procedures before beginning. Notes, Cautions and Warnings have been included for
clarification of text and safety concerns. Knowledge of mechanical theory, tool use and shop procedures are necessary
to perform some procedures in this manual safely and correctly.
Use only genuine Victory service parts, including fasteners that require replacement if removed. Do NOT substitute
fasteners or hardware.
Cleanliness of parts and tools as well as the work area is of primary importance. Dirt and foreign matter will cause damage
to precision parts. Clean the motorcycle before beginning service. Clean all parts before installing.
If difficulty is encountered in removing or installing a component, look to see if a cause for the difficulty can be found. If
it is necessary to tap the part into place, use a soft face hammer and tap lightly.
Always follow torque specifications as outlined throughout this manual. Incorrect torquing may lead to serious machine
damage or in the case of steering, driveline, and chassis components, can result in loss of control during operation of
the motorcycle, which may result in severe personal injury or death.
If a torquing sequence is indicated for nuts, bolts or screws of a certain component, start all fasteners and hand tighten.
Following the method and sequence indicated, tighten evenly to the specified torque value. When removing nuts, bolts
or screws from a component with several fasteners, loosen them all about 1/4 turn before removing them to prevent
distortion of that component.
Replace all oil seals, sealing washers, gaskets, and O-rings with new ones during assembly. Be sure the mating surfaces
for the gasket are clean and smooth to avoid leaks and maintain specified tolerances.
Some procedures require removal of retaining rings or clips. Removal can weaken and deform these parts, therefore,
they should always be replaced with new parts. When installing new retaining rings and clips, use care not to expand
or compress them beyond what is required for installation.
Victory lubricants and greases have been specially formulated to provide maximum performance and protection when
applied properly. In some applications, warranty coverage may be void if improper lubricants are used.
Parts requiring grease should be cleaned thoroughly and fresh grease applied before reassembly. Deteriorating grease
loses lubricity and may contain abrasive foreign matter. Always replace locking hardware such as lock nuts or lock
washers, fasteners that have pre-applied locking agent, or any other fasteners as noted in this service manual with
genuine Victory hardware from an authorized Victory dealer. Working with batteries can be hazardous. Review all battery
warnings and cautions.
SAFETY INFORMATION
Understanding Safety Labels & Instructions
READ AND BECOME FAMILIAR WITH ALL WARNING AND CAUTION SYMBOLS AND STATEMENTS LISTED
BELOW AND IN THE TEXT OF THIS MANUAL BEFORE YOU BEGIN WORK.
This is the safety alert symbol. When you see this symbol
on the vehicle or in this manual, be alert to the potential for
Gasoline is extremely flammable and explosive under certain
personal injury. Your safety is involved! conditions.
• Always stop the engine and refuel outdoors or in a

well ventilated area
Indicates a hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, could • Do not smoke or allow open flames or sparks in or
near the area where refueling is performed or where
result in death or serious injury. gasoline is stored
• Do not overfill the tank. Do not fill the tank neck above
the fuel tank insert. Leave air space to allow for fuel
expansion
Indicates a hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, could result • If you get gasoline in your eyes or if you swallow
in minor or moderate injury. gasoline, see your doctor immediately. Never try to
syphon gasoline using mouth suction
• If you spill gasoline on your skin or clothing,
NOTICE: immediately was it off with soap and water and
change clothing
Indicates a hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, could result
in damage to the motorcycle. • Never start the engine or let it run in an enclosed
area. Engine exhaust fumes are poisonous and can
cause loss of consciousness or death in a short time
The engine exhaust from this product Improper repairs or service can create The engine and exhaust components on
contains chemicals known to cause cancer, unsafe conditions that may cause severe this product become very hot during
birth defects or other reproductive harm. personal injury or death. operation and remain so for a period of time
after the engine is stopped.
Never run the engine in an enclosed area Modifications to this motorcycle not Brake fluid is poisonous.
without a properly functioning exhaust approved by Victory may cause loss of
.
gas evacuation system connected to the performance, excessive emissions, and KEEP OUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN.
product. make the machine unsafe for use.
Wear insulated protection for hands and Brake fluid is poisonous. Do not ingest or Battery electrolyte is poisonous. It
arms or wait until hot components have allow brake fluid to contact eyes. Always contains sulfuric acid. Serious burns can
cooled sufficiently before working on the wear eye protection when working with result from contact with skin, eyes or
product. brake fluid.
Care should be taken to be sure the motorcycle

NOTICE
Brake fluid will damage plastic, painted and rubber parts.
will not tip or fall while elevated. Severe
Protect these surfaces whenever the brake system is being
personal injury or death could occur if the
.
motorcycle tips or falls.
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS 1
2012-2013 Cross Roads Classic™ / Hard-Ball™
Cross Roads Classic Hard-Ball
C Oil Capacity 5.0 Qt. (4.75 ltr) (Approximately 4.5 qts. or 4.25 ltr at oil & filter change)
A Fuel Capacity 5.8 US Gal (22.0 ltr) (1.0 U.S. gal / 3.8 ltr reserve)
P
Fuel Type / Octane Minimum Premium Unleaded / 91 Octane
A
C Dry Weight 745 lbs (338 kg) *LE = 772 lbs (350 kg) 758 lbs (345 kg)
I
Wet Weight 780 lbs (354 kg) *LE = 807 lbs (366 kg) 793 lbs (360 kg)
T
I Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 1360 lbs (617 kg)
E Gross Axle Weight Rating Refer to Manufacturer Information label on frame of vehicle (left side of steering head)
S
Maximum Load Subtract Wet Weight from GVWR or refer to Rider’s Manual. Never exceed GVWR
& Overall Length 104.4 in. (265.0 cm) except Cross Roads LE = 106.4 in. (270.26 cm)
D Overall Width 36.0 in. (91.4 cm) 36.0 in. (91.4 cm)
I Overall Height 56.3 in. (143.0 cm) 54.4 in. (138.2 cm)
M
E Seat Height 26.3 in (66.8 cm) 26.25 in (66.7 cm)
N Ground Clearance 5.8 in (14.8 cm)
S
Total Storage Volume 21.3 gallons (80.6 liters) See Saddlebag Warning (inside right saddlebag lid)
I
O Passenger Capacity 1
N
Wheelbase 65.7 in (166.9 cm)
S
Rake / Trail 29 Degrees / 5.6 in. (14.2 cm)
Engine Type VICTORY Freedom V-Twin
Engine Configuration 50o SOHC V-Twin 4 Stroke
Engine Displacement 1731cc / 106 cubic inch 6 speed (106 / 6 engine)
Engine Cooling System Air / Oil
E
N Compression Ratio 9.4:1
G
Compression Pressure 210 - 225 psi (1448 - 1551 kPa)
I
N Valve Train 4 Valves per cylinder. Hydraulic Lifters & Cam Chain Adjusters (No Adjustment)
E Bore x Stroke 101 x 108 mm
Idle Speed / Fast Idle Speed NOT ADJUSTABLE - ECM Controlled by IAC (Spec Idle Speed is 950 +/- 100 RPM)
Fuel System / Throttle Body Bore Size Closed Loop Sequential Electronic Fuel Injection / Dual Bore 45 mm
Exhaust System Type Split Dual Exhaust With Crossover
Lubrication System Wet Sump
Spark Plug Type (Gap) NGK DCPR6E (.032 in. / .8 mm)
Dry Weight (Engine Approximate) 265 lbs (120 Kg)
B Brake Type (Front / Rear) Disc / Disc
R
A Front Brake Dual 300x5mm Floating Disc / 4 Piston Calipers ABS
K
E Rear Brake Single 300x7mm Floating Disc / 2 Piston Caliper ABS
S
Specifications may change with the addition of custom order options and / or accessories. Polaris Sales Inc. reserves the right without prior notice to
discontinue at any time at its discretion any of the items herein or change specifications or designs without incurring any obligation to the customer.
2012-2013 Cross Roads Classic™ / Hard-Ball™

Cross Roads Classic Hard-Ball
Transmission Type Manual, 6 Speed Constant Mesh with True Overdrive
Clutch Type Wet, Multi-Plate, Diaphragm Spring
D
Primary Drive Type Wet, Gear Drive w/ Torque Compensator
R
I Primary Reduction Ratio 1.48:1
V Final Drive Type / Belt Width /
Carbon Fiber Reinforced Belt / 28mm / 2.12:1
E Final Drive Ratio
Gear Shift Pattern 1 Down, 5 Up
S Internal Gear Ratios 1st 3.13:1
Y 2nd 2.02:1
S
3rd 1.50:1
T
E 4th 1.20:1
M 5th 1:1
6th .87:1
Front Wheel (Size / Type) Spoke Type - 3.50 X 18”
Rear Wheel (Size / Type) Spoke Type - 5.00 X 16”
S Front Tire Dunlop 491 Elite II - 130/70-18 63H Bias-Ply (Tube Type)
U
S Rear Tire Dunlop D418 Elite 3 - 180/60R16 M/C 80H Radial (Tube Type)
P Minimum Tread Depth .063 in. (1.6mm)
E
N Front Type Inverted Telescopic Cartridge Fork
S Front Travel 5.1 in. (13 cm)
I Front Tube Diameter 43 mm (1.7 in.)
O
N Rear Shock Type Single, Monotube Air Adjustable Shock
Rear Swingarm Type Cast Aluminum with Constant Rate Linkage
Rear Travel (inches) 4.7 in (12 cm)
L Headlamp High H-11 55W / Low: H-11 55W
I HID Headlamp (If equipped) High H-11 / Low: D1SR
G Turn Signal Lamp Non-Serviceable LED
H
Brake / Tail / License Plate Lamp Non-Serviceable LED
T
S Alternator / Battery 625W (48A @ 13.0VDC) / 12V 18AH 310 CCA
Turn Signal / Horn 10 amp fuse
F Chassis 20 amp fuse
U Engine 15 amp fuse
S Fuel Pump / Ignition Coil 15 amp fuse
E Ignition 10 amp fuse
S Lights 20 amp fuse
Circuit Breakers See fuse box label (Chapter 2)
Fuel Type Premium Unleaded / 91 Octane Minimum
F Fuel Pump Pressure 3.51 BAR (351 kPa) (51 psi)
U Fuel Pump Volume (Approx. @ 12 V) 60 liters / hr (500 ml or 16.9 oz. / 30 seconds) (0.26 gal / min)
E Fuel Level Sensor Resistance Empty: 250 Ohms / Full: 50 Ohms
L Fuel Pump Current Draw Less than 5.0 Amps
Fuel Injector Resistance 11.4 - 12.6 Ohms
Specifications may change with the addition of custom order options and / or accessories. Polaris Sales Inc. reserves the right without prior notice
to discontinue at any time at its discretion any of the items herein or change specifications or designs without incurring any obligation to the customer.
2012-2013 Cross Country® / Cross Country Tour® / NESS Specifications 1

Cross Country / NESS Cross Country Tour / NESS
Oil Capacity 5.0 Qt. (4.75 ltr) (Approximately 4.5 qts. or 4.25 ltr at oil & filter change)
C Fuel Capacity 5.8 US Gal (22.0 ltr) (1.0 U.S. gal / 3.8 ltr reserve)
A
P Fuel Type / Octane Minimum Premium Unleaded / 91 Octane
A Dry Weight 760 lbs (344 kg) / 765 lbs (347 kg) 845 lbs (384 kg)
C
I Wet Weight 795 lbs (361 kg) / 800 lbs (363 kg) 880 lbs (399 kg)
T Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 1360 lbs (618 kg)
I
E Gross Axle Weight Rating Refer to Manufacturer Information label on frame of vehicle (left side of steering head)
S Maximum Load Subtract Wet Weight from GVWR or refer to Rider’s Manual. Never exceed GVWR
Overall Length 104.4 in. (265.0 cm) 108.1 in. (274.7 cm)
&
Overall Width 39.2 in. (99.5 cm) 40.5 in. (102.9 cm)
D
Overall Height 53.2 in. (135.1 cm) 59.75 in. (151.8 cm)
I
M Seat Height 26.25 in (66.7 cm)
E Ground Clearance 5.8 in (14.8 cm)
N
S 21.3 gallons (80.6 liters) See Saddlebag 38.7 gallons (146.5 liters) See Saddlebag
Total Storage Volume
I Warning (inside right saddlebag lid) Warning (inside right saddlebag lid)
O
N Passenger Capacity 1
S Wheelbase 65.7 in (166.9 cm)
Rake / Trail 29 Degrees / 5.6 in. (14.2 cm)
Engine Type VICTORY Freedom V-Twin
Engine Configuration 50o SOHC V-Twin 4 Stroke
Engine Displacement 1731cc / 106 cubic inch 6 speed (106 / 6 engine)
Engine Cooling System Air / Oil
E
N Compression Ratio 9.4:1
G
Compression Pressure 210 - 225 psi (1448 - 1551 kPa)
I
N Valve Train 4 Valves per cylinder. Hydraulic Lifters & Cam Chain Adjusters (No Adjustment)
E Bore x Stroke 101 x 108 mm
Idle Speed / Fast Idle Speed NOT ADJUSTABLE - ECM Controlled by IAC (Spec Idle Speed is 950 +/- 100 RPM)
Fuel System / Throttle Body Bore Size Closed Loop Sequential Electronic Fuel Injection / Dual Bore 45 mm
Exhaust System Type Split Dual Exhaust With Crossover
Lubrication System Wet Sump
Spark Plug Type (Gap) NGK DCPR6E (.032 in. / .8 mm)
Dry Weight (Engine Approximate) 265 lbs (120 Kg)
B Brake Type (Front / Rear) Disc / Disc
R
A Front Brake Dual 300x5mm Floating Disc / 4 Piston Calipers ABS
K
E Rear Brake Single 300x7mm Floating Disc / 2 Piston Caliper ABS
S
2012-2013 Cross Country® / Cross Country Tour® / NESS

Cross Country / NESS Cross Country Tour
Transmission Type Manual, 6 Speed Constant Mesh with True Overdrive
Clutch Type Wet, Multi-Plate, Diaphragm Spring
D
Primary Drive Type Wet, Gear Drive w/ Torque Compensator
R
I Primary Reduction Ratio 1.48:1
V Final Drive Type / Belt Width /
Carbon Fiber Reinforced Belt / 28mm / 2.12:1
E Final Drive Ratio
Gear Shift Pattern 1 Down, 5 Up
S Internal Gear Ratios 1st 3.13:1
Y 2nd 2.02:1
S
3rd 1.50:1
T
E 4th 1.20:1
M 5th 1:1
6th .87:1
Front Wheel (Size / Type) Cast or Billet / 3.5 x 18 (inch)
Rear Wheel (Size / Type) Cast or Billet 5.00 x 16 (inch)
S Front Tire Dunlop D418F Elite 3 - 130/70R18 63H Radial
U
S Rear Tire Dunlop D418 Elite 3 - 180/60R16 M/C 80H Radial
P Minimum Tread Depth .063 in. (1.6mm)
E
N Front Type Inverted Telescopic Cartridge Fork
S Front Travel 5.1 in. (13 cm)
I Front Tube Diameter 43 mm (1.7 in.)
O
N Rear Shock Type Single, Monotube Air Adjustable Shock
Rear Swingarm Type Cast Aluminum with Constant Rate Linkage
Rear Travel (inches) 4.7 in (12 cm)
L
HID Headlamp High H-11 / Low: D1SR
I
G Turn Signal Lamp Non-Serviceable LED
H Brake / Tail / License Plate Lamp Non-Serviceable LED
T
S Alternator / Battery 625W (48A @ 13.0VDC) / 12V 18AH 310 CCA
Turn Signal / Horn 10 amp fuse
F Chassis 20 amp fuse
U Engine 15 amp fuse
S Fuel Pump / Ignition Coil 15 amp fuse
E Ignition 10 amp fuse
S Lights 20 amp fuse
Circuit Breakers See fuse box label (Chapter 2)
Fuel Type Premium Unleaded / 91 Octane Minimum
F Fuel Pump Pressure 3.51 BAR (351 kPa) (51 psi)
U Fuel Pump Volume (Approx. @ 12 V) 60 liters / hr (500 ml or 16.9 oz. / 30 seconds) (0.26 gal / min)
E Fuel Level Sensor Resistance Empty: 250 Ohms / Full: 50 Ohms
L Fuel Pump Current Draw Less than 5.0 Amps
Fuel Injector Resistance 11.4 - 12.6 Ohms
VEHICLE LOADING 1
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
WARNING
Exceeding the gross vehicle weight rating of your motorcycle can reduce stability and handling and could cause loss
of control. NEVER exceed the gross vehicle weight rating of your motorcycle.
The maximum load capacity of your motorcycle is the maximum weight you may add to your motorcycle without
exceeding the GVWR. This capacity is determined by calculating the difference between your motorcycle’s gross vehicle
weight rating and the wet weight.
Refer to the specification section of this manual or the Manufacturing Information / VIN label on the motorcycle frame
for model-specific information. Refer to Information label section in this manual (page 1.10) for location on the
motorcycle.
When determining the weight you will be adding to your motorcycle, and to ensure you do not exceed the maximum load
capacity, include the following:
•operator body weight

•passenger body weight
•weight of all riders’ apparel and items in or on apparel
•weight of any accessories and their contents
•weight of any additional cargo on the motorcycle
VEHICLE INFORMATION
Model Number Designation
Example: V13SW36NA
MODEL ENGINE PREMIUM

GROUP MODEL MODEL TYPE ENGINE SIZE SERIES COLOR
YEAR HP DESIGNATION
1st digit 2/3rd digit 4th digit* 5th digit* 6th digit* 7th digit* 8th digit 9th digit** 10th digit
A = Arlen Ness Vision
B = Cross Roads
D = Cross Country
A = 8 Ball
E = Hard-Ball
B = Standard
G = Vegas
C = Custom
H = Hammer E = Int’l
11 L = Low 1 = 1507 cc (92 ci)
K = C. Ness CCT 6 = 78-94 N= C = California
V 12 S = Sport 2 = 1634 cc (100 ci)
M = Judge 7 = 95-115 North A = Canada
13 W = ABS 3 = 1731 cc (106 ci)
R = Boardwalk America
Z = Limited
S = Vision Tour
Edition
T = Cross Country Tour
W = Vegas High-Ball
X = Jackpot
Z = Z. Ness Cross Ctry
* = digits that would transfer to 17 digit VIN and are used in digits 4-8 respectively
** = 9th digit will be used on color/featured versions of models (not including the base)
First 3 digits and 9th digit are used in model number only. They are not used with the 17 digit VIN.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) Designation

Example: 5VPXB36N0C3000000
Vehicle Descriptors Vehicle Identifiers

Mfg. Location
Model Year *
Engine Size
Check Digit
Engine HP
World Mfg. ID
Chassis
Individual Serial No.

Series
Type
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
5 V P X B 3 6 N 0 C 3 0 0 0 0 0 0
* Model Year: A = 2010; B = 2011; C = 2012; D = 2013
VIN Number / Manufacturer Label

The Manufacturer Information Label (A) contains the following:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) (also stamped into frame on right side of the steering head).
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

• Gross Axle Weight Rating
• Tire and Wheel Information
• Date of Manufacture
VECI / NECI / Tire Information Labels Key Identification Number
1
The Vehicle Emission Control Information (VECI) and The key identification number (D) is stamped on a tag
Noise Emission Control Information (NECI) labels are attached to the key ring. If key and identification number
located at (B). are lost or misplaced, the lock set must be replaced.
Key blanks are available from Victory. Locksmiths familiar
with the motorcycle industry will be able to cut a
replacement key with an I.D. number and a key blank.
B D E
Engine Number Location

The engine number (C) is stamped into the right
crankcase boss and identifies engine model and serial
number.
Saddlebag Warning Label

Saddlebag Warning Label (E).
Rear Shock Air Pressure Label

Rear Shock Air Pressure Label (F).
PUBLICATIONS & TECHNICAL LITERATURE

PUBLICATION PART NUMBERS
Some Victory publications, such as Owner’s Manuals and Parts Books are available on-line and can be downloaded from
the Victory motorcycles web site (http://www.polarisindustries.com/en-us/Victory/). Click on the Riders pull down menu
and select Manuals and Parts.
Service Manuals and Owner’s Manuals can be purchased through any authorized Victory motorcycle dealer. The part
numbers are listed in the following table. Some manuals are available for purchase on-line at www.purepolaris.com.
MODEL Service Manua l PN Owner’s Manual PN

2012 Vegas, Hammer, Jackpot, Kingpin 9923271 9923268 (NA)
2012 Vision 9923282 9923276 (NA)
2012 Cross Roads / Cross Country 9923286 9923283 (NA)
2012 Cross Roads Hard-Ball Supplement No supplement offered. 9923966
2013 Vegas, Hammer, Jackpot, High-Ball, Judge, Boardwalk 9924060 9924064
2012-2013 Vision 9924040 9924035
2012-2013 Cross Roads / Cross Country / Hard-Ball 9924047 9924041
REFINISHING
Paint Colors By Model
The 8th Digit of the model number (either a C, D, L, or U) designates the Series:
(C = CANADA, D = Domestic (49 State), E = Europe, L = CALIFORNIA, and U = United Kingdom.
The 9th letter of the model number designates the color.
2012 VICTORY CROSS ROADS / CROSS ROADS CLASSIC LE / CROSS ROADS HARD-BALL w/ABS
Model Number Model
V12BW36NA, NAA, NAC Black
V12BW36EA Black (soft bags)
V12EW36EA Black (hard bags)
V12EW36NZ, NZC, NZA, EZ Flat Black with Red Pinstripe (hard bags)
V12BW36NS, NSA, NSC Sunset Red
V12BW36EB Sunset Red (soft bags)
V12EW36ES Sunset Red (hard bags)
V12EW36EB Imperial Blue
V12BW36NR, NRA, NRC, ER Black with Classic graphics
2012 VICTORY CROSS COUNTRY / CROSS COUNTRY TOUR / NESS w/ABS
V12DW36NA, NAA, NAC, EA Solid Black
V12DW36NCA Sunset Red
V12DW36NY, NYA, NYC, EY Sunset Red & Silver
V12TW36NA, NAC, NAA, EA Black
V12TW36NS, NSA, NSC, ES Sunset Red
V12TW36ET Sunset & Silver
V12KW36NN, NNA, NNC, EN Boardwalk Blue / Ness Graphics
V12TW36NW, NWA, NWC, EW Pearl White
2013 VICTORY CROSS ROADS CLASSIC / HARD-BALL 1

Model Number Model
V13BW36EB, NB, NBA, NBC Burgundy / Classic Graphics
V13EW36EZ, NZ, NZA, NZC Flat Black with Red Pinstripe (hard bags)
2013 VICTORY CROSS COUNTRY / CROSS COUNTRY TOUR / NESS
V13DW36EA, NA, NAA, NAC Black
V13DW36EF, NF, NFA, NFC Anti-Freeze Green / Flame Graphics
V13DW36ES, NS, NSA, NSC Sunset Red
V13DW36ET, NT, NTA, NTC Super Graphite
V13TW36EA, NA, NAA, NAC Black
V13TW36EC, NC, NCA, NCC Nuclear Sunset / Graphics
V13TW36EL, NL, NLA, NLC Bronze Mist
V13TW36EU, NU, NUA, NUC Boardwalk Blue
V13KW36EK, NK, NKA, NKC Gold Digger Pearl / Ness Graphics
V13ZW36EV, NV, NVA, NVC Suede Titanium Metallic / Ness Graphics
V13DW36NN, NNC, NNA Suede Nuclear Sunset
Paint Color Codes

For current information Victory Dealers can go to www.polarisdealers.com/News, Forms, and Links. Enter PAINT
CODES in the search box.
PAINT COLOR: PAINT CODE NOTES
Black P-266
Imperial Blue P-598
Vogue Silver P-354
Boardwalk Blue P-524
Pearl White P-566
Sunset Red P-520
Suede Titanium Metallic P-1342
Gold Digger Pearl P-1341
Bronze Mist P-451
Anti-Freeze Green P-1335
Burgundy --
Super Graphite P-1339
Metallic Flake Additive METALLIC Add vial of flake to quart of clear base
Clear C
Flat Black P-463
UNDERCOATERS WU, OWU, WU=White Undercoater; OWU=Off-White Undercoater;
(Base Coat Only) PWU, VVU PWU=Pearl White Undercoater; VVU=Victory Violet Undercoater
BREAK IN PERIOD
Break-in Procedure
There is never a more important period in the life of a new Victory motorcycle than the period between zero and 500 miles
(805 km). A Victory motorcycle is manufactured using the best possible materials and manufacturing techniques, but the
final machining process is the break-in. During break-in period, many parts in the engine wear and polish to correct
operating clearances. During this time, the operator should:
• Avoid prolonged full throttle operation.
• Avoid operation which might result in excessive heating of the engine.
The general break-in guidelines are as follows:
BREAK-IN GUIDELINES
Miles/km Throttle Notes
Position
0-90 miles 0-1/3 Avoid prolonged operation above 1/3 throttle. Stop engine and let it cool
following every hour of operation. Vary speed of motorcycle. Do not operate
machine at one set throttle position.
90-300 miles 0-1/2 Avoid prolonged operation above 1/2 throttle. Stop engine and let it cool
following every hour of operation. Vary speed of the motorcycle. Do not
operate machine at one set throttle position.
300-500 miles 0-3/4 Avoid cruising speeds above 3/4 throttle.
500 miles Replace the engine oil and engine oil filter. Perform 500 mile service on the machine.
See chapter 2 for more information.
500 + Avoid prolonged full-throttle operation. Vary the engine speed occasionally. Follow the pre-
ride inspection outlined in the owner's manual.
EMISSIONS
Emission Control Systems 1
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency and California Air Resources Board (CARB) require manufacturers to certify
that their motorcycles comply with applicable exhaust emissions standards during their useful life, and that motorcycles
built after January 1, 1983 comply with applicable noise emission standards for one year or 6,000 km (3,730 mi) after
the time of sale to the ultimate purchaser, when operated and maintained according to the instructions provided.
Emission Sources
An internal combustion engine produces carbon monoxide and hydrocarbons during operation. Hydrocarbons must be
controlled because under some conditions hydrocarbons react with sunlight to produce photochemical smog. Carbon
monoxide must be controlled because it is toxic.
Exhaust Emission Control
Victory Motorcycles have an electronic engine management system which controls fuel delivery and ignition timing to
control hydrocarbon and carbon monoxide emissions. Follow the Periodic Maintenance Interval Table on (page 2.4) and
inspect the emission control system as outlined in this manual. No adjustments can be made to the EEC system.
Noise Emission Control System

Tampering with Noise Control Systems is Prohibited. Federal law prohibits the following acts or causing thereof:
1. The removal or rendering inoperative by any person other than for purposes of maintenance, repair or replacement,
any device or element of design incorporated into the motorcycle for the purpose of noise control prior to its sale or
delivery to the ultimate purchaser or while it is in use, or
2. The use of the motorcycle after such device or element of design has been removed or rendered inoperative.
Among those acts presumed to constitute tampering are the acts listed below:
1. Removal of, or puncturing the muffler, baffles, header pipes or any other component which conducts exhaust
gases.
2. Removal or puncturing of any part of the intake system.
3. Lack of proper maintenance.
4. Replacing any moving part of the motorcycle or parts of the exhaust / intake system with parts other than those
specified by the manufacturer.
Crankcase Emission Control

The crankcase emission control system is comprised of a closed system that routes crankcase emissions through the
air cleaner into the combustion chamber.
Evaporative Emission Control

California models are equipped with an Evaporative Emissions
Canister mounted under the rear fender. Activated charcoal inside the
canister temporarily stores fuel vapor from the fuel tank vent system.
The Electronic Control Module (ECM) opens a canister purge valve that
connects the charcoal canister to the intake tract (when conditions are
correct) to purge the canister of vapors absorbed by the charcoal. Refer
to Chapter 5 for system diagram and Chapter 2 for maintenance.
SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS

General / Precision Measuring Tools
TOOL PART NUMBER
Bearing & Seal Driver Set PV-43558
Bodywork Removal Tool Set PV-49955
Bore Gauge Set, 50-100mm PV-3017
Dial Caliper (Metric, 0-150mm) PV-26900-7
Dial Caliper (Electronic Conversion. English 0-6” / Metric 0-150mm) PV-39776
Dial Indicator, Adjustable (Metric. 10mm travel) PV-26900-12
Dial Indicator Stand, Flexible. Magnetic Base PV-34481
Engine Ear Listening Device PV-39565
Feeler Gauge Set PV-26900-8 or PV-26900-9
Outside Micrometer (0-25 & 25-50mm) PV-3006, PV-3007
Outside Micrometer Set (0-100mm) PV-3009
Small Hole Gauge Set Commercially Available
Straight Edge, Precision PV-34673
Surface Plate Commercially Available
Telescoping Gauge Set PU-45423
Torque Wrench (3/8” Drive 0-50 in-lb. beam type) PV-43543
Torque Wrench (1/2” Drive 0-150 ft-lbs beam type) PV-43552
Torque Wrench (3/8” Drive 15-100 ft-lbs click type) PV-43564
Tune Up & Maintenance Tools

TOOL PART NUMBER
Belt Tension Gauge PV-43532
Belt Tension - Sonic Tension Meter Commercially available
Cylinder Leakdown Tester PV-35667-A
Compression Gauge Set PV-33223
Oil Pressure Gauge Set PV-43531
Vacuum Brake Bleeder PV-50204
Front Brake Lever Reserve Inspection Adapter PV-50104
Electrical Tools
TOOL PART NUMBER
Ammeter Inductive Clamp for Fluke 73™ Multimeter PV-39617
Cruise Control Jumper Harness (Diagnostic) Kit PV-49358
Electrical Connector Test Adapter Kit PV-43526
Inductive Timing Light PV-43537
Multimeter, Fluke 73™ PV-43546
Battery / Conductance Tester MDX - 610P / PU-50296
Engine, Clutch, & Transmission Tools
1
TOOL PART NUMBER
Clutch Shaft Bearing Support PV-47331
(for clutch shaft installation)
Crankcase Assembly Tool (Crankcase Installer) PV-46299 (Must be used with PV-45030) and
Adapter (Extension) PVX-47429
Crankcase Assembly Tool Adapter PVX-47429
Crankshaft Bearing Protector PV-47207
Crankshaft Rotation Tool PV-48736
Crankcase Separator (Crankcase Removal) PV-47332B (MY11 complete new kit), or PV-
47332A & PV-50371 (PV-50371 updates PV-
47332A for MY11 engines)
Engine Hoist or Lift Commercially Available
Engine Lock Tool PV-43502-A
Engine Stand Commercially Available
Flywheel Puller PV-43533
Mainshaft (Clutch Shaft) Holder PV-45028
Crankcase Installation Tool (Crankcase Assembly) PV-46299 (Must be used with PV-45030)
Mainshaft (Output Shaft) Seal Installation Tool PV-43505
Piston Ring Compressor (97mm +) Includes PV-43570-1 Pliers, PV-43570-2 Band
(3 5/8” to 3 7/8”)
Valve Spring Compressors (Adapter is PV-43513-A) PV-1253 or PV-4019 (Quick Release)
Steering & Suspension Tools

TOOL PART NUMBER
Blind Bearing Remover Set PV-43551
Wheel Bearing Service Set PV-49462
Fork Spring Compressor PV-49463
Cartridge Shaft Extension PV-49453
Cartridge Holder PV-49452
Fork Oil Level Gauge PV-59000-A
Fork Seal Driver 43mm, Inverted Forks PV-47035
Fork Seal Guide Tool, 43mm PV-47037
Steering Bearing, Wheel Bearing Installation Set PV-43515
Steering Stem Bearing Adjustment Socket PV-43508
Steering Stem Bearing Spanner Wrench PV-43509
Shock Spring Compressor PV-43571
Wheel & Tire
TOOL PART NUMBER
PV-48909 (Victory Air Pump & Gauge) Or
Air Pressure Gauge
Commercially Available Tire Pressure Gauge
Tire Bead Breaker Commercially Available
(May be part of the tire removal equipment being used)
Tire Mounting Lubricant Commercially Available
Tire Removal Equipment Commercially Available
Rim Protector PV-43536
Wheel Balancing/Truing Stand Commercially Available
Fuel System & Fuel Injection

TOOL PART NUMBER
(See Chapter 5 for more information)
Victory/Polaris Diagnostic Tool Kit PV-46085-B
Digital Wrench Software: PU-47052-G
Standard Interface Cable: PU-47151
PV-46085-B (above) INCLUDES:
Victory Adapter: PV-46085-2
SmartLink Interface Kit: PU-47471
Fuel Pressure Gauge PU-43506-A
Fuel Pressure Gauge Adapter PV-48656
Fluke 73 Digital Multi-Meter or (Fluke 77 DMM) PV-43546 (Fluke 77 - PV-43568)
Laptop Computer (Refer to diagnostic software user manual Commercially Available
or HELP section for minimum specifications
Fuel Tank Fitting Plug Tool (9.5mm) 2009-2011 PV-50251
Fuel Tank Fitting Plug Tool (11.8mm) 2011-current
PV-50567
Refer to Chapter 5 for tool application details.
Tool Ordering Information

Order Special Service Tools from SPX Corporation (Phone 800-328-6657 / FAX 586-578-7375) or use the link on the
Victory Dealer Web site.
If you are not a Victory dealer use the phone or FAX number listed above or visit http://polaris.spx.com/
TRANSPORTING, ELEVATING, AND SECURING THE MOTORCYCLE 1

General Guidelines
WARNING
Care should be taken to be sure the motorcycle will not tip or fall while elevated. Severe personal injury or
death could occur if the motorcycle tips or falls.
If you must transport the motorcycle or secure it to a lift table:

• Use a truck, trailer, or lift table designed or equipped properly for motorcycles. Review truck, trailer or lift
manufacturer’s recommendations.
• Do not tow the motorcycle with another vehicle, as towing will impair the motorcycle’s steering and handling,
which can cause a loss of control.
• Position and restrain the motorcycle so it remains upright on the truck, trailer, or lift table as gasoline may leak
out of the fuel tank vent if the motorcycle is transported at extreme angles. Gasoline is a fire hazard and it can
also damage the motorcycle’s finish.
• Do not restrain the motorcycle using the handlebars. Place soft tiedown straps around lower triple clamp and
fork tube, clear of any cables, wire harness, or other parts.
• Secure the rear of the motorcycle with tiedowns around the swingarm, being careful to avoid brake lines,
exhaust, drive belt, or drive belt guards.
• The motorcycle can be elevated by placing a stable, flat platform jack or lift mechanism on a firm flat surface and
lifting under the engine crankcase. The platform should be a minimum 12 inches square, and clear of any
components under the motorcycle. DO NOT attempt to lift the motorcycle without properly securing it with
straps.
(Both sides)
Platform jack To swing arm (both sides)
KEY SWITCH
Ignition Key
The ignition key operates the ignition switch only.
OFF
ON
PARK
Ignition Switch
The ignition switch has 3 positions - OFF, ON, and PARK.
Ignition Switch Function

No electrical circuits are active. Ignition key
OFF
can be removed from the switch.
All electrical circuits are energized and the
ignition key cannot be removed. The
headlight, tail light, and instrument lights
ON illuminate. The engine stop/run switch must
be in the RUN position to start the engine or
activate the turn signals and other electrical
features.
Tail light, indicator lights, and license plate
light illuminate. The radio can be operated
and instrumentation is active. The
PARK emergency flashers can be activated and
the ignition key can be removed. You must
push the ignition key into the switch to
select the PARK position.
CROSS ROADS SPEEDOMETER / 1

INSTRUMENTS
Speedometer (A) Speedometer Gear position Indicator

The speedometer receives an input signal from the ECM. For model year 2011-2013, ALL Victory Motorcycles with
The ECM outputs the speed information to the a gear indicator display will show two dashes (--) if the
speedometer via CAN. These outputs are displayed by the clutch is disengaged (lever pulled in).
analog needle (speed) or in the MFD window (distance).
The speedometer operates only when the ignition switch The gear indicator system uses multiple inputs to
is in the On position and the speed sensor has an input determine gear number (1-6). ALL of the following criteria
(vehicle is moving). Refer to Chapter 19 for speedometer must be present for gear indicator function:
or sensor diagnostics.
• Vehicle ignition and run / stop switch are powered
and the engine is running.
Multi-Function Display (MFD) (B)
The MFD can display many items, selectable by the • Vehicle is in motion.
MODE button on the LH handlebar switch. See chapter 19 • Vehicle clutch is engaged (clutch lever out).
for more information.
• Vehicle transmission is in gear 1 through 6 (not
The MFD can display the following: (some accessory neutral).
modes listed)
• Odometer
• Trip Odometer 1 & 2 Gear indicator
• Fuel Economy showing dashes.
• Tachometer
• Gear Indicator
• Clock
• Trip Hours
• Avg. Speed
• DC Voltage
• Ambient Air Temp
• Diagnostic Functionality (Engine Error Codes)
• Oil Pressure Warning (MY12+)
Cross Roads Instrument Cluster
Cross Country Instrument Cluster
1
Low Fuel
High Beam
RH Turn
LH Turn
Oil
Cruise Pressure
Control Neutral
Low
Check Battery
Engine ABS
Light Sensor Gear Position
Port
Indicator Lamp Function Indicator Lamp Function

Neutral The Check Engine Light (Malfunction
Illuminates when transmission is in neutral (and Indicator Lamp or “MIL”) is displayed during a
Key is in ON or ACC position) system check. If system sensors report an
abnormal condition, the indicator will continue
to illuminate as long as the fault condition
ABS Indicator always illuminates when key is in exists. An error code menu can be viewed on
the ON position and remains on until the anti- the Information Display by using the MODE
lock system is initiated, which occurs when button to toggle through the features until
vehicle speed reaches 6 MPH (10 km/h). “Err” is displayed. Record the information that
is displayed (e.g. “Err 3 - 520200”) and refer
On models equipped with reverse, “R” is
Chapter 5 for code conversion. NOTE: These
Reverse displayed on the LCD when transmission is in Check codes are not stored. The “Err” screen will
neutral, ignition key is in ON, and Reverse shift Engine appear when toggling the display with the
lever is in the Reverse position (Up)
MODE button only when the Check Engine
For model year 2011-2013, ALL Victory light is on. If the key is turned OFF, the code
6 Motorcycles with a gear indicator display will and message is lost, but will reappear if the
show two dashes (--) with the clutch disengaged. fault is still present after re-starting the
Gear The gear indicator system uses multiple inputs engine. Refer to Chapter 5 for more
Position to show the gear number (1-6). information about “Err” messages.
The Low Oil Pressure indicator illuminates
when the ignition switch is in the ON position
Illuminates when the head lamp switch is set to and the engine is
HIGH BEAM. Note: To energize headlamp not running. This demonstrates that the
circuit on 2009-2012 models, tap starter button
or start engine. indicator circuit is functioning properly. The
High indicator also illuminates when engine oil
Beam pressure drops below safe operating
Cruise Control indicator illuminates when cruise Low Oil pressure. If this indicator illuminates while
control power is ON and a set speed is selected. Pressure engine is running, turn the engine off as soon
Review Cruise Control Safety & Operation in as safely possible and check the oil level. If the
the Rider’s Manual before operating the Cruise oil level is correct and the indicator remains
Cruise illuminated after the engine is restarted, turn
Control.
Control the engine off immediately.
(L) (R) Flashes left arrow, right, or both (hazard) when
turn or hazard is activated. If a turn signal bulb The Low Fuel indicator illuminates when
has failed, or if there is a short circuit in the approximately 1.0 gallons (3.8 liters) of fuel
system, turn signal indicator flashes at more remains in the fuel tank.
Low Fuel
Turn than twice the normal rate.
Multi Function Display (MFD) Engine Error Codes (Cross Country)

(Cross Country) The error screen displays only when the check engine
(MIL) light is on or when it goes on and off during one
Use the MODE button (page 1.27) to toggle through the
modes of the MFD. To change display units (metric) see ignition cycle (key on / key off cycle). Error codes are not
page 1.26. Permanent and trip computer modes are stored. When the key is turned off, the code and message
described on the following pages. is lost, but it will reappear if the fault occurs again after
starting the engine.
PERMANENTLY DISPLAYED MODES:
If the MIL light illuminates, retrieve the error codes from the
• Clock (A) display or connect Digital Wrench to view historic and
current fault codes (Chapter 5).
• Gear Position (B)
• Ambient Temperature (C) To retrieve error codes from the display:
TRIP COMPUTER (D) MODES*: 1. If the error codes are not displayed, use the mode
button to toggle until “Err” displays in the clock area.
• Odometer
• Trip Odometer 1 & 2** 2. Record the three code numbers displayed in the gear
position, temperature, and odometer displays.
• Average Fuel Economy**
• Average Speed** 3. Refer to Chapter 5 for a list of codes.
• Fuel Range
Error Code
• Instantaneous Fuel Economy Failure Mode
Number (0-9)
Indicator (FMI)
• Trip Hours Meter** “Err”
**Press and hold the mode button to reset.
B
A C
Suspect Parameter Number (SPN)
Clock (Cross Country) Trip Information (Cross Country)
1
The clock is displayed with the key in the ON or PARK Average speed, average fuel economy, and a trip timer are
position. displayed individually using the MODE button. Average
fuel economy data is most accurate when taken over
The clock must be reset any time the battery is multiple trips or multiple tanks of fuel.
disconnected or discharged.
To RESET the above items, tap MODE button until desired
To change from 12 hour clock to 24 hour clock, see data item is displayed, then press and HOLD the MODE
page 1.26. button until the item resets.
To set the clock: The Trip Timer accumulates time only when the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
Gear Position (Cross Country)

All 2012 Victory Motorcycles with a gear indicator display
will show dashes (---) if the clutch is disengaged (lever
pulled in). The gear indicator system uses multiple inputs
to determine which gear has been engaged (1-6, N and R).
1. Clock 1 ALL of the following conditions must be met for gear
indicator to function properly.
NOTE: If the LOW FUEL light is flashing, the display • Engine is running.
will not enter the CLOCK SET mode.
• Vehicle is in motion.
Setting the clock: • Vehicle clutch lever is released (clutch engaged).
1. Turn the key to ON or PARK. Use the MODE button • Vehicle transmission is in gear 1-6.
(page 1.27) to toggle the display to ODOMETER.
2. Press and hold the MODE button until the hour Trip Odometer (Cross Country)
segment flashes, then release the button. (3) The trip odometer shows total miles traveled since the
trip odometer was reset. Use the MODE button
3. With the segment flashing, tap the MODE button to (page 1.27) to toggle between odometer and trip meter.
advance to the desired setting. To reset the trip meter:
4. Press and hold the mode button until the next • Turn the key ON and toggle to the trip meter to
segment flashes. Release the button. TRIP 1 or 2.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 twice to set the 10-minute and • Hold the MODE button until the trip meter resets.
1-minute segments. After completing the 1-minute
• To change from miles to kilometers see page 1.26.
segment, Step 4 will save the new setting and exit the
clock mode.
6. Turn the key OFF.
Temperature (Cross Country) 3. Press and hold the mode button to save the setting
and advance to the next display option.
(4) Current ambient air temperature is displayed with the
key in the ON or PARK position.
4. Repeat the procedure to change remaining display
settings.
CONSOLE SWITCHES (CROSS

COUNTRY)
Hand Grip Heater Switch
2 3 4 Press rocker switch toward Hi or Low position, depending
2. Gear Position 5 on the amount of heat required. Press rocker switch to
3. Trip Odometer middle position to turn grip heaters OFF.
4. Ambient Temperature
5. Odometer
Odometer (Cross Country)

(5) The odometer displays total mileage of the vehicle in
miles or kilometers. To change unit display from miles to
kilometers see page 1.26 Optional Accessory Hand Grip Heater
Switch Switch
Changing Information Display Units (Cross

Country)
Seat Heater Switch (Cross Country Tour)
Standard and Metric Information Display options are
available as indicated in the table: The seat heater switch is located on the left hand side of
the seat, midway between the driver and passenger
Standard Metric position. The forward toggle switch (D) controls power to
Display Display the drivers heating element. The rear toggle switch (P)
controls the passengers heating element.
DISTANCE Mi / Hour Km / Hour
FUEL I (Imperial Gallons) or
U.S. Gal
UNITS Liters
P
TEMP F C D
CLOCK 12 Hour 24 Hour
NOTE: To exit set-up mode at any time, wait 10

seconds and display will return to odometer.
1. Turn the key OFF.

Press and hold the MODE button (page 1.27) while
turning the key to the ON or PARK position.
2. When the display flashes the DISTANCE setting, tap

the mode button to advance to the desired setting.
LEFT HANDLEBAR SWITCHES Headlamp High / Low Beam Switch

1
The headlamp high/low beam switch toggles the
Mode Button
headlamp between high and low beam.
The MODE button (A) is located on the front side of the left
handlebar switch.
The MODE button is used to toggle through the various
Information display items available, and to change the
display units.
Refer to the individual display feature throughout this

chapter for more information.
NOTE: If “Err” is displayed while toggling through
the mode features, a system error has been logged
in the ECM (the CHK ENG light may or may not be
illuminated). Refer to Chapter 5 for more
information.
A Turn Signal Switch

With the ignition key in the ON or PARK position, the turn
signal switch will activate the turn signals.
• Push the switch left to activate left turn signals
• Push the switch right to activate right turn signals
• To manually cancel either turn signal, push the
switch straight in toward housing when the switch
is in the center position.
If activated below 15mph* (24 kph), the turn signals cancel
automatically, shortly after the vehicle speed reaches
Hazard Switch (Emergency Flashers) 15mph. If a signal is activated with vehicle speed above 15
mph, cancellation will occur based on distance traveled.
The Hazard switch (B) activates and de-activates
emergency flashers. When emergency flashers are NOTE: If a signal is activated above 15 mph and vehicle
active, all turn signals flash. speed drops below 15 mph, cancellation will occur shortly
after speed again reaches 15 mph.
* The 15mph speed is approximate.
Turn
B
Turn Signal Momentary Feature RIGHT HANDLEBAR CONTROLS

When passing a vehicle or when changing lanes, you have
Engine Stop Switch
the option of using the momentary feature built in to the
The engine stop/run switch completes or interrupts the
turn signal auto-cancel system.
ignition, starter, and fuel pump circuits.
Push the turn signal switch in the direction you wish to turn Press RUN side of engine stop/run switch (RUN position).
and hold it in that position for at least 1 second. The
Press STOP side of switch to interrupt circuits and stop the
momentary feature will activate and the signal will cancel
engine. The engine should not start or run when the switch
when you release the switch.
is in the STOP position. Use STOP/RUN switch to turn
engine off under either normal or emergency conditions.
Hold Left or Turn key OFF after the engine stops.
Right for one NOTE: The stop switch must be in the RUN position
flash cycle for turn signal operation.
Run
RIGHT
Starter Interlock Handlebar Switch
The motorcycle is equipped with a starter interlock switch
(A) that prevents the electric starter from operating when
the transmission is in gear and the clutch is engaged (lever Engine Starter Button
released), or if the Reverse lever is in the Reverse (Up)
position (if equipped). The starter button works only when STOP/RUN switch is
in RUN position and transmission is in neutral (or clutch is
disengaged).
Start
RIGHT Handlebar
Switch
CAUTION Front Brake Lever Reach Adjustment
Front brake lever “reach” or distance to the hand grip is

Never start the motorcycle in gear with the clutch
adjustable. To adjust the front brake lever reach:
disengaged unless you are properly seated with the
front brake applied. • Pull the lever away from the grip (1) and hold.
• Turn dial (2) to align a lower number with arrow (3)
on lever to increase lever reach distance.
Turn the dial to align a higher number with the arrow on the RADIO / AUDIO SYSTEM 1
lever to decrease reach distance.
Radio / Audio Systems Operation
The following pages describe basic operation and function
of various Radio and Audio systems (if equipped) such as
AM/FM/WX audio system, CB radio / intercom, XM radio,
auxiliary and iPod audio or NAV MP3.
iPodis a registered trademark of Apple Inc.

1
XMis a registered trademark of XMSatellite Radio Inc.
Not all motorcycles are equipped with all components

3 discussed in the audio section of this manual.
Refer to Chapter 19 (Electrical Systems) for diagnostics.
Software Updates
Radio system software should be updated annually to
Audio / Com / Cruise Control Buttons ensure the best performance. Refer to Chapter 19 for
Auxiliary Controller Reprogramming procedure using
The remote audio control buttons (if equipped) are Digital Wrench diagnostic software.
mounted below the LH bar switch. Cruise control buttons
(if equipped) are mounted below the RH bar switch. See
page 1.29 for an overview of Audio System operation.
Refer to Chapter 19 for Audio System and Cruise Control
Radio Frequencies
System diagnostic information.
North America
Auxiliary Driving Light Switch (Cross Roads
• AM 520 to 1720 kHz
Classic)
• FM 87.9 to 107.9 MHz
The Cross Roads Classic is equipped with auxiliary
• WX 162.40 to 162.55 MHz
driving lights which are operated using a handle bar
mounted switch. European
• FM 87.5 to 108.00 MHz
Auxiliary Light Switch
• MW 522 to 1602 kHz
• LW 144 to 288 kHz
Audio Controls Lower Left Hand Control

U.S.A. Sources: Some mode menu options have sub-menus. Sources
and menu options will be displayed only for installed
• FM / AM / WX / XM Radio / AUX (NAV MP3, AUX
components.
or iPod)
European Sources: 1 2 3
• FM / MW / LW / AUX (NAV MP3, AUX, or iPod)
Mode Menu Options:
• Bass
• Treble
4
• Fader
• External Speakers
• Automatic Volume Control (AVC)
• CB Headset ENT Mode
1. Volume Button (System ON / OFF): Press VOL (+)
• ICOM Volume
to turn the audio system ON. Press VOL (+) to
• CB Volume increase audio volume. Press VOL (-) to decrease
volume. Press and hold to rapidly increase or
• CB Local (LO) / Distant (DX)
decrease volume. When volume is decreased until
• AM/FM Clear Preset OFF displays, continuing to press and hold volume (-
) for two seconds will turn the radio off.
• Radio Data System (RDS)
• AUX Mode 2. Tuner Button: Press and release TUNE (+) or TUNE
(-) to change radio stations or iPod tracks. Press and
• XM Clear Preset
hold to automatically seek.
• XM Display
3. Mode Button: Press and hold the MODE button until
• XM Category
the system enters the audio system mode menus.
Then press and release the MODE button until the
desired mode menu displays.
4. Memory Preset (PRE) Button: Press PRE to cycle

through stored presets (page 1.33).
Upper Left Hand Control* Audio System Power
Operation of the left handlebar CB control is outlined in
1
The ignition key must be in the PARK or ON position to use
greater detail on the following pages. the audio system.
1. PTT (Push to Talk): Press and hold top or bottom of With the key in the PARK or ON position and audio system
PTT button to transmit (page 1.39). OFF, the screen will display “VICTORY”.
2. Squelch: Press SQ (+) or SQ (-) to adjust CB radio

channel reception sensitivity (page 1.39).
3. COM: Press COM to turn the CB on or off. Press and

hold COM to select a COM channel.
VICTORY
4. ICOM: Press ICOM to turn the driver/passenger NOTE: To prevent battery drain, do not leave the key
intercom on or off. Press and hold ICOM to access in the PARK or ON position for long periods.
Voice Activated Switch (VOX) settings (page 1.41).
Press the VOL (+) button to turn the audio system on.
1 2 3
The screen will display the active entertainment source.
Passenger CB Controls 1 2 5
1. PTT (Push to Talk): Press and hold PTT button to
transmit.
2. Rear Volume: Press (+) or (-) to adjust the rear 4
headset volume.
3
1. Current audio source:

• (U.S.) FM / AM / WX / iPod - AUX / XM
• (Euro) FM / MW / LW / iPod - AUX
2. Station preset number (P1 - P15).
3. CB radio active and active channel (if equipped).
4. Intercom system active (if equipped).
5. Stereo indicator.
NOTE: The audio system will always display the last

active source when turned on.
Audio Volume Control WX (Weather) source active:

The driver can adjust volume for the speakers and turn the
speakers on and off.
Press and release VOL (+) or VOL (-) to raise or lower

U.S. models only
volume.
NAV MP3 source active:
U.S. / European models
Audio Source Selection

Press and release the MODE button until the desired
iPod source active:
source is active.

(skipped if not equipped)
AUX source active:
FM source active:
U.S. / European models U.S. / European models
AM source active:
U.S. models only
XM Radio source active: Memory Presets
1
The audio system features 15 user-defined presets for
storing favorite stations.
To set a preset, press and release the MODE button until

the desired source is active (FM, AM, WX, XM, MW, LW).
(skipped if not equipped) Use TUNE or seek to locate a radio station.
Press and hold the PRE button.

MW (Medium Wave) source:
531
European models only
LW (Long Wave) source:
Use TUNE (+) and TUNE (-) to cycle to an available preset

144 location. The preset location displays on the screen.
European models only Station being stored
+ 100.5
TUNE
- P1 ---.-
Audio Tuning When the desired location is displayed, press and hold the
PRE button to store the selected radio station. If the
Use the tuner on the left control to select radio stations. desired preset location already contains a stored radio
station, it will be overwritten by the new selection.
Press and release TUNE (+) or TUNE (-) to locate stations
in single-step increments.
+ 100.5
Press and hold TUNE (+) or TUNE (-) to SEEK for stations. TUNE
- P1 97.1
Station will be overwritten
Wait 5 seconds or push VOL (+) or VOL (-) to exit.
To listen to a preset location, press and release the PRE

button until the desired location displays.
Audio Mode Menus Treble Setting Mode

Entering Mode Menus Press TUNE (+) or TUNE (-) to adjust. (See page 1.34 to
enter and exit mode menus).
Press and hold the MODE button until the system enters
the audio system mode menus. Then press and release
the MODE button until the desired mode menu displays. + TREBLE 0
TUNE
-
+ TREBLE +3
TUNE
-
+ TREBLE -3
TUNE
-
Exiting Mode Menus

Fader Setting Mode
Exit the screen and return to the default display in one of Press TUNE (+) or TUNE (-) to adjust.
two ways. (See page 1.34 to enter and exit mode menus).
1. Wait 5 seconds. The system will automatically exit.
2. Press VOL (+) or VOL (-) (the volume will also
+ R FADER F
change). TUNE
-
Bass Setting Mode

Press TUNE (+) or TUNE (-) to adjust.
(See page 1.34 to enter and exit mode menus).
External Speakers Mode
+ BASS 0
TUNE
Press TUNE (+) or TUNE (-) to adjust.
- (See page 1.34 to enter and exit mode menus).
+ BASS +3 + EXTERNAL SPKRS

TUNE TUNE
- -
ON
+ BASS -3 +
TUNE EXTERNAL SPKRS
TUNE OFF
- -
Automatic Volume Control (AVC) Mode CB Headset Volume Controls Mode
(If Equipped)
1
When set, this feature will lower or raise the speaker /
headset volume automatically, based on vehicle speed. The headsets have 3 separate volume settings: Intercom
(ICOM) volume, CB receive volume, and entertainment
Press TUNE (+) or TUNE (-) to adjust. (ENT) volume. Always position headsets with the
(See page 1.34 to enter and exit mode menus). speakers directly over your ears to ensure the best sound
quality and volume.
• AVC Off = No AVC. Volume will not adjust.
NOTE: The driver can turn off the external speakers
• AVC Low = Least aggressive AVC setting. and listen to audio only through the headsets (See
External Speakers page 1.34).
• AVC Medium = Moderate AVC setting.
Passenger
Item Can Be Adjusted / Driver Controls
• AVC High = Most aggressive AVC setting. Controls
ENT While listening to ENT / Press VOL (+) or
Volume VOL (-) on the left control.
Press (+) or
+
AUTO VOL CONTROL ICOM When VOX is in use / Press VOL (+) or (-) on the
TUNE
- OFF Volume VOL (-) on the left control. headset
control
CB When receiving a CB transmission /
+ cord.
AUTO VOL CONTROL Receive Press VOL (+) or VOL (-) on the left
TUNE
- LOW Volume control.
+
AUTO VOL CONTROL CB Headset Ent Mode (If Equipped)
TUNE
- MEDIUM
+ Press the hand control TUNE (+) or (-) button to set the CB
AUTO VOL CONTROL
TUNE
- HIGH Headset ENT settings.
+ HEADSET ENT MODE

TUNE OFF
-
+ HEADSET ENT MODE
TUNE
- MIX
+ HEADSET ENT MODE
TUNE
- MUTE
OFF: Only communications are audible in the headsets.

Riders can listen to navigation commands and
entertainment with the external speakers while reserving
the headset for communication.
MIX: The audio source volume drops lower than the
ICOM volume whenever the voice operated switch
(VOX) is opened. The audio source volume gradually
returns to its original level after the VOX is closed.
MUTE = The audio source volume is muted when the VOX
is opened. The audio source volume gradually returns to
its original level once the VOX is closed.
AUDIO MODE MENUS (Cont.) Radio Data System (RDS) Mode

Driver Icom Volume Mode
Press TUNE (+) or TUNE (-) to turn RDS on, full, or off.
When ON, the screen will display the 8 character station
Press TUNE (+) or TUNE (-) to adjust. identification in the upper left of the display. When turned
to FULL, the screen will display the 8 character station
ICOM VOL 15 identification in the upper left of the display plus the
+
extended station information such as artist and song title
TUNE
- in the center of the display (if available in the radio signal
you are receiving).
+ RDS
TUNE ON
Driver CB Volume Mode -
Press TUNE (+) or TUNE (-) to adjust. + RDS

TUNE FULL
-
+ CB VOL 15
TUNE + RDS
- TUNE OFF
-
CB LO/DX Mode
Press TUNE (+) or TUNE (-) to change settings. See
Aux Mode
page 1.40 for more detailed CB / ICOM information. (See page 1.34 to enter and exit mode menus).
+ Press TUNE (+) or TUNE (-) to choose AUX (for iPod or

CB LO / DX MODE any other MP3 player) or NAV MP3 for navigation unit MP3
TUNE
- DISTANT player use.
NOTE: NAV MP3 mode will override any device
+
CB LO / DX MODE connected with an input cable. If using NAV MP3
TUNE
- LOCAL mode, always pause the Garmin unit before
changing sources. Otherwise, music from the NAV
unit will interrupt the new source, interpreting it as
navigation commands, not music.
+ AUX MODE
TUNE AUX
-
+ AUX MODE
TUNE NAV MP3
-
AUDIO MODE MENUS (Cont.) NOAA Weather Band (WX)

1
Weather band channels are broadcast by the National
Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA). NOAA
XM Display Mode* operates more than 940 transmitters covering the United
(See page 1.34 to enter and exit mode menus). States, Puerto Rico, the U.S. Virgin Islands, U.S. Pacific
Territories, and adjacent coastal waterways.
Press TUNE (+) or TUNE (-) to set the screen to display
channel name or category when the XM radio is active. Typically, only one weather band channel will be available
for a given location. When traveling, if a channel becomes
unavailable, search for another active channel.
+ XM DISPLAY
TUNE CHANNEL NAME
- Press and release the MODE button until WX is the active
+
source.
XM DISPLAY
TUNE CATEGORY
-
*This menu item is skipped when XM radio is not present.
When the WX source is selected, a total of 7 weather band

XM Category Mode* channels are available.
Press TUNE (+) or TUNE (-) to access a channel.
Press TUNE (+) or TUNE (-) to set the music selection
category when tuning XM. WX Channels
These categories are downloaded from XM whenever the WX CH. FREQ.

XM antenna is receiving a signal and may change from
time to time. 1 162.400
2 162.425
+ XM CATEGORY
TUNE All Channels 3 162.450
-
4 162.475
+ XM CATEGORY
TUNE
-
MorMusic 5 162.500
+ XM CATEGORY 6 162.525
TUNE Traffic
-
7 162.550
NOTE: Selecting a category will then limit the

channels available to those within that category until
ALL CHANNELS or another category is selected.
*This menu item is skipped when XM radio is not present.
CB RADIO / ICOM SYSTEM CB Channels

When the CB radio system is active, “CB” and the active
Introduction - CB Radio FCC Rules
channel will display.
In the U.S.A., refer to the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Plain Rules pamphlet accompanying
the CB/ICOM kit for a comprehensive guide of citizens
band (CB) radio rules and regulations.
Headset Use Press and hold COM on the upper LH control to access the
CHANNEL ADJUST screen.
The use of helmet-mounted headsets may be restricted or
prohibited in some areas. Always obey all applicable
regulations and laws.
The headsets have three separate volume settings:

Intercom (ICOM) volume, CB receive volume and
entertainment (ENT) volume. See page 1.35 for more
information.
Getting Started - CB / ICOM

Push COM or ICOM on the left control to change channels.
NOTE: To minimize distractions while riding, always
make adjustments to the CB/ICOM system prior to
operating the motorcycle.
NOTE: To prevent battery drain, do not leave the key

in the PARK or ON position for long periods.
The ignition key must be in the PARK or ON position to use NOTE: Changing to a new channel may require
the audio system. changing the squelch setting.
Press the VOL (+) button to turn the audio system on. Wait 5 seconds or push VOL (+) or VOL (-) to exit the
CHANNEL ADJUST screen and return to the main
display.
Press COM on the upper left handlebar control to activate

the CB-COM system.
CB / ICOM System (Cont.) Squelch

1
Push-to-talk (PTT) Squelch blocks undesired signals and noise by allowing
the reception of signals only over a specified level.
Driver - Press and hold the top or bottom of the PTT button
on the upper LH control to transmit over CB radio.
Passenger - The passenger must push and hold the PTT

button on the headset controls.
Press and release the SQ (+) or SQ (-) buttons to adjust

the squelch level to any level between OPEN and
CLOSED.
NOTE: PTT will activate the intercom when the

intercom is turned on and the CB is turned off.
“TX” will display on the screen when one of the PTT

buttons is pressed.
When squelch is set to OPEN, no filtering occurs. Setting
“RX” will display when the CB is receiving a transmission. squelch to CLOSE blocks all signals, including strong
signals.
Transmitting
To set the squelch level, first lower the squelch level until
noise or static is audible.
Receiving Gradually increase the squelch level until the noise or

static is gone.
CB / ICOM System (Cont.) CB LO/DX

To change settings, enter the mode menu and toggle to the
CB Radio Volume Setting (Driver) CB LO/DX mode display.
Press TUNE (+) or TUNE (-) to set the CB to LOCAL (LO)
CB VOL display.
or DISTANT (DX) mode.
Press TUNE (+) or TUNE (-) to adjust settings.
+
NOTE: The CB volume can also be set using the CB LO / DX MODE
hand control (VOL +/-) when the CB is receiving. TUNE
- DISTANT
+
+ CB VOL 15 CB LO / DX MODE
TUNE
TUNE - LOCAL
-
Distant: Use this setting for weaker signals. Receiver

sensitivity will be increased. Static and noise levels are
increased.
CB Radio Volume Setting (Passenger)
Local: Use this setting for stronger signals or in high
The passenger can control rear headset volume when the density areas. Receiver sensitivity will be decreased.
Entertainment, CB radio or ICOM is active. Static and noise levels are decreased.
Press (+) or (-) on the headset control to raise or lower
volume.
CB / ICOM System (Cont.) ICOM System

1
Press and release ICOM on the upper LH control to
CB Frequencies activate the intercom system.
The FCC has designated 40 citizen band (CB) channels
for consumer use.
NOTE: Channel 9 is designated as an EMERGENCY
channel for emergency use only.
CB Channels / Frequencies When the intercom system is active, ICOM will be

displayed on the screen.
CH. FREQ. CH . FREQ. CH. FREQ.
1 26.965 8 27.055 15 27.135
2 26.975 9 27.065 16 27.155
3 26.985 10 27.075 17 27.165
4 27.005 11 27.085 18 27.175

VOX Break Setting
5 27.015 12 27.105 19 27.185 The intercom is opened and closed using a voice operated
6 27.025 13 27.115 20 27.205 switch (VOX). The volume sensitivity level required to
open the intercom can be adjusted using the VOX
7 27.035 14 27.125 21 27.125
sensitivity setting.
Press and hold ICOM on the upper LH control to access
the VOX sensitivity set screen.
22 27.225 31 27.315 40 27.405
23 27.255 32 27.325
24 27.235 33 27.335
25 27.245 34 27.345
Push COM or ICOM to adjust the sensitivity setting.
26 27.265 35 27.355
27 27.275 36 27.365 Lower settings require less volume to open the intercom.
28 27.285 37 27.375 If wind or ambient vehicle noise trigger the VOX to open,
29 27.295 38 27.385 set the VOX sensitivity to a higher level.
30 27.305 39 27.395
“VOX” will be display on the screen whenever the driver or

passenger are communicating over the intercom system.
CB / ICOM System (Cont.) AUX / iPod

ICOM Volume Setting (Driver) Getting Started - AUX / iPod

ICOM VOL mode display.
AUX / iPod Input Cable
Press TUNE (+) or TUNE (-) to adjust settings.
Intercom volume can be adjusted with the hand control

when the VOX circuit is open.
+ ICOM VOL 15
TUNE
-
ICOM Volume Setting (Passenger)

Input Cable Setup
Press (+) or (-) on the headset control to raise or lower
volume. The AUX and iPod input cables are connected to the audio
system via an (accessory) extension cable leading from
the fairing area to the right saddlebag. An accessory iPod
Headset Receptacles pouch may also be installed in the saddlebag to hold the
iPod unit.
The driver headset receptacle (if equipped) is located on
the left side of the motorcycle below the fuel tank. Only one input cable (either AUX or iPod) can be
connected at any given time.
The passenger headset receptacle (if equipped) is located
on the left side of the motorcycle near the front of the The AUX harness uses one of the two connectors on the
saddlebag. input cable; an iPod uses both of the connectors.
To connect a device:
1. Locate the input cable in the right saddlebag.
2. Remove the protective cap and connect either the
AUX lead or the iPod leads. Be sure the connector
snaps together securely.
3. If using the AUX connector, be sure to install the
protective cap on the unused connector.
4. Set the active source to AUX or iPod as described on
page 1.32.
To change or disconnect an input cable:

1. Disconnect the cable from the device by carefully
pushing down on the locking tab and pulling gently to
separate the connector.
2. Install the protective cap(s).
AUX / iPod (Cont.) When AUX is active, the screen will display “AUX” as the
1
active source.
iPod Use
the AUX / iPod function.
NOTE: To prevent battery drain, do not leave the key
When iPod is active, the screen will display the iPod as the
Press the VOL (+) button to turn the audio system on. active source and iPod information in the display screen.
iPod Artist
ICOM Song Title
CB19 Playlist
Press and hold MODE to enter the settings menu.

iPod Play Lists
NOTE: Generic MP3 players can play music, but
cannot be controlled though the audio system (for
example, selecting tracks or playlists).
To browse tracks by artist, playlist or album, press and

hold the PRE button to bring up the selection screen.
Use the TUNE + / - button to change the mode to AUX (for
iPod or any other MP3 player use) or to NAV MP3 to use Press TUNE (+) or TUNE (-) to highlight the desired
the MP3 player feature of the navigation unit. category.
NOTE: NAV MP3 mode will override any device
connected with an input cable in the right saddlebag.
To use an MP3 player or an iPod
+
AUX MODE
TUNE
- AUX
+ Artist
+ TUNE Playlist
AUX MODE - Album
TUNE
- NAV MP3
Press and release the PRE button to bring up the items in
the selected category. When a category is selected, a list
of items in that category are displayed with the active track
To use the MP3 function of the
NAV unit (if equipped). highlighted.
+ My Top Rated
TUNE Road Tunes 2
- 80’s Music
AUX / iPod (Cont.) XM RADIO

About XM Radio
iPod Song Control
For more information, or to subscribe, U.S. customers visit
Press and release TUNE (+) or TUNE (-) to change tracks
xmradio.com or call XM Listener Care at 1-800-XMRADIO
in the currently selected playlist.
(1-800-967-2346); Canadian customers visit xmradio.ca
Press and hold TUNE (+) or TUNE (-) to fast-forward or or call XM Listener Care at 1-877-GETXMSR (1-877-438-
fast-reverse in the currently playing song. 9677).
NOTE: Generic MP3 players can play music, but Getting Started - XM Radio
cannot be controlled though the audio system (for
example, selecting tracks or playlists). The ignition key must be in the PARK or ON position to use
the XM radio.
A quick double-press and release (double click) of the
TUNE (+) or TUNE (-) button will bring up a list of songs NOTE: To prevent battery drain, do not leave the key
in the currently selected playlist. in the PARK or ON position for long periods.
Press VOL (+) to turn the audio system on.

+ Brown Sugar
TUNE Gimme Shelter 2 Press and release the MODE button until the XM radio is
- Honky Tonk Woman the active source.
Use TUNE (+) or TUNE (-) to scroll through this song list.
The selected song will be highlighted on the center line of
the display. Press and release the PRE button to select
and play the highlighted song, or press and release the
MODE button to exit without selecting a new song. When the XM Radio is active, the screen will display
radio channel number, preset number (if applicable), the
To exit without selecting channel name or category, the artist, and song title.
a new song.
To select the highlighted

song.
XM RADIO (Cont.) XM Radio Settings

1
XM Radio Reception To access XM specific menus, turn the audio system
power ON (using VOL (+) button) and change the active
If XM radio is not receiving a signal due to being indoors source to XM (press and release the MODE button until
(or any overhead obstruction) “No Sgnl” appears in the XM is active).
display.
the audio system mode menus. Then press and release
the MODE button repeatedly to toggle to the XM DISPLAY
menu.
Press TUNE (+) or TUNE (-) to select CATEGORY or

CHANNEL NAME.
If the XM antenna becomes disconnected, “Antenna”
appears in the display. +
XM DISPLAY
TUNE
- CHANNEL NAME
Antenna
+
XM DISPLAY
TUNE
- CATEGORY
In the CATEGORY mode, the category of a selected

XM Radio Menu Options station will display in the upper right corner of the screen.
The XM radio system has unique menus that apply only to

this system when XM radio is the active source.
Some Audio System settings such as BASS, TREBLE,

FADER, etc., apply to both the audio system and the XM
radio system. In CHANNEL NAME mode, the name of the selected
channel will display.
Menus specific to the XM radio system are:
XM Display (You can select CATEGORY or CHANNEL

NAME to be displayed)
XM Category (Rock, Country, Traffic, Sports, Talk News,

All Channels, etc.)
XM Category Selection
With XM as the active source, use the MODE button to
scroll to the XM Category menu.
Press TUNE (+) or TUNE (-) button on the left control to

change the category.
+
XM CATEGORY
TUNE
- ALL CHANNELS
XM RADIO (Cont.) NAV MP3

XM Channel Selection Before You Begin - NAV MP3
Press TUNE (+) or TUNE (-) button on the left control to Here are a few helpful tips for motorcycles equipped with
change the channel. the Garmin® zumo® 660 NAV MP3 player and the Audio
Integration Kit.
• Be sure to read the Owner’s Manual and all

information included with your Garmin® zumo®
660 to become familiar with the operation of and
access to all available features.
• The Audio Integration kit must be installed to
enable outputs from the NAV MP3 (such as
The ALL CHANNELS category must be selected to scroll navigation instructions or user-loaded MP3 media
through every available channel in numerical order. files) to play through the headsets or the speakers.
If a specific category (other than ALL CHANNELS) is • The NAV MP3 unit is fully functional without the
selected, only channels within that category will be Audio Integration kit installed, but there will be no
selected with the TUNE button. interface with the audio system on the motorcycle.
NOTE: If a Preset button is used to select a channel • Review general Audio system operation
that is not within the currently selected category and information beginning on page 1.29.
the TUNE + / - button is used to change the channel,
it will tune stations within the previously selected
category, not within the category of the Preset
station.
EXAMPLE:
Country is the selected category.
Preset 6 is used to switch to a channel within the Rock

category.
Pressing TUNE + / - on the lower left control will continue

to only select stations available in the Country category.
XM RADIO (Cont.) Getting Started - NAV MP3

1
Tips For NAV MP3 Operation the NAV MP3 player.
Signal Priority NOTE: To prevent battery drain, do not leave the key
• Signals coming from the NAV MP3 unit will
override any source of the motorcycle’s audio Press the VOL (+) button to turn the audio system on.
system to ensure navigation instructions are
communicated when needed. Navigational
instructions will also override the MP3 player.
Volume Settings - IMPORTANT!

• You must set volume levels within the NAV MP3
unit. Volume settings in the motorcycle’s audio
system control NAV MP3 volume, but navigation
instructions may be difficult to hear if volume levels
in the unit are set too low. See the GARMIN Press and release the MODE button until AUX is the active
information for setting procedures. source.
Recommended initial setting are 100/80/80: AUX
MASTER - 100% AUX

NAVIGATION - 80%
There are two AUX Modes available:
MEDIA - 80%
AUX (iPod) and NAV MP3
To switch to the radio when the MP3 player is in use: the audio system mode menus. Then press and release
the MODE button repeatedly to toggle to the AUX mode
• Pause or stop the MP3 player to switch to radio. menu.
Press TUNE (+) or TUNE (-) to set the mode to AUX (for
To switch from radio to the MP3 player: iPod or any other MP3 player use) or to NAV MP3 to use
the MP3 player in the NAV unit.
• Change the active source to AUX
• For best sound quality, change the AUX MODE To use an MP3 player or an iPod
setting on the radio to NAV MP3 when listening to
the MP3 player in the NAV unit. Audio works in the
AUX setting, but the levels are not optimized. +
AUX MODE
TUNE
• Refer to Getting Started (below) for instructions on - AUX
how to change the active source to AUX and the
AUX Mode to NAV MP3. +
AUX MODE
TUNE
• If playing MP3 files from the Garmin® zumo® 660 - NAV MP3
unit, you may need to turn down the “MEDIA
VOLUME” on the Garmin unit to avoid distortion.
To use the MP3 function of the

NAV unit (if equipped).
XM Radio Wiring Diagram
REFERENCE Decimal Equivalents

1
SAE Tap Drill Sizes 1/64 ................ .0156
Thread Size/ Drill Size Thread Size / Drill Size 1/32. . . . . . . . . . . . . .0312 . . 1 mm = .0394"
3/64 ................ .0469
#0-80 3/64 1/2-13 27/64 1/16. . . . . . . . . . . . . .0625
#1-64 53 1/2-20 29/64 5/64 ................ .0781 . . 2 mm = .0787"
#1-72 53 9/16-12 31/64 3/32. . . . . . . . . . . . . .0938
#2-56 51 9/16-18 33/64 7/64 ................ .1094 . . 3 mm =.1181"
1/8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1250
#2-64 50 5/8-11 17/32 9/64 ................ .1406
#3-48 5/64 5/8-18 37/64 5/32. . . . . . . . . . . . . .1563 . . 4 mm = .1575"
#3-56 45 3/4-10 21/32 11/64 ................ .1719
#4-40 43 3/4-16 11/16
3/16. . . . . . . . . . . . . .1875 . . 5mm = .1969"
13/64 ................ .2031
#4-48 42 7/8-9 49/64 7/32. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2188
#5-40 38 7/8-14 13/16 15/64 ................ .2344 . . 6 mm = .2362"
#5-44 37 1-8 7/8 1/4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
#6-32 36 1-12 59/64
17/64 ................ .2656 . . 7 mm = .2756"
9/32. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2813
#6-40 33 1 1/8-7 63/64 19/64 ................ .2969
#8-32 29 1 1/8-12 1 3/64 5/16. . . . . . . . . . . . . .3125 . . 8mm = .3150"
#8-36 29 1 1/4-7 1 7/64 21/64 ................ .3281
#10-24 24 1 1/4-12 1 11/64
11/32. . . . . . . . . . . . .3438 . . 9 mm = .3543"
23/64 ................ .3594
#10-32 21 1 1/2-6 1 11/32 3/8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
#12-24 17 1 1/2-12 1 27/64 25/64 ................ .3906 . . 10 mm = .3937"
#12-28 4.6mm 1 3/4-5 1 9/16 13/32. . . . . . . . . . . . .4063
1/4-20 7 1 3/4-12 1 43/64
27/64 ................ .4219 . . 11 mm =.4331"
7/16. . . . . . . . . . . . . .4375
1/4-28 3 2-4 1/2 1 25/32 29/64 ................ .4531
5/16-18 F 2-12 1 59/64 15/32. . . . . . . . . . . . .4688 . . 12 mm = .4724"
5/16-24 I 2 1/4-4 1/2 2 1/32 31/64 ................ .4844
3/8-16 O 2 1/2-4 2 1/4
1/2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 . . . . . 13mm = .5118"
33/64 ................ .5156
3/8-24 Q 2 3/4-4 2 1/2 17/32. . . . . . . . . . . . .5313
7/16-14 U 3-4 2 3/4 35/64 ................ .5469 . . 14 mm = .5512"
7/16-20 25/64 9/16. . . . . . . . . . . . . .5625
37/64 ................ .5781 . . 15 mm = .5906"
19/32. . . . . . . . . . . . .5938
Metric Tap Drill Sizes 39/64 ................ .6094
5/8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625 . . . 16mm =. 6299"
Decimal Nearest 41/64 ................ .6406
Tap Size Drill Size Equivalent Fraction 21/32. . . . . . . . . . . . .6563 . . 17 mm = .6693"
3x.50 #39 0.0995 3/32 43/64 ................ .6719
11/16. . . . . . . . . . . . .6875
3x.60 3/32 0.0937 3/32 45/64 ................ .7031 . . 18 mm = .7087"
4x.70 #30 0.1285 1/8 23/32. . . . . . . . . . . . .7188
4x.75 1/8 0.125 1/8 47/64 ................ .7344 . . 19 mm = .7480"
3/4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
5x.80 #19 0.166 11/64 49/64 ................ .7656
5x.90 #20 0.161 5/32 25/32. . . . . . . . . . . . .7813 . . 20 mm = .7874"
51/64 ................ .7969
6x1.00 #9 0.196 13/64 13/16. . . . . . . . . . . . .8125 . . 21 mm =.8268"
7x1.00 16/64 0.234 15/64 53/64 ................ .8281
8x1.00 J 0.277 9/32 27/32. . . . . . . . . . . . .8438
55/64 ................ .8594 . . 22 mm = .8661"
8x1.25 17/64 0.265 17/64 7/8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .875
9x1.00 5/16 0.3125 5/16 57/64 ................ .8906 . . 23 mm = .9055"
9x1.25 5/16 0.3125 5/16 29/32. . . . . . . . . . . . .9063
59/64 ................ .9219
10x1.25 11/32 0.3437 11/32 15/16. . . . . . . . . . . . .9375 . . 24 mm = .9449"
10x1.50 R 0.339 11/32 61/64 ................ .9531
11x1.50 3/8 0.375 3/8
31/32. . . . . . . . . . . . .9688 . . 25 mm = .9843"
63/64 ................ .9844
12x1.50 13/32 0.406 13/32 1............... 1.0
12x1.75 13/32 0.406 13/32
Fahrenheit To Celsius Measurement Conversion Chart

oC to oF: 9 (oC + 40)  5 - 40 = oF
UNIT OF MEASURE MULTIPLIED BY CONVERTS TO
o
F to C: 5 ( F + 40)  9 - 40= C
o o o
ft-lb x 12 = in-lb
in-lb x.0833 = ft-lb
DEGREES F DEGREES C ft-lb x 1.356 = Nm
in-lb x.0115 = kg-m
32 0
Nm x.7376 = ft-lb
41 5 kg-m x 7.233 = ft-lb
kg-m x 86.796 = in-lb
50 10 kg-m x 9.81 = Nm
in x 25.4 = mm
59 15
mm x.03937 = in
68 20 in x 2.54 = cm
mile x 1.6 = km
77 25
km x.6214 = mile
86 30 Ounces (oz) x 28.35 = grams (g)
grams (g) x.035 = Ounces (oz)
95 35 = Fluid Ounces
cc’s x.03381
(oz)
104 40
lbs x.454 = kg
113 45 kg x 2.2046 = lbs
= Cubic
Cubic Inches x 16.387
122 50 Centimeters
Cubic Centimeters x.061 = Cubic Inches
131 55
Imperial pints x.568 = liters (l)
140 60 liters (l) x 1.76 = Imperial pints
Imperial quarts x 1.137 = liters (l)
149 65 liters (l) x.88 = Imperial quarts
Imperial quarts x 1.201 = US quarts
158 70
US quarts x.833 = Imperial quarts
167 75 US quarts x.946 = liters
liters x 1.057 = US quarts
176 80
US gallon x 3.785 = liter
185 85 liter x.264 = US gallon
Pounds force per = Kilo pascals
x 6.895
194 90 square inch (psi) (kPa)
= Pounds force per
203 95 Kilo pascals (kPa) x.145
square inch (psi)
212 100
MAINTENANCE
CHAPTER 2
MAINTENANCE 2
SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3
MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE INTERVAL TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4
AIR FILTER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5
ENGINE OIL LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8
ENGINE OIL AND FILTER CHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8
REVERSE IDLER SHAFT LUBRICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9
IDLE SPEED / FAST IDLE SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10
TIRE PRESSURE / INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10
THROTTLE CABLE INSPECTION / LUBRICATION / FREE PLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11
CRUISE CONTROL CABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12
FRONT BRAKE LEVER INSPECTION / LUBRICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12
FRONT BRAKE LEVER REACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13
CLUTCH LEVER LUBRICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13
CLUTCH LEVER FREE PLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14
FRONT BRAKE FLUID LEVEL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.15
REAR BRAKE FLUID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.15
BRAKE PAD INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16
SHIFT PEDAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17
REAR BRAKE PEDAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17
FOOT CONTROL ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17
CRANKCASE VENTILATION SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.18
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM (CALIFORNIA MODELS) . . . . . . . . 2.18
FUEL SYSTEM INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.18
SPARK PLUG REMOVAL / INSPECTION / INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.19
BATTERY CHARGING / STORAGE / INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.20
BATTERY REMOVAL / INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.21
ENGINE COMPRESSION TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.22
CYLINDER LEAKAGE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.22
DRIVE BELT WEAR ANALYSIS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.23
DRIVE BELT TENSION GAUGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.23
DRIVE BELT TENSION - INSPECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.24
SPROCKET INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.25
DRIVE BELT CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.25
DRIVE BELT ADJUSTMENT / ALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.26
HEADLAMP AIM INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.27
HEADLAMP AIM ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.28
SIDESTAND INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.28
SIDESTAND & SPRING REMOVAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.29
SIDESTAND PAD REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.29
REAR SUSPENSION / SWINGARM INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.30
REAR SUSPENSION AIR PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.31
FRONT FORK / SUSPENSION INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.32
FUSE REPLACEMENT (MAIN FUSE BOX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.33
FUSE REPLACEMENT (REMOTE FUSES). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.34
FASTENERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.34
LOCK AND IGNITION SWITCH LUBRICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.35
CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.35
WINDSHIELD CARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.36
STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.36
SUEDE FINISH CARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.36
MAINTENANCE
SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS
Tune Up
ITEM 2012-2013 SPECIFICATIONS
Brake Pedal Freeplay (Rear) 1-2mm (.031") Gap At Pedal Stop
Brake Pad Friction Material Thickness (All) 1.0 mm (.039 inch) Minimum
Clutch Lever Freeplay (Cable) .5 - 1.5mm (.020-.060")
Compression Pressure (Cylinder) 210-225 (1448-1551 kPa) (page 2.22)
Drive Belt Deflection
32 mm +/- .5mm (1 1/4" +/- 1/64) with 10 lb force
(See page 2.24)
Drive Belt Frequency Frequency: 20 Hz +/- 1 Hz
Using Sonic Tension Meter Belt Mass Constant: 8.4
(See page 2.24) Span: 708.65mm
Drive Belt Width / Teeth / Pitch 28mm / 154T / 14mm
Idle Speed / Fast Idle Speed NOT ADJUSTABLE (ECM / IAC valve controlled) (See page 2.10)
Oil Pressure, Lubrication @ 3000 rpm 552 kPa (80 psi) (Minimum 40 psi)
Oil Pressure, Cooling @ 3000 rpm (See special notes Chapter 4)
Rear Shock Air Pressure See page 2.31 or decal on right saddlebag lid
Spark Plug Type / Gap NGK DCPR6E / .8 mm (.032")
Throttle Cable Freeplay 2 - 4 mm (5/64 - 5/32") (page 2.11)
Tire Pressure Refer to page 2.10 or Manufacturing Decal on steering head
Oil Change
Start the engine and warm it up for several minutes. While warming up, check for oil leaks. If any leaks are found, stop
the engine immediately and determine the source of the problem before starting the engine again.
TIGHTENING TORQUE
Drain Plug (new sealing washer) 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs )
Oil Filter 3/4 full turn after contacting seal surface
OIL TYPE / QUANTITY

Oil Type Victory Semi-Synthetic 20W40 Engine Oil
Oil Capacity (Oil & Filter Change) Approximately 4.25 liters (4.5 quarts)
Oil Capacity (Dry) Approximately 4.75 liters (5.0 quarts)
Use Victory 20W40 Synthetic Blend 20W40 engine oil for all temperatures. If Victory oil is not available, use a high
quality 20W40 motorcycle designed for use with wet clutches (such as those with a JASO MA rating).
NOTICE
Do not put chemical additives in the oil. Victory motorcycle oil has been specially designed for this application.
Additional additives are not necessary and have not been approved by Victory Engineering.
MAINTENANCE
SPECIAL TOOLS
Maintenance Tools 2
• Belt Tension Gauge PV-43532 (Sonic Tension Meter is optional and commercially available)
• Compression Gauge Set PV-33223
• Victory Air Pump & Gauge 2876654 or PV-48909
• Cross Roads / Cross Country Fuel Tank Fitting plug tool PV-50251 (9.5mm) or PV-50567 (11.8mm)
MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS
Lubricants / Chemicals
Visit www.purevictorypolishes.com for a complete list of available cleaning products. See page 2.35 for cleaning
guidelines.
MAINTENANCE PRODUCT PART NUMBERS
Product Part Number
All Purpose Grease 2872187
Brake Cleaner 2872191
Brake Fluid, DOT 4 2872189
Crankcase Sealant (Loctite Ultra Black 598) Commercially Available
Dielectric Grease (Nyogel™) 2871329
Fork Oil - Cartridge Forks (KYB) 2874568
Fuel Additive, Carbon Clean 2872190
Fuel Stabilizer 2872280
Hand Grip Adhesive (Three Bond 1501) (10ml tube) 2872575
Moly Assembly Paste 2871460
Multi-Purpose Lubricant 2872863
Oil Change Kit 2873551
Paint Wax and Final Finish 2872193
Semi-Synthetic 20W/40 Engine Lubricant 2872175 (Quart) 2872176 (Gallon)
Vinyl and Rubber Dressing 2872194
MAINTENANCE
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
Periodic Maintenance Interval Table
ENGINE ODOMETER READING in MILES (KILOMETERS)
10,000 (16,000)
15,000 (24,000)
20,000 (32,000)
25,000 (40,000)
30,000 (48,000)
35,000 (52,000)
40,000 (64,000)
45,000 (72,000)
50,000 (80,000)
5000 (8,000)
500 (800)
PAGE
Component
(see operation codes below)

Air Filter 2.5 I I R I R I R I R R
Crankcase Vent System 2.18 I I I I I I I I I I I
Drive Belt 2.24 I I I I I I I R I I I I
Drive Belt Adjustment 2.24 P Adjust with each tire change thereafter
Engine Compression 2.22 I I I I I I
Engine Oil* 2.8 R R R R R R R R R R R
Engine Oil Filter* 2.8 R R R R R R R R R R R
Evaporative Emission 2.18 I I I I I I I I I I I
Exhaust System Ch. 3 I I I I I I I I I I I
Fuel Filter 2.18 R R
Fuel System 2.18 I I I I I I I I I I I
Reverse Idler Shaft 2.9 I L L L L L L L L L L
Spark Plugs 2.19 I I I I I I R I I I I
Throttle / Cruise Cable End 2.11 I I L I L I L I L I L
CHASSIS ODOMETER READING in MILES (KILOMETERS)
Battery 2.20 I I I I I I I I I I I
Brake Fluid** 2.15 I I I I I I R I I I I
Brake Pads 2.16 I I I I I I I I I I I
Control Cable (Ends) 2.11 I I L I L I L I L I L
Clutch and Brake Lever 2.12 L I L I L I L I L I L
Fasteners 2.34 I I I I I I I I I I I
Front Fork Oil** - I I I R I I R I I R I
Front Forks and Front Axle 2.32 I I I I I I I I I I I
Gear Shift Pedal 2.17 I I L I L I L I L I L
Headlamp 2.27 I I I I I I
Ignition Switch & Locks 2.35 L L L L L L L L L L
Radio / Radio Software Ch. 19 Update software annually
Rear Brake Pedal 2.17 I I L I L I L I L I L
Rear Shock Absorber 2.30 I I I I I I I I I I I
Rear Wheel Alignment 2.26 I I I I I I I I I I I
Road Test - P P P P P P P P P P P
Sidestand 2.28 I I L I L I L I L I L
Sidestand Pad 2.28 I I I I I I I I I I I
Steering Head Bearings 2.32 I I I L I I L I I L I
Suspension, Rear, Rocker 2.30 I I I L I I L I I L I
Swing Arm and Rear Axle 2.30 I I I I I I I I I I I
Tires / Wheels 2.10 I I I I I I I I I I I
Operation Codes:
I-Inspect (tighten, clean, adjust, correct or replace if necessary) R-Replace/Rebuild P-Perform
L-Lubricate with proper lubricant
*Replace at specified interval or annually **Replace at specified interval or every 2 years
MAINTENANCE
Air Filter 3. Remove ground wire bolt (B) and rear tank bolts (C)
and collect flange bushings (D) and isolators (E).
The air filter element is a dry, treated paper design. Do
not apply air filter oil. 2
B E
The fuel line is secured to the main wiring harness by D
a tie strap. The fuel line must be disconnected from
the fuel pump fitting (A) before removing the tank.
• If fuel tank will be removed for other maintenance

or inspection, refer to removal procedure.
See ‘Fuel Tank Removal” on page 5.15 C
A
4. Secure handlebars in the straight ahead position.
Place a protective cloth on front of tank to prevent
damage.
Don’t Remove
Tie Strap 5. Pivot rear of tank up to gain access to fuel line/fuel
fitting. Support rear of tank.
6. Reach under tank and locate pump harness electrical

connector. Carefully lift tab (F) and disconnect
harness.
WARNING
Review gasoline warnings on page 5.3. Allow
engine and exhaust to cool completely before
disconnecting fuels line or removing tank.
NOTE: Do not cut or remove tie strap. F
1. Remove side covers and seat (Chapter 3).
2. Disconnect single vent line.
WARNING
Fuel Tank Removal: DO NOT move tank rearward
prior to disconnecting fuel line. To disconnect the
fuel line fitting located on the bottom of the tank, lift
up rear of tank allowing tank to pivot on front
isolators. The fuel line is secured to the main wiring
harness by a tie strap that should not be removed.
MAINTENANCE
7. Disconnect fuel line from pump by squeezing release 12. Loosen (3) filter retainer screws (E).
tabs (G) on both sides of the fitting. Pull fuel line straight
down off pump fitting. 13. Loosen (2) filter mount screws (F) only until filter can
be removed. Do not remove screws from filter.
G F E
36 in-lbs 36 in-lbs
(4.0 Nm) (4.0 Nm)
Tie Strap 14. Lift retainer up, then lift filter and slide it rearward to
Don’t Remove remove.
Lift retainer up,
8. Install fuel tank fitting plug tool PV-50251(9.5mm Pull filter up and out
fittings) or PV-50567 (11.8mm fittings) onto fuel pump
fitting to protect the fitting and prevent fuel for seeping
out of tank.
Install Special Tool
PV-50251 or PV-50567
Air Filter Installation
15. Clean filter sealing surface on frame.

9. Grasp tank at front edge. Lift rear of tank high enough
for the fuel pump fitting and the plug tool to clear the 16. Install new air filter with captive screws. Check edges
frame. of filter to be sure they are seated properly in flange.
10. Carefully pull tank rearward to release front tank 17. Tighten filter mount screws and retainer screws. (4.0
mounts from front isolators. Nm or 36 in-lb)
11. Place tank on suitable flat surface that will not scratch 18. Reinstall fuel tank by performing steps 1-14 on the next
fuel tank. Do not place fuel tank on frame/seat area of page.
the motorcycle.
MAINTENANCE
Reinstall Fuel Tank 9. Verify fuel line is routed and secured properly before
lowering tank.
Place a protective cloth on front of tank to prevent 2
damage.
2. Carefully place fuel tank on motorcycle frame. Be

careful not to snag or catch special tool PV-50251 or
fuel tank fitting on frame of vehicle.
3. Assemble vent and drain lines to tank (if removed).
20 in-lbs
(2.3 Nm)
Rotate lines
against side
of tank
10. Install rear isolators (flange side to tank) and flange
bushings.
11. Lower rear of tank and install bolts.
12. Torque fasteners to specification. Ref. “A” below.
96 in-lbs (10.8 Nm)

REF B
4. Assemble front isolators to frame. Apply alcohol, soapy

water solution, or rubber lubricant to ease tank
installation.
5. Slide tank onto front isolators and slide tank fully

forward. Pivot rear of tank up to gain access to fuel line/
fuel fitting. Support rear of tank. 18 ft-lbs (24.5 Nm)
6. Remove fuel tank fitting plug tool PV-50251 from fuel

pump fitting by pressing in on center button of the
plastic coupler.
7. Connect fuel line to fuel pump. Push fitting straight onto

REF A
pump fitting until it clicks in place. You will hear a
noticeable clicking sound when the fitting engages
properly. Pull lightly to be sure fitting is fully installed.
8. Connect fuel pump wire harness electrical connector. 13. Connect vent, drain, and ground wire. Torque ground
wire bolt to 10.8 Nm or 96 in-lbs Ref. “B” on above
photo.
14. Install seat and side covers.
MAINTENANCE
Engine Oil Level Engine Oil And Filter Change

Change engine oil at intervals listed in the Periodic
1. Warm the engine for several minutes until operating
Maintenance Table.
temperature is reached.
2. Stop engine and wait for 3-5 minutes. 1. Start and run engine until it reaches normal operating
temperature. Stop engine.
3. Place the machine on a level area and hold it in an
upright position.
2. Securely support motorcycle on sidestand.
4. Remove dipstick (A) and wipe it clean.
3. Place an oil drain pan under drain plug (B) and filter (C).
B 15 ft-lbs (20 Nm) C

5. Screw dipstick in until seated.
6. Remove dipstick and view oil level.
7. Oil level should be between ADD and FULL lines on 4. Remove drain plug (6mm Allen wrench) and allow oil
dipstick. If oil level is low, add Victory 20-40 Semi- to drain completely.
Synthetic engine oil to raise level to FULL mark. DO
NOT overfill. 5. Remove oil filter with a 2 1/2 inch (63.5 mm) filter
wrench.
6. Clean drain plug sealing surface on crankcase.

Replace seal washer on drain plug.
7. Install drain plug and tighten to proper torque. DO NOT

overtighten.
8. Clean oil filter gasket sealing surface on crankcase.
1/2 qt. 9. Make sure new oil filter gasket is properly seated in the
new oil filter, and apply a thin film of clean engine oil
Screw in to check to the gasket. Screw new filter on until gasket contacts
the filter mounting plate. Tighten filter by hand an
additional 3/4 turn.
(Cont.)
MAINTENANCE
10. Add approximately 4 1/2 quarts (4.0 liters) of oil Reverse Idler Shaft Lubrication
through dipstick hole. Use only Victory brand Semi-
Synthetic 20W-40 Motor Oil or equivalent oil for use On motorcycles equipped with Reverse, lubricate the
with wet clutches such as JASO MA rating. reverse idler shaft at every oil change or as required for 2
smooth reverse actuator lever movement.
NOTICE 1. Remove access bolt (A).
Do not add chemical additives to the engine oil. Some
automotive engine oils contain additives that could 2. Spray Victory Multi-Purpose spray lubricant (2872863)
damage or reduce the service life of the wet clutch in into center of shaft for 2-3 seconds while moving the
the motorcycle. Reverse actuator lever up and down through the travel
range until it operates smoothly and freely.
11. Reinstall dipstick. Start and run engine until it reaches
normal operating temperature. 3. Install screw and torque to 60 in-lbs (6.8 Nm)
NOTE: After an oil change, the low oil pressure

indicator light could remain on longer than usual. Do
not rev the engine while the light is on. If light does
not go out within 5 seconds of starting the engine,
stop the engine immediately and investigate.
12. Stop engine and make sure there are no leaks around
the drain plug and oil filter.
A
13. Check oil level and adjust if needed.
NOTICE: Recycle used oil and filter in accordance

with local regulations.
ENGINE OIL CAPACITY AT Approx. 4.5 qt.

CHANGE (WITH FILTER) (4.0 - 4.25 liter)
ENGINE OIL CAPACITY AT Approx. 4.0 qt.

CHANGE (WITHOUT FILTER) (3.75 - 4.0 liter)
MAINTENANCE
Idle Speed / Fast Idle Speed 2012-2013 Cross Roads Classic / Hard-Ball
NOTE: Idle speed is continuously monitored and

adjusted by the ECM via the IAC valve. DO NOT tamper Up to 200 201 (91 kg+)
Tire Load  pounds (91 kg) - Max Load
with or attempt to “adjust” the throttle plate flow screw (A)
or plate stop screw (B)! They are factory pre-set. If idle is Load Capacity
erratic or if idle speed is incorrect, refer to troubleshooting FRONT: 36 psi 38 psi
in this section to find the cause of the problem. Tampering Dunlop 491 Elite II (248 kPa) (262 kPa)
with these screws will not correct an idle speed or control 130/70-18
problem. REAR: 38 psi 40 psi
Dunlop Elite 3 (262 kPa) (276 kPa)
180/60R16 M/C 80H
Tire Inspection
1. Inspect tires for weather checking, cuts, embedded
foreign objects, abnormal wear, and surface damage.
2. Inspect front and rear wheels for damage / runout.

Refer to Chapters 12 and 13 for procedure.
A B
3. Measure tread depth at center of tread (C). Be sure tire
NOT ADJUSTABLE. DO NOT TAMPER! pressure is set correctly before measuring tread depth.
Measure in 3-4 places equally spaced around the tire
and record the smallest measurement.
Tire Pressure
C
WARNING
Operating the motorcycle with improper tires or with
improper or uneven tire pressure could cause loss
of control or accident. Always use the correct size
and type of tires specified for your vehicle. Always
maintain proper tire pressure as recommended in
the owner's manual and on safety labels.
NOTE: Refer to the Manufacturing Information label

(located on the steering head) for more information.
Tire pressure should be checked when the tires are
cool and on a regular basis. Tire pressure may be low
despite tire appearance. WARNING
2012-2013 Cross Country / CC Tour / NESS Operating the motorcycle with worn tires could
cause loss of control or accident. When a tire
Up to 200 201 (91 kg+) reaches the minimum tread depth listed below,
Tire Load  pounds (91 kg) - Max Load replace the tire immediately.
Load Capacity
MINIMUM TIRE TREAD DEPTH
FRONT: 36 psi 38 psi
Dunlop Elite 3 FRONT TIRE MINIMUM REAR TIRE MINIMUM
(248 kPa) (262 kPa) TREAD DEPTH TREAD DEPTH
130/70R18 63H
REAR: 1.6mm (.063") 1.6mm (.063")
38 psi 40 psi (1/16 inch) (1/16 inch)
Dunlop Elite 3 (262 kPa) (276 kPa)
180/60R16 M/C 80H
MAINTENANCE
Throttle Cable Inspection / Lubrication Throttle Cable Free Play

Check the amount of control grip movement from the rest
NOTE: Control cable casings are lined with a low friction
sleeve and are factory lubricated for reliable operation.
position to the point of cable resistance. 2
Periodic lubrication of cables is not required and could be
detrimental to cable performance. Only cable ends must 2-4mm (.080-.160)
be periodically inspected and lubricated in accordance
with the Periodic Maintenance Schedule (page 2.4). See
Chapter 12 (Throttle Cable Removal) to lubricate cable
ends at the throttle grip.
Throttle Opening Cable Adjustment

NOTICE 1. With engine OFF and handlebars pointed straight
ahead, loosen cable lock nuts by turning them
Do not kink, bend or twist inner cable or cable
counter-clockwise (viewed from throttle grip) until they
casing during removal or installation.
stop against the throttle housing.
2. Turn both cable adjusters toward lock nuts until they
lightly contact the lock nuts.
3. Turn throttle opening cable adjuster (front cable) out
until freeplay is within specified range.
1. Remove triangular IAC cover from right side of 4. Hold adjuster in place and tighten lock securely (by
motorcycle by pulling straight outward at each corner hand) against the adjuster.
to release the three tabs.
2. Inspect cables for proper routing, smooth movement,

and for damage to the external casing. Inspect the
exposed inner cable for fraying, kinks, or corrosion.
Replace any damaged cables or cables that are sticky
or sluggish to return.
3. Spray each barrel end (A) with Victory Multi Purpose

Lubricant 2872863.
Freeplay Lock nut is tightened

Reduce Increase against adjuster, not
the switch housing!
Adjuster Lock Nut Loosen
Throttle Closing Cable Adjustment

DO NOT tamper
with these screws! 1. Hold throttle grip lightly in closed position.
2. Turn throttle closing cable (rear cable) adjuster out until
you feel slight resistance at the adjuster.
3. Hold adjuster in place and tighten lock nut securely (by
4. After lubricating barrel ends, inspect cable free play. hand) against the adjuster.
Cruise Control Cable information is on page 2.12. 4. Verify throttle grip moves smoothly and returns freely
when released in all handlebar positions.
MAINTENANCE
Cruise Control Cable Front Brake Lever Inspection

(Cross Country model or if equipped with accessory)
1. Pull brake lever and release it. Lever should move
1. Remove triangular IAC cover from right side of smoothly without binding and return freely to the rest
motorcycle by pulling straight outward at each corner position.
to release the three tabs.
2. Pull the lever. The lever should be firm not spongy.
1. Inspect throttle body end of cruise control cable in Bleed brakes and inspect system if brake lever is not
area (A) for fraying and be sure end is secured in firm.
bracket (B). Inspect outer cable casing for damage.
A Front Brake Lever Lubrication

B
1. Remove nut (C), pivot screw (D), and lever. Lubricate
screw, lever bushing, and lever cam (E) with Special
Brake Grease (PN 2203685) or Victory All Purpose
Grease.
2. Assemble lever, screw, and nut.
3. Tighten screw.
4. Hold screw and tighten nut.
5. Inspect lever movement as described for FRONT

BRAKE LEVER INSPECTION above.
2. Inspect exposed inner cable for fraying, kinks, or
corrosion. Replace any damaged, frayed or corroded D
cables.
9 in-lbs (1.0 Nm)
3. Spray each barrel end with Victory Multi Purpose
Lubricant 2872863.
NOTE: The cruise control cable (if equipped) is not

manually adjustable and does not require periodic
adjustment.
E
C
52 in-lbs (6.0 Nm)
MAINTENANCE
Front Brake Lever Reach Clutch Lever Lubrication

Front brake lever “reach” (or distance to the hand grip) is 1. Disconnect clutch cable from lifter arm by rotating arm
adjustable. To adjust lever reach: (A) inward with pliers or adjustable wrench. Protect 2
surface of lever arm or use a pliers or adjustable
• Pull the lever away from grip (1) and hold.
wrench with non-marring jaws.
• To INCREASE lever reach distance, turn dial (2) to
align a lower number with arrow (3) on lever.
• To DECREASE lever reach distance, turn dial to
align a higher number with the arrow. A
2. Clean lower cable bushing and cable. Inspect inner

cable wire for damage or frayed strands. Replace
cable if damaged.
3. At handlebar end, pull outer cable casing (B) out of

perch and carefully rotate inner cable out of perch and
lever. Do not kink cable.
3
B
2
VIEW FROM BOTTOM
MAINTENANCE
4. Remove nut (C). Push pivot bolt upward to remove it, Clutch Lever Free Play (Cable)
then remove lever pivot bushing (D).
1. With handlebars pointing straight ahead, measure the
clutch lever free play (E).
.5 - 1.5 mm (.020 - .060”)

C
52 in-lbs (6 Nm)
5. Clean all parts. Inspect bushings and lever for wear. 2. If adjustment is required, hold cable (F) and loosen
adjuster jam nut (G).
6. Inspect inner cable wire for frayed strands. Replace
cable if frayed. 3. Turn cable adjuster (H) in or out until clutch freeplay is
correct.
7. Lubricate both lever pivot and cable end bushing with
Moly Assembly Paste PN 2871460 or Special Grease
PN 2203685.
8. Assemble lever (with bushing) to perch.

F
9. Install pivot bolt and nut. Torque nut to 52 in-lbs (6 Nm).
G
10. Grease cable end.
11. Rotate cable back through slot in perch, and push outer
casing back into perch recess. H
12. Lubricate lower cable and barrel end.
13. Rotate lifter arm inward with a pliers or adjustable

wrench and attach cable to lifter arm.
14. Inspect clutch lever free play and adjust if necessary. 4. Tighten adjuster jam nut securely to cable.
Be sure cable and lever operate smoothly without
binding.
MAINTENANCE
Front Brake Fluid Level Rear Brake Fluid

1. Set vehicle upright on a level surface and turn
handlebars until top of reservoir is level. 2
Maximum Level
Minimum Level
MAX
MIN
1. Set vehicle upright on a level surface and inspect rear

brake fluid reservoir level.
2. View fluid level through sight glass.
2. Level must be between MIN and MAX lines on
3. If low, check brake pads for wear (page 2.16) and
reservoir.
check the brake system for leaks. Check for signs of
fluid leaks around hoses, fittings, reservoir, and brake 3. If level is low, check brake pads for wear (page 2.16)
caliper pistons (behind brake pads). and inspect rear brake system for leaks. Check for
signs of brake fluid leaks around hoses, fittings,
4. To add fluid, remove reservoir cover screws, cover,
reservoir, and brake caliper pistons (behind brake
and diaphragm.
pads).
5. Add DOT 4 Brake Fluid from a sealed container to the
4. To add fluid, remove reservoir cover with diaphragm by
proper level.
turning it counter-clockwise (as viewed from top).
6. Clean and dry all sealing surfaces of reservoir,
5. Add DOT 4 Brake Fluid from a sealed container to bring
reservoir cover, diaphragm, and diaphragm plate with
level between MIN and MAX marks.
a clean lint-free cloth.
7. If the diaphragm is extended, return it to the retracted 6. Clean and dry all sealing surfaces of reservoir,
(neutral) position (A). reservoir cover, diaphragm, and diaphragm plate with
a clean lint-free cloth.
A
7. If diaphragm is extended, return it to the retracted
(neutral) position (B).
8. Reinstall diaphragm, plate, and cover.

9. Torque screws to 25 in-lbs (3 Nm).
10. Check for deterioration of hoses.
8. Check for deterioration of hoses.
MAINTENANCE
Front Brake Pad Inspection Rear Brake Pad Inspection

Wear indicator grooves are provided on each front brake Wear indicator grooves are provided on each rear brake
pad to allow for a visual inspection without pad removal. pad to allow for a visual inspection without pad removal.
Inspect pads by viewing from rear of caliper. Inspect pads from top of caliper behind swingarm.
Replace pads if worn to bottom of grooves or near the Replace pads if worn to bottom of grooves or near the
minimum thickness. minimum thickness.
Refer to Chapter 15 to remove pads for further inspection Refer to Chapter 15 to remove pads for further inspection
or to replace if worn. or to replace if worn.
Minimum Thickness:
Rear Pad: 1.5mm (.060 in.)
Minimum Thickness:
Front Pad: 1.5mm (.060 in.)
Grooves
Grooves
MAINTENANCE
Shift Pedal Foot Control Adjustment

1. Check all shift pedal and linkage fasteners to be sure The brake pedal and shift pedal can be adjusted to one of
they are tight. Torque values are shown in chapter 9. three positions. The controls are in the center position as 2
delivered from Victory.
To move the controls to the front or rear position, do the

following:
1. Use a 6mm Allen wrench to remove screw (1).
2. Slide the control forward or rearward in its track until

the threaded hole of the control aligns with the front (2)
or rear (3) screw hole in the footrest support.
3. Install the screw and torque to 96 in-lbs (11 Nm).
2. Lubricate shift pedal pivot bushing and all pivots with

Victory All Purpose Grease P/N 2872187 or Victory
Multi-Purpose Lubricant.
Rear Brake Pedal

1. Push brake pedal and release it. Pedal should move
smoothly without binding and return freely to the rest
2
position. 1
3
2. Push down on brake pedal. The pedal should be firm
not spongy. Bleed and inspect rear brake system if
pedal is not firm.
4. After adjusting shift pedal position, the linkage rod
3. Lubricate rear brake pedal pivot bushing with Victory must be adjusted to re-set pedal height.
All Purpose Grease (P/N 2872187) or Multi-Purpose
Lubricant (P/N 2872863). 5. Hold rod ends and loosen both jam nuts (4).
4
90mm (3.5 in)
6. Turn linkage rod (5) until center of shift peg is 82.5-

4. Check brake pads for wear as outlined on page 2.16. 102mm above the floor board surface (see chapter 9).
7. Tighten jam nuts to 96 in-lbs (11 Nm).
MAINTENANCE
Crankcase Ventilation System Fuel Filter

The fuel filter is attached to the electric fuel pump located
1. Inspect condition of breather hose (A) and hose inside the fuel tank (see Chapter 5). No periodic fuel filter
clamps. maintenance is required, however, the fuel filter should be
replaced at intervals specified in the Periodic
Maintenance Table on page 2.4.
Fuel System Inspection
A Inspect fuel line and system components in accordance

with the Periodic Maintenance Table on page 2.4.
1. Remove IAC cover from right side (Chapter 3).
2. Inspect fuel line and fuel rail for signs of deterioration,

damage, abrasion, cracks, leakage, or kinked areas.
3. Replace any components that fail inspection with

genuine Victory replacement parts only.
4. Refer to Chapter 5 for a system diagram and

Evaporative Emission Control System component location.
(California Models)
WARNING
1. Inspect all Evaporative Emissions Control system
hoses and be sure all connection are securely The fuel supply hose and fuel rail are subjected to high
attached. pressure. Replace with genuine Victory replacement
parts to reduce the possibility of fuel line failure. Be sure
2. Refer to Chapter 5 for a system diagram and fuel lines are routed properly and do not come in contact
component location. with sharp or hot objects, or anything that may cause
wear or damage.
MAINTENANCE
Spark Plug Removal & Inspection Spark Plug Installation

1. Inspect spark plug gap with a wire gauge.
WARNING 2
2. To adjust gap, bend ground electrode carefully using
HOT COMPONENTS Wear insulated gloves and/or a spark plug gap tool.
allow engine and exhaust to cool before handling
these parts.
1. With engine at room temperature, grasp spark plug

boot (A) at base to disconnect. DO NOT pull on wire NGK DCPR6E
or spark plug wire may be damaged.
.8 - .9 mm
(.032 - 036”)
TORQUE: 10.8-14.5 ft-lbs (14.5-19.5 Nm)
3. Apply anti-seize compound sparingly to spark plug

threads, avoiding the bottom 2 or 3 threads.
A
4. Torque spark plugs to specification.
5. Apply a light film of dielectric grease to each spark plug

2. Clean area around spark plug base with compressed
boot and install securely on spark plugs.
air to remove loose debris.
3. Remove spark plugs and inspect for:
• Insulator damage
• Worn electrodes
• Deposits
MAINTENANCE
Battery Battery Charging

This motorcycle is equipped with a maintenance free Refer to See ‘Battery Charging - General” on page 16.7.
battery which is located in front of the engine. DO NOT
remove cell caps or add distilled water to the battery.
Refer to Chapter 16 for battery and charging system Battery Storage
diagnostic procedures.
When the motorcycle is not used for periods of one month
or longer, charge the battery using the charging plug
WARNING harness or remove battery from motorcycle and charge it.
Store battery in a cool, dry place. (See Chapter 16).
Battery electrolyte is poisonous. It contains sulfuric
acid. Serious burns can result from contact with
skin, eyes or clothing. Antidote: WARNING
Battery charging can create explosive gasses;
External: Flush with water.
keep sparks, flames, cigarettes or anything that
could ignite the gasses away. Provide adequate
Internal: Drink large quantities of water or milk.
ventilation when charging in an enclosed space.
Follow with milk of magnesia, beaten egg, or
Batteries contain acid that is caustic. Wear
vegetable oil. Call physician immediately.
protective clothing and a face shield or protective
eyewear when working with the battery. KEEP OUT
Eyes: Flush with water for 15 minutes and get
OF REACH OF CHILDREN.
prompt medical attention.
Batteries produce explosive gases. Keep sparks,

flame, cigarettes, etc. away. Ventilate when Battery Inspection
charging or using in an enclosed space. Always
shield eyes when working near batteries. KEEP Battery terminals and connections should be kept free of
CHILDREN AWAY FROM BATTERY. corrosion. If cleaning is necessary, remove the corrosion
with a stiff wire brush. Wash with a solution of one
tablespoon baking soda to one cup water. Rinse well with
NOTICE tap water and dry off with clean rags. Coat terminals with
dielectric grease.
Whenever removing the battery, disconnect the
negative (black) cable first. When reinstalling the
1. Visually inspect the exterior of the battery. Replace
battery, connect the negative (black) cable last.
battery if case damage is evident or if the case is
swollen, deformed or leaking electrolyte.
Do not remove the battery cables while the engine
is running. Doing so may damage the Electronic
2. To remove corrosion, remove battery from motorcycle
Control Unit (ECM).
and wash terminals with water and baking soda
solution. Clean terminals, bolts, and cable ends with a
Take great care not to reverse the battery leads
brass wire brush. Apply a thin film of dielectric grease
when installing the battery. Reverse power applied
to the terminal bolt threads.
to the ECM will damage it instantly.
3. Measure battery voltage.
Specification: 12.5Vdc minimum
4. If battery voltage is below 12.5 VDC, charge it

thoroughly (refer to page 16.7). Replace battery if it will
not accept a charge.
MAINTENANCE
Battery Removal Battery Installation
WARNING WARNING 2
Improperly connecting or disconnecting battery Improperly connecting or disconnecting battery
cables can result in an explosion and cause serious cables can result in an explosion and cause serious
injury or death. When removing the battery, always injury or death. When removing the battery, always
disconnect the negative (black) cable first. When disconnect the negative (black) cable first. When
reinstalling the battery, always connect the reinstalling the battery, always connect the
negative (black) cable last. negative (black) cable last.
1. Remove chin fairing (grill) (page 3.20).

NOTICE
2. Remove negative (-) battery cable (A) from battery On CB Radio equipped vehicles, be sure the CB
terminal. antenna is installed and connected to the radio
before connecting the battery.
3. Lift the red protective boot (B) from the positive (+)
cable end to expose the terminal. Remove the positive 1. Inspect battery tray for damage. Be sure tray
cable from the battery terminal. fasteners (D) are tight, and foam pads (E) are in good
condition and properly located.
4. Remove battery hold-down strap (C).
40 in-lbs 40 in-lbs
(4.5 Nm) B (4.5 Nm)
A
C D
E
5. Remove battery. 2. Install battery in battery box with terminals facing

forward.
3. Install battery hold-down strap.
4. Apply dielectric grease to terminal bolt threads.
5. Install positive (+) cable first. Torque bolt to

specification.
6. Install red protective boot over positive (+) terminal.
7. Install negative cable. Torque bolt to specification.
8. Install chin fairing (page 3.20).
MAINTENANCE
Engine Compression Test Cylinder Leakage Test

If compression is low, perform a cylinder leakage test to
1. Warm engine to operating temperature. determine where leakage is occurring. Follow instructions
provided with test equipment.
2. Shift transmission into neutral and stop engine.
Cylinder Leakdown Tester: PV-35667-A
3. Disconnect ignition cables from both spark plugs.
Engine Compression Test (Wet)
4. Remove spark plug from cylinder to be tested.
If a leakage tester is not available, perform a wet cylinder
5. Remove 15A FUSE (FP / IGN COIL) from fuse box to compression test.
disable fuel supply and ignition system (see pg. 2.34 1. Pour 3-5 cc of clean engine oil into one spark plug
for fuse box location). hole. Repeat cylinder compression test. Repeat for
the other cylinder.
6. Install compression tester in the spark plug hole
following manufacturers instructions. 2. If compression increases substantially, inspect
cylinder, piston, and rings. If compression does not
7. Open throttle and crank engine until needle on increase, inspect valves and valve seats.
compression gauge stops rising (about 5 seconds).
8. Repeat procedure for other cylinder.
Engine Compression:
STD: 210-225 psi
(1448-1551 kPa)
SERVICE LIMIT:
Below 180 PSI
High engine compression may indicate:

• Carbon deposits on piston crown / cylinder head
• Engine modification
• Addition of performance parts
• Faulty gauge
Low engine compression may indicate:
• Debris / carbon on valve face or valve seat.
• Worn piston and/or piston rings
• Piston ring stuck in the piston ring groove
• Leaking valves or head gasket
• Slow starter motor cranking speed
• Valve timing incorrect
• Faulty gauge
MAINTENANCE
Drive Belt Wear Analysis
Internal Tooth Cracks (Hairline) External Tooth Cracks Missing Teeth Chipping (Not Serious)
OK to run, but monitor condition. Replace Belt Replace Belt OK to run, but monitor condition.
Fuzzy Edge Cord Hook Wear Stone Damage Bevel Wear (Outer Edge Only)
OK to run, but monitor condition. Replace Belt Replace belt if damage is on edge OK to run, but monitor condition.
Drive Belt Condition Drive Belt Tension Gauge

Replace the drive belt if it is cracked or has broken teeth Proper use of the belt tension gauge PV-43532 is
or frayed edges. No matter its condition, the drive belt important for accuracy. During the measurement
should be replaced in accordance with the Periodic procedure, be sure the gauge is seated squarely against
Maintenance Interval Table on page 2.4. the belt and in alignment with the belt centerline.
90
Drive Belt Side View
PV-43532
Belt Cross
Section

DO NOT attempt to check belt tension if the belt has been Tool
exposed to rain or washing within a 24 hour period or if Body 90
O-Ring Set to 10 lb mark
the belt is hot from riding. Allow the belt to cool down to
ambient temperature before measuring belt tension. Gauge
Replace drive belt and both sprockets as a set if drive belt
has over 5,000 miles (8,000 km) of service at the time of
damage or failure.
Push plunger until

End View O-ring contacts body
MAINTENANCE
Drive Belt Tension - Inspection 7. Slide O-ring on belt tension gauge to the 10 lb. mark.
8. Place tape measure or ruler next to drive belt at mid-
WARNING span (Fig. 2) and align a major graduation mark on the
ruler with the lower edge of the belt surface. (Fig. 3) Do
Care should be taken to be sure the motorcycle will not move the ruler from this position.
not tip or fall while elevated. Severe personal injury
or death may occur if the motorcycle tips or falls.
1. Secure motorcycle in an upright position.
2. Shift transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. ELEVATE rear wheel off the ground when checking

deflection or adjusting the belt.
4. Do not attempt to check belt tension if the belt has been

exposed to rain or washing within a 24 hour period or Fig. 2
if the drive system is hot from riding. Allow the system
to cool to room temperature (60-80 F / 15-27 C) before
measuring belt tension. Replace drive belt and both
sprockets as a set if the drive system has over 5,000
miles (8,000 km) of service at the time of damage or
failure.
5. See page 2.23 for instructions for proper use of belt

tension gauge PV-43532.
Finding The Tight Spot In The Drive System
6. Use the tire valve stem as a reference. Rotate wheel

in a CLOCKWISE rotation as viewed from belt side of Fig. 3
motorcycle until valve stem is at the bottom. (Fig. 1)
9. Place belt tension gauge squarely against belt at until
push up on center plunger until O-ring just touches tool
90 body. Record the total amount of deflection as
measured on the ruler.
10. Rotate wheel 90 degrees (valve stem is at rearmost

position). Measure and record the deflection.
11. Repeat measurements with the valve stem at the top

90 90 and forward positions and record the deflection.
12. Compare all measurements and use the point of least

deflection (tightest spot) as your reference point to
determine if belt requires adjustment.
13. Rotate the wheel in normal drive direction

(CLOCKWISE) 1-2 revolutions back to your reference
Start Forward (tightest) point.
Rotate clockwise only during this procedure 14. If belt deflection is greater than specified, tighten the
belt. If deflection is less than specified, loosen the belt.
Fig. 1
Refer to specification table on page 2.26.
MAINTENANCE
Specifications: Drive Belt Sprocket Inspection

1. Inspect front and rear sprocket teeth (Chapter 11) for
BELT DEFLECTION wear or damage from foreign material. Closely inspect 2
drive belt condition at the same time.
Model Deflection @ 10 lbs force
Cross Roads 32.0 mm ± .5mm

Cross Country (1 1/4 ± 1/32") Drive Belt Cleaning
Drive belt and sprocket service life is maximized and
drive line noise minimized by proper cleaning. Cleaning
interval is approximately every tire change, or more often
SONIC TENSION DATA if operated in dirty, dusty, or high debris environments.
The following data is provided for use with the Gates 507C 1. Mix a few drops of mild dish soap with a cup of warm
Sonic Tension Meter or an equivalent. Follow Steps 1-4 water a use a soft nylon brush to clean the belt and
and the instructions included with your sonic tension sprocket teeth.
meter. 2. Pay close attention to corner areas (A) where road
debris and belt dust can collect.
Required Data For
Sonic Tension Specification
Meter
Span 708.65mm
A
Belt Width 28mm
Belt Mass Constant 8.4
Tension 20 Hz ( ± 1 Hz)
3. Rinse thoroughly with clear water. Dry thoroughly.

NOTE: Do not inspect or adjust drive belt tension
when the belt is wet. Improper adjustment will result.
MAINTENANCE
Drive Belt Adjustment / Alignment 4. Safely elevate rear tire off floor.
Rear Wheel Alignment / Belt Adjustment 5. Turn adjuster nuts (D) on left and right side of swingarm
to achieve:
WARNING • Recommended belt tension
A mis-aligned rear axle can cause drive line noise • Wheel alignment (marks equal both sides)
and damage the drive belt, causing possible belt
failure and loss of control of the motorcycle.
1. Remove both saddlebags (page 3.25).
2. Swingarm marks (A) and plate marks (B) are used as

a reference for initial wheel alignment. Marks should be
in same position on both left and right sides of wheel.
3. Loosen axle nut (C).
A Note: Adjuster nuts are

B hidden by swingarm
6. When belt tension is correct, check and adjust final

wheel alignment as follows:
NOTE: To minimize change in belt tension, use LEFT

SIDE adjuster only (E) to make final adjustments to
belt alignment. Be sure to keep axle seated forward
against axle adjusters during this procedure.
C
Marks are for initial alignment only. Refer to

procedure for final alignment.
MAINTENANCE
7. Rotate the wheel BACKWARD. Tighten LEFT rear axle Headlamp Aim Inspection
adjuster until belt begins to track to right sprocket
flange (outboard) during backward wheel rotation. The top edge of the high beam must be 3 inches (7.6 cm)
below the height of the widest part of the headlight and 2
centered straight ahead at 25 feet (7.6 meters).
To check for proper headlamp aim:
• Set tire pressure (page 2.10) and rear

suspension air pressure for load (page 2.31).
• Straddle motorcycle in an upright position

and sit in the operator’s seat.
• Turn ignition switch ON.
• Select HIGH BEAM.
• Compare to illustration and adjust if necessary.
Rear Wheel Alignment - Final Cross Roads / Hard-Ball

8. Rotate the wheel in FORWARD direction. Loosen Wall
LEFT rear axle adjuster until belt moves off the right
sprocket flange and begins to track to the left flange 25 feet (7.6m)
(inboard) during forward wheel rotation. 3 in. (7.6 cm)
Height of widest
part of headlamp
(housing parting line)
Floor
Cross Country
Wall
25 feet (7.6m)
3 in. (7.6 cm)

9. Tighten rear axle nut to 65 ft-lbs (88 Nm).
10. Torque both axle adjuster nuts to 8 ft-lbs (11 Nm).

Height of widest
11. Pump rear brake pedal several times to reset brake part of headlamp
pad distance.
Floor
12. Verify wheel rotates smoothly and freely without drag
when brake pedal is released.
MAINTENANCE
Headlamp Aim Adjustment Sidestand Inspection

Cross Roads 1. Support the motorcycle in an upright position.
• Loosen adjustment nut (A). 2. Inspect sidestand spring for damage or loss of tension.
Be sure stand returns to fully retracted position.
• Move headlamp horizontally or vertically to proper
position. 3. Inspect sidestand for smooth movement.
• Hold headlamp in position and tighten nut to 28 ft- 35 ft-lbs (47.5 Nm)
lbs (38 Nm).
• Verify proper aim after nut is tight.
4. Inspect sidestand pivot bolt nut for proper torque.

5. Replace sidestand if it is bent. Do not attempt to
straighten sidestand.
Cross Country 6. Inspect sidestand pad for wear.
• Remove headlamp bezel by pulling straight Sidestand Pad Inspection

outward to release the clips (page 3.9).
Sidestand Pad Inspection
• Vertical Adjustment: Loosen the adjustment screws
(B) equally to lower the beam. Tighten the screws 1. Inspect the sidestand rubber pad (A) for wear. Be sure
equally to raise the beam. pad is secured in place and not damaged or torn.
Replace pad if worn to or beyond the wear mark (B).
• Horizontal Adjustment: Tighten one screw and See page 2.29 for replacement procedure.
loosen the other equally. The beam will move in the
direction of the tightened screw.
B
• Verify proper aim and install headlamp bezel.
Leading Edge Trailing Edge
Front of Motorcycle
MAINTENANCE
Sidestand & Spring Removal Sidestand Pad Replacement (Typical)

Sidestand Pad Removal
WARNING 2
1. Remove side stand from frame.
The sidestand spring is under tension. Wear eye
and face protection when removing and installing
the spring and sidestand. Be sure the vehicle is
properly secured before you begin.
1. Sidestand will be moved between the UP (retracted)

and DOWN (extended) position during removal and
A
installation. Be sure vehicle is properly secured.
35 ft-lbs
(47.5 Nm)
2. Place sidestand in a soft-jawed vise.
UP to remove/install spring 3. Remove rubber pad with a pliers to expose the rivets.
DOWN to remove/install bolt
4. Using an angle grinder, cut off the head of both rivets
on the top side of the sidestand foot (A). Be careful to
2. Remove sidestand pivot nut using a 15mm socket avoid grinding wheel contact with the finished area of
while holding bolt with a 6mm hex wrench. the stand.
3. Place sidestand in the DOWN position, then remove 5. Drive rivets out of sidestand foot from top to bottom
the bolt. with a suitable drift punch (B).
4. Grasp sidestand firmly and move it to the UP position.
5. Pull sidestand straight rearward against spring tension
until mounting flange on sidestand is clear of the
recessed mounting boss on the frame cradle.
B
6. Remove spring.
7. Installation: Attach spring to sidestand.
8. Lightly grease sidestand mounting boss on frame rail
and the shouldered portion of the pivot bolt.
9. Place loose end of spring through hole in frame rail.
10. With sidestand in the retracted position (up), pull stand
straight rearward against spring tension until the
mounting flange on the sidestand drops into the
recessed mounting boss on the frame cradle.
11. Swing sidestand to the extended position to align bolt
hole and install bolt and nut.
12. Torque nut to 35 ft-lbs (47.5 Nm) and wipe off any
excess grease.Cycle the sidestand to be sure it moves
freely, and returns to the fully retracted position.
13. Cycle the sidestand to be sure it moves freely, and
returns to the fully retracted position.
MAINTENANCE
Sidestand Pad Installation Rear Suspension / Swingarm Inspection

1. Install new sidestand pad with open end on trailing
edge of stand. WARNING
Care should be taken to be sure the motorcycle will
1. Sit astride the motorcycle. Compress the rear

suspension several times and check for smooth and
quiet operation.
2. Secure motorcycle with rear wheel elevated.
3. Grasp the rear most surface of the rear tire and attempt
to move the wheel side-to-side. If there is movement
at the front of the swingarm (A), check swingarm pivot
nut torque 65 ft-lbs (88 Nm) and swingarm bearings.
See Chapter 13, Rear Suspension).
2. Install new rivets from top to bottom.
3. Invert sidestand and place washers over rivets.
4. Hold washers and rivets in place and set sidestand on

a hard surface (such as the anvil of a vise) with hollow
end of rivets facing upward. Push washers as far down A
as possible. Be sure washers are at least 1/16 - 1/8
inch (1.5-3mm) below hollow end of rivets.
5. Peen hollow end of rivets with a commercially available

rivet tool. Be sure rivets, washers and pad are secure.
4. Rotate rear wheel. Check for smooth rotation of wheel

bearings. Grasp wheel at top and bottom and attempt
Flare Washer
to move wheel side-to-side. If movement is detected in
axle area (B) inspect axle nut torque 65 ft-lbs (88 Nm)
and rear wheel bearings (Chapter 13). If abnormal
noise is detected, inspect belt tension / alignment
(page 2.24 - 2.26) and brake pads (page 2.16).
End View of rivet tool
Rivet
B
NOTE: An alternative method is to use a center punch to

start a flare on hollow end of rivet, then use a 1/4 inch drift
(flat) punch to complete the peening operation.
6. Apply touch up paint or primer to exposed bare metal.
MAINTENANCE
5. Inspect rear shock for signs of oil leakage (Chapter 13). Rear Suspension Air Pressure Adjustment
6. Lift rear wheel up and down slightly with a pry bar while To provide the most comfortable ride and proper ground
watching lower shock mount and lower strut mount on clearance, adjust air pressure in the rear shock absorber
2
swingarm (C) for movement. Check fastener torque or as specified on the decal for total cargo and occupant
replace spherical bearings if worn. weight.
7. If radial movement is evident in upper rocker joints Follow these guidelines to check and adjust air pressure:
refer to Chapter 13 to remove shock and strut • Rest bike firmly on sidestand on level ground.
assembly for further inspection.
• Remove all cargo from the saddlebags.
• Victory Air Pump & Gauge 2876654 or PV-48909
is the preferred tool for checking and adjusting rear
suspension air pressure. If not available, use a
pressurized dry air source with a maximum line
pressure of 110 PSI and the pressure gauge
provided in the tool kit (or a similar 0-100 PSI tire
pressure gauge).
• Use ONLY A DRY AIR SOURCE, such as a system
with a water separator or airline dryer to prevent
moisture from entering the shock. The shock has
a small volume. Air pressure increases VERY
quickly when using pressurized air.
C
NOTE: The shock has a small air volume. Each time
pressure is checked with a tire pressure style gauge,
approximately 4 PSI (27.5 kPa) is lost to fill the volume of
54 ft-lbs the gauge. Once you’ve set the pressure with the gauge,
(73 Nm) remove it quickly to minimize leakage, and expect to see
a reduction from the previous reading of about 4 PSI if
you re-check the pressure.
1. Remove right side cover.
2. Remove cap from air fitting (A).
A
60 ft-lbs
(81 Nm)
3. Open the right saddlebag and locate pressure decal.
MAINTENANCE
4. Read recommended air pressure for total cargo and Front Fork / Suspension Inspection
occupant weight from decal.
MAX OPERATING PRESSURE: WARNING

72 PSI (496 kPA)
Damaged, worn, or loose suspension components
may cause loss of control, increasing the chance of
a crash or possible injury. Damaged, worn, or loose
suspension components must be repaired before
the motorcycle is operated. See Chapter 12.
WARNING
1. Place motorcycle on sidestand and inspect inner fork

tube area (A) and brake discs for signs of oil leakage.
Replace seals if leaking (Chapter 12).
5. Screw hose fitting of gauge PN 2876654 securely onto

air fitting and read air pressure on gauge.
6. To REDUCE air pressure, push bleed button (B) on
gauge. Bleed pressure in small amounts to desired
pressure. Remove tool hose from fitting and install cap.
7. To INCREASE pressure, install gauge on fitting. Pump
handle (C) until pressure increases to desired amount.
Remove hose and install cap.
DO NOT exceed 110 PSI (758 kPa) when using
pressurized air to fill the shock.
DO NOT operate motorcycle with air pressure above
2. Clean fork tubes with mild soap and water as required
72 PSI (496 kPa) (pressure measured with motorcycle
to remove bugs, tar, or buildup which may cause seal
unloaded on side stand).
wear or leakage.
3. Inspect outer surfaces of inner fork tubes for scoring,

2876654 / PV-48909 scratches, and damage from foreign objects.
C
4. With motorcycle upright, apply front brake and pump
forks through travel range several times. Fork
operation should be smooth without abnormal noise.
5. Verify all fasteners are tight. Refer to Chapter 12 for

front wheel and suspension torque specifications, and
Chapter 15 for brake system torque specifications.
B
MAINTENANCE
6. Secure motorcycle with front wheel elevated. Fuse Replacement (Main Fuse Box)
7. Turn handlebars from full left to full right and inspect 1. Remove right side cover (page 3.24).
for smooth, free movement. 2
2. Pull latch (A) on each side of fuse box cover to release.
NOTE: Be sure hoses, cables, and wiring are not
interfering with handlebar rotation. 3. To remove fuse box from mount, lift tab (B) and slide
box in direction shown on decal.
8. Point front wheel straight ahead, grasp fork tubes and
pull/push fork tubes front to back (B). 4. Accessory power fuse is located in holder (C).
B
A
C
B
9. If steering binds, feels rough or uneven, or if movement

is detected at steering stem, adjust or replace steering Main Fuse Box Layout: Cross
head bearings as necessary. Refer to Chapter 12. Roads, Cross Country & Tour.
10. Rotate front wheel and inspect for smooth rotation of

front wheel bearings. If bearings are rough or noisy,
replace front wheel bearings (Chapter 12).
11. Turn handle bars against a fork stop. Attempt to move

wheel side-to-side (C). If movement is observed,
inspect front axle, wheel, and bearings (Chapter 12).
NOTICE
Use only the recommended fuse to prevent
electrical system damage.
MAINTENANCE
Fuse Replacement (Remote Fuses) • Radio fuse is located behind the headlamp
assembly (Cross Country), plugged into the radio
NOTE: Some Victory Cross Roads, Cross Country module.
and Cross Country Tour Motorcycles may be
equipped with remote fuses which provide power to
Reverse System, ABS System, Radio and Accessory
socket.
• Reverse system fuse is located beneath the left

hand seat skirt. See Chapter 19 for details.
Radio Fuse
• Accessory fuse (lower fairing) is located beneath

trim panel covering battery.
Reverse Fuse
Accessory Fuse
• ABS system fuses (2) are located below the rear

fender.
ABS Fuse
Fasteners
Inspect all fasteners on the vehicle to be sure they are
tight. Refer to the appropriate chapter as required for
torque specifications.
MAINTENANCE
Lock And Ignition Switch Lubrication Cleaning

1. Insert spray nozzle of Victory Multi-Purpose Lubricant NOTE: Refer to page 2.3 for maintenance product part
into the ignition switch and each lock cylinder and numbers, and the Owner’s Manual for more information. 2
spray for 1-2 seconds. Pure Victory cleaning and polishing products and
accessories have been specifically designed to offer the
2. Insert key and turn it to all positions to distribute the best care possible for a Victory motorcycle. In addition to
lubricant. the products recommended here, Pure Victory products
are also available for removing scratches, scuffs, and
3. Wipe any excess lubricant from lock or switch. swirls in paint or clear coat, cleaning or enhancing black
or silver engines, cleaning tires and wheels, and
removing brake dust. Visit www.purevictorypolishes.com
for all cleaning product needs.
Before washing the motorcycle, do the following:

• Be sure exhaust has cooled completely. Cover
exhaust openings with a plastic bag secured with a
strong rubber band to prevent water from entering
exhaust system.
• Check spark plugs, spark plug wires, oil dipstick,
fuel cap, and other fill caps are properly seated.
• Avoid spraying the air box / air filter area or
electrical connectors and wiring.
• Remove excess dirt with low pressure water. Use
as little water as possible near air intake or exhaust
openings. Dry thoroughly before starting the engine
or operating the motorcycle.
• Make sure brakes are functioning properly before
operating the motorcycle.
• Do not use abrasive cleaners. Paint wear or other
cosmetic damage can occur if abrasives are used.
NOTICE
Electrical components may be damaged by water. Do not
allow water to contact electrical components or
connectors.
NOTICE
Do not use pressurized water to wash the motorcycle.
EU Models Water may seep in and deteriorate wheel bearings and
seals, brake caliper assemblies, brake master cylinders,
electrical connectors, steering head bearings, and
transmission seals if excessive pressure is used.
NOTICE
Do not use glass cleaners, water or soil repellents, and
petroleum or alcohol based cleaners on the windshield (if
equipped), as these products can damage the
windshield.
MAINTENANCE
Windshield Care 8. Remove battery and charge it.
Rinse windshield with water to remove loose dirt and dust. 9. Store battery in a cool, dry area and charge it once a
Wash the windshield using one of the Pure Victory wash month.
products described on page 2.35 (follow directions on the
container for the product you choose) then rinse (if 10. Cover motorcycle with a genuine Victory cover, or a
recommended in the directions) and wipe with a Pure covering made of fabric that allows for adequate
Victory Microfiber Chamois or Plush Microfiber Towel to dry ventilation. Do not use plastic or tarps, as corrosion
virtually spot free. may result.
IMPORTANT: Starting the motorcycle periodically during
NOTICE storage is not recommended. Water vapor is a by-product
Do not use glass water and soil repellents, of the combustion process, and corrosion may result
petroleum or alcohol based cleaners as these unless the engine is operated long enough to bring the oil
products can damage the windshield. and exhaust system to normal operating temperature.
NOTICE Suede Finish Care

Windshield material is polycarbonate plastic. Do not Suede paint is different from Victory’s usual high gloss
use cleaners or rain protective products meant for finish. Like suede fabric, suede paint changes as you
glass surfaces on the windshield. interact with the finish. It will change with time, exposure
to elements, and use. Although the quality of the paint is
not affected by these changes, special care is required
Storage when cleaning a suede finish.
To prevent storage damage due to long-term storage (60 Suede paint cannot be buffed out if it becomes scratched
days or more) the following guidelines should be fol- or scuffed. If polished, the finish will become less flat or
lowed. matte. This finish cannot be repaired if it receives heavy
damage like a scratch or a chip.
1. Top off fuel tank with fresh fuel and add fuel stabilizer
to fuel. Suede Finish Cleaning Instructions
1. Spray Pure Victory Polish Suede Finish Cleaner
2. Run motorcycle for 15 minutes or more to distribute (#90949) directly on all suede bodywork.
fuel stabilizer throughout fuel system.
2. Using a Pure Victory Polish 100% Microfiber Polishing
3. Clean motorcycle completely. Towel (#90962), wipe cleaner into the surface, then
wipe dry using a clean, dry surface of the towel.
4. Dry machine thoroughly and wax all painted surfaces.
3. After suede bodywork is clean and dry, apply Pure
5. Change engine oil as outlined in Chapter 2. Victory Polish Suede Finish Protectant to maintain and
protect the beauty of your Victory Motorcycle.
6. Lift and support the motorcycle securely to take some Suede Finish Protectant Instructions
of the weight off of front and rear wheels.
1. Spray Pure Victory Polish Suede Finish Protectant
7. Secure a plastic bag over the exhaust outlets to (#90950) onto clean suede bodywork and use
prevent moisture from entering the exhaust system. Polishing Towel (#90962) or Microfiber Applicator
(#90965) to rub protectant thoroughly into the surface.
IMPORTANT: Make certain exhaust system is cool prior to
securing plastic. 2. Using a clean, dry microfiber towel, wipe surface to
achieve that showroom-new Suede Finish.
IMPORTANT: Be sure to apply Pure Victory Polish
Suede Finish Protectant after every cleaning.
FRAME-BODY-EXHAUST
CHAPTER 3
FRAME-BODY-EXHAUST
SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3
3
REMOVAL / INSTALLATION PROCEDURES - FRONT BODY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4
FRONT FENDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4
IGNITION SWITCH / IAC COVER REMOVAL / INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5
MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5
WINDSHIELD (CROSS COUNTRY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6
WINDSHIELD (CROSS COUNTRY TOUR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7
WINDSHIELD (CROSS ROADS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8
HEADLAMP BEZEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9
HEADLAMP (CROSS COUNTRY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9
HEADLAMP, HID (CROSS COUNTRY TOUR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10
HEADLAMP ASSEMBLY VIEW (CROSS COUNTRY). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11
HEADLAMP (HID) ASSEMBLY VIEW (CROSS COUNTRY TOUR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11
HID BALLAST (CROSS COUNTRY TOUR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12
HEADLAMP (CROSS ROADS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12
HEADLAMP ASSEMBLY VIEW (CROSS ROADS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13
AUXILIARY DRIVING LIGHTS (CROSS ROADS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14
SPEAKER GRILL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14
FRONT FAIRING - UPPER (CROSS COUNTRY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14
DASH PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15
FAIRING MOUNT ASSEMBLY VIEW (CROSS COUNTRY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.16
FAIRING MOUNT REMOVAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.17
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER / SPEAKER / SPEAKER VOLUME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.18
FAIRING TRIM / FRONT TURN SIGNAL ASSEMBLY VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.19
VISOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.19
SPEEDOMETER / SPEEDOMETER MOUNT (CROSS ROADS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.19
CHIN FAIRING (INNER GRILL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.20
CHIN FAIRING (OUTER AND REAR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.20
HIGHWAY BARS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.21
FRONT FAIRING - LOWER - (CROSS COUNTRY TOUR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.21
INSTRUMENT BEZEL (CROSS COUNTRY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.23
REAR BODY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24
SIDE COVER REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24
SEAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24
SADDLEBAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.25
ANTENNA / ANTENNA MOUNT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.25
SADDLEBAG ASSEMBLY VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.26
REAR FENDER / SADDLEBAG MOUNT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.27
TRUNK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.28
TRUNK ASSEMBLY VIEW / MOUNT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.29
TAIL LIGHT / TURN SIGNAL ASSEMBLY VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.30
FLOORBOARD / FOOT CONTROL MOUNTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.31
PASSENGER FOOTREST MOUNTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.32
PASSENGER FLOORBOARDS (ADJUSTABLE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.33
EXHAUST SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.35
ASSEMBLY VIEW - EXHAUST COMPLETE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.35
ASSEMBLY VIEW - MUFFLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.36
ASSEMBLY VIEW - HEAD PIPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.37
FRAME-BODY-EXHAUST
SAFETY
General Precautions
This section covers the removal and installation of the frame body panels and exhaust system. Always replace
exhaust system sealing gaskets when exhaust components are removed. Inspect the system for leaks after
installation.
WARNING
Gasoline is extremely flammable and explosive under certain conditions.
Always stop the engine and refuel outdoors or in a well ventilated area.
Do not smoke or allow open flames or sparks in or near the area where
refueling is performed or where gasoline is stored.
Do not overfill the tank. Do not fill the tank neck above the fuel tank insert.
Leave air space to allow for fuel expansion.
If you get gasoline in your eyes or if you swallow gasoline, see your doctor
immediately. Never try to syphon gasoline using mouth suction.
If you spill gasoline on your skin or clothing, immediately wash it off with
soap and water and change clothing.
Never start the engine or let it run in an enclosed area. Gasoline powered
engine exhaust fumes are poisonous and can cause loss of
consciousness and death in a short time.
The engine exhaust from this product contains Improper repairs or service can create unsafe
chemicals known to cause cancer, birth defects conditions that may cause serious injuries or
or other reproductive harm. death to your customers or others.
Never run the engine in an enclosed area without Engine and exhaust components get hot and
a properly functioning exhaust gas evacuation remain hot for a period of time after the engine
system connected to the product. is stopped. Wear insulated protective clothing
or wait for components to cool sufficiently
before working on the machine.
Engine exhaust from this product contains poisonous Modifications to this motorcycle not approved by
carbon monoxide gas that can cause loss of Victory may cause loss of performance, excessive
consciousness and may lead to death. emissions, and make the machine unsafe for use.
FRAME-BODY-EXHAUST
GENERAL INFORMATION
Special Tools
• PV-49955 Body Panel Tool Kit or commercially
available equivalent.
3
PV-49955
How To Use This Chapter
• Body components in this chapter are arranged by

their general location on the motorcycle - either
FRONT or REAR body. (Fuel tank removal is in
Chapter 5).
• For torque values of fasteners, fastener type,
fastener location, and special notes refer to the
ASSEMBLY VIEW for the component or group of
components if provided.
• Most of the body panel fasteners have a 4mm
internal hex drive or a 10mm hex head drive.
• For specific removal and installation steps refer to
the REMOVAL / INSTALLATION PROCEDURE for
the individual component.
• Use care when removing and installing cosmetic

body parts. Some parts have friction fit tabs in
addition to mechanical fasteners. Apply pressure
as close to a tab as possible, supporting both parts
until the tab releases or connects.
• Work carefully. Read the entire procedure before

you begin so you are familiar with the parts.
• A non-marring wedge is essential to lift edges of
mating parts without damage. Body Panel Tool Kit
PV-49955 is recommended.
FRAME-BODY-EXHAUST
REMOVAL / INSTALLATION PROCEDURES - FRONT BODY

Front Fender Installation
1. Install fender and align mounting holes.
Removal
2. Loosely install all screws with nuts.
1. Remove (A).
3. Tighten all screws evenly to specification.
2. Carefully remove fender between the fork legs.
Front wheel removal see Chapter 12
A 12 ft-lbs (16 Nm)
A
12 ft-lbs
(16 Nm)
FRAME-BODY-EXHAUST
Ignition Switch / IAC Cover Removal / Mirrors

Installation Removal
1. Grasp ignition switch cover (left side) or Idle Air
1. Loosen jam nut (counterclockwise).
Control (IAC) cover (right side) and pull outward to
release 3 clips (A). 2. Rotate mirror to remove. 3
Left Side
12 ft-lbs (16 Nm)
Installation
Right Side
1. Screw jam nut to top of thread on mirror shaft.
A 2. Screw mirror into perch until bottomed, then back off

to approximate angle required for rear view.
3. Screw jam nut until bottomed against perch.
4. Hold mirror shaft in position and tighten jam nut to

specified torque.
5. Adjust mirror head to proper rear viewing angle.
Installation
1. Be sure clips are in place and in good condition.
2. LH cover - route front spark plug wire below top of
cover.
3. Push cover evenly inward to install.
FRAME-BODY-EXHAUST
Windshield (Cross Country)

Removal
1. Loosen all screws (A) about 1/2 turn.
2. Support windshield and completely remove all screws and windshield.
Installation
1. Fairing removal is not required for windshield installation. Place windshield on support and align screw holes.
2. Start all screws and tighten until the shoulder of each screw is close to the windshield.
3. Tighten each screw, carefully aligning the shouldered portion of the screw with the hole in the windshield. Be sure
shoulder of screw passes through hole in windshield and bottoms on the support bracket. Push or pull lightly on
center of windshield if necessary to align the last screw.
4. Torque all screws evenly to specification. Do not overtighten screws or windshield may be damaged.
Lubricate the lower edge of windshield with

Install last. soap and water solution to ease assembly.
Install Fairing removal not required to removal and
first. install windshield.
A 36 in-lbs
(4.0 Nm)
Windshield Support
Cover - Snap into
place on visor.
Shoulder of screws must
be in windshield holes
Windshield Support before tightening any.
85 in-lbs
(9.6 Nm)
FRAME-BODY-EXHAUST
Windshield (Cross Country Tour)

Removal
1. Loosen all shoulder screws (6) and nuts (Fig. 3) about 1/2 turn.
2. Support windshield and completely remove all screws and windshield.
3
Installation
1. Fairing removal is not required for windshield installation. Place windshield on supports and align screw holes.
2. Verify that rubber washers are in place (Fig. 4). If any rubber washers (6) are missing, they must be replaced. Start
all screws and tighten until the shoulder of each screw is close to the windshield.
3. Tighten the screws, starting with top two. Carefully align the shouldered portion of the screw with the hole in the
windshield. Be sure the shoulder of the screw passes through the hole in windshield and bottoms out on the bracket.
4. Torque all screws evenly to 36 in-lbs (4.1 Nm). Do not overtighten screws or windshield may be damaged.
Tighten top screws first
FRAME-BODY-EXHAUST
Windshield (Cross Roads)

Removal
1. Loosen (4) mount screws (A) and lift windshield off forks with bracket attached.
Installation
1. Set windshield bracket in place between triple clamp and washers.

2. Torque mount screws to specification.
18 ft-lbs
A
(24.5 Nm)
Rubber Washer Both Sides Of Windshield (All screws)
Windshield
B
85 in-lbs
(9.6 Nm)
(All)
Spacer Sleeve Metal Washer
Rubber Washer
FRAME-BODY-EXHAUST
Headlamp Bezel Headlamp (Cross Country)

Removal Also refer to Assembly View on following page.
1. Using body tool PV-49955, pry one edge of bezel Removal

from fairing then pull straight forward to release clips.
Do not bend or rotate bezel during removal. 1. Remove headlamp bezel (page 3.9). 3
2. Remove two upper screws (A) and 2 lower screws (B).
3. Slide headlamp out of fairing.
85 in-lbs (9.6 Nm) (All Screws)

A A
B B
Installation
1. Align tabs with spring clip slots.

4. Note orientation of bulbs in headlamp. Top bulb wiring
2. Push straight inward until seated. harness faces left.
5. Lift tab to disconnect headlamp wire harness or turn

each bulb socket 1/4 turn to remove socket with wires
attached. Do not touch glass surface of bulb. Bulb can
be cleaned with isopropyl alcohol to remove oil
residue if contaminated.
NOTE: Headlamp removal is on page 3.9.
Euro only
FRAME-BODY-EXHAUST
Installation 3. Remove four screws (A) securing headlamp

assembly and withdraw headlamp from fairing.
1. Note wire harness tag marked “TOP BULB” for
proper installation in upper headlamp socket (yellow
wire is top and green is bottom). Connect wires or A
install bulbs in sockets.
“TOP BULB”
85 in-lbs (9.6 Nm) (All Screws)
4. Disconnect electrical connectors from HID bulb and

high beam bulb and remove headlamp assembly.
NOTE: If HID bulb requires replacement, remove
2. Torque mounting screws to specification. screws (B) from housing and remove bulb.
3. Install headlamp bezel.
Headlamp, HID (Cross Country Tour)
WARNING
HID (High-Intensity Discharge) head lights utilize
extremely high voltage during bulb ignition. To
prevent accidental shock, disconnect power supply B
and wait 5 minutes before servicing. Failure to
comply could result in serious personal injury.
Removal
1. Make sure ignition is turned OFF and wait 5 minutes

before proceeding to step 2.
2. Remove headlamp bezel (page 3.9).
FRAME-BODY-EXHAUST
Headlamp Assembly View (Cross Country)
85 in-lbs
(9.6 Nm)
48 in-lbs
(5.4 Nm) 3
Aim Adjusters
(See Chapter 2)
Top bulb socket faces left.

(LOW BEAM)
Bottom bulb socket faces right.

(HIGH BEAM)
Europe
85 in-lbs
(9.6 Nm)
Headlamp (Hid) Assembly View (Cross Country Tour)
FRAME-BODY-EXHAUST
HID Ballast (Cross Country Tour) 3. Remove headlamp cover.
Removal A
1. Remove HID headlamp assembly (page 3.10)

B
2. Working from the front of the bike, reach through the
headlamp port and disconnect the two ballast
electrical connectors (A).
3. Remove the two bolts (B) securing the HID ballast

bracket to the fairing and carefully lift the ballast /
bracket assembly out through the headlamp port.
A
4. Note orientation of bulbs in headlamp. Top bulb wiring
B harness connector (C) faces left.
5. Lift tab to disconnect headlamp wire harness or turn

each bulb socket 1/4 turn to remove socket with wires
attached. Do not touch glass surface of bulb. Bulb can
be cleaned with isopropyl alcohol to remove oil
residue if contaminated.
Installation
NOTE: Ensure rubber grommet is in position at base
of HID bracket before proceeding.
1. Reverse procedure for installation.
Headlamp (Cross Roads)

Removal
Euro only
Also refer to Assembly View on following page.
1. Remove upper screws (A). Installation

2. Remove (2) lower screws (B) (access through slot in Also refer to Assembly View on following page.
turn signal stalk).
1. Note wire harness tag marked “TOP BULB” for
proper installation in upper headlamp socket (yellow
wire is top and green is bottom). Connect wires or
install bulbs in sockets. Top bulb wiring harness (C)
faces left.
2. Install top cover.
3. Grease threads of cover screws and install.
4. Torque to 48 in-lbs (5.4 Nm).
FRAME-BODY-EXHAUST
Headlamp Assembly View (Cross Roads)
Headlamp Aim Procedure See Chapter 2
Apply Victory All Purpose

3
Grease 2872187 48 in-lbs (5.4 Nm)

(LOW BEAM)

(HIGH BEAM)
48 in-lbs
Turn Handlebars FULL LEFT
(5.4 Nm)
before tightening right P-Clamp
48 in-lbs Turn Handlebars FULL RIGHT

(5.4 Nm) before tightening left P-Clamp
48 in-lbs (5.4 Nm )
36 in-lbs
(4.0 Nm)
28 ft-lbs 17 ft-lbs
(38 Nm) (23 Nm)
FRAME-BODY-EXHAUST
Auxiliary Driving Lights (Cross Roads) Front Fairing - Upper (Cross Country)
Removal Removal
1. Remove bolt (A) securing turn signal assembly and 1. Remove headlamp bezel and headlamp (page 3.9).
driving lamp mounting bracket to light bar.
2. Remove both speaker grills (page 3.14).
3. Remove screws indicated below.
Screw Torque: 36 in-lbs (4.0 Nm)
2. Remove driving lamp / mount assembly.

Installation
3. Reverse procedure to install. Torque screws to 36

in-lbs (4.0 Nm).
Speaker Grill
Removal
1. Using body tool, pry outward carefully in area shown

to release one edge of grill then pull straight outward
to release all tabs. Do not bend or rotate the grill
during removal.
FRAME-BODY-EXHAUST
4. Grasp fairing by the upper edge (near the visor) and Dash Panel
in the lower center headlight opening. Pull forward on
the bottom edge and then the top to remove. Also refer to Fairing Assembly Views page 3.16.
5. Disconnect turn signal wires (push small white tab). 1. Remove fairing (page 3.14) and windshield
(page 3.6).
3
2. Remove (6) screws indicated below.
Installation
3. Remove (2) screws above the instruments.
1. Place the two tabs (A) on the fairing into the slots on
Screw Torque:
the front support.
36 in-lbs (4.0 Nm)
2. Be sure wires are not trapped in area (B).
3. Pull the fairing down and forward in area (C) to snap

fairing alignment pin into the hole in the front support.
(Fairing shown cutaway for clarity)
4. Remove (2) screws located underneath the

information display area.
Screw Torque:
36 in-lbs (4.0 Nm)
B C
4. Install screws and torque to 36 in-lbs (4.0 Nm).
5. Install speaker grills (page 3.14), headlamp

(page 3.9), headlamp bezel (page 3.9), and
windshield (page 3.6, if removed).
FRAME-BODY-EXHAUST
Fairing Mount Assembly View (Cross Country)
NOTE: Fairing mount can be removed with inner fairing, dash panel, speakers (and related wiring), radio,
and fairing wire harness in place. The left and right handlebar switches and the left and right main wire
harnesses must be disconnected from mating connectors inside the fairing and the P-Clamps (A) removed.
See Fairing Mount Assembly removal in this chapter.
.
Turn Handlebars FULL RIGHT

Harness should not extend through P-clamp past red tape. before tightening left P-Clamp
36 in-lbs
(4.0 Nm)
19 ft-lbs
(26 Nm)
36 in-lbs
(4.0 Nm)
19 ft-lbs
(26 Nm)
FRAME-BODY-EXHAUST
Fairing Mount Removal the two openings in the fairing mount bracket
(handlebar switch wires and radio antenna cable).
1. Remove fairing (page 3.14) and. Disconnect the radio LCD display harness (routed
2. Cut tie straps (A). Radio(s), radio fuse, and instrument below the radio).
cluster harnesses (B) can remain connected. 4. Remove (4) mount bolts (E) and lift fairing mount
3. Remove P-Clamp fasteners (C) for left and right wire assembly upward off handlebar clamp, then forward
to remove. Check for any remaining wires attached.
3
harnesses. Separate any associated connectors (D)
for main harnesses and any that are routed through
A
A
D
Handlebar switch
wires, etc.
E
4 mount bolts:
19 ft-lbs (26 Nm)
FRAME-BODY-EXHAUST
Instrument Cluster / Speaker / Speaker Volume
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL
1 Remove front fairing (page 3.12).

A
2 Remove dash panel (page 3.13).
Lift red lock tab (A) on cluster harness

3
connector and slide it off the connector.
4 Push connector tab and pull to separate

connector from cluster.
5 Remove screws and cluster.
15 in-lbs (1.7 Nm)
36 in-lbs (4.0 Nm)
FRAME-BODY-EXHAUST
Fairing Trim / Front Turn Signal Assembly Speedometer / Speedometer Mount (Cross
View Roads)
14 in-lbs
(1.5 Nm)
3
36 in-lbs (4.0 Nm)
36 in-lbs (4.0 Nm)
Visor
36 in-lbs
(4.0 Nm)
FRAME-BODY-EXHAUST
Chin Fairing (Inner Grill) Chin Fairing (Outer And Rear)

Removal Removal
1. Remove (4) screws with washers (A). 1. Remove oil cooler mount nut (B) (on left side only).
2. Remove lower screw (C).

A 36 in-lbs (4.0 Nm)
3. Remove upper and lower screws (D).
4. Remove rear chin fairing screw (E).
D 19 ft-lbs B 36 in-lbs
(26.0 Nm) (4.0 Nm)
A
E 36 in-lbs
(4.0 Nm)
2. Push grill to right side until tabs on left edge are clear
of left outer chin fairing.
3. Remove grill.
Installation
1. Engage tabs on right edge of fairing grill with right

outer chin fairing.
C
2. Push fairing toward right side and tip inward to engage
left side tabs with left outer chin fairing. 36 in-lbs
(4.0 Nm)
3. Align holes and install screws with washers.
Installation
4. Tighten screws to specified torque.
1. Reverse removal steps.
FRAME-BODY-EXHAUST
Highway Bars Removal - Top Cover (Forged)
Removal (Tubular) 1. Remove fasteners (E).
1. Slide boot (A) off top mount. 2. Lift cover to release pegs from grommets (F).
2. Remove fasteners (B) (M15). Installation 3

Installation 1. Lubricate grommets with soapy water.
1. Align mount holes and loosely install all fasteners. 2. Align pegs and push to seat in grommets.
2. Tighten all fasteners. 3. Align mount holes and loosely install all fasteners.
4. Tighten all fasteners.

A
F
B
52 ft-lbs
(70 Nm)
Removal (Forged) E 20 in-lbs

(2.2 Nm)
1. Remove fasteners (C).
2. Remove fasteners (D). Front Fairing - Lower - (Cross Country Tour)

Installation Removal
1. Align mount holes and loosely install all fasteners. 1. Remove screws (4 per side) securing outer fairing to
inner fairing.
2. Tighten all fasteners.
C 52 ft-lbs
(70 Nm)
D
52 ft-lbs
(70 Nm)
FRAME-BODY-EXHAUST
2. Disengage retainer from rubber grommet and remove Installation

outer fairing.
1. Position fairing clamps (3 per side) on highway bars
as shown.
3. Remove screws and nuts (3 per side) securing inner

fairing to mounting clamps.
NOTE: The clamps can be pinched together with a
pliers to help align holes.
2. After mounting clamps have been properly located on

the highway bars, loosely mount fairing inners to
clamps. Screws (3 per side) should be started from
the fairing-side and nuts threaded on finger tight.
WARNING
Failure to locate the inner assembly far enough
outboard on the bar could cause interference with
the optional adjustable upper fairing wind deflectors.
Prior to operating bike, verify that there is no
interference with the adjustable wind deflectors or
4. Disconnect ACC socket and iPod adapter multi-plug any other bike part by moving the handlebars from
and remove lower fairing inners. full left to full right position.
NOTE: Multi-plug is tucked beneath fuel tank. It is
3. Once the fairing inners have been adjusted properly,
not necessary to remove fuel tank to access multi-
torque screws and lock nuts to 32 in-lbs (3.6 Nm).
plug.
FRAME-BODY-EXHAUST
4. Reconnect ACC socket and iPod adaptor multiplug 2. With dash panel removed, carefully pry inner tabs (A)
and reposition harness beneath fuel tank. and push bezel toward front side of dash until tabs are
released.
5. Move fairing outers into position and press retainers
into rubber grommets.
6. Insert screws (4 per side) to secure inner fairing panel A 3

to outer fairing panel and torque screws to 32 in-lbs
(3.6 Nm).
3. Carefully pry outer tabs (B) and push bezel toward

front side of dash to remove.
B
Instrument Bezel (Cross Country)
Bezel removal is not required for removal of dash panel
or other fairing parts. To remove the bezel, first remove
the dash panel.
Removal
1. Remove dash panel (page 3.15).
Installation
1. Reverse removal procedure to install bezel. Align

bezel with opening in dash panel.
2. Place outer tabs into opening and hook tabs on inside

edge of dash.
3. Press inner edge of bezel toward dash until it snaps

into place and all tabs are engaged with the inside
edge of dash panel.
4. Install dash panel.
FRAME-BODY-EXHAUST
REAR BODY Seat

IMPORTANT: Motorcycles equipped with heated
Side Cover Removal
seats must be unplugged prior to removal. Seat heater
1. Pull corners of left or right cover evenly straight plug is located at the back of the seat.
outward to disengage each tab (A) from rubber
Removal
grommet (B).
1. Remove side covers.
2. Remove seat bolt (C) on each side.
A
C
Installation
1. Be sure rubber grommets are in place and not

dislodged.
2. Lubricate rubber grommets with mild soap and water C 10 ft-lbs (13.5 Nm)
solution. Push cover evenly inward on all 3 corners
until tabs are securely engaged.
3. Lift front of seat upward and pull forward to disengage

tab at rear of seat. Disconnect wire harness for heated
seat (if equipped).
Installation
1. To install, reverse above process. Be sure rear tab of

seat is engaged in slot.
2. Tighten seat bolts to specification.
FRAME-BODY-EXHAUST
Saddlebag Antenna / Antenna Mount

Removal
1. Open saddlebag lid.
2. Lift each D-ring and rotate counterclockwise 1/4 turn
from the horizontal position to the vertical position to 3
release the pin. Do not remove the D-ring pins from
the saddlebag.
LOCK
UNLOCK ANTENNA CABLE:

Assemble teeth against
bracket and small hole
3. Tip bag outward slightly away from bracket and lift bag against washer.
up off muffler support to remove. Apply dielectric grease
all around connection
Installation after tightening nut.
1. Set bag in place on muffler support.
2. Rotate each D-ring to the vertical position.
3. Move saddlebag until D-ring pins align with holes on

bag bracket.
25 in-lbs Base
4. Hold light pressure inward on saddlebag and (if (2.8 Nm)
necessary) rotate both D-ring pins back and forth from
vertical slightly until slot of pin engages latch wire on
saddlebag bracket.
5. When both pins are engaged, rotate each pin 1/4 turn
counterclockwise until locked.
6. Pull lightly outward on front and rear of bag to ensure

pin is secured.
7. Close and lock the saddlebag lid.
FRAME-BODY-EXHAUST
Saddlebag Assembly View
43 in-lbs
(4.8 Nm)
Corner Seal
85 in-lbs
Lock Seal
(9.6 Nm) 43 in-lbs
(4.8 Nm)
See Detail A
Detail A - Seal Joint
85 in-lbs
(9.6 Nm)
Rib
Detail B - Outer Seal Detail C - Inner Seal Detail D - Lid Bumper

To outside
FRAME-BODY-EXHAUST
Rear Fender / Saddlebag Mount
10 ft-lbs
3
(13.5 Nm)
84 in-lbs
(9.5 Nm)
18 ft-lbs
(24.4 Nm)
18 ft-lbs
(24.4 Nm)
Tie Straps
FRAME-BODY-EXHAUST
Trunk 5. Working from the left side of motorcycle, locate cable

ties (2) securing trunk wire harness to bracket and
Removal remove.
1. Remove saddlebags.
2. Remove left hand side cover.
3. Locate left and right trunk lock bolts (1 per side) and Cable Ties
remove.
Trunk Lock Bolt
6. Locate trunk wire harness multi-plug tucked beneath

seat and disconnect.
4. Lift trunk lock levers (1 per side) to release trunk from

mounting bracket.
7. Starting from the back, lift trunk (A) to disengage trunk

locks from mounting bracket, and slide towards rear
of motorcycle (B) to remove trunk assembly.
FRAME-BODY-EXHAUST
Installation
1. Reverse procedure to install.

NOTE: Secure wire harness with cable ties.
Trunk Assembly View / Mount 3
During installation, make sure LOCK

lever detent has fully engaged (clicked
into place). Failure to properly secure
trunk to mount may result in damage.
FRAME-BODY-EXHAUST
Tail Light / Turn Signal Assembly View
FRAME-BODY-EXHAUST
Floorboard / Foot Control Mounting

SHIFT
18 ft-lbs
(24.5 Nm)
3
85 in-lbs (9.6 Nm)

Pedal position adjustment:
1. Remove screw (A) below.
2. Move pedal assembly forward or rearward until the hole

for the screw is aligned with one of the other two
threaded holes.
3. Install the screw and torque according to specification.
4. Adjust the shift pedal height as follows:
5. Hold linkage rod end (B) with a 7/16 in. wrench and
loosen jam nuts (CO with a 1/2 in. wrench.
6. Rotate linkage rod to set pedal height.
7. Hold linkage rods. Securely tighten the jam nuts.
BRAKE Apply soap & water solution to install

18 ft-lbs
(24.5 Nm)
12 ft-lbs
(16.0 Nm)
35 ft-lbs (47.5 Nm)
A 96 in-lbs (10.8 Nm)
FRAME-BODY-EXHAUST
Passenger Footrest Mounting
FOOT PEGS
35 ft-lbs (47.5 Nm)
65 ft-lbs
(88.0 Nm)
FLOORBOARDS (ADJUSTABLE)
(2)
FRAME-BODY-EXHAUST
Passenger Floorboards (Adjustable) Adjustment (Height)
Removal 1. Remove floorboard adjustment bolts (2 per side) from

slotted holes.
1. Remove bolt (1 per side) and nut (1 per side)
securing floorboard assembly to chassis as shown. Floorboard Adjustment Bolts
3
2. Select the desired position from one of the 3 available

height settings and torque floorboard adjustment bolts
Installation to specification.
1. Reverse procedure to install. Torque as shown.
=T
Floorboard Adjustment Bolts: 18 ft-lbs (24.4 Nm)
FRAME-BODY-EXHAUST
Adjustment (Angle)
1. Loosen floorboard adjustment bolts (2 per side) in

slotted holes, and rotate floorboard to desired
position.
2. Tighten floorboard adjustment bolts to specification.
=T
Floorboard Adjustment Bolts: 18 ft-lbs (24.4 Nm)
3
3.35
FRAME-BODY-EXHAUST
NOTE: See Head Pipe Assembly View and Muffler Assembly view
on following pages for torque sequence. 18 ft-lbs (24.4 Nm)
36 in-lbs (4.0 Nm)
9924047 - 2012-2013 VICTORY Cross Roads / Cross Country Service Manual

12 ft-lbs
(16.3 Nm)
96 in-lbs
(10.8 Nm)
12 ft-lbs
(16.3 Nm)

40 ft-lbs (54.0 Nm)
Assembly View - Exhaust Complete
96 in-lbs
EXHAUST SYSTEM
36 in-lbs (4.0 Nm)

(10.8 Nm)
35 ft-lbs (47.5 Nm)
Apply Anti-seize lubricant
FRAME-BODY-EXHAUST
Assembly View - Muffler
MUFFLER REMOVAL MUFFLER INSTALLATION

1. Remove saddlebags. 1. Install muffler with clamp to head pipe or crossover pipe.
2. Remove rear bolts (A). 2. Loosely install rear bolts (A) and draw muffler level with
3. Remove shield clamps (B). bracket. Do not tighten.
(See clamp detail below). 3. Rotate clamps to proper position and torque fastener.
4. Move end of muffler to loosen joint. 4. Torque rear bolts.
5. Remove muffler. 5. Install shields and torque clamps and fastener (right side).
NOTE: Left muffler can be removed complete with shield attached by loosening crossover pipe clamp (C)
and removing muffler with crossover pipe.
B
96 in-lbs A
(10.8 Nm) 36 in-lbs (4.0 Nm) 18 ft-lbs (24.4 Nm)
40 ft-lbs (54.0 Nm )
Shield Clamp Detail
B 36 in-lbs (4.0 Nm)
Loosen 4-5 turns

then lift screw to
release.
FRAME-BODY-EXHAUST
Assembly View - Head Pipes
HEAD PIPE REMOVAL HEAD PIPE INSTALLATION

1. Remove saddlebags and mufflers. 1. Install new gaskets and assemble head pipe loosely to
engine with the passenger footrest bracket.
3
2. Remove right passenger footrest bracket fasteners.
(Page 3.27). 2. Start screws A and B to roughly align head pipe bracket.
Do not tighten.
3. Remove screw (A) from left side of bracket.
3. Tighten front flange nuts (F) then tighten rear (D).
4. Remove screw (B) from left side of bracket. Be sure bracket is in contact with engine case in
5. Loosen front head pipe clamp (C). area (B) BEFORE tightening head pipe flange nuts.
6. Remove rear flange nuts (D). 4. Tighten screw (B) then (A) to specification.
5. Tighten clamp (C) to specification.
7. Pull outward and downward on rear head pipe
to loosen joint (E). 6. Connect oxygen sensors and install mufflers.
8. Remove front flange nuts (F). 7. Clean any oil residue from entire exhaust system.
8. Start engine and inspect for leaks. Install saddlebags.
9. Disconnect oxygen sensors at the connector.
Do not attempt to remove the sensor wire at the sensor.
D
10. Remove head pipe with rear passenger footrest bracket.
C A
FRAME-BODY-EXHAUST
NOTES
LUBRICATION & COOLING
CHAPTER 4
OILING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2
OPERATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2
OILING SYSTEM DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3
SPECIFICATIONS - LUBRICATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3
4
OIL FLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4
DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4
OIL COOLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5
ASSEMBLY VIEW - OIL COOLER AND LINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5
OIL COOLER INSPECTION / CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6
OIL COOLER / OIL LINE REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6
OIL COOLER / OIL LINE INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6
OIL PRESSURE INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
LUBRICATION OIL PRESSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
COOLING OIL FLOW INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
OIL PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8
OIL PUMP REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8
OIL PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9
OIL PUMP INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10
OIL PUMP DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11
OIL PUMP ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12
OIL PUMP INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.14
OILING SYSTEM Troubleshooting
Operation LOW OIL PRESSURE HIGH OIL PRESSURE

For safety, read, understand and follow the warnings/ Incorrect oil being used or Incorrect oil being used
cautions contained in this section. low oil level
To perform some of the procedures in this section, the Engine temp above test Additives added to oil to
engine must be running. temperature range increase viscosity
The oil pump has two sets of internal gerotors. One set Damaged O-rings or leaks Engine temp below test
provides lubrication pressure and the second set provides at pipes or fittings temperature range
cooling oil pressure. A separate pressure relief valve is
located on the oil pump for each oiling system. Damaged or worn oil pump Restricted oil passages
or oil pump drive
To access the oil pump, the engine must be removed from
the frame and disassembled. Before disassembly, review
Pressure relief valve stuck Incorrect oil filter
the troubleshooting charts located in this chapter.
open
If the engine is making irregular noises that appear to be
coming from rotating parts, check the lubrication side oil Damaged engine bearings/ Pressure relief valve stuck
pressure. Check the oil pressure before engine excessive engine wear. closed
disassembly, and recheck the oil pressure after a repair.
Restricted oil filter, oil filter
Cooling oil pressure troubleshooting is done by verifying screen or passages
cooling oil flow, not cooling oil pressure. For more
information, see oil pressure testing on page 4.7.
Special Tools
WARNING Oil Pressure Gauge PV-43531
DO NOT loosen any oil line connections with the engine Moly Assembly Paste PN 2871460
running, or within 30 minutes of operation. Oil inside the 5mm Ball Drive Allen Socket (commercially available)
lines could be under pressure.
WARNING
Never run an engine in an enclosed area. Exhaust

contains poisonous carbon monoxide gas that can
cause loss of consciousness or death. Operate the
engine in an open area or with an exhaust evacuation
system connected and functioning properly.
WARNING
The engine components, oil and exhaust system

become hot during operation and remain hot for a
period of time after the engine is shut off. Wear eye
protection and heat-resistant garments for hands and
arms if working on a hot engine or wait until the
components have cooled sufficiently before working on
the machine.
OILING SYSTEM DATA

Specifications - Lubrication
LUBRICATION & COOLING SYSTEM
Item Standard Service Limit
Engine Oil Capacity (After Disassembly) 4.75 Liters (5.0 U.S. qts) Not Applicable
Engine Oil Capacity (At Change) Fill to full line with the engine Approximately 4.25 Liters
at operating temperature. (4.5 U.S. qts)
Not Applicable
4
Recommended Engine Oil Victory 20W/40 for all Not Applicable
If Victory 20W/40 is not available, use motorcycle oil suitable operating temperatures.
for wet clutches (such as those with JASO MA rating).
DO NOT use additives of any kind.
Oil Pressure @ 3000 rpm (Lubrication System) 552 kPa (80 psi) Readings should be within
Measurements must be taken with engine at operating 20% of the specifications.
temperature (82oC/180oF) and specified Victory Engine Oil Minimum Lubrication
Pressure 276 kPa (40 psi)
Oil Pressure (Cooling System) No measurement.
-
See page 4.7.
Oil Pump Clearances Rotor Tip Clearance .12 mm (.005") .18 mm (.007”)
Pump Body Clearance .10 mm (.004") .26 mm (.010")
Pump End Clearance .025 mm (.001") .10 mm (.004")
Cooling Rotor Width 14.96 mm (.5889") 14.90 mm (.5866")
Lubrication Rotor Width 9.99 mm (.3933") 9.90 mm (.3897")
Shaft End Play (Check 2.0 mm (.080") + .5 mm (.020")
assembly of pump if
excessive)
Fastener Torque Specifications - Lubrication & Cooling

Torque Torque
Description
Nm ft-lbs (in-lbs)
Cylinder Head Temperature Sensor - (CHT) - (Install new if removed) 13.5 10 ft-lbs
Oil Cooler Lower Support Bracket 13.5 (120 in-lbs)
Oil Drain Plug 20 Nm 15 ft-lbs
Oil Filter - apply oil to filter O-ring 71 in-lbs (8 Nm)
Approximately 3/4 turn after sealing ring
has contacted the engine case.
Oil Filter Nipple (threaded fitting to crankcase) 61 45
Oil Line to Crankcase 10 (85 in-lbs)
Oil Lines to Cooler 10 (85 in-lbs)
Oil Pressure Relief Valves 6 20 ft-lbs
Oil Pressure Sensor Loctite™ 565 or pipe sealant 13 (115 in-lbs)
Oil Pump to Crankcase / Oil Tube to Crankcase 10 (85 in-lbs)
Oil Pump Sprocket 10 (85 in-lbs)
OIL FLOW
Diagram
Valve
Adjusters
Camshaft Journals Rocker Arm Shafts
Lower Camshaft Carrier

Cylinder
Cylinder Head Cam Chains / Sprockets
Heads
(Exhaust Valve Bridge) Right Side
RH Front Cylinder Stud
Crankcase Passage Passage In Passage in

Head Gasket Cylinders (Left side)
Stator
Crankshaft Cam Chain
Tensioner
Starter Drive Main Bearings Crankcase Passage
Rod
Bearings
Oil Pipe LOWER HOSE
Oil Filter Oil Cooler Torque

UPPER HOSE Compensator
Gear
Oil Pipe
Oil Pressure
Switch Oil Jet
Transmission
Oil Pressure Oil Pressure
Oil Pump
Regulator Regulator
Lube Cooling
(Lubrication) (Cooling)
(+ 85 PSI) (+ 105 PSI)
Pickup
Screen
Oil Sump
Crankcase Passage Gravity & Splash Lubrication

Lubrication Circuit
Reed Valve
Air Box Cooling Circuit
Breather Hose Pressure Relief Circuit
Breather Circuit
OIL COOLER
Assembly View - Oil Cooler And Lines
85 in-lbs Clean from
A
(9.6 Nm) engine side
Apply Victory Engine Oil
To O-Rings
O-Ring 4
C 85 in-lbs (9.6 Nm)
A Letters are used for reference
on following pages.
Oil to cooler
O-Ring
Apply mild soap and water E

to ease assembly
Flat Washer Flat Washer
Oil from cooler
G
Tightening Order - Oil Lines
D
B F
Tighten second
85 in-lbs (9.6 Nm) P-Clamp Detail
Note orientation of text
Shift shaft
Bottom View
Retainer Plate Detail
Install retainer
plate with bend in
P-Clamp
corner of plate facing
Tighten last Retainer Plate away from engine
85 in-lbs (9.6 Nm) Tighten first
85 in-lbs (9.6 Nm) OUT
Oil Cooler Inspection / Cleaning Oil Cooler / Oil Line Installation

1. Inspect cooler, lines, and all connections for leaks. Refer to Illustration on page 4.5. Loosely install all parts,
then tighten in order shown.
2. Inspect lines for proper routing. Replace if there is any
sign of abrasion or damage. Oil Lines to Engine
1. Assemble support grommet (F) with print facing UP.
3. Inspect cooler surface for obstructions or debris. Install P-clamp over grommet. See P-clamp detail.
4. Rinse from engine side with low pressure water. 2. Install new flat washers on lines.
5. Inspect oil cooler fins for deformation. Fins can be 3. Lubricate new O-rings with engine oil and install against
straightened if not severely deformed and no oil leaks flat washers.
are present.
4. Clean oil line sealing surfaces on engine. Carefully align
6. Inspect cooler mounting fastener for proper torque. and assemble lines to engine.
Inspect mounting bracket and rubber grommets for
cracks or damage (page 4.5). 5. Install retainer plate (G) with curved edges facing OUT.
See detail view.

Oil Cooler / Oil Line Removal
1. Place drain pan beneath oil lines. 7. If lines are not attached to cooler, install them before
installing P-clamp screw.
2. Refer to Chapter 3 to remove the left highway bar, front
chin fairing, left chin fairing, and left foot rest assembly. 8. Tighten brake line clamp screws to 85 in-lbs (9.6 Nm).
Oil Cooler Installation

3. Remove rear brake line clamps as required for oil line
access.
If oil lines were removed from cooler and engine, install
Refer to Illustration on page 4.5. engine end first.
NOTE: The upper oil cooler mount is secured to the top 1. Lubricate cooler support grommets in bracket with mild
inner edge of the left chin fairing. Remove the nut (A). soap and water solution.
4. Remove screw from P-clamp screw (B). 2. Install cooler, engaging posts with grommets.
5. Remove screws (C) from lines at cooler.
3. Install oil lines to cooler.
6. Remove retainer plate screws (D) and plate.
7. Pull both lines straight outward to remove from Oil Lines to Cooler
crankcase.
1. Install new backing washers on oil lines.
8. Slide cooler off of grommets (E).
2. Lubricate new O-rings with engine oil and install on lines
against backing washers.
3. Carefully align and assemble lines to cooler.
5. Install left chin fairing and upper cooler mounting nut.
6. Install left foot rest and highway bar.
OIL PRESSURE INSPECTION Cooling Oil Flow Inspection

Cooling oil inspection is accomplished by verifying oil flow
Lubrication Oil Pressure
through the cooler. The temperature of the cooler should
Use caution when working around hot engine oil. Review be close to crankcase temperature. Pressure testing
all WARNINGS on page 4.2. cannot be performed at the Cylinder Head Temperature
(CHT) port, because the sensor does not enter the
1. Start the engine and run until operating temperature is cooling oil passage. Cooling oil pressure changes along
reached. various paths and designed flow restrictions located
2. Turn off the engine.
inside the engine (like voltage drops across a resistive 4
electrical circuit). Diagnostics should be limited to
3. Remove oil pressure sensor (A). verifying that oil is flowing through the cooler, and that air
flow through the cooler and to the engine cylinder fins is
4. Install oil pressure gauge adapter.
unobstructed. Cooling oil enters the cooler on the bottom
Oil pressure gauge: PV-43531 line and exits (back to the engine) on the upper line.
Lubrication System Pressure
IMPORTANT! Tip conforms to cylinder head metal when
Oil Pressure installed. It does not contact the cooling oil passage!
Gauge
Apply LoctiteTM 565
Cylinder Head DO NOT
Temp re-install
Sensor a temp sensor
(CHT) if removed!
Oil
Pressure No Thread
Sensor Sealant at tip
A (2-3 mm)
5. Use the dipstick to check the engine oil level and add
Fig. 1 Apply LoctiteTM 565 Sealant
recommended oil, if necessary.
6. Start engine and check oil pressure at 3000 rpm. Cylinder Head Temperature Sensor (CHT)
7. If oil pressure is outside of specification, refer to the
troubleshooting on page 4.2. =T
8. Once testing is completed, clean threads with Cylinder Head Temperature Sensor:
Loctite Primer N and apply sealant to threads 10 ft-lbs (13.5 Nm)
indicated in Fig. 1 and install.
Oil Pressure Sensor NOTE: See Chapter 5 for temperature sensor location
and installation.
=T
Oil Pressure Sensor: 115 in-lbs (13.0 Nm)
Lubrication Oil Pressure @ 3000 rpm Standard ±20%

552 kPa (80 psi) MINIMUM pressure is
Measure at Oil Pressure Sensor @ 82oC/180oF 276 kPa (40 PSI)
Cooling Oil OIL FLOW -
OIL PUMP
LUBRICATION/COOLING OIL PUMP ASSEMBLY
Replace all gaskets, washers, and O-rings Pump - Check for free rotation after
installation
A Fitting (Nipple)
Install after pump and pipe (B)
45 ft-lbs (62 Nm)
85 in-lbs (9.6 Nm)
O-Ring(X2)
1/2-3/4 turn past gasket

contact (by hand)
Washer
O-Ring B
O-Ring Oil Tube Installed With Pump
Remove / install this pipe Washer and Before Nipple (A)
and oil pump as an assembly
85 in-lbs (9.6 Nm)
Oil Pump Removal 4. Detach oil pump drive sprocket bolt and sprocket (D).
1. Disassemble engine to access oil pump. (Refer to 5. Remove the (3) oil pump mounting bolts (E). Note that
Chapters 6-10) they also hold the oil pump body together.
A E
E
C
2. Remove oil filter and oil filter nipple (fitting) (A). 6. Take out the long oil tube.
NOTE: The oil filter nipple MUST be detached before the 7. Remove, as a unit, the oil pump and short oil tube being
long oil delivery tube can be removed. See photo above.
careful not to drop any parts when taking them from the
3. Remove retaining screw for short oil tube (C). crankcase.
NOTE: The washers and/or O-rings for the oil piping may
stay in the engine cases/oil pump body. Be sure to
retrieve the used O-rings and washers and discard. Use
new O-rings and washers during assembly.
Oil Pressure Relief Valves are not interchangeable. Be sure to install each valve in the
proper location on the oil pump as indicated below.
The lubrication and cooling systems operate at different oil
pressures, regulated by pressure relief valves. The valves
Lubrication Oil Pressure Relief Valve

(Shorter Hexagonal Portion - 85 PSI)
20 ft-lbs (27 Nm)
Short Hex
Long Hex 4
Pump Base
(Cooling Oil Pump)
Lubrication Pump
Cooling Oil Pressure Relief Valve
(Longer Hexagonal Portion - 105 PSI*)
20 ft-lbs (27 Nm)
* See cooling oil flow inspection

on page 4.8.
1. Remove the relief valves. The lubrication relief valve

(A) has a SHORTER hexagonal portion and screws
into the pump BODY (B). The cooling pressure relief
valve (C) has a longer hexagonal portion and screws
into the pump BASE (D).
2. Visually inspect the relief valve for obstruction or
unusual wear.
A C
Oil Pump Inspection 3. Measure clearance between pump body and outer
gerotor on the lubrication side.
Inspect the oil pump when lubrication oil pressure is below
specification. The oil pump contains (2) sets of gerotors.
Follow the inspection procedure for both sets of gerotors
and both ends of the pump.
Keep gerotors together as a set, and oriented the same

way (dots on each gerotor must be on the same side upon
assembly). The parts are not interchangeable.
If dots on the gerotors are not visible, mark the gerotors
upon disassembly so they can be matched and oriented
properly upon assembly.
Before disassembling pump completely, follow these
inspection steps, and compare to specifications on
page 4.3.
1. Remove the pump base (A) and lubrication side end 4. Measure clearance between pump body and outer
cap (B). gerotor on the cooling side.
2. Measure tip clearance as shown below for both cooling 5. Measure the oil pump end clearance with a feeler
(larger gerotor set) and lubrication. gauge at point (C). Lubrication side of pump is shown
below. Cooling side is measured in the same manner.
Oil Pump Disassembly
Oil Jet
Torque: 115 in-lbs (13 Nm) Dowel 9X26 mm
Pressure Relief Valve Assembly - 85 PSI
(Lubrication Pump) Cooling Gerotor
Shorter Hex
Torque: 20 ft-lbs (27 Nm) Pump Body
4
Dowel 9X10mm
Pin Pump Base
Pressure Relief Valve Assembly - 105 PSI

Lubrication Gerotor (Cooling Pump) Longer Hex
Torque: 20 ft-lbs (27 Nm)
Seal
Shaft / Body (Both Ends)
Apply Moly Lube
APPLY VICTORY ENGINE
OIL TO ALL PARTS
DURING ASSEMBLY
Lubrication Pump Cap Inlet Screen
NOTE: Keep all parts together during disassembly. Note 7. Push on opposite end of shaft to allow pin to be
orientation of dots on gerotors for assembly. Gerotors removed from lubrication gerotor. Pull lubrication rotor
must be assembled with the dots on the same side. They back to expose and remove pin.
do not need to be aligned with each other.
6. Remove cooling outer gerotor.
8. Push shaft back toward cooling end of pump and

remove pin from cooling gerotor.
9. Pull shaft with inner rotor from pump body.
10. Clean all parts and inspect for wear.
11. Dry with compressed air.
Oil Pump Assembly 4. Assemble lubrication gerotor on pump shaft.
Refer to Illustration on page 4.11 for assembly 5. Lubricate shaft with moly assembly paste PN 2871460.
view and torque values.
1. Press short dowel pins into lubrication side of pump

body using an arbor press and a 6mm allen head
screw (A).
6. Insert pump shaft/rotor assembly into pump body in

direction shown (B).
2. Press long dowel pins into cooling side of pump body

using same method as above.
3. Secure pump body in a soft jaw vise. Apply Victory
engine oil to threads of lubrication pressure relief valve B
and install into pump body. The lubrication relief valve
has a shorter hexagonal portion than the cooling relief
valve. Torque to specification.
7. Lubricate and install the cooling gerotor with pin slot

(C) facing OUT.
8. Insert pin (D) into shaft on cooling side.
9. Push shaft inward while rotating to align pin and slot.
=T
Pressure Relief Valve: 20 ft-lbs (27.1 Nm)
10. Install outer gerotor. 13. Install oil jet to oil pump base.
Torque to 115 in-lbs (13 Nm)
14. Lubricate pressure relief valve assemblies and both

11. Push shaft toward lubrication side and hold in place. lubrication and cooling gerotors with engine oil.
Install pin for lubrication rotor. Lubricate both gerotors
with oil. 15. Install base (A) and body cap (B) to pump.
16. Install a new oil inlet seal to inlet screen (C).
17. Pre-lubricate the entire oil pump and relief valves with
Victory engine oil and assemble screen to oil pump
body, aligning groove (D) in screen to tab on pump.
12. Secure pump base in a soft jaw vise. Apply Victory

engine oil to threads of cooling pressure relief valve B
and install into pump base. The cooling relief valve has
a longer hexagonal portion than the lubrication relief
valve. Torque to 20 ft-lbs (27.1 Nm). D
Oil Pump Installation 6. Start the top two oil pump retaining bolts (E) and the
1. Refer to Fig. 2. Clean oil pipes and dry with rear pipe bolt (F) but do not tighten at this time.
compressed air. 7. Install new oiled O-rings (G) onto front of long oil pipe.
NOTE: After oil pump is installed, be sure the pump Install new washer (H) on end of pipe and a new
rotates freely by installing the sprocket without the O-ring (I).
chain and rotating pump a few revolutions.
8. Fit front end of long oil pipe into position at front of
2. Use new washers and O-rings upon assembly. crankcase and rear of pipe through oil filter nipple
3. Install a backing washer (A) and lightly oiled O-ring (B) opening in crankcase. Install pipe retaining bolt (J).
onto short oil pipe. Insert pipe into pump body with a 9. Torque all pump fasteners to specification.
twisting motion until seated.
10. Install oil filter nipple (K). Center the oil pipe to the fitting
4. Place washer (C) onto the other end of short oil pipe with a 1/4 inch pin punch as shown.
followed by a new lightly oiled O-ring (D).
11. Temporarily install pump sprocket on pump shaft
5. Install oil pump and short pipe into left crankcase. Start (without the chain) and turn oil pump over by hand.
by inserting oil pipe into rear of crankcase, then place NOTE: Turn pump shaft by hand a few revolutions to
oil pump into crankcase alignment holes. make sure it turns freely.
Use 1/4 inch pin punch 85 in-lbs (10 Nm)

to align oil filter nipple to
oil pipe during installation E
G
45 ft-lbs (62 Nm) K
B
H
A J
I 85 in-lbs (10 Nm)
Tapered O-ring seat

faces oil pipe F 85 in-lbs (10 Nm)
D
C
Fig. 2
12. Remove sprocket so chain can be installed.

13. Install chain over oil pump sprocket and balance shaft
sprocket. Align pump sprocket to shaft and install
retaining bolt (A). Torque to 85 in-lbs (9.6 Nm).
NOTE: The sprocket is a floating design. A small

amount of end play is normal after tightening the
retaining bolt.
14. Refer to Chapter 10 for crankcase assembly.

15. Verify proper lubrication oil pressure after assembly.
Refer to page 4.7.
NOTES
FUEL SYSTEM / FUEL INJECTION
CHAPTER 5
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3
FUEL SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4
TROUBLESHOOTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4
BASICS TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4
THROTTLE BODY FLOW SCREW AND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4
IDLE STOP SCREW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4
5
SERVICE PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5
FUEL SYSTEM ASSEMBLY VIEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6
FUEL TANK AND CAP MOUNTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6
FUEL TANK ASSEMBLY VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7
FUEL TANK VENT WATER DRAIN LINE ROUTING - 49 STATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8
FUEL TANK EVAPORATIVE EMISSIONS SYSTEM - CALIFORNIA MODELS . . . . . . . 5.9
FUEL PUMP / LEVEL SENSOR REFERENCE DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10
FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY VIEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.11
AIR INTAKE / BOX FRAME ASSEMBLY VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12
IDLE AIR CONTROL ASSEMBLY VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.13
FUEL SYSTEM SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.14
FUEL SYSTEM DEPRESSURIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.14
PRIMING THE FUEL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.14
FUEL TANK VENT INSPECTION - 49 STATE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.14
FUEL TANK VENT INSPECTION - CALIFORNIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.15
FUEL TANK REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.15
FUEL TANK INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.16
FUEL PUMP REMOVAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.18
FUEL FILTER REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.19
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.20
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.20
FUEL PUMP INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.21
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.23
FUEL PUMP PRESSURE INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.24
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR RESISTANCE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.25
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR BYPASS TEST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.25
FUEL PUMP ELECTRICAL DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.26
FUEL PUMP SUPPLY VOLTAGE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.26
FUEL PUMP CURRENT DRAW TEST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.28
IDLE AIR CONTROL REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.29
THROTTLE BODY REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.30
THROTTLE BODY INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.31
EFI SYSTEM COMPONENTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.32
FUEL INJECTION COMPONENT LOCATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.32
FUEL RAIL / FUEL INJECTOR REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.33
FUEL RAIL INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.33
FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM TESTING AND DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.34
FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM - OVERVIEW OF OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.34
IDLE AIR CONTROL (IAC) - OVERVIEW OF OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.34
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC FEATURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.34
ECM CONNECTOR MAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.35
VIEWING AND CLEARING TROUBLE CODES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.36
TROUBLE CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.37
SENSOR TESTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.42
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR (TPS) DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.42

TMAP DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.43
AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR (ATS) DIAGNOSTICS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.44
CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE SENSOR (CHT) DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.45
IDLE AIR CONTROL (IAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.46
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.47
NEUTRAL INDICATOR SWITCH TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.47
MEMORY CHECK SUM ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.47
TIPOVER SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.47
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR DIAGNOSTICS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.48
BATTERY VOLTAGE AT ECM DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.48
DIGITAL WRENCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.49
REPROGRAMMING PROCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.56
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.58
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Fuel Safety
Many hazards are present when working on or around the fuel injection system. Read and pay close attention to the
following warnings and cautions when working on any component in this section.
WARNING
Gasoline is extremely flammable and explosive under certain conditions.
Always stop the engine and refuel outdoors or in a well ventilated area.
Do not smoke or allow open flames or sparks in or near the area where refueling is
performed or where gasoline is stored. 5
Do not overfill the tank. Do not fill the tank neck above the fuel tank insert. Leave air
space to allow for fuel expansion.
If you get gasoline in your eyes or if you swallow gasoline, see your doctor immediately.
Never try to syphon gasoline using mouth suction.
If you spill gasoline on your skin or clothing, immediately wash it off with soap and water
and change clothing.
Never start the engine or let it run in an enclosed area. Engine exhaust fumes are
poisonous and can cause loss of consciousness and death in a short time.
Gasoline is extremely flammable and is explosive under The engine exhaust from this product contains
certain conditions. Work in a well ventilated area. Open chemicals known to cause cancer, birth defects or other
flames, sparks and cigarettes must be kept away from reproductive harm.
gasoline.
KEEP GASOLINE OUT OF THE REACH OF CHILDREN
The engine and exhaust system become very hot

during operation and remains hot for a period of time
Careless handling of the control cables can result in
after the engine is shut off. Wear insulated protection for
twisting or bending of the cables. This can cause the
hands and arms or wait until the engine and exhaust
cables to stick or bind, resulting in loss of vehicle control.
system have cooled before performing service work.
DO NOT TAMPER WITH DO NOT TAMPER WITH

THROTTLE BODY FLOW IDLE STOP SCREW
SCREW
DO NOT TAMPER
SPECIFICATIONS TROUBLESHOOTING
Fuel System Specifications BASICS TROUBLESHOOTING
NOTE: The closed-loop EFI system does not require
FUEL SYSTEM TPS calibration. Refer to Fuel System
Item Specifications Troubleshooting page 5.58 - 5.61.
DO NOT OVERLOOK THE BASICS WHEN
Fuel Octane (Minimum) 91 Octane (R+M/2) TROUBLESHOOTING:
Fuel Pump Pressure 3.51 BAR (351 kPa) (51 psi) 1. Battery in a low state of charge can cause problems.
Be sure the battery is in good condition and fully
60 liters / hr charged.
Fuel Pump Volume
500 ml (16.9 oz) / 30 sec
(Approximate @ 12 V)
0.26 gal / min 2. Air leaks in intake tract / air box - check for air leaks
and repair to avoid mis-diagnosing the EFI system.
Fuel Pump Current Draw 5A maximum
3. Contaminated or improper fuel.
Fuel Level Sensor
50 - 250 Ohms ± 5%
Resistance 4. Restricted fuel flow / filters (low fuel pressure).
Not Adjustable (Set by ECM 5. Fuel tank vent line pinched or obstructed.
Idle Speed / Fast Idle
Speed and IAC valve) Spec Idle
Speed is 950 rpm ± 100 6. Faulty spark plug(s).
7. Corroded, disconnected, or mis-connected wiring. Pay
Injector Resistance 11.4 - 12.6 Ohms
close attention to wires at the back of connectors and
Throttle Grip Free-Play 2-4 mm (1/16"-5/32" ) at the fuse box to be sure they are secured in their slots
and not loose.
NOTE: Idle speed is continuously monitored and 8. Poor electrical ground connections.
adjusted by the ECM via the IAC valve. DO NOT tamper
with or attempt to “adjust” the idle stop screw or throttle 9. Exhaust system restriction, improper exhaust, air leaks
plate flow screw! They are factory pre-set. If idle is erratic at joints or head pipe flange.
or if idle speed is incorrect, refer to troubleshooting in this 10. Engine mechanical condition.
section to find the cause of the problem.
SPECIAL TOOLS
Fuel System Service Tools Throttle Body Flow Screw and
TOOL DESCRIPTION
SPX PART Idle Stop Screw
NUMBER
DO NOT TAMPER WITH THESE SCREWS!
Diagnostic Tool Kit (PV-46085-B)
INCLUDES: Throttle body flow and idle stop screws are factory pre-
Digital Wrench Software PU-47052-G set. Throttle body must be replaced if screw setting is
PV-46085-B
Standard Interface Cable PU-47151 changed.
Victory Adapter PV-46085-2
SmartLink Interface Kit (PU-47471)
Fluke 77 Digital Multi Meter PV-43568
Relay Jumper (to run fuel pump) PU-49466
Fuel Tank Fitting Plug Tool (9.5mm) PV-50251
Fuel Tank Fitting Plug Tool (11.8mm) PV-50567 IDLE SPEED NOT ADJUSTABLE!
SERVICE PRECAUTIONS Static electricity can damage the ECM beyond repair. The
human body can easily store enough static electricity to
EFI System Precautions damage sensitive electronic components. Before working
NOTICE: While electronic fuel injection (EFI) is durable with any components of the Fuel Injection system, ground
and reliable, the components can be damaged or yourself to dissipate any static charge. Also take care not
problems may occur if the following precautions are not to touch any of terminal pins on the ECM.
taken..
5
Do not touch ECM connector pins
It is not advisable to “jump start” the machine with another
battery. Although problems are unlikely to occur if every- Anti-static Wrist Strap PV-43541
thing is done carefully, the electrical component could be
damaged. NOTICE: Some tests require probing of the ECM wiring
harness connector. Do not touch or probe the exposed
Never disconnect the battery while the engine is running. pins on the ECM. Static electricity from your body or the
When connecting and disconnecting the battery cables meter can easily damage the ECM.
refer to Chapter 16 for complete battery connection and Always use the proper adapter from the Connector Test
charging information. Adapter Kit when probing the terminals. Many of the
Make sure that the key switch is off before connecting connectors are sealed and cannot be back probed. Be
and disconnecting connections. Best practice is to extremely careful not damage the connectors by forcing
disconnect the battery before connecting or meter probes into the connectors.
disconnecting the electrical connections.
Fuses and circuit breakers protect critical electrical
components and circuits. Never replace the fuse with a
larger value fuse or “jumper” the fuse with wire, aluminum
foil or any other means. Always investigate the cause of
the problem and repair before replacing the fuse.
Use proper test adapters on connector pins
Connector Test Adapter Kit PV-43536

Poor connections are the most common cause of EFI
malfunctions. Inspect wires at connectors and at the fuse
box during troubleshooting. Be sure they are secured in
The ECM and the sensors are sensitive pieces of elec- their slots and pushed out or loose.
tronic equipment. Dropping or hitting them may cause
irreparable damage
“SNAP”
Do not drop or strike F.I. components

Wire terminals must be corrosion free and fully seated.
Connectors should snap together and lock.
FUEL SYSTEM ASSEMBLY VIEWS

Fuel Tank and Cap Mounting
43 +/- 6 in-lbs
(4.8 +/- .6 Nm)
Vent
Water Drain
Tank Badge Removal:

Carefully lift top edge of badge away from tank to expose adhesive.
Do not bend or force badge! Apply a few drops of lacquer thinner to
loosen adhesive bond. Work adhesive patch slowly away from tank,
wiping any excess thinner away as you work. Do not allow thinner
to remain on painted surface or badge.
Tank Badge Installation:
Clean surface of tank with alcohol and allow to dry.
Press badge to tank with 40 pound force and hold for 5-10 seconds 96 in-lbs
(10.8 Nm)
Flange
Bushing
Isolators
Wipe contact surfaces with

alcohol prior to fuel tank
installation
18 ft-lbs
(24.5 Nm)
Vent Line (Front Fitting)
See detail view

next page.
20 in-lbs
(2.3 Nm)
Water Drain Line (Rear Fitting)
Fuel Tank Assembly View
Water Drain
5
Fuel Line Installed
20 in-lbs
(2.3 Nm)
Replace mounting screws and gasket

upon assembly.
Tie strap secures fuel line

to wire harness.
Vent Line and Drain Line Detail Fuel Line Tie Strap Detail
Right side of tank
Clearance between
line and throttle linkage
Orient lines as shown and

in contact with outside wall Fuel Pump
of tank tunnel
Fuel Tank Vent Water Drain Line Routing - 49 State
Be sure hoses are in good condition and securely connected to the proper fitting.
Vent Line (to front fitting on tank)
Water Drain (to rear fitting on tank)
“T” Fitting
Dart strap
To atmosphere
Left Side Routing
Dart strap
Fuel Tank Evaporative Emissions System - California Models
Be sure hoses are in good condition and securely connected to the proper fitting. Secure lines where indicated.
Left Side Routing Right Side Routing
Dart Strap
Tie Strap Purge Valve
(ECM Controlled)
To rubber “T” fitting at rear

of throttle body.
Insert to proper depth.
Rotate atmospheric vent to top position before
tightening canister tie straps
To rear side of
purge valve
To “Purge” fitting
on canister
Filter
Atmospheric vent
Plug
Activated Charcoal Canister
Dart Straps Secure to bracket with straps
Water Drain Line
To “Tank” fitting on canister
Fuel Pump / Level Sensor Reference Data

Fuel Level Sensor Test - page 5.25
Fuel Pump Test - page 5.26
Fuel Pressure Test - page 5.24
Fuel Pump Installation - IMPORTANT! Improper installation of pump can result in fuel starvation at low fuel levels.
Refer to procedure on page 5.21.
TOP VIEW - Fuel Pump Installed in Tank

FUEL PUMP DATA (Room Temperature)
Fuel Pressure: 3.51 BAR (351 kPa) (51 PSI)
Current Draw:  5.0 Amp
Level Sensor Resistance Empty: 250 Ohms

Level Sensor Resistance Full: 50 Ohms
Forward
Fuel Sensor Resistance Test
Pin A to Pin B: 50-250 5%
Sensor “-” Sensor “+”

A B
BN GN
OR BU
D C
Pump “+” Pump “-”
Filter -
View - WIRE side of pump connector
Replace@
Baffle Plate Baffle Plate
30,000 mi
(48,000 km) Fuel Pump Torque Sequence
43 in-lbs 1 3
(4.8 Nm)
8 5
10
9
6
7
Pickup filter must be located between baffle plates in
rear of tank to prevent fuel starvation at low fuel levels. 4 2
See Fuel Pump Installation procedure.
Fuel Pump Assembly Views
Filter -
Replace@
30,000 mi
(48,000 km)
Pickup filter tab Pickup filter
Pickup filter push-nut
Level sensor wire connector

secured to fuel hose
Wires inside bend of fuel hose
Be sure edge of pickup filter is inside baffle plate when pump is installed. See Pump Installation procedure.
Air Intake / Box Frame Assembly View
36 in-lbs (4.0 Nm)
36 in-lbs*
(4.0 Nm*)
* Captive screws.
Loosen to remove filter.
Do not remove screws from filter.
Idle Air Control Assembly View
Install fitting to depth of paint mark

Do not insert tube too far into tee or elbow,
or the IAC air delivery will be restricted.
85 in-lbs (9.6 Nm)
Whenever IAC is disconnected, or after

ECM re-programming (re-flash), cycle the
ignition key ON and OFF a few times (with
5
kill switch in RUN position) to allow the IAC
valve to learn its “base” position. Wait 5-10
seconds after turning key ON or OFF.
Front
85 in-lbs (9.6 Nm)
Detail of IAC Restricted “T” Fitting

Front To Air Box Plugged on 49 State
Connected to Purge Valve on California
To Throttle Body (Rear)
Do not install “T”
Paint mark fitting too deep!
To Throttle
To Throttle Body (Front) Body
Restricted side of “T” must be on purge valve

View From Left Side side (California) or plugged side on 49 State
FUEL SYSTEM SERVICE Priming The Fuel System

Fuel System Depressurization Fuel pump prime procedure also serves to center the IAC
valve. The fuel level in tank must be high enough to
submerge the fuel pickup in the tank. A prime procedure
WARNING should be performed:
Allow engine and exhaust to cool completely before
• If a new fuel pump is installed or if tanks are run
disconnecting fuel line or removing tank. Wear eye
completely dry.
protection.
• Whenever fuel system is serviced (fuel line is
IMPORTANT: Two different Fuel Tank Fitting Plug disconnected).
tools have been used with Victory Motorcycles. To
• Whenever battery or IAC is disconnected.
determine which tool must be used, the fuel pump
outlet fitting must be measured with a caliper. Refer to 1. Fill the fuel tank.
Fuel System Service Tools at the beginning of this
2. Turn Engine Stop switch OFF.
chapter for size specifications.
3. Turn ignition key ON.
4. Turn stop switch to RUN.
1. Remove IAC cover. 5. Allow switch to remain in RUN position until pump
2. Wrap a clean shop towel around fuel line fitting. stops running (about 2-3 seconds).
3. Squeeze both release buttons (one on each side of 6. Turn stop switch OFF.
fitting) and hold; carefully slide fitting from fuel rail. 7. WAIT until the ECM centers the IAC valve (the clicking
4. Cover fuel fittings to keep debris out of line. sound stops) and then wait an additional 10 seconds.
or until you hear a faint single “click” from the relay.
8. Repeat Steps 4-7 about 5 times to complete the
priming procedure. Turn ignition key OFF when
priming is complete.
Fuel Tank Vent Inspection - 49 State

1. Disconnect vent hose (A) under seat.
2. Be sure hose is unobstructed to tank fitting and to drain
line (B) to atmosphere.
Fuel Tank Vent Inspection - California 2. Disconnect vent line and water drain lines (C).
1. Disconnect vent hose (C) under seat.

2. Be sure both hoses (C, to tank) and (D, to EVAP
canister) are unobstructed.
C 5
3. Remove ground wire bolt (D) and rear tank bolts (E)
and collect flange bushings (F) and isolators (G).
D G
F
Fuel Tank Removal
WARNING
Review gasoline warnings on page 5.3. Allow engine
and exhaust to cool completely before disconnecting E
fuels line or removing tank.
NOTE: The fuel line is secured to the main wiring

harness by a tie strap. The fuel line must be
disconnected from the fuel pump fitting (A) before
removing the tank. Do not cut or remove tie strap.

Place a protective cloth on front of tank to prevent
damage.
A
5. Pivot rear of tank up to gain access to fuel line/fuel
fitting. Support rear of tank.
Don’t Remove
Tie Strap
6. Reach under tank and locate pump harness electrical 8. Install fuel tank fitting plug tool (see Special Tools for
connector. Carefully lift tab (H) and disconnect application details) onto fuel pump fitting to protect the
harness. fitting and prevent fuel for seeping out of tank.
Install Special Tool

PV-50251or PV-50567
9. Grasp tank at front edge. Lift rear of tank high enough

for fitting on fuel pump and special plug tool to clear the
frame.
CAUTION 10. Carefully pull tank rearward to release front tank

mounts from front isolators.
Fuel Tank Removal: DO NOT move tank rearward
prior to disconnecting fuel line. To disconnect the 11. Place tank on suitable flat surface that will not scratch
fuel line fitting located on the bottom of the tank, lift fuel tank. Do not place fuel tank on frame/seat area of
up rear of tank allowing tank to pivot on front the motorcycle.
isolators. The fuel line is secured to the main wiring
harness by a tie strap that should not be removed.
Fuel Tank Installation
7. Disconnect fuel line from pump by squeezing release 1. Secure handlebars in the straight ahead position.
tabs (I) on both sides of the fitting. Pull fuel line straight Place a protective cloth on front of tank to prevent
down off pump fitting. damage.
2. Carefully place fuel tank on motorcycle frame. Be
careful not to snag or catch special fuel tank plug tool
or fuel tank fitting on frame of vehicle.
3. Assemble vent and drain lines to tank (if removed).
20 in-lbs
(2.3 Nm)
I
Rotate lines
against side
of tank
Don’t Remove
Tie Strap
4. Assemble front isolators to frame. Apply alcohol, soapy 12. Torque fasteners to specification. Ref. “A” below.
water solution, or rubber lubricant to ease tank
installation. 96 in-lbs (10.8 Nm)
Ref. B
5. Slide tank onto front isolators and slide tank fully
forward. Pivot rear of tank up to gain access to fuel line/
fuel fitting. Support rear of tank.
6. Remove fuel tank fitting plug tool from fuel pump fitting
by pressing in on center button of the plastic coupler.
7. Connect fuel line to fuel pump. Push fitting straight onto

pump fitting until it clicks in place. You will hear a
18 ft-lbs (24.5 Nm)
5
noticeable clicking sound when the fitting engages
properly. Pull lightly to be sure fitting is fully installed.
8. Connect fuel pump wire harness electrical connector.
9. Verify fuel line is routed and secured properly before

lowering tank. Ref. A
13. Connect vent drain, and ground wire. Torque to 10.8

Nm or 96 in-lbs. Ref. “B” above.
14. Install seat and side covers.
10. Install rear isolators (flange side to tank) and flange

bushings.
11. Lower rear of tank and install bolts.
Fuel Pump Removal 8. Push hose at front edge of pump away from edge of
tank opening (A) to gain more clearance for pump
removal.
WARNING
Replace all mounting screws and pump seal O-ring any
time pump is removed for service or fuel filter A
maintenance. Review gasoline warnings on page 5.3.
Do not kink or bend fuel pickup hose upon removal.
NOTICE
Be careful when removing and installing the fuel pump to

avoid damage to pump, wiring, or hoses. Follow pump
removal and installation procedure. Inspect wires and
hoses for damage after removing pump. Be sure pickup
filter is positioned properly (between the baffle plates at
9. Lift front of pump upward until wires and hose are clear
rear of tank) to prevent fuel starvation at low fuel levels.
of pump opening. Push tab (B) of fuel level sensor
connector in and slide apart to separate connector.
1. Drain fuel from fuel tank using a vacuum or siphon
pump designed for fuel systems. The level fuel sensor
float arm is located in the left side of the fuel tank.
Careless use of a pump or siphon hose could damage
the float arm or sensor.
2. Remove fuel tank (page 5.15).

B
3. Place a clean, soft protective cloth on a work bench or
flat surface.
4. Lay tank on cloth with pump facing UP. Be prepared

to contain any fuel spillage as a small amount of fuel
will remain in the tank.
5. Loosen all mounting screws evenly in a cross pattern

until all are loose. Remove all screws and discard. 10. Carefully remove pump, being careful not to bend or
kink the fuel pickup hose.
6. Remove vent line and drain line. 11. Inspect wires and hoses for damage.
7. Lift FRONT EDGE of pump upward until resistance is

felt.
Fuel Filter Replacement 4. Push and hold retainer tab (B). Using a small flat screw
NOTE: Careless removal of fuel pump pickup filter driver, gently pry the connector plate off the inlet fitting
can damage the pump. Use care and work carefully, of pump (C), prying as close to the fitting as possible.
following all instructions.
Filter Removal B
C
1. Remove fuel pump (page 5.18).
2. Using a machinist’s scribe, or a similar pointed tool,

loosen the push nut by carefully prying it open on the
alignment post. Do not remove push-nut before
opening the tabs or the post may be damaged.
5
A Filter Installation
1. Push the new filter straight onto the inlet fitting while
guiding retainer tab (D) under the fuel pump mounting
ring Apply firm pressure to be sure the filter is seated
completely against the pump before installing push-
nut.
3. Remove the push-nut being careful not to damage or D

break alignment post (A).
2. Install a new push-nut from the filter kit onto the

alignment post, making sure it is firmly seated against
the connector plate against the filter plate.
Fuel Level Sensor Removal Fuel Level Sensor Installation

1. Remove fuel pump (page 5.18). 1. Orient sensor as shown and place in tank opening.
2. The sensor assembly is mounted on a bracket on the
left side of the fuel tank and retained by a tab on the
center bar of the fuel sensor body. Below is a cutaway
view showing the sensor mounted to the bracket with
the tank upright in a normal position.
CUTAWAY VIEW OF SENSOR
TAB 2. Slide sensor onto bracket and push until tab engages
bracket. Pull downward lightly on sensor to be sure
sensor tab is locked into bracket.
3. With tank inverted as shown, use a machinist’s scribe

with a small hook or a small screwdriver to carefully pry
the center of the bar outward until lock tab is released.
4. Push sensor off mounting bracket and remove it from
the tank.
3. Install fuel pump (page 5.21).
Fuel Pump Installation 5. Below is a cutaway fuel tank shown to illustrate filter
placement described in Step 4. The two views show
1. Install a NEW O-ring on the pump mounting flange by the correct and incorrect pump installation.
pressing it firmly into groove of pump flange, making
sure it is not twisted CUTAWAY VIEWS
VIEWS ARE FROM FUEL CAP AREA LOOKING
2. In checking the position of the wires and protective TOWARD REAR OF TANK ON TOP SIDE.
hose jacket, the wires should not extend past the curve
in the hose (located on the outside). If the wires need
adjusting, route them toward the inside of the hose, as  CORRECT - Filter is between baffle plates.
shown (A) to prevent damage during pump installation.
5
A
 INCORRECT - Filter caught on baffle plate.
3. Clean sealing surface of tank (B) and inspect closely

for scratches or surface damage that would prevent the
O-ring from sealing properly.
4. Install pickup end of pump first, guiding filter between
baffle plates located at the back of the tank.
6. Connect fuel level sensor harness (C).

B
Fuel Pump Installation (Cont.) 11. Push hose back slightly with index finger while pushing
downward on front edge of pump flange. Apply enough
7. Set rear edge of pump flange on mounting surface. force to slip hose past front edge of tank opening. Be
8. Before final pump installation, use light to look at the sure O-ring is still in place after installation.
baffle area of the tank (D) as shown. If the filter is visible
it is caught on the tank baffle (see photo previous
page). Slide pump forward slightly and move filter
toward center of tank (between the plates) or remove
pump and reinstall properly.
12. Start all NEW pump mounting screws in each hole,

then tighten all screws evenly finger tight.
9. If filter is NOT visible, proceed with installation Step 10. 13. Torque in 3 steps to 43 in-lbs (4.8 Nm) following the
star pattern shown below. Repeat final torque one
time.
Filter should
NOT be visible INSTALL NEW SCREWS
here
43 in-lbs
1 3
(4.8 Nm)
5
8
10
9
10. Push level sensor wires into tank and clear of hose.
6 7
4 2
14. Add fuel. Check for leaks at flange area before

installing fuel tank (page 5.16).
Fuel Pump Circuit Diagram
Fuel Pump Pressure Inspection
WARNING
Gasoline is extremely flammable and is explosive
under certain conditions. Work in a well ventilated Fuel Line
PU-43506-A
area. Open flames, sparks and cigarettes must be
kept away from gasoline. KEEP GASOLINE OUT OF
THE REACH OF CHILDREN!
PV-48656
CAUTION
Wear safety glasses or a face shield when working
around the fuel system to protect your eyes.
1. Disconnect fuel line at fuel rail (page 5.14).

Fuel Pressure: 3.51 BAR (351 kPa) (51 psi)
2. Attach Fuel Pressure Gauge Adaptor PV-48656 to fuel
line and to fuel rail.
3. Screw Fuel Pressure Gauge PU-43506-A to fitting on
adaptor.
4. Start engine and record fuel pressure (or cycle key and
Engine Stop switch to read pressure when pump
cycles for 2-3 seconds).
5. Turn ignition switch off.
6. Open bleed valve to de-pressurize gauge and drain
residual fuel.
7. Disconnect adapter. Re-connect fuel line to rail,
pushing straight inward until quick connect fitting
“clicks” securely in place. Pull lightly to ensure fuel line
is secured.
FUEL PRESSURE TROUBLESHOOTING
FUEL PRESSURE TOO LOW: INSPECT FUEL PRESSURE TOO HIGH: INSPECT
* Low fuel level (add fuel) * Plugged fuel return (in tank on pressure regulator)
* Pump not running (Fuel pump or circuit malfunction) * Pressure regulator malfunction (located on pump)
* Restricted fitting, fuel supply line, or gauge adapter hose
* Fuel line kinked or restricted (from tank fitting to rail)
* Fuel line leaking (leaking air in or fuel out)
* Vent restriction
* Plugged fuel pickup filter (located in fuel tank)
* Pressure regulator malfunction (located on pump)
*Fuel pump malfunction (Pump should run for about 2
seconds the instant that the key switch and Engine Stop
switch are turned ON)
Fuel Level Sensor Resistance Test Fuel Level Sensor Bypass Test
OVERVIEW OF OPERATION: The fuel level sensor is a 1. If fuel gauge is inoperative but level sensor resistance
mechanical float arm located inside the fuel tank. Circuit is correct, perform the following test when the
resistance determines the reading on the fuel level gauge connector is still unplugged.
(Cross Country) or on the fuel level bar display on the 2. Connect a 50 Ohm (minimum) resistor across Pin A
speedometer (Cross Roads). When the fuel level and Pin B on the harness side of the fuel pump
indicated on the fuel gauge is below 1/4 tank, a LOW connector (connect Black/Dark Green wire to Black
FUEL warning icon lights up on the information display wire).
(Cross Country).
3. Turn ignition key ON and engine stop switch to RUN.
Follow the steps below to test the sensor circuit with an
ohmmeter.
4. The fuel gauge should indicate between FULL and
empty depending on the resistor value used for testing.
5
1. Remove side covers and seat (Chapter 3). NOTE: At least 50 Ohms should be installed in series
with Pins A and B. Connecting Pin B directly to Pin A
2. Disconnect vent and water drain hoses at rear of tank. or to chassis ground will set an error code.
3. Remove rear tank mounting bolts.
5. If gauge does not function, check continuity of Black
4. Lift and support rear of fuel tank high enough to access wire (Pin A) to ground. Resistance should be less than
fuel level sensor / fuel pump connector. .5 Ohms. If ground is OK, check all pin connections in
5. Disconnect the harness. the fuel pump connector and the gauge connector (in
headlamp or fairing) and verify good continuity of BK/
6. Set multimeter to measure resistance. DG wire to the gauge connector.
7. Attach meter leads to pin A and pin B of 4-pin connector
out of the fuel pump. Estimate the fuel level in the tank Fuel Pump Connector 50-250 Ohm resistor
and compare resistance reading to the table below. (harness side)
FULL: 50
EMPTY: 250
Error Message (Cross Roads)
Resistance Measured
Approximate If the fuel level sensor is disconnected, an error message
From Pin A to Pin B in
Resistance will be displayed on the speedometer information screen.
4-Pin Connector
FULL (Sensor Arm Up) Message Screen Indicates

Sensor Resistance 50  +/- 3 
Fuel sensor disconnected /
(Room Temperature) ERROR Fuel Level
EMPTY (Sensor Arm Down) shorted
250  +/- 5 
Fuel Pump Electrical Diagnostics
FUEL SYSTEM
Fuel Pump Pressure 3.51 BAR (351 kPa) (51 psi)
Fuel Pump Volume (@ 12VDC) 60 liters/hr (500 ml / 30 seconds) (16.9 oz. / 30 seconds) (0.26 gal / min)
Fuel Pump Current Draw 5 amps maximum @ 13.5 VDC
NOTE: When ignition switch is turned ON and Engine Stop switch is in the RUN position, fuel pump will run
momentarily (about 2-3 seconds). Key or Engine Stop switch must be turned OFF for at least 5 seconds
before fuel pump will cycle again (there may be an audible click as the relay re-sets). Fuel pump will not cycle
again if switch is turned on and off quickly. NOTE: If the ECM reprogramming procedure was interrupted or
failed due to low battery voltage, the ECM could have lost critical startup information. If you notice the fuel
pump does not run with key / stop switch cycle immediately after reprogramming the ECM, connect a battery
charger and re-program the ECM with a stock fuel map and start over.
Fuel Pump Supply Voltage Test 5. If low or no voltage is delivered to the fuel pump, verify
ground wire (Pin C, Black) has good continuity to
1. Disconnect fuel pump / level sensor harness (as chassis ground and back to battery negative (-) post.
described on page 5.25 for level sensor test).
Ground path test

End view of main
harness connector
A B
A B
C C
D
(Black)
VT/YE (Violet/Yellow)
End view of main
harness connector
Fuel Pump Connector (Main Harness Side).
6. If ground is OK, check Gray wire from fuel pump relay
to Pin 5 of the Engine-Chassis harness connector, and
from there to ECM pin #28. The Gray wire receives a
momentary ground from the ECM (for 2-3 seconds)
2. Connect red lead of a DC volt meter to Pin D on the and activates the fuel pump relay which supplies power
wire harness side of the connector. Connect black lead to the pump on the VT/YE wire.
to chassis ground (or to Pin C of connector). Trace both power and ground circuits to determine
fault if battery voltage is not present for 2-3 seconds
3. Turn Engine Stop switch to RUN. after key and kill switch are turned on.
4. Turn ignition key ON and read DC voltage on meter When a CPS signal is received by the ECM (engine is
when key is first turned on. Voltage reading on pin D cranking or running) the ECM maintains the ground on
(Violet/Yellow) should be close to battery voltage for 2- Pin 28 (Gray wire), keeping the pump powered.
3 seconds after turning key ON.
Battery Voltage To Fuel Pump 4. If power is present, insert PU-49466 Relay Jumper into
relay socket (the tool is non directional and can be
installed either way). If PU-49466 is not available, an
NOTICE ammeter can also be used as in Current Draw Test
(page 5.28).
The following procedure powers the fuel pump circuit
directly. Read and understand the entire procedure
before you begin.
PU-49466
1. Check fuel pump fuse (A, below). If open (blown)
visually inspect circuit wiring for shorts to ground and
5
then perform fuel pump current draw test on NOTICE
page 5.28.
2. If fuse is OK, remove fuel pump relay (B). A jumper wire can also be used to connect terminal
A4 and B5 to run the pump, however, be careful not
to apply power to the Gray wire terminal B4, or ECM
A damage will occur.
B
Do not power a dry fuel pump or pump damage
could result from overheating. Pump must be in
tank, submerged in fuel, and connected to fuel rail.
5. If pump runs when powered directly in Step 4, swap

fuel pump relay with accessory relay, turn ignition key
ON and engine stop switch to RUN. If pump runs when
key/stop switch is cycled, replace faulty relay.
6. If pump does not run with relay swapped and Key/Stop
switch cycled (but ran in Step 4 with the jumper
installed) check for battery voltage on Red/Black wire
3. Use a test light or a DC voltmeter to verify battery (RD/BK) terminal A5 of pump relay socket. NOTE: The
voltage is present on Violet/Black (VT/BK) wire on key must be ON and the engine stop switch set to RUN.
relay terminal A4. NOTE: Battery voltage should be 7. If there is no battery voltage on terminal A5 (with
present regardless of key switch position. ignition key ON and Engine Stop switch to RUN) refer
to the wiring schematic to trace power path through
Top View - Fuse Box Terminals ignition switch and Engine Stop switch.
(Fuses and relays removed)
NOTE: If starter motor circuit works, key and kill
Column 9, 8, 7, etc. switch are not suspect. Check continuity of RD/BK
Row wire from kill switch (Pin 2) to pump relay.
Terminal A4
8. If battery voltage is present on terminal A5, turn key
and stop switch OFF.
A 9. Check continuity of gray wire from pump relay (terminal
B B4) through engine harness connector (Pin 5) to ECM
Pin 28. The ECM grounds the pump relay through pin
C 28 for 2-3 seconds when key and engine stop switch
D are first turned ON. The ECM maintains the ground
connection after engine start-up (after a CPS signal is
present). Ground the Gray wire to bypass the ECM
ground for testing (Key and stop switch ON).
Fuel Pump Current Draw Test 4. Insert red meter lead in terminal A4 and black meter
lead in terminal B5 of relay socket. NOTE: The fuel
OVERVIEW: Fuel pump current draw is an indicator of pump will run regardless of key / stop switch position.
pump condition. Perform draw test if fuel pump operation
is suspect, or if fuel pump fuse is found open (blown).
NOTE: When meter leads are inserted the pump will (A5) (A4)
run, and current draw will be displayed on the meter, RD/BK VT/BK
even with key and stop switch off. Fuel tank must be
completely installed and have enough fuel in it to
cover the fuel pickup filter for an accurate test.
NOTE: Be sure fuse of your ammeter is not open Chassis
Relay
Engine
Relay
Primary Lighting
Relay
(blown). To check ammeter fuse, place leads in the
normal + and - jacks and turn selector to  Breaker Breaker Fuse
(resistance) position. Place free end of red (+) meter Turn Signal / Horn
Relay
lead into 10 Amp socket as shown below. Meter Breaker Fuse Fuse
should read approximately .2 Ohms. A reading of OL

indicates an open fuse.
(B5)
Red probe in VT/YE
10A Jack .2 Ohms
Fuse OK B4 (Gray) DO NOT APPLY POWER!
Red lead in V, 
jack (black lead 5. Read fuel pump current draw on meter and compare
not used) to specification.
Checking Ammeter Fuse Less than

5 Amps
1. Remove right side cover. Lift tab at top of fuse box
base and slide fuse box up to remove it from bracket.
Remove cover.
2. Remove fuel pump relay (A) by pulling straight upward.
6. Inspect fuel pump circuit wiring if pump does not run.

7. Replace fuel pump if current draw exceeds
specification.
SPECIFICATION: Fuel Pump Current Draw

Maximum: 5 DC Amps
3. Set meter to DC Amps. Be sure red meter lead is in the

10A jack, and black meter lead is in common (-) jack.
Idle Air Control Removal 7. Lift tab of primary wire harness connector to detach it
from the ignition coil.
Also refer to IAC Assembly View on page 5.13.
1. Remove RH cover and IAC cover.

2. Remove wire dart (A).
3. Push tab (B) to disconnect IAC harness.
4. Remove (4) IAC bracket screws (C) using a 5mm ball
drive hexagonal socket.
5
C
A
B
8. Push tab on ignition switch connector and remove

bracket with switch attached.
9. Remove air supply hose from air box, the front air
delivery hose, and the rear air hose with “T” fitting from
throttle body.
NOTE: Restricted side of tee fitting faces purge valve

5. Remove high tension leads (D) from coils. on California models. On 49 state models, the
restricted side of the tee fitting is plugged (E).
NOTE: The front HTL is routed behind the ignition
switch cover, not above it upon assembly.
E
D
6. Remove (4) bracket screws with a 5mm ball drive

hexagonal socket.
Throttle Body Removal 8. Remove outer jam nuts at both throttle cables.
NOTE: This operation requires the removal of the

Throttle Position Sensor (TPS). Upon reassembly, the
TPS will need to be recalibrated to its base setting
using Polaris Digital Wrench®. TPS base setting
voltage, with throttle closed, should read between
.80V - .92V.
1. Using Polaris Digital Wrench®, access the vehicle

diagnostic system and record the TPS voltage with the
ignition “ON” and the throttle fully closed.
9. Rotate throttle reel to access phillips head screws (2)

and remove.
2. Remove fuel tank.

3. Remove IAC cover and ignition switch cover.
4. Remove ignition switch, coil and bracket from LH side
of the motorcycle followed by IAC valve and bracket
from RH side.
5. Disconnect and remove TMAP sensor. 10. Remove throttle cable bracket.
6. Position a shop towel around the fuel line quick-
connect and disconnect from fuel rail.
WARNING
Review Gasoline Warnings at the beginning of this
chapter. Allow engine and exhaust to cool
completely before disconnecting fuel lines or
removing tank.
7. Disconnect cruise control cable from throttle reel and

unclip cable from bracket.
11. Disconnect throttle cables from throttle reel and move

out of the way.
12. Slide IAC pipes off of front and rear of throttle body.
13. Using a T25 Safety Torx bit, remove screw securing 4. Install throttle cables, cruise control cable and check
TPS to throttle body and withdraw TPS sensor from cable free play (page 2.11.)
throttle body.
5. Install TMAP sensor, TPS sensor.
14. Using a 5mm ball-drive hex socket, remove the (4)
6. Install IAC valve and refit IAC pipes, paying close
bolts securing the throttle body to the intake manifold.
attention to rear “T” fitting pipe depth (see page 5.13
15. Working from the RH side of motorcycle, withdraw for proper IAC pipe installation procedure).
throttle body assembly from motorcycle.
7. Install fuel tank, seat and side covers.
8. Attach ignition coil and ignition switch electrical
connectors and let assembly hang, leaving access to
TPS sensor. 5
9. Turn the ignition ON, connect Polaris Digital Wrench®
and slowly rotate TPS sensor until voltage matches the
reading taken in step 1 of THROTTLE BODY
REMOVAL. Once the voltage reading is set, torque the
TPS screw to 10 in-lbs (1Nm). The TPS is now
calibrated.
Throttle Body Installation

NOTE: Replace upper and lower throttle body seals
prior to installation. Use extreme care not to fold, tear
or damage seals when sliding throttle body back into
position.
1. Press throttle body adapter plate upwards into airbox

seal approximately 1/4” to ease throttle body
installation.
TPS Voltage base setting

1/4” relief @ closed throttle: 0.80V -
0.92V
10. Install ignition switch / coil assembly.

11. Install IAC and Ignition switch covers.
12. Start engine and check for air leaks, trouble codes and
proper throttle operation.
2. Working from the RH side of motorcycle, carefully slide

throttle body into position, making sure not to damage
or displace throttle body seals.
3. Install throttle body bolts (4) and torque to 9 Nm
(85 in-lbs.)
EFI SYSTEM COMPONENTS

Fuel Injection Component Locations
Idle Air Control (IAC) Fuel Pump (with pressure regulator and filter)
Under IAC cover Inside fuel tank
Throttle Body & Fuel Injectors
Fuel Line / Fuel Rail

(pulse damper on RH side of fuel rail)
Tipover Sensor TMAP Sensor Crank Position Sensor

Right side rear cylinder intake port Right side under timing cover
Purge Valve
Air Filter (Calif. Models) Under right side cover
Under fuel tank
Evaporative Emissions Canister
(Calif. Models) Under rear fender
Battery &
40 amp Circuit Breaker
(Front of battery box)
Engine Temperature Sensor (CHT)

Diagnostic Connector
Front cylinder head, left side
Under left side cover
Throttle Position Sensor (TPS)
Left side of throttle body
Fuel Rail / Fuel Injector Removal Fuel Rail Installation

1. Remove fuel tank (page 5.15). 1. Lubricate O-rings with engine oil. Install front injector
2. Remove ignition coil with bracket and IAC bracket with wire harness connector facing forward.
assembly with hoses (page 5.29). 2. Install rear injector with wire harness connector facing
3. Remove fuel rail screws (A) and four intake manifold rearward.
screws (B).
3. Press firmly to seat injector and remove protective
B cover.
4. Install retainer clips fully onto each injector. Be sure
clips are fully seated in the groove.
Right Side 5
View
Rearward Forward
A
Rear Front
4. Remove throttle cables from throttle body bracket.

5. Push throttle body and air box seal up into frame to 5. Install fuel rail and place in position on top of injectors.
provide as much clearance as possible for injector Press rail over each injectors evenly until retaining
removal. clips “click” into place on the rail. Be sure rail is seated
completely and clips are engaged in the groove.
6. Cut tie strap that secures injector wire harness to fuel
rail. Slide red lock tab from each injector harness Align injectors carefully before
connector. installing the fuel rail.
6. Install fuel rail retaining screws and torque to 85 in. lbs.

(10 Nm).
7. Press tab to remove harness from each injector. 7. Install wire harness on each injector and then install the
8. Slide fuel rail retaining clip back until rail is released red locking tabs.
from injector, or remove them completely.
8. Secure wires to fuel rail with new tie straps.
9. Lift fuel rail off injectors and remove rail from right side.
9. Assemble remaining parts in reverse order and prime
10. Cover exposed ends of injectors and fuel rail with the fuel system (page 5.14).
plastic wrap to prevent contamination.
11. Clean area around injectors with compressed air to
prevent foreign material from entering engine. Pull
injectors out of cylinder heads; keep in order (front and
rear) for assembly.
FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM TESTING Idle Air Control (IAC) - Overview Of Operation
AND DIAGNOSTICS The Idle Air Control system consists of the Engine Control
Module (ECM), IAC valve, air supply hose, two air delivery
Fuel Injection System - Overview Of hoses, and related wiring between ECM and IAC valve.
Operation (See IAC Assembly View on page 5.13).
The Electronic Fuel Injection (EFI) system functions to The IAC valve is located behind the cover on the right side
provide the engine with precisely metered fuel under of the throttle body. Its main function is to stabilize the
varying loads and conditions. engine’s base idle speed by varying the amount of air
allowed to the engine at idle and low throttle openings. Air
The Engine Control Module or “ECM”, is located under is regulated by valves located inside the IAC valve body.
the seat. It is programmed to provide the proper fuel and The ECM continuously monitors engine RPM and
ignition timing based mainly on primary inputs of engine changes the position of IAC air valves (via step motors) to
RPM and the Temperature and Manifold Absolute maintain idle speed between 850 and 1050 RPM.
Pressure (TMAP) sensor inputs. The ECM evaluates
Filtered air from the air box is delivered to the IAC valve
other minor sensory information received from various
body through a supply hose on the lower left side of the air
sensors in the EFI system, and also provides grounds or
box, then distributed to front and rear cylinder throttle
voltage to other EFI related circuits of the electrical and
bodies through separate delivery hoses.
fuel delivery systems.
IAC CYCLING - Whenever the IAC wire harness is
A Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) is mounted on the left disconnected, or after ECM re-programming, cycle the key
side of the throttle body. The TPS is not a primary input switch on and off so the IAC valve can “learn” its position.
for air flow information in the closed loop system. It mainly Wait 5 seconds after turning the key ON. The system
provides “rate of change” feedback to the ECM (such as requires no scheduled maintenance beyond visual
rapid acceleration) and also serves as a plausibility check inspection of all hoses and electrical connections. NEVER
for the TMAP sensor. The MAP portion of the TMAP attempt to “adjust” idle speed with the throttle stop screw
sensor is the primary air flow and load sensing device. or flow balance screw (on RH end of throttle body). These
screws are factory pre-set. Any tampering will require
An electric fuel pump, mounted inside the fuel tank
throttle body replacement. If IAC cannot stabilize the idle,
supplies fuel pressure to the injectors continuously when
look for air leaks, air restrictions, or poor electrical
the engine is running or cranking. A pressure regulator
connections. View the Closed Loop Correction Factor data
incorporated on the pump keeps fuel pressure steady at
item in Digital Wrench (normal is .92-1.07). Higher
approximately 50 PSI (3.44 Bar). The fuel pump cycles
numbers could indicate an IAC or inlet manifold leak.
“ON” for 2-3 seconds when the ignition key and Engine
Stop switch are turned on to pressurize the system for Self-diagnostic Feature
start-up.
The ECM used on the Victory motorcycle stores trouble
The fuel injectors inject fuel when they are grounded by codes in memory. Trouble codes are stored by the ECM
drivers inside the ECM. The duration of the injector pulse when a sensor reading is outside of the normal or
(length of time the injector circuit is grounded) is “plausible” range. Codes are listed and described on
controlled by the ECM. Pulse duration determines the page 5.37. The ECM is located under the left side cover.
amount of fuel delivered to the engine (longer cycles = When a fault occurs, the ECM records a code in the
more fuel). The ECM selects the correct amount of fuel “Logged Faults” memory. If a fault is currently active, the
injector cycle time by referencing a three dimensional fuel code is also recorded in the ECM “Current Faults”
“map”. Simplified, each reference point on the map memory and remains until the fault is no longer occurring.
represents a different amount of time. If a problem is corrected, a “Current Fault” is erased, but
the code remains in “Logged Faults” memory until it is
Although TMAP and engine RPM are the most influential manually cleared using Digital Wrench. Logged faults
inputs for selecting a map reference point, the ECM also remain even if battery power is removed from the ECM.
evaluates feedback from minor sensors in the system, to
obtain a more accurate “picture” of the fuel needs at any Digital Wrench diagnostic software is the tool used to
given moment. interface with the EFI system by coupling to a diagnostic
port located under the left side cover. Whenever avail-
The locations of sensors and other EFI system related able, Digital Wrench should always be connected to a
components is shown on page 5.32. vehicle for more accurate problem diagnosis.
ECM Connector Map

Refer to page 5.39 to remove connector from ECM.
Viewing and Clearing Trouble Codes The check engine (“ENG”) warning may or may not
illuminate to alert the rider of a possible problem,
Trouble codes are logged in the ECM memory when a depending on the system fault. Following a check engine
sensor or other supported system fault occurs. To view light, perform a visual inspection to see if a cause can be
the codes, do the following: determined.
Viewing Trouble Codes Connect the Digital Wrench to see what codes are
present in memory, and focus your diagnostics on that
1. Connect the Digital Wrench diagnostic software and
sensor and the related wiring for that circuit. (Refer to
establish communication with the ECM.
wiring diagrams for ENG light circuits.
2. Select the icon to display loaded trouble
code(s). If multiple codes are set, refer to the wiring diagram and
focus your efforts on wiring and connections common to
3. The codes are classified as Current or Historical.
each of the sensors. Multiple sensor failure is extremely
Current codes are occurring at the moment. Historical
unlikely.
codes are not occurring at the moment but have
occurred in the past. A list of codes is on page 5.37.
The sensor tests described in this section are performed
Clearing Trouble Codes at the ECM wire connector. This method ensures that the
data from a sensor is reaching the ECM. Sensor tests can
1. Click on the “Clear Trouble Codes” icon to clear
be performed at the sensor if easily accessible, but the
trouble codes.
wiring between the sensor and the 60 pin ECM connector
should always be closely examined and tested if the
sensor itself passes the test.
Poor or corroded connections are the most common

cause of system faults. Always check the integrity of the
male pins and female receptacles of the connectors in the
affected circuit. These may include the sensor connector,
the ECM connector, and any in between the two such as
jumper harnesses or the Engine-to-Chassis harness 14
pin connector where applicable.
NOTE: CHASSIS TO ENGINE HARNESS

CONNECTOR (14 PIN)
Some sensor tests refer to the Engine Harness

Sensor Diagnostics - Important Information Connector (A) located behind the left sid
To Understand Before You Begin
If a sensor fails or reads outside a “normal” range, a “pre-

A
programmed” (default) value is substituted by the ECM
until sensor reading returns to normal.
Sensor values can be viewed in Digital Wrench® on the

“Sensor Data Grid Or Graphs” screen. Since the sensor
reading may either be actual feedback from the sensor
OR a default value set by the EM in the event of a fault in
the sensor or wiring, it is important to verify the condition
of the sensor.
Trouble Codes
Access codes by clicking on the icon on the Digital Wrenchdiagnostic screen.

Refer to Digital Wrenchguided diagnostics for detailed P-code description and
Code Access Icon troubleshooting. See page 5.35 for description of FMI / SPN codes and where they appear.
P-CODE
SPN FMI DESCRIPTION
NUMBER
P0107 Manifold Absolute Pressure sensor circuit voltage low - MAP portion of TMAP sensor circuit is
102 4
open, or shorted to ground.
P0108 Manifold Absolute Pressure sensor circuit voltage high - MAP portion of TMAP sensor circuit is
102 3
shorted to battery voltage. 5
P0112 Intake Air Temperature Sensor voltage low - Temperature portion of TMAP sensor circuit is
105 4
shorted to ground.
P0113 Intake Air Temperature Sensor voltage high - Temperature portion of TMAP sensor circuit is
105 3
open, or shorted to battery voltage.
P0117 110 4 Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor voltage low - circuit shorted to ground.
P0118 Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor voltage high - circuit open, or shorted to battery
110 3
voltage.
P0122 51 4 Throttle Position Circuit voltage low - TPS open, or shorted to ground.
P0123 51 3 Throttle Position Circuit voltage high - TPS shorted to battery voltage.
P0171 520204 17 Fuel Correction - system too lean Cyl 1 (Front).
P0172 520204 15 Fuel Correction - system too rich Cyl 1 (Front).
P0174 520205 17 Fuel Correction - system too lean Cyl 2 (Rear).
P0175 520205 15 Fuel Correction - system too rich Cyl 2 (Rear).
P0181C 520267 31 Kickstand Switch condition exists.
P0217 110 16 Engine Temperature Sensor - temperature too high.
P0231 1347 5 Fuel Pump Driver Circuit - open or shorted to ground.
P0232 1347 3 Fuel Pump Driver Circuit - shorted to battery +.
P0261 651 5 Injector 1 (Front Cylinder) driver circuit open or shorted to ground.
P0262 651 3 Injector 1 (Front Cylinder) driver circuit shorted to battery voltage.
P0264 652 5 Injector 2 (Rear Cylinder) driver circuit open or shorted to ground.
P0265 652 3 Injector 2 (Rear Cylinder) driver circuit shorted to battery voltage.
P0336 Crankshaft Position Sensor fault - missing tooth signal not detected in CPS signal within the correct
636 8
period of time.
P0443 520202 3 Canister Purge Valve - driver circuit short to battery +.
P0444 520202 5 Canister Purge Valve - driver circuit open or grounded.
P0503 84 2 Vehicle Speed Sensor - data erratic, intermittent, or missing.
P0508 520193 5 Idle Air Control (IAC) circuit or IAC motor shorted to ground.
P0509 520193 11 Idle Air Control (IAC) circuit or IAC motor open or shorted to battery voltage.
P0519 520193 7 Idle Air Control (IAC) position out of range.
P0562 System Voltage Low - System voltage too low after the engine has been running for a specific period
168 4
of time.
P0563 168 3 System Voltage High - System voltage above allowable limit.
P0914 523 2 Gear Position Sensor Signal - signal fault
P0916 523 4 Gear Position Sensor Signal - voltage too low
P0917 523 3 Gear Position Sensor Signal - voltage too high
P1217 110 0 Engine Temperature Sensor - engine overheat shutdown. (2009 only)
TABLE CONTINUED ON FOLLOWING PAGE
P-CODE SPN FMI DESCRIPTION

NUMBER
P1351 1268 5 Ignition Coil Primary Driver Cyl 1 (Front) - driver circuit open or grounded
P1352 1269 5 Ignition Coil Primary Driver Cyl 1 (Front) - driver circuit short to battery +
P1353 1268 3 Ignition Coil Primary Driver Cyl 2 (Rear) - driver circuit open or grounded
P1354 1269 3 Ignition Coil Primary Driver Cyl 2 (Rear) - driver circuit short to battery +
P1501 520200 2 Tipover Sensor (Rollover) - signal fault.
P1502 520200 4 Tipover Sensor (Rollover) - voltage low.
P1503 520200 3 Tipover Sensor (Rollover) - voltage high.
P1504 520200 14 Tipover Sensor (Rollover) - tipover condition detected.
P1651 1213 5 Check Engine Lamp (MIL) - MIL lamp driver circuit open or shorted to ground. (2009/2010 only)
P1653 1213 3 Check Engine Lamp (MIL) - MIL lamp driver circuit shorted to battery voltage. (2009/2010 only)
P1710 2369 5 Right Turn Indicator Driver Circuit - driver circuit open / grounded. (2009/2010 only)
P1711 2369 3 Right Turn Indicator Driver Circuit - driver circuit shorted to battery + (2009/2010 only)
P1714 2367 5 Left Turn Indicator Driver Circuit - driver circuit open / grounded. (2009/2010 only)
P1715 2367 3 Left Turn Indicator Driver Circuit - driver circuit shorted to battery + (2009/2010 only)
SPN / FMI Error Codes (Cross Country)

If the CHECK ENGINE (MIL) light is ON or when it goes 3. Refer to table above for a list of codes.
on and off during one ignition cycle (key on / key off cycle)
an ERROR message will appear after the normal LCD
Information Display functions (Miles, Trip 1, Trip 2, Miles
per Gallon, Average Speed, etc.). Use the MODE button
to toggle through the various normal display options and
view the ERROR message at the end.
The ERROR message consists of an FMI and an SPN
number.
Example: ERROR 14 - 520200 corresponds to FMI 3 /
SPN 520200 (and Trouble Code P1504) in the table
above for this combination. The best course of action is to
connect Digital Wrench to view logged codes directly and
use the guided diagnostics for that code; however, if
Digital Wrench is not available you can use the
description of the FMI / SPN code to determine which
system or component may be causing the code by
reading the description from the table.
NOTE: Error codes are not stored. The error screen will
only appear when the Check Engine light is ON. When
the key is turned off, the code and message is lost, but it
will reappear if the fault occurs again after starting the
engine.
To retrieve error codes from the display:
1. If the error codes are not displayed, use the mode
button to toggle until “Err” displays in the clock area.
2. Record the three code numbers displayed in the gear
position, temperature, and odometer displays.
ECM Harness Connector Test Precautions ECM Connector Removal

1. Remove left side cover (page 3.24).
NOTICE: Tests in this section may require reading
resistance and voltages at ECM connector. Once ECM NOTICE: The lock lever also serves as an eject / install
connector has been removed from the ECM: mechanism for the 60 pin connector. When removing or
installing the connector, you should pull or push lightly on
• Do not touch pins on the ECM. Static electricity the connector while sliding the lock lever to assist the
from your body can damage the ECM. mechanism, keeping the connector perfectly straight with
the ECM to prevent ECM pin or connector block damage.
• Do not attempt to perform tests on the ECM unit.
2. Clean the connector boot and surrounding area.
• Always use the appropriate test connector from the
Electrical Connector Test Adapter Kit (PV-43526). 3. Cut tie strap (A) and move the Engine-to-Chassis
harness connector aside.
5
• DO NOT attempt to use a standard meter probe or
other devices to probe the sockets in the ECM 4. Pull back protective boot from ECM connector.
connector. Doing so could expand the terminal
5. Pull connector lightly with one hand (arrow B) while
socket or damage the connector case, create a
sliding lock lever upward (arrow C).
problem where none existed before, and
complicate the diagnostic process. 6. Pull connector straight out of ECM.
• Sensor tests on the following pages can often be
performed at the sensor connector itself or at the
ECM connector based on accessibility of the
connector or wiring. C
• If a sensor tests within the specified range (OK),

A
then test the circuit wiring. This usually originates at
the ECM 60-pin connector, but may include other
connections (Engine-to-Chassis harness 14-pin
connector located under the seat). Be sure to B
check all easily accessed connectors and wiring
first, to reduce diagnostic time
ECM Connector Installation

1. Carefully align ECM connector straight with flange on
ECM. (Do not tip or pivot the connector when installing
it into the ECM).
2. Gently apply straight inward pressure on connector
while sliding lock lever downward until it stops and
connector is fully seated.
3. Install protective boot (if equipped).
4. Install a new tie strap through slot of the harness dart
and re-secure Engine-to-Chassis harness connector.
ECM Removal
1. Remove left side cover.
2. Remove the ECM connector (procedure above).
3. Pull outward at each corner of ECM to release darts.
EFI Sensor Circuit Wiring Diagrams
NOTE: IAC diagram is on page 5.44

Color Codes: OG = Orange; RD = Red;
BK = Black; DB = Dark Blue;
BN = Brown; DG = Dark Green
YE = Yellow; VT = Violet; GY = Gray
FUEL INJECTORS
LOCATION: Cylinder head.
WH / DB
WH / GY
VT / PK
DG/BK
VT/YE
RD / BK FUEL PUMP
LOCATION: Inside fuel tank.
RD
GY VT / BK
(TMAP SENSOR)
OG/DG
INTAKE AIR TEMP
BN/DB LOCATION: Integrated with MAP sensor.
BN/RD MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE

PRESSURE (MAP)
LOCATION: Rear cylinder inlet port; RH side.
OG/BN
GY/RD
GY/DB OXYGEN SENSOR

LOCATION: Exhaust head pipe.
EFI Sensor Circuit Wiring Diagrams
NOTE: IAC diagram is on page 5.44

Color Codes: OG = Orange; RD = Red;
BK = Black; DB = Dark Blue;
BN = Brown; DG = Dark Green
YE = Yellow; VT = Violet; GY = Gray
CRANKSHAFT POSITION
RD
SENSOR
Shield
LOCATION: Under timing cover (lower right 5
engine).
BK
OG / DB
CYLINDER HEAD TEMP
(CHT)
LOCATION: Front cylinder head, left side.
BN / DB
BN / RD
THROTTLE POSITION
SENSOR (TPS)
BN / DB
LOCATION: Left side of throttle body.
OG / YE
BK / WH
VT
DIAGNOSTIC CONNECTOR
YE LOCATION: Under left side cover.
DG
SENSOR TESTS
Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) Diagnostics
FAIL CODE: P0122 / P0123

INDICATES INSPECT LOCATION
Voltage received at ECM from TPS is outside of Resistance readings at ECM connector. Left side throttle
parameters. This test inspects TPS and wiring. body
To view and clear trouble codes refer to page 5.36. See page 5.35 for wire colors / pin number in connector.
1. Disconnect ECM 60 pin connector (page 5.39). 4. If results are outside of specifications, disconnect TPS.
2. Attach test lead adapters to meter leads and set DMM 5. Inspect wires for continuity from ECM connector to
selector to measure resistance. TPS connector. If any wire has no continuity or high
resistance, inspect wire harness.
3. Place test leads in open side of connector (not the
ECM) as indicated in chart below. 6. If good continuity exists, test TPS separately. Compare
to chart below.
TOP VIEW - ECM CONNECTOR (Wire side is shown - perform tests on other side)
Slide Latch
FRONT (BOOT AND WIRE COVER REMOVED)
METER TEST SPECIFICATIONS

COMPONENT
SETTING CONNECTIONS (+ 10%)
TPS signal (OG / YE) to +5 VDC 1000 - 5000 Ohm +/- 1K Ohm. Resistance changes
OHMS Pin #53 to #55
reference voltage (BN/RD) smoothly as throttle is opened and closed. No gaps.
TPS signal (OG / YE) to signal 1000 - 5000 Ohm +/- 1K Ohm. Resistance changes
OHMS Pin #53 to #46
return (BN/DB) smoothly as throttle is opened and closed. No gaps.
TPS +5 VDC reference wire (BN/ 1000 - 5000 Ohm +/- 1K Ohm.
OHMS Pin #55 to #46
RD) to signal return (BN/DB) NOTE: Reading does not change with throttle position
Red DMM lead to Re-connect ECM 60 pin connector. Disconnect TMAP
+5 VDC reference voltage pin 3 of TMAP sensor connector at the sensor. Turn key and stop
DC Volts
(BN/RD) sensor. Black to switch ON. Verify 5 Volts DC present at pin 3 of
ground. connector.
NOTE: Resistance readings may vary slightly from vehicle to vehicle. The important thing to remember
when testing the TPS is to look for a smooth, uninterrupted sweep between closed and open throttle.
Sweep can also be checked using Digital Wrench diagnostic software.
Temperature & Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor (TMAP) Diagnostics
FAIL CODE: P0107 / P0108 (MAP SENSOR COMPONENT OF TMAP SENSOR)

COMPONENT AFFECTED: Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor
INDICATES INSPECT LOCATED
Continuity of wires from ECM connector to TMAP connector at sensor.

Voltage received Check for +5 DCV at TMAP sensor BN / RD wire (ECM connector attached and On rear
at ECM from MAP Ignition key and stop switch ON.)
sensor is outside
cylinder head
intake port.
5
of parameters. Connect Digital Wrench for MAP sensor test. Approximate voltage examples:
~ 0.6 V @ 30 kPa
~ 1.0 V @ 50 kPa
1. Disconnect ECM 60 pin connector (page 5.39).
2. Disconnect TMAP sensor connector (push black tab).
3. Attach test lead adapters to meter leads and set DMM to measure resistance.
4. Place test leads in open side of connector (not the ECM) and measure resistance of each wire to the TMAP sensor
connector. Verify good continuity on each wire (example: pin 53 of ECM connector to pin 4 of the TMAP connector
should have less than .5 Ohm resistance).
5. Re-connect the ECM connector.
6. Turn key ON and turn engine stop switch to RUN.
7. Set DMM to measure DC Volts.
8. Test for 5VDC reference voltage at connector (see test in table below).
9. Check the MAP Sensor Volts and pressure in Digital Wrench. Voltage should be approximately 0.6 V @ 30 kPa,
(approximately 1.0 V @ 50 kPa), etc.
TMAP Sensor, 115 kPa

OG/DG
BN/DB
BN/RD
OG/BN

COMPONENT
SETTING CONNECTIONS (±10%)
Re-connect ECM 60 pin connector.
Disconnect TMAP connector from
Red DMM lead to sensor. Turn key / stop switch ON. Verify
+5 VDC reference voltage (BN/RD) to TMAP pin 3 of TMAP. 5 Volts DC present at pin 3 of connector.
DC Volts
connector. Black DMM lead to If Code 107 (Low voltage to MAP) code is
ground. present, jump pin 3 (5 V ref) to pin 4
(sigrtrn). Does code go out? If yes,
replace MAP Sensor. If no, check wiring.
Air Temperature Sensor (ATS) Diagnostics

COMPONENT AFFECTED: Air Temperature Sensor
INDICATES INSPECT LOCATED
Voltage received at ECM Resistance readings at ECM connector (ECM disconnected). On rear cylinder head
from ATS is outside of This test will inspect wiring, connectors, and Air Temperature intake port
parameters. sensor resistance. (in TMAP sensor).
1. Disconnect ECM 60 pin connector (page 5.39). 5. If reading is outside of specifications, disconnect air
temperature sensor connector and verify wires have
2. Attach test lead adapters to meter leads.
good continuity back to the 60 pin connector.
3. Set DMM to measure resistance.
6. If wiring is correct, measure the sensor resistance
4. Place meter leads in pins 38 and 46 of connector (not directly at the sensor. In addition, ATS data can be
the ECM) and compare to specification. viewed as a temperature value in Digital Wrench
diagnostic software. The sensor should display a
NOTE: Temperature of engine / sensor must be as
temperature close to ambient room temperature.
specified.
7. Replace TMAP sensor if out of specified range.
Slide Latch

COMPONENT
AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR signal

OHMS Pin #46 to #38 2.5 K Ohms +/- 5% at 20o C (68o F)
return (BN/DB) to OG /DG
Cylinder Head Temperature Sensor (CHT) Diagnostics

COMPONENT AFFECTED: Cylinder Head Temperature Sensor (Engine Temperature)
INDICATES INSPECT
Voltage received at ECM from CHT sensor is outside of Resistance readings through sensor and wiring at ECM
parameters. connector (ECM disconnected). This will test will inspect
the wiring, connectors, and CHT sensor resistance.
5
2. Attach test lead adapters to meter leads.
3. Set DMM to measure resistance.
4. Measure resistance between pin 46 and pin 39 of the
ECM connector and compare to specification.
5. If resistance is out of specified range, disconnect
sensor and measure the resistance through each wire
from ECM connector to the sensor connector.
Resistance should be less than 1 Ohm (good
continuity).
6. If continuity is good, measure the resistance through
the sensor and compare to specification.
Left Side View
Slide Latch

TEST # COMPONENT
CYLINDER HEAD
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
OHMS Pin #46 to #39 30.5 K Ohms +/- 13% @ 25o C (77o F)
Idle Air Control (IAC) be sure hoses are connected properly and securely when
Air leaks or air restrictions in the IAC air supply or delivery idle control problems exist. If an IAC code is present,
hoses will not cause a trouble code in the system, but are perform the following circuit tests.
the most common cause of idle control problems. Always

INDICATES INSPECT LOCATION
Connector pin visual inspection.
P0508 - IAC circuit or IAC motor shorted to ground. Continuity - Verify ECM to IAC motor IAC valve - under
P0509 - IAC circuit or IAC motor open or shorted to harness connector. fuel rail cover.
battery voltage. Verify battery voltage is supplied to (Upper right side
P0519 - IAC position out of range IAC motor on VT/PK wire triangular cover)
from Engine Relay.
DB / PK
DB / WH VT / PK
DB / OG
DB / RD

COMPONENT
SETTING CONNECTIONS (+ 10%)
ECM pin 6 to IAC
IAC Circuit Resistance OHMS Less than 1 Ohm
connector pin 3.
ECM pin 7 to IAC
connector pin 1.
ECM pin 8 to IAC
connector pin 6.
ECM pin 9 to IAC
IAC Circuit Resistance OHMS motor harness Less than 1 Ohm
connector pin 4.
DMM “+” lead to
Re-connect ECM 60 pin connector. Disconnect wire
Pin 2 or pin 5 of
Voltage Supply To IAC Motor harness from IAC motor. Turn ignition key and engine kill
DCV IAC harness (VT/
Harness Connector switch ON. Check for battery voltage at pin 2 and pin 5
PK). DMM “-” lead
of IAC motor harness connector.
to ground.
Vehicle Speed Sensor Test Memory Check Sum Error

To view and clear trouble codes refer to page 5.36. See To view and clear trouble codes refer to page 5.36. See
page 5.35 for wire colors / pin number in connector. page 5.35 for wire colors / pin number in connector.
1. Refer to Chapter 19 to test the speed sensor, located

on the crankcase behind the rear cylinder (A). FAIL CODE: P0601
COMPONENT AFFECTED: ECM
INDICATES INSPECT / ACTION
Module Memory Check Clear code and check to

Sum Error when installing see if code re-appears 5
new ECM.
NOTE: All new ECMs have the “Memory Check Sum

Error” at first power-up after the memory is loaded
A into the ECM. This code must be cleared when the
ECM is initialized. If this code appears when using
the diagnostic software, it is possible that a new ECM
was not cleared successfully. If this is the case, the
code may be present without an actual fault.
1. If Trouble Code message P0601 (Internal Control
Module Memory Check Sum Error) is present when
using the diagnostic software, first record any other
faults present, then try clearing the P0601 trouble
code.
Neutral Indicator Switch Test 2. If the code reappears, further inspection is required;
1. Refer to Digital Wrench and Chapter 19 to test the however, it is more likely the code was not cleared from
neutral indicator switch on the vehicle. The harness memory during initialization, and will not be present
connector is located at the top of the engine after it is cleared.
crankcase behind the side covers (near the speed
sensor).
Tipover Sensor
Refer to Chapter 19 and Digital Wrench for tipover sensor
information.
Crankshaft Position Sensor Diagnostics Battery Voltage At ECM Diagnostics

See page 17.10 for CPS test procedure.

COMPONENT AFFECTED: Battery Voltage to ECM
INDICATES INSPECT
Voltage received at ECM is outside of parameters. Vehicle Battery Voltage
1. Turn the DMM selector dial to measure DC volts. repeating test.

Measure open circuit voltage at battery (page 18.7).
6. Turn both ignition and engine stop switches OFF.
2. Battery voltage must be 12.5VDC or above. If below
7. Attach test lead adapters to the DMM leads, or use
12.5, charge or replace battery before proceeding.
Fluke accessory probes.
3. Check the 15 A Engine fuse.
4. Connect red (+) DMM lead to Pin A of the Engine-to-
9. Connect a jumper wire from Pin 11 in the ECM
Chassis wire harness connector (under LH side cover).
connector to ground. Verify battery voltage is present
Connect black (-) DMM lead to battery negative
on pins 1 and 31 when Pin 11 is grounded. If voltage
terminal.
is not present, test related wiring If voltage is present,
5. Turn ignition key ON and cycle the engine stop switch go to Step 10.
from OFF to RUN. Battery voltage should appear on
10. Check for power at ECM Pin 34 (for 2-3 seconds) with
Pin A for 2-3 seconds after the engine stop switch is
ignition key ON and engine stop switch set to RUN.
turned ON. To repeat the test, leave key ON and turn
stop switch OFF for at least 10 seconds before
Slide Latch
Connect Pin 11 to ground
Battery Voltage
DIGITAL WRENCH
Using Digital Wrench® Diagnostic Software
Refer to the Instruction Manual provided in the

Diagnostic Tool Kit PV-46085-B to install the Polaris
Digital Wrench® software on a laptop computer. Once
installed, select the HELP icon (?) for more
information.
Smart Link cable pin connections are shown on

page 5.49. 5
Tools
DIGITAL WRENCH DIAGNOSTIC SOFTWARE PART NUMBER
Victory/Polaris Diagnostic Tool Kit PV-46085-B
Digital Wrench Software: PU-47052-G
Standard Interface Cable: PU-47151
PV-46085-B (above) INCLUDES:
Victory Adapter: PV-46085-2
SmartLink Interface Kit: PU-47471
Fluke 73 Digital Multi-Meter or Fluke 77 DMM (Fluke 77 - PV-43568)
Laptop Computer (Refer to diagnostic software user manual Commercially Available
or HELP section for minimum specifications
Diagnostic Software Version ECM Replacement

Always be sure you are using the most current version of Although the need for ECM replacement is unlikely, a
Digital Wrench to ensure you have the latest specific replacement procedure is required to ensure that
enhancements. Reprogramming files are added to file all essential data contained within the original ECM is
sets as required for new models, new accessory kits, and transferred to the replacement ECM. Be sure to verify the
fuel/ignition map changes. For information on how to VIN number of the unit you are working on and the VIN
determine if you have the latest file set download number on the Vehicle Identification page of Digital
available, see Reprogramming Tips on page 5.54. Wrench are identical after reprogramming an ECU.
TPS Calibration Not Required Refer to procedure and carefully follow all instructions
provided in Digital Wrench.
The TPS does not require calibration in the closed loop
EFI system as in earlier systems, either as a baseline
setting component or after reprogramming of the ECM.
TPS Calibration is not a menu option in Digital Wrench for
2008 - current models.
Digital Wrench® Features Digital Wrench®Guided Diagnostics

Once connected to Digital Wrench, a variety of features Guided diagnostics are available within Digital Wrench for
are available for reference or to use as diagnostic tools. all supported Trouble Codes (that is, any fault that will
turn on the CHK ENG light).
You do not have to be connected to a vehicle to use the
help feature.
In addition, guided diagnostics are also available for
many other electrical sub systems.
Diagnostic modules are added to subsequent versions of

Digital Wrench as they become available. Check your
release version often and upgrade to be sure you’re using
the most current tools available.
Status: Help
“Connected”
Digital Wrench® Communication Errors
If you experience problems connecting to a vehicle or any

Digital Wrench related problem, visit the Digital Wrench
Knowledge Base for the most current troubleshooting
information, FAQs, downloads and software updates at:
http://polaris.diagsys.com/.
Vehicle specific service reports can be saved for future
reference, or electronically sent to Polaris using the
“Send Report” feature.
Victory dealers can access the Digital Wrench site by

Data grids with typical or “normal” sensor values can be visiting www.polarisdealers.com and clicking on the
saved for future reference. Some examples are shown on Digital Wrench Updates link in the Service and Warranty
the following pages. drop down menu.
Digital Wrench®Feature Map
Digital Wrench® Screen Examples
Cold engine at idle

during warm up.
Throttle partially open.

TPS voltage value
has increased.
Digital Wrench® Screen Examples
Warm engine at idle.

RPM has stabilized
Change the position of

various data items in the
table with these buttons.
5
Save data grid.
Meter Grid Display items
Reprogramming The Engine Control Module 2. DEDICATED LAPTOP: Best results are obtained using
(ECM) a laptop computer that is “dedicated to Polaris/Victory
service”. A laptop that is used by a variety of people
and in several applications around the dealership is
Process Overview more likely to cause a reprogramming problem than
The Digital Wrench® Engine Controller Reprogramming one dedicated to Digital Wrench® diagnostics only.
(or ”Reflash”) feature allows reprogramming of the ECM
fuel and ignition map. To successfully reprogram the 3. OBTAINING THE LATEST FILE SET:
ECM, an Authorization Key must be obtained by entering Reprogramming file sets are updated frequently and
a Request Code in the box provided on the Reflash contain the most recent calibrations for both Stock and
Authorization site. The Request Code is automatically Performance updates.
generated by Digital Wrench during the reprogramming
process. The Reflash Authorization site is located under To verify the version of Digital Wrench currently installed,
the Service & Warranty drop down menu on the dealer start Digital Wrench and check the right side of the screen
website at www.polarisdealers.com. just above the icon bar.
The Auxiliary Controller Reprogramming feature of Digital

Wrench allows reprogramming of the main radio, CB
radio, or Instrument Cluster in the same manner as the
ECM. See Chapter 19 for Auxiliary Controller
Reprogramming.
NOTICE: Failure to follow instructions completely can

result in an engine that does not run! Review all of the
Reprogramming Tips that follow to reduce the chance of
reprogramming problems.
Reprogramming Tips
The reprogramming feature is in the Special Tests menu Compare your version with the version listed in the
on the Digital Wrench® screen. Simply start Digital Downloads area at www.diagsys.com. If a later version is
Wrench and click on the Special Tests menu icon (the red available, follow the instructions to download the most
tool box). A technician should be familiar with this process current version of Digital Wrench.
and with computer operation in general before attempting
to reprogram an ECM.
If you have not yet installed the software, read the Install
Instructions in the Getting Started section of the
Diagnostic System Installation Guide and User Manual.
Laptops that fit the System Requirements guidelines
listed in the User Manual can be used for reprogramming.
Pay close attention to system requirements listed for the
Windows version on your laptop.
1. BATTERY VOLTAGE: The majority of problems with

reprogramming can be attributed to a low battery. Be
sure the battery voltage (no load) is at least 13 volts
and at least 12.5 volts with the key ON. It is
recommended to leave a constant rate battery
charger connected throughout the ECM
reprogramming process. If “Key ON” voltage is
marginal, it may help to remove the headlamp relay in
the fuse box.
4. CLOSE NON-ESSENTIAL PROGRAMS: 6. COMMUNICATION PROBLEMS: If you have had

Victory recommends that you DO NOT install non- problems communicating with a vehicle while
essential programs on a Service Department PC. performing diagnostic functions, do not attempt
Digital Wrench users should close all open software reprogramming until the cause has been identified and
applications before attempting vehicle diagnostics or fixed. Check all connections, and be sure battery
reprogramming an ECM. voltage is as specified in Step 1.
5. KNOW THE PROCESS: If you are not familiar with the Go to www.diagsys.com for specific information and
entire reprogramming process, review the HELP FAQs on how to troubleshoot communication
section of the diagnostic software before you attempt problems.
reprogramming. Click on the ? on the toolbar or press
F11. The information in the on-line help is the most
current and complete information available. This
5
should be your first step until you are familiar with the
process.
7. DON’T DISTURB THE PC: when a reprogramming is

in progress. Don’t move the mouse, and don’t touch the
keyboard. The process only takes a few seconds, and
is best left alone until complete.
8. You can select Vehicle Information from the Special
Tests menu to view the part number of the software
(map) installed when reprogramming is completed.
Reprogramming Process 6. Select the file you want to load into the ECM then click
CONTINUE to proceed to the Integrity Check and
If you are not familiar with the reprogramming process, obtain a Request Code.
review tips beginning on page 5.54 before you begin.
Following is an overview of the reprogramming process.
Follow the on-screen instructions as you progress
through the steps. If you encounter a problem, always
check the On-Line help for current tips and information.
1. Attach a battery charger to vehicle. (Chapter 16)

2. Connect the communication cable to the vehicle.
3. Start the Digital Wrench® program.
4. Select the year, product, and model from the menus,

then click the tool box icon to open the Special Tests
menu.
7. The Request Code will be required in the next step.
Copy the Request Code, making sure not to close
Digital Wrench or the Request Code will be invalid.
Please note that the Request Code consists of letters,
there are no numbers generated.
NOTE: Request Codes, Calibration I.D. numbers (for
accessory exhaust) and Authorization Keys must be
entered EXACTLY as they appear on the screen.
Authorization Key (obtained on the web)

goes here in Step 7.
5. Select Engine Controller Reprogramming.
Copy the Request Code required for

the web site
8. Go to www.polarisdealers.com and click on “Re-Flash 11. In the empty box provided on the screen, enter the 9
Authorization” from the Service and Warranty drop- digit Calibration I.D number from the card enclosed
down menu. with the accessory kit, then click “Continue”.
www.polarisdealers.com main menu NOTE: Stock reprogramming files do not require a
Calibration I.D. number. An Authorization Key will
appear after clicking the Authorize button in Step 9.
Service and
Warranty
5
Reflash Authorization
9. (See Ill. 3) Enter (or paste) the Request Code into the Enter the 9 digit Calibration I.D. number
box. from the card enclosed with the kit.
12. An 8-digit “AUTHORIZATION KEY” will appear in the

upper left corner of the screen. Copy this number
exactly as it appears, and enter it in the Authorization
Key box on the Digital Wrench® screen. Follow
Enter Request Code instructions provided on the screen to complete the
reprogramming procedure.
10. Select the same file type from the list that you selected
previously (e.g. Stage 1 H/JP Shotgun Pipe 2009 49
State...), and click the Authorize button to proceed to
the next screen.
Authorize Button
Enter the Request Code and select

the SAME file you selected previously
TROUBLESHOOTING
Fuel System Troubleshooting
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE AFFECTED PART(s) REPAIR RECOMMENDED
Engine turns over with Compression too low See engine section
electric starter, but won’t
start No spark at spark plugs See ignition system
No fuel reaching intake Out of fuel Add Fuel

tract Blown Fuse Replace
Plugged fuel filters / lines Clean/Replace
Fuel pump not working Test / Replace
Fuel pressure regulator Test / Replace
Faulty fuel pump relay Test / Replace
Open wiring / connector Inspect / Repair
Faulty connection at ECM Inspect / Repair
Excessively rich or lean Fuel pump Test / Replace

fuel mixture Fuel pressure regulator Test / Replace
Crank Position Sensor Test / Replace
Low Battery Test / Replace
TMAP sensor Test / Replace
CHT sensor Test / Replace
Fuel Injector Test / Replace
Spark at wrong time or Timing Wheel or CPS Install correctly, inspect for
no spark. Fuel delivery installed incorrectly, proper air gap (gap is preset
timing incorrect. damaged, or dirty; faulty but cover, sensor, and timing
CPS wheel must be clean and in
good condition).
Poor Idle / High Idle Excessively rich or lean Low Battery Voltage Inspect Battery & Charging
fuel mixture Air Leaks Inspect IAC system
Air restriction in IAC Inspect IAC hoses and fittings
Fuel Pump Inspect fuel pressure
Fuel injector or fuel rail Replace
obstructed or leaking
Air Filter Replace
Wrong Fuel / Old Fuel Inspect / Replace
Crank Position Sensor Inspect / Replace
Throttle Plates Remove carbon residue
Poor Running in Higher Air intake restriction Inspect

RPM Range Oil Overfilled Air filter Inspect oil level and condition
Ignition problems - Refer to ignition section.
Ignition Coil(s) / plug wires
Low Battery Voltage Battery Charge or replace
Loose, corroded, or wet ECM and wiring harness Unplug connections - inspect
connector(s)
Valve train problems Valve springs, valve, head Inspect cylinder head & valves
Fuel System Troubleshooting (cont.)
Engine Stalls Fuel Pump Problem Low battery voltage Battery/Charging system
Faulty fuel pump Check fuel pressure
No signal from ECM Repair Wiring
Wiring problem Repair/Chk Pump Relay
Excessive rich or lean TMAP Sensor Repair / Replace

fuel/air mixture Plugged fuel filter Replace
Fuel pump (pressure)
Fuel pressure regulator
Test / Replace
Test / Replace Pump Assembly
5
Vacuum leak Repair / Replace hoses
Wiring problem Repair
Air Filter Replace
Low battery voltage Ck battery & charging system
Control Circuit/Sensors Fuel pressure regulator Test Pressure / Replace

not functioning TPS Test / Replace
correctly Engine speed sensor Test / Replace
Fuel pump relay Test / Replace
Rotor Inspect / Install correctly
Fuse Replace
ECM Relay Replace
Low battery voltage ECM Inspect Charging system
Valve train problems or Refer to chapter 7

Compression low
Backfiring Low Battery Voltage Battery, spark plug fouled, Refer to battery section
Ignition Problem poor wire connection for Replace plugs / diagnose
ignition or fuel injection, Inspect wiring connections
loose pin in multi-pin
connector for ECM or Disconnect and check pin
wiring harness connections
Air leaks Inlet Manifold and Exhaust Seal inlet or exhaust leaks
IAC Hoses (NOTE: Air leaks at throttle body
can often be identified using
Digital Wrench to view the Closed
Loop Correction Factor data item.
Normal is between .92 and 1.07.
Higher numbers (1.25-1.35) could
indicate a leaking manifold.
Restricted air intake or Intake tract / Throttle body Clean air inlet tract and/or throttle
throttle body body / throttle plates.
Poor Running in upper Control Circuit/ Engine speed sensor Test / Replace
rpm ranges Sensors not TPS Test / Replace
functioning correctly Air temperature sensor Test / Replace
Manifold Absolute Test / Replace
Pressure sensor
Intermittent wiring / Repair/Replace
connector problem ECM
Test / Replace
Fuel delivery incorrect Plugged or kinked fuel and/ Repair/Replace

or vent hoses
Fuel pump Test / Replace
Fuel regulator Test Pressure / Replace
Fuel filter Test / Replace
Battery/Charging System Charge/Replace
Fuel Injector plugged Clean/Replace
Contaminated fuel (water, Clean/Replace
additives, etc.)
Inadequate octane Use correct fuel
Defective throttle valve Replace throttle body
Low battery voltage Charging system
Air intake restriction Dirty Air Cleaner Clean

Intake restriction Repair
Air Leak Throttle body gasket Repair/Replace

surfaces
Intake manifold Repair/Replace
Throttle body Repair/Replace
Engine lacks power Engine component See chapter 7, 8

problems See chapter 17
Ignition problems See chapter 2
Overfilled with oil
Improper fuel delivery Plugged fuel injector Replace

TPS Inspect / Replace
Dirty air cleaner Replace
Vacuum leaks Repair / Replace
Fuel pump Test / Replace
Fuel pressure regulator Test / Replace
Air temperature sensor Test / Replace
Engine speed sensor Test / Replace
TMAP sensor Test / Replace
Plugged vent hose Charge Battery / Replace
Low battery voltage ECM Test batt./Charging system
Test / Replace
Engine overheats Internal Engine Parts Cooling System Refer to chapter 4

Lubrication & Cooling Cooling System Refer to chapter 4
system
Low or incorrect oil Engine Oil Refer to chapter 3
Brakes dragging Brake systems Refer to chapter 15
Drive belt too tight Drive Belt Refer to chapter 3
Ignition timing incorrect Ignition Coils Refer to chapter 17
Faulty coolant
temperature sensor
Replace 5
Faulty engine Replace
speed sensor
Faulty ECM Replace
Spark plug(s) Heat range incorrect Replace
Low battery voltage Charging System Refer to charging section
Faulty Battery Replace
Faulty Wiring Repair
Lean Air/Fuel mixture Fuel pressure regulator Repair/Replace

vacuum hose kinked or
plugged
Air leak Repair
Fuel injector plugged Clean/Replace
Coolant temperature Replace
sensor
Vent hose plugged/ Repair
kinked
Air leak at throttle body to Repair
manifold seal
Won’t Accept New Non-Current Go to

Calibration Calibration File Set Dealer website (Victory Re-
Flash) and download the most
current Victory Calibration File
Set
Low Battery Voltage Attach Battery Charger

During Re-Flash, and Re-
Charge Battery When Re-Flash
Is Completed
Attempting Re-Flash Enter Authorization Code Sent

Without Proper VIN, With Accessory Kit
Calibration I.D. number,
or calibration
authorization code
NOTES
ENGINE REMOVAL & INSTALLATION
CHAPTER 6
OVERVIEW - ENGINE REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2

GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3
TORQUE VALUES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4
ENGINE MOUNTING - AIRBOX / MAIN FRAME ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4
ENGINE REMOVAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5
PREPARATION FOR REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5
PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5
6
REMOVAL PROCEDURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5
INJECTOR REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11
ENGINE INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12
PREPARATION FOR INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12
ENGINE ATTACHMENTS & NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.15

6.1
OVERVIEW - ENGINE REMOVAL

General
Swingarm removal is required to access the bolts that fasten the engine to the rear subframe on Cross Roads and
Cross Country models. The front wheel must be secured in the wheel vise of a motorcycle lift, the engine supported
securely on a platform lift, and the rear subframe supported with an overhead hoist or shop crane when the swingarm
is removed. In order to complete the work safely and correctly, be sure all special tools and equipment are available
before you begin. Arrange for assistance when removing and installing the engine.
Engine Mounting Plates PV-48737 must be installed and tightened before the engine is removed to maintain
alignment between the front and rear frame sections and simplify the engine installation process.
After engine is removed, the swingarm (and rear shock and strut) can be temporarily installed so motorcycle is self
supported. An engine stand is recommended for disassembly and assembly of engine.
Engine removal and installation methods may differ slightly depending on available equipment, but always be sure the
engine and chassis are securely supported at all times.
WARNING
Care should be taken to be sure the motorcycle will not tip or fall while elevated. Severe personal injury or
death could occur if the motorcycle or engine tips or falls.
REQUIRES ENGINE REMOVAL FOR SERVICE CAN BE SERVICED WITH ENGINE IN FRAME
Camshaft Regulator, Stator, Flywheel
Camshaft Chain / Guide / Tensioner Blade Cam Chain Tensioner
Crankcase Breather Reed Valve Clutch
Crankshaft & Crankshaft Component Service Fuel Injectors / Fuel Rail
Cylinder Heads Throttle Body
Valve Covers Ignition System
Oil Pump Output Shaft Seal
Oil Pump Drive / Balance Shaft Starter, Starter One-Way Clutch, Starter Torque Clutch,
Piston / Cylinder Gearshift Linkage and Gear Shift Mechanism
Transmission / All Internal Transmission Parts Torque Compensator Assembly
Specifications
ENGINE WEIGHT and OIL CAPACITY
Item Specifications
Engine Dry Weight Approximately 120 Kilograms (265 lbs)
Oil Capacity Approximately 4.75 Liters (5.0 Quarts)
Special Tools
ENGINE REMOVAL SPECIAL TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Item Part Number
Engine Mounting Plates PV-48737
Motorcycle table lift with wheel vise Commercially Available
Engine platform jack or platform lift Commercially Available
Overhead hoist or shop crane Commercially Available
Engine stand. Commercially Available

6

6.3
TORQUE VALUES
Engine Mounting - Airbox / Main Frame Assembly
ENGINE REMOVAL ENGINE INSTALLATION
(See page 6.5 for procedure) (See page 6.12 for procedure)
ENGINE REMOVAL OVERVIEW
PV-48737 ENGINE MOUNTING PLATES MUST BE INSTALLED
AND TIGHT BEFORE LOOSENING LOWER AND FRONT BOLTS
Rear Upper Bolts

82 ft-lbs (111 Nm)
M12 x 1.75 x 100mm
Airbox / frame
Rear frame
Lower Bolts
Front Bolts
45 ft-lbs (61 Nm)
82 ft-lbs (111 Nm)
M10 x 1.5 x 90mm
M12 x 1.75 x 90mm
Alignment pin location
35 ft-lbs (47.5 Nm)
ENGINE REMOVAL • Left passenger footrest, rear brake line clamp (A),
tie strap (B), and line guide (C) from swingarm.
• Rear brake line clamp (D) on left cradle (near

Preparation For Removal
sidestand mount).
A number of different methods can be used to
remove the engine depending on the equipment
available to the technician.
• Support motorcycle securely in an upright position

during engine removal. Clamp front tire securely
on a stable motorcycle lift and secure the front
wheel in the wheel vise.
• Clear the work area so rear and sides of

motorcycle are accessible with lift equipment. B C
6
D
A
Precautions
• Clean engine thoroughly before removal. Cover
openings during and after engine removal. • Remove oil cooler and lines (page 4.6).
• Disconnect clutch cable from lifter arm on primary
• Note routing of wires, cables and hoses. Refer to
cover (page 2.13) and remove cable from bracket.
routing diagrams throughout this manual for more
information. 2. Remove starter motor (+) cable from motor or
solenoid (E), ground wires (F), wires from load side of
• Always note the location of tie straps, dart straps,
circuit breaker (G), and brake light switch wires (H).
or any one-time-use fastener and replace with new
Disconnect Regulator/Rectifier 3-Pin connector from
parts in the same location upon assembly.
stator.
3. Remove (3) battery box screws (I) at front of left cradle

Removal Procedure and remove left cradle.
Remove the list of items in this general order. Refer page
listed for procedure. E
F
1. Remove:
• Side covers and seat (page 3.24).

• Saddlebags (page 3.25).
• Engine oil (page 2.2) and mufflers (page 3.35). H
• Ignition switch and IAC covers (page 3.5).
• Highway bars and horn bracket (page 3.21).
• Chin fairings (outer, inner, and rear) (page 3.20). G I
• Battery (page 2.20).

• Fuel tank and fuel line (page 5.15).
• Left footrest with shift linkage (page 3.31).
• Engine crankcase breather hose.
4. Remove right floorboard support bolts (J) then 10. Loosen front head pipe flange nuts (P) about two
remove rear master cylinder assembly from turns. Remove rear head pipe flange nuts (Q).
floorboard mount by removing bolts (K) and clip (L)
with clevis pin. Support master cylinder and reservoir. 11. Loosen clamp (R) and remove bolt (S) on left side.
Do not allow assembly to hang from brake lines.
P Q
R S
L NOTE: The exhaust header cross-over pipe is

J attached to a plate with an M6 allen screw on the left
K
rear corner of the engine (M5 drive head).
5. Remove left side cradle bolts (M) then remove cradle

with sidestand attached.
6. Open clip to release front head pipe oxygen sensor

wire. Disconnect sensor wire at harness connector
(do not attempt to disconnect wire from sensor).
7. Cut tie strap (N) that secures brake line to rear right
side of battery box.
8. Remove right side cradle bolts (O) then remove cradle

with battery box attached. Set assembly aside with
brake master cylinder, reservoir, and line supported.
12. Remove nut from right side of swingarm pivot shaft
Front that secures the right side passenger footrest bracket,
then remove the lower bracket fasteners.
LH 13. Pull rear head pipe outward to loosen front head pipe
RH Cradle clamp joint (R, above) then slide passenger foot rest
Cradle
bracket off swingarm pivot shaft and remove bracket.
14. Remove front head pipe flange nuts and remove head
pipe assembly.
M O
N
9. Disconnect rear oxygen sensor wire at harness

connector (do not attempt to disconnect wire from
sensor).
15. Loosen rear axle nut about 3 turns. Loosen belt 18. Disconnect IAC air supply hose (W) from frame, and
adjusters (T) equally on each side 2 - 3 turns. Tap air delivery hoses (X) from throttle body.
wheel / axle forward to remove belt tension.
W X
T
6
16. Remove drive sprocket cover and drive belt. 19. Push tab (Y) to disconnect IAC valve. Remove
bracket (M5 ball-drive allen), valve, and hoses.
20. Remove cables from bracket and throttle reel. The

bottom cable (Z) is the PULL cable and is darker in
color than the upper (PUSH) cable.
Cruise switch wires
(if equipped)
NOTE: Do not kink or twist the drive belt.

Z
NOTE: If you plan to disassemble the engine
crankcase, remove drive sprocket (page 11.5).
17. Remove ignition switch bracket with coil and switch

attached. Lift tab (U) to disconnect coil. Push tab (V)
to disconnect ignition switch.
SENSORS - LEFT SIDE and REAR ENGINE SENSORS - RIGHT SIDE
21. Push black tab (A) and disconnect the TPS harness 27. Push black tab (E) to remove TMAP sensor harness
from throttle body. from sensor.
28. Push white tab (F) to disconnect engine temperature
sensor.
A F
22. Slide oil pressure switch connector off switch and cut
tie strap (B) that secures the wire to the crankcase.
29. Secure wire harness out of the way of engine removal.
ENGINE REMOVAL FROM FRAME

30. Place a platform lift (commercially available) under
engine crankcase and lift engine just enough to
B support the engine (do not elevate wheel or frame).
23. Push black tab on left side of connector to disconnect

speed sensor (C).
24. Push white tab to disconnect gear position sensor.
25. Lift black tab to separate CPS harness.
26. Remove ground wire screw (D) near clutch cable
bracket.
31. Remove upper rear engine mount bolts and plates.
32. Install Engine Mounting Plates PV-48737 in place of 35. Remove the swingarm pivot shaft nut and washer
original upper rear engine mount plates using four of from the RIGHT side.
the 5 bolts removed in previous step (see page 6.3).
NOTE: The (4) lower engine mount bolts will contact
33. Torque all bolts to 82 ft-lbs (111 Nm). the swingarm and cannot be removed until
swingarm is removed.
PV-48737
36. Support the rear frame with a shop crane or an

overhead hoist. Be sure the front wheel is secured in
the wheel vise, and the engine is properly supported
and secured on the platform lift.
37. Remove lower shock bolt and lower strut bolt (G).
34. After PV-48737 plate fasteners are tightened, remove

front upper engine mount bolts and plates.
38. Push swingarm pivot shaft out with a suitable drift, and 44. Lift red lock tab on injector harness connector. Push
lower the front of the swingarm to the work bench. black tab to remove harness from injector. Be sure
injectors are aligned properly after re-connecting
39. Completely remove the (4) lower rear engine mount wires upon installation (see Chapter 5).
bolts (H) with a 16mm socket.
1. Lift red lock tab

H
2. Push black tab
40. When all fasteners have been removed, ensure all 45. Lower the engine and remove out the right side.
hoses, wiring and other components have been
disconnected or removed. 46. Cover any openings with a clean shop towel to
prevent contamination.
NOTE: Injector wires are easier to disconnect,
reconnect, and secure to the fuel rail when engine 47. Temporarily re-install swingarm, shock, and strut if
and throttle body are lowered out of the air box / necessary so vehicle can be moved.
frame. It is not necessary to disconnect the injector
wires at this time. NOTE: Attach engine securely to an engine stand to
prevent damage and for ease of disassembly. Use
41. Slowly lower engine and move it forward slightly to spacers as needed for stand you are using. If
release engine from rear crankcase alignment pins. crankcases will be separated, use two left crankcase
mounts only.
42. When engine is free of frame and alignment pins,
carefully lower it enough to allow throttle body adaptor
to clear the airbox/frame assembly. Place clean shop
towels in the intake to prevent contamination.
43. With engine lowered, cut tie straps (I) that secure the
front and rear injector wire harness to the fuel rail.
I
I
Injector Removal
IMPORTANT: Debris could have collected in and
around injector cavities. If injector removal is
required, clean cavity and surrounding area with
compressed air before removing injectors. If
removed, injectors must be indexed properly to the
fuel rail (aligned) to ensure proper spray pattern.
See Chapter 5 for injector installation.
ENGINE INSTALLATION 4. Connect both front and rear injectors.
Preparation For Installation NOTE: White / Gray injector wire is Rear cylinder;
White / Blue is Front cylinder.
Refer to page 6.4 for torque values and assembly views.
5. Route front injector wire harness along top of fuel rail
toward throttle reel. Secure harness to the fuel rail with
CAUTION a tie strap (A) located about 6mm (1/4 inch) past the
IAC fitting, on the throttle reel side.
Arrange for assistance when installing engine.
The engine must be held securely and aligned
properly to prevent damage to engine, frame,
wiring, or hoses. The engine is very heavy and
could cause severe personal injury if not handled
properly. Be sure engine is properly supported
before proceeding.
IMPORTANT: Be sure alignment pins are in place on

engine crankcase.
Installation Procedure
A
1. Clean mating surfaces of rear sub frame and engine
crankcase. Lightly grease the alignment pins.
2. Move engine on a table lift into position through 6. Route rear injector wire harness along top of fuel rail
RIGHT side. toward throttle reel. Secure harness to the fuel rail with
a tie strap (B) located about 6mm (1/4 inch) past the
3. Move the lift until the throttle body adaptor is centered IAC fitting, on the throttle reel side.
and aligned under the air box seal.
7. Attach a shop crane or an overhead hoist to the rear

frame section.
8. Remove swingarm pivot shaft and lower shock and

strut bolts (if they were re-installed after engine
removal) and lower the swingarm to the work bench.
9. Apply a rubber lubricant (sparingly) or a light film of oil

to the throttle body adaptor and air box seal.
10. Raise engine until throttle body adaptor (C) is fully 13. Tighten rear engine mount bolts to draw engine flat
engaged and flush with the airbox seal (D). Be sure against sub frame and onto alignment pins.
seal is not rolled, folded, or misaligned.
14. Tighten all 4 bolts to 45 ft-lbs (61 Nm).
D
6
45 ft-lbs (61 Nm)
C 15. Grease right side swingarm needle bearing and both

seals, and install bearing sleeve.
16. Be sure stepped spacers are in place on the spherical

11. Use the crane or overhead hoist to adjust the height bearings on the swingarm (for lower shock and strut
of the rear frame section and align the rear mounting mounts).
bolt holes.
17. Lift swingarm while aligning lower shock and strut
clevis over the stepped spacers and spherical
bearings. Install bolts and loosely install nuts.
12. When alignment is correct, install all (4) lower rear

bolts.
CAUTION
Be sure engine is aligned at the proper height and angle
with the bolt holes. DO NOT force engine alignment
using the mounting bolts or the crankcase threads, rear
sub frame, or alignment pins may be damaged!
Adjust engine height and angle continuously as required
while drawing up the bolts.
18. Raise or lower the rear crane or overhead hoist as 23. Torque all front mount bolts to 82 ft-lbs (111 Nm).
required to align the swingarm with the pivot shaft
bore on frame, and install the pivot shaft.
82 ft-lbs (111 Nm)
19. Install washer and nut on right side of pivot shaft.
Torque nut to 65 ft-lbs (88 Nm).
24. Remove the PV-48737 Engine Mount Plates from the

upper rear mount.
65 ft-lbs (88 Nm)
25. Install original rear upper engine mount plates and
tighten all bolts evenly hand tight.
20. Torque lower shock and strut bolts to 60 ft-lbs (80
Nm). 26. Torque all upper rear mount bolts to 82 ft-lbs (111
Nm).
27. Install M6 screw (E) in top of side panel on each side

48 in-lbs (5.4 Nm).
60 ft-lbs (80 Nm)
21. Lower and remove the rear frame crane or hoist. E

22. Install front upper engine mount plates. 82 ft-lbs (111 Nm)
28. Remove platform jack or platform lift.
Engine Attachments & Notes 34. Loosely install front left and right frame cradles with
alignment pins (G) and M10 bolts (H).
29. Route oil pressure sensor wire behind engine and
toward the sensor on the left rear crankcase. Attach 35. Move rear brake line, battery box, and master cylinder
sensor wire to sensor and secure it to the left rear to general mounting location.
crankcase with a tie strap through hole (F) provided.
36. Install a new dart strap for brake line (if removed) to
right rear side of battery box.
F
37. Loosely install (3) screws (I) & (J) through front of each
frame cradle to battery box.
22 in-lbs
(2.5 Nm)
J 19 ft-lbs
Front
(25.7 Nm) 6
I
85 in-lbs
(9.6 Nm)
30. Install throttle cables onto cable bracket (dark cable

is PULL cable and located on the bottom). Torque
nuts to 48 in-lbs (5.4 Nm). Adjust cable free play 48 in-lbs
(page 2.11). (5.4 Nm)
H
31. Connect cruise cable to throttle reel (if equipped) and
snap cable securely into bracket. 35 ft-lbs G H
(47.5 Nm)
32. Route wire harnesses to general location and
connect:
- Ground wires to left rear crankcase 87 in-lbs (9.8 38. Fully tighten left and right frame cradle bolts (H) to
Nm). engine.
- Engine temperature sensor
- TMAP sensor 39. Fully tighten left and right battery box screws (I & J).
- CPS
- Speed sensor 40. Install starter motor lead and torque to 60 in-lbs (6.8
- TPS Nm).
- Horn and bracket
41. Install regulator/rectifier to engine (if removed) and
33. Install engine breather hose. torque fasteners to 85 in-lbs (9.6 Nm). Connect 3-Pin
stator connector.
42. Install harness ground wires and regulator rectifier

ground wire to engine. Torque screw to 85 in-lbs (9.6
Nm).
43. Attach removed wires to circuit breaker terminal and

torque nut to 25 in-lbs (2.8 Nm).
44. Install oil cooler (page 4.6). 52. Install clutch cable to bracket on crankcase 48 in-lbs
(5.4 Nm) and connect cable to lifter arm.
45. Install drive sprocket (if removed). Torque to 180 ft-
lbs (244 Nm). (See Chapter 11). 53. Install rear brake line guide to swingarm (K) and line
clamp (L) to left frame cradle.
46. Install drive belt and sprocket cover. Torque cover
bolts to 85 in-lbs (9.6 Nm). 54. Install rear master cylinder onto brake pedal support.
Torque mounting bolts (M) to 18 ft-lbs (24.4 Nm).
NOTE: Drive belt is installed with “VICTORY”
readable from right side. Do not kink or twist the
New M
drive belt.
18 ft-lbs
47. Adjust belt tension and tighten axle nut (page 2.26). (24.5 Nm)
48. Install new exhaust head pipe gaskets.
49. Install head pipe assembly along with right side

passenger footrest bracket as an assembly.
50. Loosely install head pipe flange nuts, lower footrest L K

bracket bolt, and footrest bracket nut with washer. 60 in-lbs 96 in-lbs 60 in-lbs
(6.8 Nm) (10.8 Nm) (6.8 Nm)
51. Tighten fasteners in the following sequence:
- Draw rear head pipe bracket (A) against crankcase
with lower passenger footrest fastener (B) then back 55. Install right floorboard assembly. Torque bolts (N) to
off fastener 1/4 turn. 35 ft-lbs (47.5 Nm).
- Tighten head pipe flange nuts (C) evenly.
- Tighten footrest bracket nut (D).
- Tighten lower footrest bracket fastener (B).
- Tighten head pipe clamp (E).
- Tighten screw (F).
- Install mufflers with shields (page 3.35).
65 ft-lbs
(88.0 Nm) D
N
35 ft-lbs
12 ft-lbs (47.5 Nm)
35 ft-lbs (16.3 Nm)
(47.5 Nm) B
C
96 in-lbs
12 ft-lbs (47.5 Nm)
C (16.3 Nm)
F
A
E 31 ft-lbs (42.0 Nm)
56. Install left floor board assembly with shift arm. 63. Secure engine and chassis wire harness to left upper
engine mount plate with a tie strap (Q).
64. Two tie straps secure upper and lower branches (R)
of harness under left side cover.
84 in-lbs
(9.5 Nm) Q
35 ft-lbs
(47.5 Nm)
R
6
57. Install battery (page 2.21).
58. Apply dielectric grease to battery terminals and

connect battery cables. Torque terminal bolts to 40 in-
lbs (4.5 Nm). 65. Install saddlebags (page 3.26).
59. Install chin fairings (page 3.20). 66. Install new oil filter and fill crankcase to proper level
with Victory engine oil (Chapter 2).
60. Install highway bars (page 3.21).
67. Inspect operation of all cables and controls and adjust
61. Install fuel tank (page 5.16). (Chapter 2).
62. Secure clutch cable with a tie strap to upper right 68. Add fuel to fuel tank and prime fuel system
engine mount bracket with lower wire harness (O) and (page 5.14).
evaporative emission purge valve hose (P) (California
models). 69. Start engine and inspect for oil leaks.
70. Pump front brake lever and rear brake pedal to seat
pads against disc. Test brakes to be sure operation
and pedal pressure are normal. Bleed brake system
O if necessary (Chapter 15).
71. Test ride motorcycle; check all systems for proper

operation.
72. If equipped with Cruise Control, perform cruise control

cable “Lash Learn” procedure (Chapter 19) and test
ride to verify proper operation of the cruise control set
P speed and cancel functions.
73. When test ride is completed, again check entire

vehicle and engine for fluid leaks and be sure all
fasteners have been properly tightened.
74. Inspect oil level and adjust if necessary.
NOTES
CYLINDER HEAD & VALVE TRAIN
CHAPTER 7
IMPORTANT NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2
DATA - CYLINDER HEAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3
TORQUE VALUES AND ASSEMBLY VIEWS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4
CAM DRIVE & VALVE COVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4
CAMSHAFT CARRIER / ROCKER ARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5
CYLINDER HEAD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6
CAMSHAFT TIMING QUICK REFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7
CYLINDER HEAD SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.8
CAMSHAFT DRIVE COVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.8
VALVE COVER REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.8
VALVE COVER INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.8 7
CAM CHAIN TENSIONER REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.8
CAM CHAIN TENSIONER INSPECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.9
CAM CHAIN TENSIONER INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.9
CAMSHAFT CHAIN & SPROCKET REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.10
CAMSHAFT CARRIER REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.11
ROCKER ARM & SHAFT INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.11
CAMSHAFT INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.12
CYLINDER HEAD REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.12
CYLINDER HEAD DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.13
CYLINDER HEAD INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.14
VALVE SPRING FREE LENGTH INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.14
VALVE INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.15
VALVE INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.16
VALVE GUIDE REMOVAL / INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.17
VALVE SEAT INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.18
VALVE SEAT RECONDITIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.18
CYLINDER HEAD ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.19
CYLINDER HEAD ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.20
CYLINDER HEAD / CAMSHAFT INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.21
CAMSHAFT TIMING - REAR CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.23
CAMSHAFT CHAIN GUIDE INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.23
CAMSHAFT TIMING - FRONT CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.24
TROUBLESHOOTING, CYLINDER HEAD AND VALVE TRAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.27
GENERAL INFORMATION
Important Notes
• This section covers service of the cylinder heads, camshafts, cam chains and tensioners, cam chain guides and
rocker arms. Cam chain tensioners can be serviced with the engine in the frame. Most other cylinder head
components require engine removal.
• Refer to Chapter 6 for engine removal and installation.
• If cylinder heads are removed the cylinder base gasket must be replaced also.
• Head and base gasket replacement is recommended if camshaft carrier fasteners are loosened or removed.
The 1-piece camshaft carrier design on these engines uses common fasteners for the carrier, the cylinder head,
and the cylinder.
• Mark and store all mating parts for correct engine assembly.
• Use Moly Assembly Paste P/N 2871460 or Victory Semi-Synthetic 20W/40 Engine Oil P/N 2872176 to lubricate
parts where indicated.
• Handle and store all parts in such a way that they will not be damaged or contaminated.
• Some fasteners have a pre-applied locking agent, and must be replaced if loosened or removed. Always
replace fasteners that have a pre-applied locking agent or as directed in this service manual.
• There are some precision machining steps to be performed in this section. If you are not sure of your
capabilities in these areas, have a competent machinist perform these operations.
• Valve guide and seat reconditioning should be performed by a technician proficient in cylinder head
reconditioning techniques using high quality equipment with grinding stones. Do not attempt cylinder head
repair without the proper equipment or experience in cylinder head reconditioning techniques.
• The intake and exhaust valves cannot be re-faced.
• Cleanliness of parts is critical to engine life and accurate parts inspection. Use clean solvent to clean all
disassembled parts. Dry parts with compressed air and lubricate before engine inspection and engine assembly.
Special Tools
• Valve Spring Compressor PV-1253 or PV-4019 with adapter PV-43513-A
• Crankshaft Rotation Socket PV-48736
• 8mm or 5/16 pin punch (Commercially available)
• Engine lock Tool: PV-43502-A
DATA - CYLINDER HEAD

Specifications
CYLINDER HEAD
Valve Train Single Overhead Cam / 4 valves per cyl 2
Intake valves / 2 Exhaust valves
Intake Valve Opens At 1 mm Lift 1o BTDC
Intake Valve Closes At 1 mm Lift 27o ABDC
Exhaust Valve Opens At 1 mm Lift 33o BBDC
Exhaust Valve Closes At 1 mm Lift -5 ATDC (5o BTDC)
o
Max Lobe Lift (In / Ex) 7.26 mm / 7.07mm

Max Valve Lift (In / Ex) 10 mm / 10 mm

Item
Cam Chain Tensioner (Hydraulic)
Standard
-
Service Limit
-
7
Lobe Height IN 40.259 mm (1.5850") 40.159 mm (1.5811”)
EX 40.060 mm (1.5772") 40.02 mm (1.5732”)
Cam Shaft Oil Clearance .036 mm to .086 mm ( .0014" to .0034")
Journal O.D. (Small) 23.96 - 23.98 mm (.943 - .944" ) 23.93 mm (.942”)
Journal O.D. (Large) 48.464 - 48.484 mm (1.9080 - 1.9088") 48.434 mm (1.9068”)
Cylinder Head Warpage (Distortion) - .10 mm max. (.004”)
Rocker Arm Bore I.D. IN/EX 12.01 - 12.03 mm (.473 - .474") 12.065 mm (.475”)
Rocker Arm, Shaft, Rocker Arm Shaft O.D. IN/EX 11.974 - 11.986 mm (.471-.472") 11.944 mm (.470”)
& Lifter Rocker Arm to Rocker Arm .024 - .056 mm (.001 - .0022") .156 mm (.006”)
Shaft Clearance IN/EX
Valve Clearance Hydraulic/Self Adjusting -
Valve Guide Installed Height 12.2-12.8mm (.480-.504") 41.40 mm (1.630”)
(See illustration on page 7.19)
Valve Stem O.D. IN 6.953 - 6.973 mm (.2737 - .2745") 6.933 mm (.2729”)
EX 6.950 - 6.970 mm (.273 - .274") 6.928 mm (.2727”)
Valve Stem Deflection - .13 mm max. (.005”)
Valve, Valve Guide, Valve Seat Width Intake 1.2 mm (.047") -
Valve Seat Valve Seat Width Exhaust 1.75 mm (.068") -
Valve Stem Runout - .13 mm max. (.005”)
Valve Head Radial Runout - .05 mm max. (.002”)
Valve Installed Height INTAKE: 49.31 - 50.31 mm --
(See illustration on page 7.19) (1.941 - 1.981")
EXHAUST: 48.78 - 49.78 mm
(1.920 - 1.960")
Valve Spring Free Length IN/EX 43.36 mm ( 1.708" ) 41.40 mm (1.630”)
Intake Valve Maximum Lift 10.0 mm ( .393" ) --
Exhaust Valve Maximum Lift 10.0 mm ( .393" ) --
Spring Installed Height 34.20 - 36.20 mm --
(See illustration on page 7.19) (1.346 - 1.425")
TORQUE VALUES AND ASSEMBLY VIEWS

Cam Drive & Valve Cover
115 in-lbs (13 Nm)

Repeat Torque
Sealant bead UP
10.8-14.5 ft-lbs (14.6-19.5 Nm)

(New plugs - with anti-seize
compound applied to threads)
120 in-lbs (13.5 Nm)
Cam Chain Tensioners

55 ft-lbs (75 Nm)
100 in-lbs (11.3 Nm)
Sealant bead
toward cover
115 in-lbs (13 Nm)
Repeat Torque
100 in-lbs
(11.3 Nm)
Clean with isopropyl alcohol 17 ft-lbs (23 Nm)

Align slot with tab on cover
Apply firm pressure (40-60 psi) for 30 seconds
Allow 24 hour cure
Camshaft Carrier / Rocker Arm

After assembly, rotate cams back and forth slightly to verify free rotation. Allow time for lifters to bleed
FRONT down before performing this inspection.
60 in-lbs
(6.8 Nm).
Solid pin - install
chamfered end first.
7
“F” (FRONT)
Camshaft - Install with  Tighten head nuts slowly and evenly

lobes down. Refer to to allow lifters to bleed off pressure
page 7.21 for
camshaft installation.  Tighten only enough to seat carrier.
Follow cylinder head torque procedure
on page 7.21-7.22.
Solid pin - install

REAR chamfered end first.
Camshaft - Install with
lobes down. Refer to
60 in-lbs page 7.21 for
(6.8 Nm). camshaft installation.
“R” (REAR)
 Tighten all head nuts slowly and evenly to allow lifters to bleed off pressure
 Tighten only enough to seat carrier. Follow cylinder head
torque procedure on page 7.22
Cylinder Head
See page 7.22 for cylinder Temp Sensor

head torque procedure. (Front Cylinder Head Left Side)
IMPORTANT! Gaskets and gasket 10 ft-lbs (13.5 Nm)
surfaces must be oil free. Loctite 565 or Pipe Sealant
(Replace sensor if removed)
15 ft-lbs
(20 Nm)
Damper on front
tensioner only
“R”
55 ft-lbs (75 Nm) Studs 8/9 mm

15 ft-lbs (20 Nm)
Studs 10/11 mm
25 ft-lbs (34 Nm)
Apply Loctite 598 to crankcase parting line below

base gasket. Assemble immediately.
Camshaft Timing Quick Reference

Use this page as a reference ONLY if you are familiar with the cam timing procedure.
Refer to Page 7.23 for complete camshaft timing procedure
The illustration below shows final cam timing configuration.
The rear cylinder has been timed and the crankshaft rotated 410 from rear TDC.
Twin marks indicate the crankshaft has been

rotated 410 from rear TDC cam timing.
Rear Cylinder Front Cylinder
Gasket Surface
Rear Camshaft Sprocket Marks Parallel

To Gasket Surface Front Camshaft
NOTES
Rear camshaft must be timed first.
Install rear tensioner (marked “R”).
Rotate crankshaft CLOCKWISE
(viewed from right side) 410
to FRONT cylinder TDC,
then time front camshaft Key way aligned with front cylinder
as shown above crankshaft/camshaft centerline
Front cylinder TDC hole Rear cylinder TDC hole
Ill. 1
Valve Cover Removal

CYLINDER HEAD SERVICE
1. Engine removal is required. Refer to Chapter 6.
Camshaft Drive Cover
2. Remove all valve cover screws.
1. Remove cam drive cover.
3. Tap cover with a soft faced hammer until loose.
2. Remove CPS timing wheel.
4. Remove cover and gasket.
Valve Cover Installation

1. Install gasket with sealant bead UP (toward cover) on
clean, dry surfaces.
2. Install all screws and tighten evenly in a cross pattern.
115 in-lbs (13 Nm)
3. Place shop towel in cavity below cam drive sprocket to

prevent objects from falling into crankcase.
Cam Chain Tensioner Removal
CAUTION
Do not rotate engine with tensioner(s) removed.
1. Remove tensioner body (A), sealing washer (B) and

damper sleeve (C) (damper on FRONT cylinder only).
2. Inspect tensioner parts.
4. Rotate engine to front or rear TDC using Crankshaft

Front Cam Chain Tensioner
Rotation Tool PV-48736.
5. Insert 8mm (5/16) pin at front or rear cylinder TDC to
prevent engine rotation. See page 7.7
Front tensioner only
CAUTION
Do not rotate engine with cam chain tensioner(s) A

removed.
B
C
Cam Chain Tensioner Inspection Cam Chain Tensioner Installation

1. Visually inspect inner plunger (A) for damage, scoring, 1. Lubricate all parts with engine oil.
or burrs.
2. Lubricate inner plunger with engine oil. Move plunger 2. Install damper (C) squarely into tensioner bore in
in and out of outer plunger (B) to check for smooth cylinder, and push it past the first 4 or 5 threads.
movement without binding.
3. Inspect damper (C) on FRONT tensioner. It should slip
over inner plunger with noticeable drag, not a loose fit.
4. Replace tensioner assembly or damper if worn or
damaged.
A B
7
3. Install tensioner body with a new sealing washer.

C
4. Torque tensioner body to 55 ft-lbs (75 Nm).
Camshaft Chain & Sprocket Removal 7. Remove tensioner blade bolt (C) and guide bolt (D).
1. Remove engine from frame (Chapter 6).
2. Remove camshaft drive cover and CPS timing wheel C D

(page 7.8).
3. Rotate crankshaft clockwise, past TDC on the

compression stroke for front cylinder until bottom
sprocket bolt (A) is accessible and remove it.
Crankshaft Rotation Socket: PV-48736
A
8. Remove cam chain and sprocket from camshaft and
lower it between tensioner blade and guide, then
remove chain from drive sprocket on crankshaft.
9. Lift chain, sprocket, tensioner blade, and guide out of

engine.
10. Repeat steps for rear cylinder.
4. Rotate crankshaft clockwise back to front cylinder TDC

(camshaft marks aligned with cylinder head surface)
and remove top sprocket bolt (B).
5. Remove front cam chain tensioner (page 7.8).
6. Remove lower cam chain guide (below drive sprocket).
Camshaft Carrier Removal Rocker Arm & Shaft Inspection

NOTE: Keep mated parts together. Mark parts as 1. Remove button head screw (B) and pin (C). Slide
required to keep them in order. camshaft out of carrier.
1. Loosen camshaft carrier / cylinder head nuts (A) 1/2
2. Remove dog point screws (D) and tap rocker shafts out
turn at a time using a cross pattern until loose.
of carrier.
3. Visually inspect rocker arms and rocker arm shafts for
A
wear, scoring, or damage.
4. Inspect all oil passages and clean thoroughly. Use only
clean solvent. Do not allow debris to contaminate
hydraulic lifters or rocker arms.
5. Rocker arm should fit tightly on shaft without excessive
play, and rotate smoothly on shaft without binding.
6. Check roller for radial movement. Roller should have
no noticeable radial movement (E).
7. Apply light pressure to roller with a flat piece of bar
7
stock and draw the stock over the roller while observing
movement. Roller should not stop, drag, or bind.
2. Remove carrier nuts and washers, then remove carrier
with camshaft and rocker arms as an assembly. Bar stock
8. Measure O.D. of each rocker arm shaft (F) and

compare to specification.
9. Measure I.D. of each rocker arm (G).
10. Subtract rocker arm shaft O.D. from its matching
rocker arm I.D. to determine clearance. Compare to
specification on page 7.3.
3. Note markings “F” or “R” on drive end of camshafts. E

G
Front and Rear cylinder heads use different camshafts.
B
F
C
11. Replace parts worn beyond service limits.
Camshaft Inspection Cylinder Head Removal

1. Visually inspect camshaft journal surfaces (A) for 1. Remove engine (Chapter 6), valve covers (page 7.8),
scoring or signs of insufficient lubrication. Replace and camshaft sprockets (page 7.10).
camshaft if heavy scoring or damage is noted.
2. Remove camshafts (page 7.11).
3. Remove cylinder head nuts and washers (A).
4. Remove cylinder head (B) head gasket (C) and

alignment pins (D).
A
A
2. Measure O.D. of each camshaft journal.
3. Inspect height of each cam lobe.
Cylinder Head Disassembly 2. Remove upper valve spring retainers (B), springs (C),
and valves (E).
CAUTION
Wear eye protection while removing valve springs.
NOTE: Keep mated parts together for assembly. It is

important to put cylinder head parts back in the same
location.
Valve Spring Compressor: PV-1253 (or PV-4019 with

adapter PV-43513-A)
1. Remove the valve keepers (A) using a valve spring
compressor tool. Use a pencil magnet to remove valve
keepers.
3. Remove and discard valve guide seals (D). 7

4. Clean carbon deposits from combustion chamber.
5. Clean gasket surfaces.
Cylinder Head Inspection Valve Spring Free Length Inspection

1. Visually inspect cylinder head for cracks or damage. 1. Measure free length of valve springs. Replace springs
Pay close attention to the areas around spark plug that do not meet specification on page 7.3.
and valve seats.
2. Be sure oil passage (A) in cylinder head is

unobstructed.
NOTE: Intake and exhaust springs are identical.
3. Inspect cylinder head for distortion with a straight edge

and feeler gauge. Check in different directions and
locations on the cylinder head as shown. Compare to
specification on page 7.3.
Valve Inspection 6. Measure valve stem deflection for each valve to

determine if valve or valve guide requires replacement.
Specifications are on page 7.3.
A. Raise valve 10mm (0.400") off of seat.
B. Position dial indicator as shown. Measure deflection

in two directions perpendicular to each other (X & Y
axis).
C. If valve deflection exceeds service limit measure

valve stem.
1. Place valves on V-blocks as shown and measure

valve stem runout. 7
2. Inspect the valve face for damage from burning, pitting
or uneven contact.
3. Place valves on V-block as shown and inspect valve

head radial runout.
7. Replace valve and repeat step 6 if valve stem O.D.

measures outside standard range. If valve stem
deflection exceeds service limits with a new valve
installed, valve guide must be replaced.
Measure valve stem in several places.
4. Insert valves into their original locations in cylinder

head.
5. Inspect that each valve moves up and down smoothly

without binding in guide.
8. Installation of new valve guides and/or new valves
requires valve seat reconditioning. This work should be
performed by an experienced technician properly
equipped to perform cylinder head reconditioning.
Valve Inspection
VALVE INSPECTION
CONDITION ILLUSTRATION POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
Uneven seat width Bent valve stem, worn Replace valve and reface
valve guide seat
Damaged valve face Burnt, pitted, foreign Replace valve and reface
material damage seat
Contact area too high Wear, settling of valve seat Lower with 30o stone
Contact area too low Wear, settling of valve seat Raise with 60o stone
Contact area too wide Wear, settling of valve seat Narrow with both 30o
stone and 60o stone
Contact area too narrow Use 45o stone
Contact area free of pitting Correct None

and damage, centered in
seat, proper width.
Valve Guide Removal / Installation 4. Drive or press new guides from camshaft side of head.
Drive or press guides in until circlip (A) seats against
head surface (B).
CAUTION A
B
Replacement of valve guides requires an oven,
special equipment and experience to do the job
correctly. If you are unsure of your ability to do the
repair professionally it is best to sublet the labor to a
competent machinist. Valve seat reconditioning is
required when valve guides are replaced.
5. Measure valve guide height from spring seat:

GUIDE INSTALLED HEIGHT: 12.20-12.80 mm 7
6. Ream new valve guides to size to obtain specified
stem-to-guide clearance. Ream from combustion
chamber side of head.
1. Support cylinder head and place valve guide remover

into valve guide from the combustion chamber side.
2. Drive or press old valve guides out of cylinder head.
CAUTION
The cylinder head can be easily damaged if the

procedure is done carelessly.
3. Apply 90 weight oil to outside of new valve guides.

CAUTION
Do not tilt the reamer while reaming the guide.

Always rotate the reamer in a clockwise direction.
7. Clean cylinder head thoroughly with clean solvent.
8. Inspect and recondition valve seats.
Valve Seat Inspection Valve Seat Reconditioning

1. Remove carbon deposits from valves and seats. NOTE: Valve seat reconditioning should be performed
by a technician proficient in cylinder head reconditioning
2. Inspect valve face for burning, pitting or uneven
techniques using grinding stones. The use of carbide
contact. (Fig. 1)
cutters is not recommended. Follow recommendations of
the manufacturer of the valve seat reconditioning
Valve Seat Centered. No Pitting or Damage. equipment being used. Do not grind seats more than
Refer to width specifications. necessary to provide proper seat width and contact point
on valve face.
Valve Seat
Width
Fig. 1
NOTE: Valves cannot be ground. If valve face is

burned or badly worn, replace the valve.
3. Apply a light coating of machinist’s layout fluid or paste
to valve face.
4. Install valve into valve guide.
5. Tap valve several times to make a clear impression on
the valve face. Do not rotate valve.
6. Remove valve and measure contact area (valve seat
width).
7. If valve seat is incorrect, recondition as needed.
Cylinder Head Assembly
B A. Keeper
C B. Spring Retainer
D C. Spring
D. Seal
E. Valve
7
E
Valve Installed Height

(From Head Surface, Seal Removed)
Valve Spring Installed Height

(Measure with Seal Installed)
Valve Guide Installed Height

(From Head Surface, Seal Removed)
INSTALLED HEIGHT MEASUREMENT

REFER TO PAGE 7.3 FOR SPECIFICATIONS
Cylinder Head Assembly 6. Compress valve springs using a valve spring

compressor and adapter.
CAUTION
Wear eye protection during assembly.
7. Apply a small amount of grease to both sides of a valve

keeper.
1. Lubricate valve stems with assembly lube.
Moly assembly paste PN: 2871460
2. Install valve in head before installing seal. Hold valve

against seat wipe off the portion that extends above the
guide.
3. Apply Victory engine oil to valve guide seal and install

seal on valve, rotating the seal as you install it.
4. Press seal firmly in place on top of guide. Be careful

not to dislodge spring from seal.
5. Install valve spring and upper retainer. 8. Insert both valve keepers in place on valve.
CAUTION 9. Remove spring compressor.
10. Repeat previous steps for remaining valves.

Support cylinder head so valves will not be dam-
aged. 11. Be sure all keepers are fully seated in groove.
Do not compress valve springs more than
necessary to install keepers.
Cylinder Head / Camshaft Installation 5. Camshaft carriers are marked “F” (FRONT) or “R”
(REAR) for installation in their respective cylinder
NOTE: The base gasket seal is broken when the cylinder heads (C).
head is removed and must be replaced. Refer to Chapter
8 for cylinder base gasket replacement.
1. Thoroughly clean cylinder and cylinder head gasket

surfaces. Both surfaces and gasket must be free of oil
or grease. C
IMPORTANT: Gaskets and gasket sealing surfaces
must be free of oil and grease during assembly.
2. Install dowel pins (A).
B
7
6. Apply Moly Assembly Paste (P/N 2871460) to lobes
A and main journals of camshaft.
A
7. Install camshaft marked “R” into rear cam carrier and
camshaft marked “F” into front cam carrier.
8. Be sure alignment pins (D) are in place and fully seated

in cylinder head.
3. Install a new head gasket (B).
9. Turn camshaft until lobes are pointing down (away

from cam follower rollers).
10. Inspect each rocker arm and position flat side of

hydraulic lifter DOWN.
4. Clean gasket surface on cylinder head and set cylinder 11. Set camshaft carrier on cylinder head.
head in place on cylinder.
12. Apply engine oil to 10mm studs, nut threads, nut bases
and washers.
13. Install washers and nuts on cylinder studs. Tighten 15. Fully torque cylinder head following the procedure
finger tight. below to ensure accurate final torque:
CYLINDER HEAD TORQUE PROCEDURE

Lobes Down (Camshaft carriers installed and seated in head)
Step 1 Lubricate 8mm studs, washers, and nuts with

engine oil and install hand tight.
Step 2 Follow torque pattern shown in Fig. 2.
Step 3 Tighten 10 mm nuts (1-4) to 22 ft-lbs (30 Nm)
Step 3 Back off completely
Step 4 Tighten 10 mm nuts (1-4) to 40 ft-lbs (54 Nm)
Step 5 Repeat the 40 ft-lbs (54 Nm ) torque on 1-4.

14. Slowly and evenly tighten cylinder head nuts following Step 6 Torque 8mm nuts (5-6) to 18 ft-lbs (24.5 Nm).
torque sequence in Fig. 2. This allows hydraulic lifters
to bleed off pressure. Tighten only enough to seat cam Step 7 Verify that camshaft rotates freely in carrier
carrier on head. after hydraulic lifters have had time to
bleed down.
Step 8 Repeat Steps 1-7 for other cylinder head.
3 1 5
2 4 6
FRONT CYLINDER HEAD

Front of
Engine
3 1 5
2 4 6
REAR CYLINDER HEAD

Fig. 2
Camshaft Timing - Rear Cylinder 5. Be sure rear camshaft lobes are pointing down. The
single mark on cam (D) must be facing UP as shown
NOTE: Rear cam chain must be installed first. below.
1. Rotate crankshaft clockwise to TDC (rear cylinder) 6. Inspect marks before installing sprocket on camshaft.
using crankshaft rotation tool PV-48736. Mark on sprocket (E) must align with camshaft “R”
mark (D). Outer marks (F) must be parallel with valve
Crank Rotation Socket PV-48736 cover gasket surface.
2. Hold crankshaft at rear TDC by inserting an 8 mm (or F

5/16) locating pin through crankcase hole (A) into
crankshaft.
R
E
7
D
Parallel
7. Align camshaft with sprocket hole and install top

A sprocket bolt finger tight.
8. Apply engine oil to rear cam chain tensioner.
Tensioners are not interchangeable due to the length
of the tensioner body. The rear tensioner is stamped
Camshaft Chain Guide Installation
with a “R”.
1. Place cam chain around rear camshaft sprocket and
lower it into chain cavity along with the cam chain
guide (B).
2. Seat upper pins of guide in the cylinder head recess,
and install cam chain over innermost sprocket on “R” = Rear Tensioner
crankshaft.
3. Install rear tensioner blade (C).
4. Torque guide and tensioner blade bolts to
specification.
9. Install tensioner with a new sealing washer. Torque to

55 ft-lbs(75 Nm ).
C 10. Torque top sprocket bolt to 120 in-lbs (13.5 Nm).
100 in-lbs (11.3 Nm)
Camshaft Timing - Rear Cylinder (cont.) 15. Insert an 8 mm (5/16) pin through crankcase hole to
hold the crankshaft in position at front cylinder TDC.
11. Check carefully to be sure rear cylinder camshaft Timing sprocket key (A) will be aligned with pin and
timing is correct before proceeding: front cylinder centerline.
• Crankshaft secured by pin and locked in the rear

cylinder TDC position.
• Rear camshaft lobes facing down (”R” mark on cam

A
aligned with “F/R” mark on sprocket).
• Rear tensioner (stamped “R”) is installed and tight.
• Outer marks on camshaft sprocket are parallel to

valve cover gasket surface.
12. Remove locating pin from crankshaft and proceed to

Step 13.
Camshaft Timing - Front Cylinder

NOTE: Rear camshaft must be properly timed as 16. Install cam chain guide with front cylinder cam chain
shown in Step 6 on page 7.23 before you begin the and sprocket. Insert pins (B) on upper end of guide into
front cylinder camshaft timing procedure. recess in cylinder head.
13. Rotate crankshaft clockwise 410o to TDC on the front

cylinder (exactly one full turn, plus an additional 50o).
B
2. Rotate another 50
1. Rotate 360
17. Install front cam chain over crankshaft sprocket.

14. Rear camshaft double marks are now at the top. Install 18. Install front tensioner blade (C).
cam sprocket finger tight.
19. Torque guide and tensioner blade bolts to 24. Apply engine oil to front cam chain tensioner and
specification. damper. Push damper (F) squarely into tensioner bore
in cylinder, and push it past the first 4 or 5 threads.
100 in-lbs (11.3 Nm)
7
20. After pin is installed, torque the rear cam sprocket
bolt (installed in Step 14) to 120 in-lbs (13.5 Nm)
25. Install tensioner with a new sealing washer. Torque to
21. Rotate front camshaft slightly so lobes are pointing 55 ft-lbs (75 Nm).
DOWN.
22. Install sprocket on camshaft with two lines on sprocket

(D) parallel to valve cover gasket surface (E).
E
26. Torque sprocket bolt to 120 in-lbs (13.5 Nm).
27. Verify camshaft timing by comparing to Ill. 1 on

page 7.7.
23. Install top camshaft sprocket bolt finger tight. Do
not torque the bolt until front tensioner is installed. 28. Remove TDC locating pin from crankcase and rotate
engine clockwise until the remaining front camshaft
sprocket bolt hole is accessible.
29. Install sprocket bolt. Torque to 120 in-lbs (13.5

Nm).
NOTE: Be sure all camshaft sprocket bolts have been

installed and properly tightened.
30. Fill cam carrier area of both front and rear cylinders
with Victory engine oil.
31. Rotate crankshaft clockwise approximately three

complete revolutions and stop on front cylinder TDC on
the compression stroke.
32. Again compare camshaft timing to Ill. 1 on page 7.7 to

verify the timing is correct.
33. Install valve covers (page 7.8).
34. Install bottom cam chain guide. Torque screws to 100

in-lbs (11.3 Nm).
100 in-lbs (11.3 Nm)
35. Clean threads of crankshaft and retaining bolt with

Loctite Primer N.
36. Apply 2 drops of Loctite 262 (red) to bolt threads (not
required if using a new bolt which has a pre-applied
locking agent).
37. Install ignition timing wheel and torque bolt to
specification. Allow adequate cure time for Loctite 262
as directed on container.
17 ft-lbs (23 Nm)
38. Install cam drive cover.
Troubleshooting, Cylinder Head And Valve Train

Cylinder head, valve train and piston/cylinder problems are usually detected by an engine compression test. Other
problems associated with this area of the engine are external fluid leaks, excessive use of oil or abnormal noises.
Troubleshooting involves the use of:
• Leak down (cylinder leakage test) or a compression gauge
• Visual inspection for the source and cause of a fluid leak
• Listening to the engine with a stethoscope to determine source of abnormal noise
The troubleshooting table below lists problems and possible causes, parts affected, and repair suggestions. Thoroughly
investigate the problem and possible solution before disassembling the engine to replace suspect parts.
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE PART(s) AFFECTED REPAIR RECOMMENDED
Hard Starting Low Compression Lifter(s) locked Replace lifter(s)
Won’t Start Collapsed Hydraulic Lifter(s). Bleed Lifter
Excessive Lifter Noise Lifter Extremely Noisy. Noise will typically stop after 10- 7
15 minutes of high idle
operation. If lifter will not bleed,
replace lifter.
Worn Valve Guide(s) Replace Valve Guide(s).
Poor Seating of Valve(s) Repair or Replace
Broken Valve Springs Replace
Spark Plug Not Seated Torque to Specifications
Incorrect Valve Timing Repair
Valve Stuck Open Repair
Cylinder Head Gasket Leak Repair
Slow Starter Motor See Electrical Section
Worn Rings, Piston, or See Cylinder/Piston Section
Cylinder
Ignition Problem See Ignition Section
Fuel Problem See F.I. Section
Electric Starter High Compression Excessive carbon build-up in Use “Carbon Clean” fuel
Straining to Turn combustion chamber. system additive or disassemble
Engine Over engine to de-carbon
combustion chamber.
Excessive Starter Load Internal Engine / Drive Determine Cause of Seizure or

Components Seized or Binding Binding
Abnormal Pre-ignition
Poor Idle Quality Low Compression Collapsed Hydraulic Lifter(s). Air trapped in lifter. Noise will
Lifter Extremely Noisy. stop after 10-15 minutes of high
idle operation. If air will not
bleed, replace lifter.
Poor Seating of Valve(s) Repair or Replace
(Continued on next page)

Poor Idle Quality Air leak Mounting Surfaces, Hoses Repair Air Leak
IAC System Fault Inspect IAC System Hoses Repair Air Leak or restriction
in IAC System
Fuel Mixture Rich F.I. System Refer to Chapter 5
Fuel Mixture Lean F.I. System / Inlet Tract Refer to Chapter 5
Ignition Misfire Ignition System Refer to Chapter 17
Excessive Oil in Valve guides Replace
Combustion
Chamber
Excessive Oil in Worn Rings, Cylinder, or Refer to Chapter 8
Combustion Piston
Chamber Engine Oil Overfilled Correct
Valves Not Opening Fully Worn Cam Shaft or Rocker Arms Replace
Engine Noise Valve Train Area Collapsed Hydraulic Lifter(s). Air trapped in lifter. Noise will
Lifter Extremely Noisy. stop after 10-15 minutes of
high idle operation. If lifter will
not bleed, replace lifter.
Lifter(s) Locked Replace Lifter(s)
Broken or Weak Valve Springs Replace
Worn Camshaft or Rocker Arm Replace
Rocker Arm Roller Bearing Replace
Damage
Cam Journal Worn or Damaged Replace
Piston/Cylinder Area Worn Pistons and/or Cylinders Replace
Excessive Carbon Build-up in Clean
Combustion Chamber
Worn Piston Pin, Piston Pin Bore Replace
and/or Small End of Connecting
Rod
Worn Piston Rings or Piston Ring Replace
Lands.
Engine Noise General (May apply to all
Exhaust leak Remove exhaust and seal
areas below)
Timing Chain Area Stretched Chain Replace
Worn Sprockets Replace
Tensioner Not Working Replace
Primary Cover Area Clutch Refer to Chapter 9
Flywheel Refer to Chapter 9
Starter System Refer to Chapter 18
Torque Compensator Refer to Chapter 9
Bottom End Area Main Bearings Refer to Chapter 10
Rod Bearings Refer to Chapter 10
Loose Side Clearance Refer to Chapter 10
Transmission Area Bearings Refer to Chapter 10
Misplaced Circlips Refer to Chapter 10
Incorrect Side Clearance Refer to Chapter 10

Poor high speed running Air Intake Problem Refer to Chapter 5
F.I. System Problem Refer to Chapter 5
Ignition Problem Refer to Chapter 17
Valve Float Weak Valve Springs Replace
Insufficient Valve Travel Worn Camshaft/Rocker Arms Replace
Valves Opening & Closing Incorrect Valve Timing Correct
at Wrong Time
Lack of power in all RPM Low Compression Worn Piston, Rings, Cylinder Replace
ranges Low Compression Poor Valve Seating Repair/Replace
Valves Opening & Closing Valve Timing Incorrect Correct
at Wrong Time
Incorrect Valve Clearance Hydraulic Lifter Bleeding Down Replace
Lifter(s) Locked Debris in Lifter Replace lifter(s)
Collapsed Hydraulic
Lifter(s).
Air Trapped in Lifter. Noise will
stop after 10-15 minutes of high
Replace Lifter
7
Lifter Extremely Noisy. idle operation. If lifter will not
bleed, replace lifter.
Valve Float Weak Valve Springs Replace
Insufficient Valve Travel Worn Camshaft/Rocker Arms Replace
F.I. Problem Refer to Chapter 5
Air Intake Problem Refer to Chapter 5
Oiling Problem Oil Overfilled Correct
Vacuum Leak Mounting Surfaces, Hoses Correct
Using/Burning Oil Oil in Combustion Chamber Oil Overfilled Correct
Oil Past Rings Worn or Damaged Piston, Rings, Replace
Cylinder
Oil Past Valve Guides Worn Valve Guides Replace
Worn Valve Guide Seals Replace
NOTES
CYLINDER & PISTON
CHAPTER 8
CYLINDER & PISTON
CYLINDER & PISTON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2
GENERAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2
BASE GASKET SEALING & CYLINDER STUD TORQUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2
PISTON RING PROFILE AND ORIENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3
CYLINDER REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4
CYLINDER INSPECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4
CYLINDER BORE MEASUREMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4
PISTON TO CYLINDER CLEARANCE WORKSHEET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5
CYLINDER WARPAGE MEASUREMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6
PISTON & PISTON RING REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6
PISTON & PISTON RING INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6
PISTON PIN / PIN BORE INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7
CYLINDER STUD REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.8
PISTON RING INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.8
PISTON INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.9
CYLINDER INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.10
8
TROUBLESHOOTING, CYLINDER & PISTON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.11
CYLINDER & PISTON
CYLINDER & PISTON

General
NOTE: Clean the machine thoroughly before removing engine from frame.
• This section covers service of the cylinder, piston and rings. The engine must be removed from the frame to perform the
procedures in this section. Refer to Chapter 6 for engine removal and installation.
• Mark and store all mated parts for assembly. Assemble engine by putting used parts that pass inspection back in the same
location.
• Machined and mated surfaces are very delicate. Handle and store all parts in such a way that the mating surfaces will not be
damaged.
• Many parts require assembly lubrication. Follow the assembly lubrication procedures carefully.
• There are many precision measuring steps in this section. If you are not sure of your capabilities in these areas, have a
competent machinist perform the precision part inspection operations.
• Cleanliness of parts is critical to engine life and proper parts inspection. Use clean solvent and hot, soapy water to clean
parts. Dry with compressed air before inspection and engine assembly. Coat parts with fresh lubricant to prevent oxidation
after cleaning.
Base Gasket Sealing & Cylinder Stud Torque M10x1.5 mm Studs 25 ft-lbs (34 Nm)
(M11x1.50 thread to case)
Apply sealant to
case parting line
before installing
base gasket.
M8x1.25 mm Studs
(M9x1.25 mm to case) 15 ft-lbs (20 Nm)
Piston Ring Profile And Orientation

Cylinder Wall Piston
Mark
“CTOP”
UP Oil control ring
top rail gap
location Top
Locate circlip end gap
at top
Second ring gap
Second
Oil control ring
expander gap
location Oil Control
Arrow points to
FRONT of engine
Top ring gap Piston Ring Profile
Oil control ring bottom rail gap
CYLINDER & PISTON
Specifications
CYLINDER & PISTON
I.D. 100.987 - 101.013 Check taper and
(3.9759" - 3.9769”) out-of-round
Cylinder Out of Round Measure 66mm up from base 0.05 mm (.002")
Taper gasket surface 0.05 mm (.002")
Gasket Surface Warpage  .1mm max. (.0039")
Piston Mark Direction Piston orientation is determined by arrow on piston crown.
Position BOTH pistons so arrows point to front of engine.
Piston O.D. (Nominal) 100.946 - 100.964mm Replace if piston-to-
(Measured 10mm up from (3.9742 - 3.9750") cylinder clearance is
bottom of skirt, 90 degrees to excessive with good cylinder
Piston pin)
Piston Pin Hole I.D. 22.006 - 22.012 mm 22.047 mm
(.8664 - .8666") (.8680")
Piston Pin O.D. 21.995 - 22.000 mm 21.96 mm
(.8659 - .8661") (.864")
Piston to Cylinder .023 - .067 mm .15 mm 8
(.0009 - .0026") (.006")
Piston to Piston Pin .006 - .017 mm .035 mm
(.0002 - .0007") (.0014")
Piston Ring Clearances Ring End Gap - Top .15 - .40 mm .80 mm
(Installed) (.006 - .016") (.031")
Ring End Gap - 2nd .33 - .53 mm 1.11 mm
(Installed) (.013 - .021") (.043")
Ring End Gap - 3rd .15 - .35 mm .80 mm
(Installed) (.006 - .014") (.031")
Piston Ring Marks -- “CTOP” mark must face UP on
all rings. page 8.2
Piston Ring to Ring Land
Top Ring .02 - .060 mm
.11 mm (.0043")
(1.2mm ring thickness) (.0008 - .0024")
2nd Ring .02 - .060 mm
.11 mm (.0043")
(1.2mm ring thickness) (.0008 - .0024")
.03 - .17 mm
Oil Control Ring .26 mm (.010")
(.001 - .0067")
Special Tools
Piston ring compressor pliers: PV-43570-1
Piston ring compressor band: PV-43570-2
Cylinder bore gauge: PV-3017
Straightedge, feeler gauge, precision measuring instruments: Refer to Chapter 1 or Commercially available
Protective sleeves for pistons / studs: Commercially available
CYLINDER & PISTON
Cylinder Removal Cylinder Inspection

1. Remove engine from frame (Chapter 6). 1. Visually inspect cylinder bores for scratches and wear.
2. Remove cylinder head(s) (Chapter 7). 2. Inspect gasket surfaces for scratches or other damage
that may cause an oil leak.
Cylinder Bore Measurement

1. Measure each cylinder bore in 6 places to determine:
• Cylinder Bore Inside Diameter

• Cylinder Taper and Out of Round
3. Remove cylinder(s). Support pistons while removing

cylinders so they do not fall into the cylinder studs. Use
a section of hose (A) to protect piston rings from
contact with the studs.
4. Clean gasket surfaces of cylinders thoroughly.
A 2. Use maximum measurement to determine wear.

3. Use the worksheet provided on page 8.5 to record
measurements and calculate the clearance.
Cylinder Measurement
X Y
Top
Y
CAUTION 66mm up
X
from base
gasket surface
Careless handling of cylinder, pistons or rings may cause
irreparable damage. Do not damage gasket surfaces Bottom Y
during cleaning. X
CYLINDER & PISTON
Piston To Cylinder Clearance Worksheet

Front Cylinder Recorded Measurement Specification
Top “X”
Middle “X”
Bottom “X”
Top “Y”
Middle “Y”
Bottom “Y”
Difference between largest “Y” Taper for “Y” axis: Taper Service Limit: .05mm (.002")
measurement and smallest “Y”
measurement
Difference between largest “X” Taper for “X” axis:
measurement and smallest “X”
measurement
Largest difference between any “X” axis Cylinder Out-of-Round: Out-of-Round Service Limit:
measurement and “Y” axis measurement .05mm (.002")
Piston Skirt Measurement (page 8.6)
Difference between largest “X” axis Piston-to-Cylinder Clearance* Piston-to-Cylinder Clearance Service 8
measurement and piston measurement Limit: .15 mm (.006")
Rear Cylinder Recorded Measurement Specification

Top “X”
Middle “X”
Bottom “X”
Top “Y”
Middle “Y”
Bottom “Y”
Difference between largest “Y” Taper for “Y” axis: Taper Service Limit: .05mm (.002")
measurement and smallest “Y”
measurement
Difference between largest “X” Taper for “X” axis:
measurement and smallest “X”
measurement
Largest difference between any “X” Cylinder Out-of-Round: Out-of-Round Service Limit:
axis measurement and “Y” axis .05mm (.002")
measurement
Piston Skirt Measurement (page 8.6)
Difference between largest “X” axis Piston-to-Cylinder Clearance* Piston-to-Cylinder Clearance Service
measurement and piston Limit: .15 mm (.006")
measurement
Compare recorded measurement to specifications. If • If the piston-to-cylinder clearance exceeds the

measured value exceeds service limit replace the service limit, measure a new piston and re-
appropriate part. calculate the clearance. If the piston-to-cylinder
clearance exceeds the service limits with a new
NOTE: The cylinders are Ni-SiC plated and cannot be
piston, the cylinder must be replaced.
reconditioned by boring or honing. If excessive surface
damage, taper or out-of-round exists, the cylinder must
be replaced.
CYLINDER & PISTON
Cylinder Warpage Measurement 6. Spread rings only wide enough to remove them from
piston. Spreading rings too wide will damage them.
1. Inspect cylinder for warpage at cylinder head surface
and base gasket surface. 7. Clean piston ring grooves. Break or cut a piston ring in
half. File or grind one edge square and remove all
burrs. Use this piston ring to carefully clean piston ring
grooves.
NOTE: A soft wire brush may be used to clean the top of
the piston. Do not use a wire brush to clean the sides of
the piston or the piston ring groves.
Piston & Piston Ring Inspection
10 mm Piston O.D. Measurement
2. Place a straight edge diagonally across cylinder

mating surfaces in several positions. Attempt to slide
a .05mm (.002") feeler gauge under the straight edge
in each position.
3. Replace cylinder if warped beyond the service limit.
Piston Pin
1. Visually inspect piston for cracks, excessive wear,

Piston & Piston Ring Removal scoring, etc.
1. Cover crankcase with a clean shop towel to prevent 2. Measure piston skirt O.D. (90 to pin and 10 mm from
piston clip from falling into the crankcase. bottom of piston skirt). Compare to specifications on
2. Remove the left piston pin circlip. page 8.3. Replace piston if worn beyond the service
limit.
3. Push piston pin out to left side of engine and remove
the piston. 3. Calculate Piston to Cylinder Clearance. Subtract
piston O.D. from cylinder bore I.D. and compare to
specification listed on page 8.3.
Piston to Cylinder Clearance Calculation
Cylinder I.D.
- Piston O.D.
= Piston to Cylinder Clearance
4. Replace parts that do not meet specification.
NOTE: If piston-to-cylinder clearance exceeds service

4. Rotate rings in piston groves. Rings should rotate limit, measure a new piston and re-calculate
freely in grooves. clearance. If piston-to-cylinder clearance exceeds
service limits with a new piston, cylinder must be
5. Clean carbon deposits from piston. replaced.
CYLINDER & PISTON
5. Use a piston to push each ring squarely into cylinder Piston Pin / Pin Bore Inspection
bore from bottom (push rings 25-50mm into cylinder).
1. Measure piston pin hole I.D. in four locations with a
telescoping gauge. Record the smallest.
Cylinder
25-50 mm
Piston Ring
2. Measure piston pin O.D. at three locations. Record

6. Measure installed ring end gap with a feeler gauge and largest measurement.
compare to specification listed on page 8.3. If either
ring exceeds the service limit, replace ring set.
8
End Gap
Feeler Gauge
End Gap
Cylinder
25-50 mm
3. Calculate piston pin-to-piston clearance. Subtract pin

O.D. from pin hole I.D.
4. Measure connecting rod small end I.D. at two
Piston Ring locations.
5. Calculate connecting rod-to-piston pin clearance by
7. Install rings onto a clean piston. Push rings in until they subtracting pin O.D from rod hole I.D.
are flush with piston. Using a feeler gauge (A),
measure side clearances for the 1st & 2nd rings. If any
of clearances exceed limit, replace piston and piston
rings.
Connecting Rod Hole I.D.

- Piston Pin O.D.
A = Connecting Rod to Piston Pin Clearance
6. Compare measurements to specifications listed on

page 8.3 and replace any worn parts.
CYLINDER & PISTON
Cylinder Stud Replacement Piston Ring Installation

1. Use a stud remover to remove 10mm studs (A) and
8mm studs (B).
CAUTION
10 mm Studs A The rings may be damaged if they are over expanded
25 ft-lbs (34 Nm)
during installation.
1. Carefully install oil control ring assembly (bottom ring)

with “CTOP” mark facing up. The oil control ring
consists of a backing spring and one rail component.
2. Install first and second rings with “CTOP” mark facing

UP.
Mark
B “CTop”
8 mm Studs
15 ft-lbs (20 Nm)
8 mm stud - thread to crankcase is M9x1.25mm

10 mm stud - thread to crankcase is M11x1.50mm
Piston Ring
Profile
2. Clean threads in cases thoroughly.
Cylinder Wall
3. Apply engine oil to stud threads.
4. Install studs and torque them to specification. 3. Make sure that rings rotate freely in grooves.
4. Locate ring end gaps as shown below in relation to

arrow on piston crown.
Pin bore centerline Oil ring top

Second ring gap rail gap
Oil control ring

expander gap
location
Arrow points to
FRONT of engine
Top ring gap

Oil ring bottom rail gap
CYLINDER & PISTON
Piston Installation 5. Push piston pin through rod and piston pin hole until it
is stopped by circlip.
The pistons are marked with an arrow on the crown. Install
pistons on connecting rods with arrow (A) facing the 6. Install remaining circlip with end gap facing up (12:00
FRONT of the engine. position).
7. Make sure both piston circlips are seated properly in
the groove.
1. Place a clean shop towel over crankcase to prevent

foreign material from entering crankcase. 8
2. Install a new circlip on one side of the piston with end
gap facing UP (12:00 position.)
CAUTION
Never reuse piston pin circlips.
3. Apply assembly lube piston pin and I.D. of connecting

rod small end.
4. Install piston over connecting rod with arrow on piston

crown facing FRONT of engine.
(View from RH side)
Gap At Top
(12:00 Position)
Notch faces front
of engine
CYLINDER & PISTON
Cylinder Installation 7. Apply a small amount of engine oil to inside surfaces

of a piston ring compressor band.
NOTE: Be sure all top end parts are ready for assembly.
Sealant on crankcase parting line must not be allowed to
Piston Ring Compressor Band:PV-43570-2
dry before top end is assembled and torqued.
Piston Ring Compressor Pliers PV-43570-1
1. First wash cylinders with clean solvent, then with hot
soapy water. 8. Install piston ring compressor over rings and compress
rings into ring grooves.
2. Rinse the cylinders with clear water and immediately
dry with compressed air. Cylinder bore should be
wiped with a clean white shop towel and engine oil.
CAUTION
3. Apply a light coat of engine oil to piston and rings. Be sure compressor band end gap does not align
with any ring end gap when compressing the rings.
4. Ensure cylinder alignment dowel pins are in place and
gasket surfaces are clean and oil-free. NOTE: Install cylinders in their original locations.
5. Apply a small amount of crankcase sealant to the 9. Remove protective covering from crankcase.
crankcase parting lines on base gasket surface (A).
10. Carefully install cylinder(s) over piston/ring assembly.
Do not force cylinder over piston. Monitor rings
A carefully. If a piston ring becomes dislodged from the
ring compressor; remove cylinder, inspect ring
carefully for damage.
6. Install new cylinder base gaskets onto crankcase.

NOTE: Inspect all sealing surfaces carefully for
scratches or imperfections. DO NOT allow oil or grease
to contact gaskets or sealing surfaces during the
assembly process.
11. Remove piston ring compressor when rings are fully
captive in cylinder.
12. Slide cylinder down over piston until seated to base

gasket and crankcase surface.
13. Repeat for other cylinder.
14. Install cylinder head(s). (Chapter 7).
CYLINDER & PISTON
Troubleshooting, Cylinder & Piston

Engine Hard Starting (or) Low Compression Lifter(s) Locked Refer to Chapter 7
Engine Will Not Start Collapsed Hydraulic Refer to Chapter 7
Lifter(s). Lifter Extremely
Noisy.
Worn Valve Guide(s) Refer to Chapter 7
Poor Seating of Valve(s) Refer to Chapter 7
Broken Valve Springs Refer to Chapter 7
Poor High Speed Valve Float Weak Valve Springs Refer to Chapter 7
Performance Insufficient Valve Travel Worn Camshaft/Rocker Refer to Chapter 7
Arms
Valves Opening & Closing at Valve Timing Incorrect Refer to Chapter 7
Wrong Time
F.I. System Problem Refer to Chapter 5
Air Intake Problem Refer to Chapter 5
Lack of Power in all RPM Incorrect Valve Clearance Hydraulic Lifter Bleeding Refer to Chapter 7 8
Ranges Down
Collapsed Hydraulic Air trapped in lifter. Noise will Refer to Chapter 7
Lifter(s). Lifter Extremely stop after 10-15 minutes of
Noisy. high idle operation. If air will
not bleed, replace lifter.
Valve Float Weak Valve Springs Refer to Chapter 7
Valves Opening & Closing at Valve Timing Incorrect Refer to Chapter 7
Wrong Time
Engine Hard Starting Fuel Delivery Problem Low Fuel Pressure Refer to Chapter 5
Ignition Problem No Spark or Weak Spark Refer to Chapter 17
Engine Hard Starting (or) Low Compression Spark Plug Not Seated Torque Spark Plug
Engine Will Not Start Incorrect Valve Timing Refer to Chapter 7
Valve Stuck Open Refer to Chapter 7
Leaking Cylinder Head Repair
Gasket
Slow Starter Motor Refer to Chapter 18
Worn cylinder, Pistons and/ Replace parts that do not
or Rings meet specification
Fuel Problem Refer to Chapter 5
CYLINDER & PISTON
Troubleshooting (Cont.)
Engine Idles Poorly Fuel Management Air leaks intake tract Refer to Chapter 5
Incorrect IAC system malfunction, air Refer to Chapter 5
leak, or restriction
Low Compression Collapsed Hydraulic Refer to Chapter 7
Lifter(s). Lifter Extremely
Noisy
Lifter(s) Locked Refer to Chapter 7
Poor Seating of Valve(s) Refer to Chapter 7
Worn Cylinder, Pistons and/ Replace parts that do not meet
or Rings specification
Lack of Power in all RPM Insufficient Valve travel Worn Camshaft/Rocker Refer to Chapter 7
Ranges arms
Lack of Power in all RPM Low Compression Worn Piston, Rings, Replace parts that are worn
Ranges Cylinder beyond the service limit
Leaks Improper Assembly Cylinder, Gaskets, Gasket Perform white powder test to
Surfaces determine leak path.
Incorrect Fastener Torque Assemble parts clean and free

of oil, grease, or debris.
Torque fasteners properly
Damaged gasket sealing Cylinder/Crankcase Repair surface or replace part
surface(s)
Noise Excessive piston to Piston / Cylinder Replace parts that are worn
cylinder clearance beyond the service limit
Excessive piston pin Piston / Pin / Connecting Replace parts that are worn
clearance (to piston or Rod beyond the service limit
connecting rod)
Exhaust Leak - Inspect seal of exhaust system
at cylinder head
CLUTCH, PRIMARY, & SHIFT LINKAGE
CHAPTER 9
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2
ASSEMBLY VIEWS & TORQUE VALUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3
CLUTCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3
SHIFT LINKAGE / FOOTREST - FASTENER TORQUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4
PRIMARY COVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5
SHIFT MECHANISM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6
SERVICE PROCEDURES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.7
CAP PLATE & CAP PLATE SEAL REMOVAL / INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.7
CLUTCH PINION SHAFT REMOVAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.7
CLUTCH PINION SHAFT BEARING INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.7
CLUTCH PINION SHAFT SEAL REMOVAL & INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.8
CLUTCH PINION SHAFT INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.8
PRIMARY COVER REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.9
SHIFT RATCHET REMOVAL & INSPECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.10
SHIFT RATCHET INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.11
SHIFT SHAFT BEARING & SEAL REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.11 9
PRIMARY COVER INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.12
LOCKING THE CRANKSHAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.12
CLUTCH SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.13
CLUTCH ASSEMBLY VIEW & TORQUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.13
CLUTCH REMOVAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.14
CLUTCH DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.15
CLUTCH INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.16
CLUTCH ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.18
CLUTCH INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.20
PRIMARY DRIVE ASSEMBLY VIEW & TORQUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.21
TORQUE COMPENSATOR REMOVAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.22
TORQUE COMPENSATOR INSPECTION (EARLY BUILD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.22
TORQUE COMPENSATOR INSPECTION (LATE BUILD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.23
TORQUE COMPENSATOR INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.23
ROTOR (FLYWHEEL) REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.24
ROTOR (FLYWHEEL) INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.25
SPLIT GEAR REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.25
SPLIT GEAR INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.26
SPLIT GEAR INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.26
STARTER DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.27
STARTER DRIVE REMOVAL / INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.27
STARTER CLUTCH REMOVAL / INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.28
PRIMARY DRIVE GEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.28
PRIMARY DRIVE GEAR REMOVAL / INSPECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.28
STARTER TORQUE LIMIT CLUTCH INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.29
PRIMARY DRIVE GEAR INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.29
STARTER GEAR / STARTER CLUTCH INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.30
TROUBLESHOOTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.31
GENERAL
Service Information
• Clutch and external transmission shift linkage service can be accomplished with the engine in the frame.
• Internal transmission or internal shifting mechanism service requires engine removal and crankcase separation.
• Oil additives of any kind are not recommended by Victory. Using oil additives or oil of the wrong viscosity can
have a detrimental affect on clutch performance, operation, and service life.
• Burnt clutch plates are not an indication of a defect. Burnt clutch plates can indicate that the plate service life
has been exceeded, that a problem exists within the clutch system, that the clutch has been used improperly, or
that the plates were contaminated by improper oil or additives.
• Victory 20W/40 motorcycle oil is recommended for all operating temperatures. If Victory 20W/40 oil is not
available, a high quality 20W/40 motorcycle oil suitable for use in wet clutch transmissions can be used.
• Lubricate parts during assembly as described in the procedures.
• Corroded or sticking shift linkage pivot points can cause abnormal shifting. Replace any linkage components
that are damaged or do not move freely, and lubricate at regular intervals.
SPECIFICATIONS
General
Item Specifications
Clutch, Gear Shift, and Linkage Clutch Type Wet, Multi-Disk
Clutch Operating Mechanism Cable
Torque Compensator Belleville Spring Loaded Cam Assembly
Primary Reduction Ratio 1.5 : 1
Transmission Shift Mechanism Manually Operated, Spring Centered
Gearshift Pattern 1-N-2-3-4-5-6
Clutch Spring (Diaphragm Type) 145 lb. (Green Paint Mark)
Service / Maintenance
CLUTCH / GEARSHIFT / LINKAGE
Clutch Lever and Pivots Lubricate Refer to Periodic Maintenance Ch2
Clutch Cable Freeplay .50-1.50 mm (.020-.060") 
SPECIAL TOOLS
Primary Drive Special Tools
Crankshaft Rotation Socket: PV-48736
Clutch Shaft Holder: PV-45028
Clutch Spring Compressor: PV-45032
Engine Lock Tool: PV-43502-A
Rotor (Flywheel) Puller: PV-43533
1/4 inch (or 6mm) and 5/16 (or 8mm) Pin Punch or Flat Punch: Commercially available
Moly Assembly Paste (P/N 2871460)
ASSEMBLY VIEWS & TORQUE VALUES
Clutch (Cable)
.5 - 1.5mm
(.020 - .060 in.)
Torque first 9
80 in-lbs (9.0 Nm) 1.8 in-lbs (0.2 Nm)
Torque second
80 in-lbs (9.0 Nm) 53 in-lbs (6.0 Nm)
48 in-lbs (5.4 Nm)
48 in-lbs (5.4 Nm)
87 in-lbs (9.8 Nm)
Shift Linkage / Footrest - Fastener Torque
Lubricate with mild soap and water to install
84 in-lbs (9.5 Nm)
84 in-lbs (9.5 Nm)
35 ft-lbs (47.5 Nm)
84 in-lbs (9.5 Nm)
92.5mm (3.65)
92+/- 3
Adjustment:
1. Loosen lock nuts (A)
2. Rotate linkage rod until pedal height is within
specified range.
3. Tighten lock nuts to 96 in-lbs (11 Nm).
96 in-lbs (11 Nm)
Primary Cover
7
Sealant bead faces cover
6
2 15 in-lbs (2 Nm)
5
3 4 50 in-lbs (5.7 Nm)
8 9 10 11 12
1
13
50 in-lbs
(5.7 Nm)
14 15 5 6 40 in-lbs (5 Nm)
115 in-lbs (13 Nm)
15  5
Stator Wire Detail
(Stator removed for clarity)
Cover
9
Route wires installed
between ribs
18
50 in-lbs
(5.6 Nm)
16
19
100 in-lbs (11.3 Nm) 17
Loctite 242 (Blue)
1. Sensor, Oil Pressure 11. Cap Plate
2. Gasket, Primary Cover 12. Screw (2) 6x14 Tapered
3. Asm, Primary Cover (Incl. 4, 5, 6) 13. Screw, Dog Point (1) 8x16
4. Bearing, Needle (1)
14. Screw, (16) 6x40
5. Bearing, Needle (2)
15. Screw (1) 6x30
6. Seal (2)
16. Bracket, Stator Wire
7. Pinion, Clutch
8. O-Ring 17. Screw, (2) 5x8
CAUTION
The rotor contains powerful magnets. Use caution when installing primary cover to avoid personal injury.
Refer to page 9.12.
Shift Mechanism
Hold detent arm away until

shift star is installed and
screw (# 5) is torqued.
1
Straight end of spring in slot on crankcase.
Hooked end on arm.
2
Hold clutch shaft with PV-45028
Install new stake nut upon assembly 3
125 ft-lbs (170 Nm) 4
5
10
11
85 in-lbs (9.6 Nm)

Loctite 242 (Blue)
Apply Lithium Grease

9 6 7 8
1. Spring 7. Shift Ratchet Assembly
2. Roller Arm, Detent 8. Retaining Ring
3. Screw, Flanged 9. Adapter, Shift Shaft
4. Shift Star
10. Washer (Install new)
5. Screw, 6x20
SERVICE PROCEDURES Clutch Pinion Shaft Removal

1. Protect finish of pinion shaft (E). Use an adjustable
Cap Plate & Cap Plate Seal Removal
wrench to rotate arm inward and remove cable from
1. Remove screws (A) and cap plate. pinion shaft.
2. Remove three screws (B), cover (C), and O-ring (D).
2. Remove primary cover cap plate, cover plate, and O-

B A ring (page 9.7).
3. Remove dog point screw (F).
9
4. Pull clutch pinion shaft out of primary cover.
Cap Plate & Cap Plate Seal Installation Cover installed

15o 5
1. Install new O-ring (D).
F
2. Install cover (C).
3. Torque screws (B) to 5.6 Nm (50 in.-lb.).
4. Install cap plate with screws (A) and torque to 1.7 Nm

(15 in.-lb.). G
5. Inspect pinion shaft gear teeth (G) for cracks, broken

teeth, or wear.
Clutch Pinion Shaft Bearing Inspection
1. Apply engine oil to the bearings.
2. Temporarily install pinion shaft into primary cover.
3. Turn shaft by hand. Replace bearings that feel rough,

notched, or loose.
Clutch Pinion Shaft Seal Removal & Clutch Pinion Shaft Installation
Installation
1. Lubricate and install clutch pinion shaft. Rotate
release rack with screwdriver until flat side of rack is
1. Remove clutch pinion shaft (page 9.7).
UP and rack teeth align with teeth of pinion shaft.
2. Push pinion shaft into cover until seated.
2. Carefully pry seal (A) out of primary cover.
3. Lubricate outer edge of new seal with engine oil and

sealing lip with grease. 3. Push lightly inward by hand on the clutch arm until it
stops. The arm must be positioned at a 15o±5o angle
4. Drive seal into place with a suitable driver (B). to primary cover parting line when it stops. If angle is
not correct, lift arm, rotate as needed, and re-install
until angle is correct.
4. Install dog-point screw (C) to 40 in-lbs (4.5 Nm).
15o
Primary Cover Removal 8. Remove primary cover screws.
1. Refer to exploded view on page 9.5. NOTE: Note position of shorter screw (A) in the hole just
to the rear of the shift shaft.
2. Remove shift linkage and footrest as an assembly
(page 9.4). Note dots on arm and shaft must be
aligned for assembly
Pull Rod / Cable Removal From Release Arm
3. Protect finish of pinion shaft release arm and use an

adjustable wrench to rotate arm toward primary cover.
4. Remove pull rod or cable end from release arm. Do

not bend pull rod or kink cable.
9. Tap cover with a soft face hammer to loosen.
10. Pull primary cover outward evenly at front and rear of

9
cover to remove.
5. Remove cap plate and cap plate seal (page 9.7).
6. Remove clutch pinion shaft (page 9.7).

NOTE: Pinion shaft removal is not required for
primary cover removal unless pinion shaft service is
required.
7. Drain engine oil into suitable container.
NOTE: Primary cover can be removed without

draining engine oil by safely leaning and supporting
motorcycle at an angle to the right.
Shift Ratchet Removal & Inspection 7. Inspect compression spring (D) for tension. The
spring should apply enough tension on the shift
1. Shift transmission into neutral. ratchet mechanism to keep it extended.
8. Inspect fit of rivet (E) on shift ratchet assembly. It

should allow for free movement, but not be
excessively loose.
A
9. Inspect fit of locating retainer clip (F) and all parts of
ratchet for cracks or damage.
C
B
2. Remove primary cover (page 9.9).
3. Pull straight outward on shaft to remove the shift

ratchet assembly (A) with return spring (B) attached.
4. Inspect shift shaft adapter (C) on crankcase for wear

and verify it is tight. 10. Inspect cases around shift shaft adapter for cracks.
5. Inspect shift shaft return spring for cracks or loss of 11. Use a pin punch to hold detent roller away and remove
tension. The spring should have enough tension to shift star (G) from shift drum.
keep the shift shaft centered.
12. Inspect shift star.
13. Inspect detent roller arm (H) for wear or damage.
14. Inspect spring (I) for proper tension.
15. Remove detent roller arm and spring.
6. Inspect shift shaft for wear or damage.
85 in-lbs
(9.6 Nm)
Shift Ratchet Installation Shift Shaft Bearing & Seal Replacement

Refer to Shift Mechanism Assembly View on page 9.6.
1. Remove primary cover (page 9.9). Carefully pry shift
1. Apply Loctite 242 (Blue) to clean threads of detent shaft seal from cover.
roller screw. Install detent roller arm (A) with spring
and torque screw to 85 in-lbs (9.6 Nm).
2. Be sure balance gear oiler pin (B) is tight in crankcase.
3. Torque shift shaft adapter (C) and apply a small
amount of lithium grease to shift shaft bore.
4. Clean threads of shift star screw with Loctite Primer
N and apply a few drops of Loctite 242 (Blue) to
threads.
5. Hold detent roller away with a pin punch and install
shift star. Torque screw to 85 in-lbs (9.6 Nm).
2. Using a suitable arbor and arbor press, press bearing
B A from inside of cover to outside.
3. Apply assembly lube to inner & outer surfaces of new

bearing.
9
4. Press bearing into place with numbered side out until
fully seated.
C 25 ft-lbs
(34 Nm)
6. Install shift ratchet into shift shaft adapter with

centering spring (D) attached. Slide ratchet fork (E)
away from shift star and hold. Center the legs of
ratchet return spring on pin and push ratchet in until
seated.
D
Seal Driver
5. Apply a small amount of grease to lip of seal and apply

engine oil to outside of seal.
6. Drive seal into place with a seal driver slightly smaller

than the O.D. of seal.
7. Install primary cover (page 9.12).

E
8. After installing primary cover, be sure shift shaft
returns freely to the centered position after rotating up
or down.
7. Release ratchet fork to engage ratchet with shift star.
8. Install clutch (page 9.20).
Primary Cover Installation 7. Install pinion shaft (page 9.8).
1. Clean gasket surfaces of crankcases and cover. 8. Install cap plate with seal (page 9.7).
2. Verify alignment pins (A) are in position and pinion 9. Lubricate clutch lever pivots and cable ends
shaft is removed from cover. (page 2.11).
3. Place new primary cover gasket on crankcase with 10. Install clutch cable on pinion shaft arm.
sealant bead (B) out (toward cover). Loctite 534 can 11. Install shift linkage arm on shift shaft with dots aligned
be used to hold gasket in place. and install left footrest assembly. Torque linkage arm
pinch bolt to 84 in-lbs (9.5 Nm)
15o
B
A
4. Install cover keeping it parallel to crankcase to prevent

binding on shift shaft. 12. Check engine oil and fill to proper level (Chapter 2).
CAUTION Locking The Crankshaft

The rotor magnets have considerable energy. DO NOT Service procedures described in this chapter require
place fingers between primary cover gasket surface and locking of the gears or shafts to prevent rotation while
other parts or they may be pinched. removing or installing the retaining nuts. Engine Lock
Tool PV-43502-A is described in most procedures;
5. Install primary cover screws.
however, in some cases it is preferable to lock the
NOTE: Short screw (C) is placed in hole just behind shift engine crankshaft (shown below) or the clutch shaft
shaft. using tool PV-45028.
• Remove RH lower engine cover.
• Remove crankshaft position timing wheel.
• Rotate engine to front or rear cylinder TDC with
tool PV-48736 until 8mm (5/16 inch) pin punch can
be inserted into the crankshaft TDC location hole.
6. Torque screws in two steps to 115 in-lbs (13 Nm).

Repeat torque on all screws.
CLUTCH SERVICE
Clutch Assembly View & Torque
Clutch Removal 4. Remove clutch nut, lock washer, and flat washer.
Discard lock washer and nut.
2. Using an internal snap ring pliers, remove clutch rack. 5. Remove clutch assembly from clutch shaft.
6. A new spring washer (B) & Stake nut (C) must be
installed upon assembly.
B C
Install yellow dot facing OUT

3. Install engine lock tool (A) between crankcase and
split gear as shown below to prevent gear rotation and
loosen clutch nut (rotor / starter gear removal is not
required).
NOTE: An alternate method of preventing gear
rotation is to lock the crankshaft as shown on
page 9.12.
Special tool: Engine lock tool PV-43502-A
CAUTION
Use caution when removing nut and keep hands and
body clear in case tool slips off gears.
Clutch Disassembly 4. Remove retaining ring seat (B) (stepped washer).
Special tool: Clutch spring compressor PV-45032
CAUTION
Clutch is under spring pressure. WEAR EYE
PROTECTION.
1. Install clutch spring compressor threaded rod and

secure it with the snap ring (A).
5. Remove tool from clutch.

A
6. Refer to exploded view on page 9.13.
7. Disassemble clutch, laying parts out in order of

removal and keep them in order.
8. Remove clutch spring (C) and pressure plate (D).

9
9. Remove (1) special friction plate (E) that is placed
outermost against pressure plate.
2. Install compressor bridge, bearing, and T-handle over

threaded post.
3. Compress clutch spring and remove snap ring. C
E D
10. The outermost plate can be identified by the wider

pads on the friction material.
11. Remove (9) identical steel plates that separate the (8) 5. Rotate hub bearing. Check for smooth rotation. Inner
identical friction plates. race should have no detectable radial movement (C).
12. Remove judder friction plate, judder spring, and 6. Lubricate bearing with engine oil.
judder spring seat.
Clutch Hub
13. Note difference between judder plate (F) and next
friction plate (G). The judder plate is the innermost 7. Inspect spline teeth (D) for wear, cracks or damage.
friction plate on the clutch hub.
E
F
8. Inspect surface of steel plate guides (E) on outer edge

of hub for wear, grooves, or damage. Check all posts
(F) for cracks or damage. Check the snap ring groove
for wear.
Clutch Inspection 9. Visually inspect friction and steel plates for wear or
damage on both surfaces. Replace plates as a set if
1. Clean clutch plates, inner hub, and outer basket. any plate is worn or damaged.
Clutch Basket
2. Inspect clutch gear teeth (A) for wear, cracks or
damage.
3. Inspect inside surfaces (B) of basket for cracks or
wear (grooves) from clutch plates.
A
C
4. Replace parts that fail inspection
10. Replace steel plates if grooved, distorted or chips. Replace pressure plate if it fails inspection.
discolored. Inspect plates for distortion by placing
each plate on a precision flat surface. Insert a feeler
gauge (G) between plate and flat surface in several H
places.
Clutch Steel Plate Warp Service Limit: .20mm

(.008in)
11. Measure thickness of friction plates in several places.
Thickness should be the same at each place. Replace
plates that fail inspection.
9
Friction Plate Thickness Minimum): 2.00 mm (.078 in)
Clutch Pressure Plate
12. Inspect pressure plate for cracks, scoring, or wear on

friction surface.
13. Inspect lifter retaining ring groove (H) for cracks or
Diaphragm Spring Clutch Assembly

14. Inspect clutch diaphragm spring (I) for cracks or 1. Refer to exploded views on page 9.13. Apply engine
distortion. oil to judder spring seat (A) and spring (B).
15. Inspect inner and outer edges of spring carefully for

unusual wear or damage. Outer edge should lay flat A
against a surface plate and inner tabs should be even
in height (J).
B
I
2. Install judder spring seat (flat ring), then judder spring.
Clutch Release Rack and Bearing NOTE: Judder spring must be installed with concave
side facing UP (toward outside of clutch). The tallest
NOTE: Clutch rack is serviceable as an assembly edge of spring will be outermost.
only.
3. Apply engine oil to judder friction plate and install.
16. Inspect clutch rack for broken or damaged teeth.
NOTE: This plate has a thinner profile (C) than the

17. Inspect lifter bearing visually for any signs or wear or rest of the friction plates.
discoloration. Rotate bearing inner race with your
finger and check for smooth movement and no play.
18. Replace clutch rack assembly if necessary.
NOTE: Feel the edge of steel plates and friction plates 7. Install clutch diaphragm spring (D) with concave side
with your finger. One side of plate is machined at the down on top of pressure plate.
edges and the other side is a rolled edge (rounded).
8. Place retaining ring seat (E) and retaining ring over
Install steel plates with machined edge facing UP.
clutch assembly before installing clutch spring
Install friction plates with rolled edge facing UP.
compressor tool. Flange on inner edge of seat faces
UP as shown.
Clutch Plate Direction
D
Sharp Edge up
Steel Plate
E
Rolled Edge up
Friction Plate
Clutch Basket
4. Place an oiled steel plate into clutch basket with

machined edge UP.
NOTE: If friction plates are new, soak them in clean CAUTION 9

engine oil for a few minutes before installing.
Tool will be under spring pressure.
5. Continue stacking oiled clutch plates into clutch WEAR EYE PROTECTION.
basket alternating friction and steel plates until all are
installed, ending with the special friction plate. 9. Install compressor tool and compress spring so ring
seat can be positioned and retaining ring installed.
NOTE: Be sure to install special friction plate last
(against pressure plate). As noted in Disassembly, Special Tool: Clutch Spring Compressor PV-45032
the friction material on this plate has wider pads 10. Install retaining ring with machined (sharp) edge up.
than the other (8) common friction plates. See Position retaining ring so one end of retainer is located
illustrations on page 9.13 and photo below. on one of the posts (F).
6. Install clutch pressure plate on top of clutch packing.
Wide tabs =
Outer plate
F
Pressure plate
11. After retaining ring is installed, slowly release

pressure from tool and guide flange into position
under the retaining ring.
12. Remove spring compressor tool. Inspect retaining
ring to be sure it is fully expanded and seated.
Clutch Installation
B C
Replace with new

125 ft-lbs (170 Nm)
E
D
Install with yellow dot facing OUT
1. Pry back split gear (B) to align teeth and push clutch 4. Install lock tool under split gear or lock crankshaft as
assembly onto clutch shaft until gear is fully engaged shown on page 9.12. Torque nut to specification.
with torque compensator gear.
=T
2. Clean clutch shaft threads with Loctite™ Primer N to
remove all grease, oil, or old locking agent.
Clutch Stake Nut: 125 ft-lbs (170 Nm)
3. Install washer (C), a new spring washer (D) and a new Engine lock tool PV-43502-A
stake nut (E). Install spring washer with yellow dot
facing OUT. See chapter 10 for stake nut installation.
5. Install clutch lifter assembly (F) and retaining ring (G).
Be sure retaining ring is seated in groove.
7. Check engine oil and fill to proper level.
Primary Drive Assembly View & Torque
37T
Moly Lube
9
57T
11T
1. Gear, Split, 37T 20. Screw, Socket Head, M6 x 15

2. Spring, Split Gear (4) 21. Stake Nut 125 ft-lbs (170 Nm) Single use fastener
3. Gear, Split, Backlash 22. Flat Washer
4. Retaining Ring 23. Spring Washer
5. Assembly, Split Gear (incl. items 1-4) 24. Crankshaft Gear (Primary Drive Gear)
6. Torque Limit Clutch, Starter 25. Retainer, Compensator (Late Build)
7. Bearing
26. Compensator Spring, Belleville (0.9 mm)
8. Starter Drive Clutch
9. Shaft, Idler Gear 27. Spacer
10. Cover, Limit Clutch 28. Compensator Spring, Belleville (2.54 mm)
11. Slider, Compensator 29. Retainer Spacer
12. Shaft, Compensator
13. Retainer, Compensator
14. O-ring
15. Idler Gear, Starter (See 15*NOTE above)
16. Compensator Drive Gear
17. Crankshaft Gear
18. Compensator Spring, Belleville (4)
19. Screw, 30ft-lbs (41 Nm) Single use fasteners (6)
Torque Compensator Removal 7. Remove compensator sleeve, washer and gear as an

assembly.
See Torque Compensator Assembly View (page 9.21). If
split gear removal is required, see page 9.25 after
compensator is removed.

2. Lock the engine to prevent rotation with the lock tool
or lock the crankshaft as described on page 9.12.
Engine lock tool PV-43502-A
3. Remove torque compensator stake nut and discard.
4. Remove retainer plate and Belleville springs.
Note orientation of washers (concave edges of
washers face each other) for installation.
Torque Compensator Inspection (Early

Build)
1. Inspect all parts for excessive galling or damage.
NOTE: Some polishing will be evident between the
compensator gear and the compensator slider and is a
normal condition. Replace assembly if ramps are worn.
2. Measure free length of torque compensator spring
stack.
5. If working on a late build type compensator (see

“Primary Drive Assembly View & Torque” on
page 9.21 for identification), collect the spacer off of
the balance shaft, beneath the retainer plate.
6. Remove outer ramp.
Surface Plate
Specification: Compensator Spring Stack Height

Standard: 17.68-18.08mm
(.696 - .712 inch)
Torque Compensator Inspection (Late Build) 2. Apply Moly Assembly Paste 2871460 to shaft splines,
sleeve, washer and back side of gear.
1. Inspect all parts for excessive galling or damage.
NOTE: Some polishing will be evident between the
compensator gear and the compensator slider and is a
normal condition. Replace assembly if ramps are worn.
2. Measure free length of torque compensator spring
stack.
Moly Assembly Paste: 2871460

3. Slide torque compensator gear assembly (D) onto
Surface Plate balance shaft (E) and seat it firmly against split gear
(F).
Specification: Compensator Spring Stack Height

Standard: 22.67mm E 9
(.893 inch) D F
Torque Compensator Installation

NOTE: Make sure that the driven split gear is fully
engaged with the drive (crankshaft) gear before
proceeding.
1. Assemble the torque compensator sleeve (A),

washer (B) and gear (C) as shown.
B 4. Grease the peaks and valleys gear, sliding ramp, and

A splines of sleeve.
5. Install sliding ramp. 10. Early Build (shown below)- Install the flat washer,
Belleville washer and a new stake nut.
Late Build - Install the Belleville washer and a new
stake nut.
Flat
Washer
6. If working on a late build type compensator (see Belleville
“Primary Drive Assembly View & Torque” on Washer Stake Nut
page 9.21 for identification), place the spring retainer
spacer on the end of the balance shaft. 11. Hold shaft by inserting lock tool or pin the crankshaft.
7. Grease edges of springs and retainer plate. 12. Torque nut to 125 ft-lbs (170 Nm).
Illustration below shows correctly assembled springs Engine Lock Tool PV-43502-A
(Early Build), with concave edge facing each other.
The assembled sets of spring washers are stacked
back to back. =T
Compensator Nut:125 ft-lbs (170 Nm)
13. Install primary cover (refer to page 9.12).

14. Fill engine oil to proper level.
Rotor (Flywheel) Removal

1. Remove primary cover (page 9.9) and rotor retaining
bolt (counterclockwise). Lock the engine to prevent
rotation with the lock tool (insert at point A) or lock the
crankshaft as described on page 9.12.
A
8. Install retainer plate and Belleville spring assembly,
pushing it onto splines as far as possible.
9. Clean balance shaft threads thoroughly to remove
all old locking agent, oil, or grease.
Engine lock tool PV-43502-A 5. Install washer & bolt. Torque to 75 ft-lbs (102 Nm).
CAUTION
Use caution when removing nut and keep hands and
body clear in case tool slips off gear.
2. Remove lock tool.

3. Cover crankcase cavity under rotor with a clean shop
towel to prevent parts from falling into case.
75 ft-lbs (102 Nm)
B
C
Split Gear Removal
2. Remove rotor (page 9.24).
3. Remove clutch assembly (page 9.14).
4. Remove torque compensator (page 9.22).
5. Remove starter gear retaining ring (A) with a flat-billed
external ring pliers. Remove any burrs from 9
crankshaft ring groove before removing starter gear,
or starter gear bushing may be damaged when gear
4. Install puller (B). Install lock tool (C) on bottom of gear is removed.
and rotate puller clockwise to remove rotor.
Rotor Puller PV-43533 A
5. Remove rotor and key.
Rotor (Flywheel) Installation

1. Clean taper of rotor and crankshaft thoroughly.
2. Install key in key way on crankshaft.
3. Align rotor key-way and install rotor on crankshaft.
Engine Lock Tool PV-43502-A
4. Position the lock tool as for rotor removal (C, previous
photo) or lock the crankshaft as described on
page 9.12. 6. Remove torque compensator (page 9.22).
7. Temporarily install rotor to rotate engine until key is
pointing up, and timing marks on split gear are aligned
with mark on crankshaft gear.
8. Insert a 1/4” pin punch in gear alignment hole (B) to Split Gear Installation
relieve spring pressure on gear teeth.
1. Rotate balance shaft until “boss” spline (D) (double
wide spline) is at 12:00 o’clock position.
B
B
D
2. Apply grease to balance shaft and back of split gear

9. Pull split gear off balancer shaft. assembly.
3. Line up teeth of split gear assembly with 1/4” straight
Split Gear Inspection pin in hole (E). Leave pin in place.
4. Do not allow pin to protrude out the back of the split
1. Remove retaining ring (C) from split gear hub and
gear assembly.
separate outer gear from inner gear. Visually inspect
contact surfaces of gears, springs, spring channels,
and gear teeth.
E
5. Place split gear on balance shaft with alignment dots

at the 9:00 o’clock position.
6. Align “boss” splines of balance shaft and split gear
while engaging crankshaft gear with split gear. Dot on
crankshaft gear (F) must be between the 2 dots on
balance gear (G).
NOTE: Some normal polishing may be evident in the

spring channels of gears. Replace the gear assembly if
F G
wear is evident.
2. After assembly, outer gear must rotate and return
freely without binding on inner gear.
7. Push split gear inward until fully seated and flush with 4. Remove starter gear retaining ring (A) with a flat- billed
crankshaft gear. Verify proper balance shaft timing. external ring pliers. Remove any burrs from
crankshaft ring groove before removing starter gear,
or starter gear bushing may be damaged when gear
is removed.
5. Remove flat washer and gear.
Starter Gear Inspection 9

1. Inspect gear teeth for chips, cracks or excessive
wear.
33.350 +/- 0.025
8. Install torque compensator, starter gear, rotor, clutch,

and primary cover.
49.7215
B +/- 0.0065
STARTER DRIVE
Starter Drive Removal
NOTE: The starter gear and primary drive (crankshaft)
gear must be removed before the starter idler gear or C
starter torque limiter clutch and shaft can be removed
from crankcase.
2. Inspect bushing (B) for excessive wear and scoring.
1. Remove primary cover (page 9.9). 3. Inspect one-way clutch hub (C) for wear, scoring or
rough surface.
2. Remove rotor (page 9.24).
4. Measure I.D. of bushing and O.D. of one-way clutch
Rotor Puller PV-43534 hub and compare to specification.
3. Place a shop towel in the crankcase cavity. 5. Replace gear if wear or damage is evident.
Starter Clutch Removal / Inspection 3. Use a primary cover screw to pull idler gear shaft (B).
1. Remove one-way clutch from primary drive gear.
A
2. Note direction of one-way clutch with flanged side (D)
inward (toward engine) for reassembly.
Place gear here
BB
IMPORTANT! Position idler gear as shown for primary

gear removal. If removed from the case, place idler gear
back in this position BEFORE installing primary gear.
4. Pull primary drive gear off crankshaft.

5. Remove idler gear from crankcase.
6. Inspect clutch hub surface (C) inside primary drive
gear for wear, scoring, nicks, or rough surface.
3. Inspect cage for cracks. Check band springs for

tension and proper function.
4. Inspect clutch lobes for wear, galling, or rough
surface.
5. See “Starter Gear / Starter Clutch Installation” on
page 9.30
C
PRIMARY DRIVE GEAR
Primary Drive Gear Removal / Inspection
1. Install engine lock tool in position (A) to hold
crankshaft gear stationary while removing bolts. 7. Inspect gear teeth on idler and primary drive gear for
2. Remove primary gear screws. NOTE: Install new chips, cracks or excessive wear.
screws with pre-applied locking agent upon 8. Remove starter drive cover.
assembly.
9. Pull torque limiter clutch shaft out through cover
opening with washer.
NOTE: Stepped side of washer faces out (toward gear)
and flat side of washer is against limiter clutch (inset).
10. Remove torque limit clutch.
Starter Torque Limit Clutch Inspection 4. Temporarily install rotor to rotate engine until key is
pointing UP. Remove rotor.
1. Mount torque limit clutch in a soft jawed vise across
5. Install primary gear on crankshaft with dot on gear at
entire gear face (D). Clamp only tight enough to
the 3:00 position (90 degrees to the rear).
prevent gear rotation.
D
F
2. Install shaft with spacer (E).

6. Engage teeth of primary gear and split gear, with dot
3. Use a 19mm 12 point socket on gear (F). on primary gear between two dots on split gear.
4. Read torque at point of clutch slip. 7. Place engine lock tool between bottom of inner split
gear and crankcase.
Limit Clutch Break-Away Torque:
Standard: 35-45 ft-lbs (46-61 Nm) 8. Install drive gear. If split gear is installed, rotate drive
9
Service Limit: 30 ft-lbs (40 Nm) gear clockwise against spring pressure until split gear
teeth align. Push gear in and rotate until pin on
Primary Drive Gear Installation crankshaft aligns with hole on the back of drive gear.
Primary and split gear teeth will be flush if fully seated.
1. Clean mating surfaces of crankshaft and gear.
2. Clean screw threads in crankshaft to remove all 30 ft-lbs (41 Nm)
locking agent, oil, and grease with Loctite™ Primer N
and dry with low pressure air.
NOTE: Starter torque limit clutch (A) and idler gear (B)
MUST be placed in the case before the primary drive
gear is installed.
A Clean all holes
Use all NEW screws
9. Install new primary drive gear screws. These screws

B have a pre-applied locking agent. Always replace
these screws if loosened or removed.
10. Install screws and torque in 2 steps following a star
pattern to 30 ft-lbs (41 Nm). Repeat final torque on all
screws.
3. Place idler gear in crankcase but do not install shaft.
11. Install idler gear and shaft (C). 2. Install starter gear (B). When properly installed, the
starter gear should rotate smoothly in a clockwise
direction and lock to the primary gear when you
C attempt to rotate it counterclockwise.
12. Install starter clutch and gear (page 9.30).

3. Install washer (C).
Starter Gear / Starter Clutch Installation
C
1. Install one-way clutch with raised edge (A) inward
(toward primary gear).
4. Install retaining ring (D).
5. Install rotor (page 9.25).
7. Check engine oil and fill to proper level.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Troubleshooting
Clutch Lever Pulls Clutch lever pivot, bushings,
Clutch lever pivot points Lubricate
Excessively Hard ferrules need lubrication
Drive plates catching on primary Clutch primary driven gear/
Replace necessary parts
driven gear basket clutch plates
Clutch lifter plate bearing damage Clutch plate bearing lifter Replace
Damaged clutch lifter Clutch release mechanism Repair as necessary
mechanism
Clutch Slips Clutch spring weak Clutch spring Replace
Clutch spring snap ring loose or Clutch spring snap ring Repair or replace as
broken necessary
Pressure plate worn, warped or Pressure plate Replace
distorted
Clutch plate(s) worn, warped or Driven plates or drive plates Replace
distorted
Clutch lifter mechanism sticking Clutch lifter mechanism Repair
Engine oil level low Oil level Correct
Oil additives present in oil or used Oil quality Replace oil & filter 9
previously (clutch plates may need to
be replaced)
Dragging Clutch Clutch lever, pivot, cable, or lifter Lever, pivots, bushings, Inspect
(doesn’t disengage arm sticking bearings, cable
completely, creeping, Oil additives present in oil or used Oil quality Replace oil & filter (clutch
hard to find Neutral) previously plates may need to be
replaced)
Oil level too high Oil level Correct
Oil viscosity too high Oil quality Replace oil & filter
Pressure plate worn, warped or Pressure Plate Replace
distorted
Clutch plate(s) worn, warped or Driven plates and/or drive Replace
distorted plates
Weak clutch spring Clutch springs Replace all

Transmission Will Not Broken shift drum Shift drum Replace shift drum
Shift Bent shift forks Shift fork Replace shift forks
Worn shift drum Shift drum Replace shift drum
Broken gears Transmission gears Replace broken gear(s)
Damaged/broken bearings Transmission, shift cam Replace bearings that fail
bearings inspection
Worn gear shift pawl ratchet Shift pawl mechanism Replace parts that fail
mechanism inspection
Broken or dislodged shift shaft Shift shaft return spring Repair or replace
return spring
Roller detent arm stuck Roller detent arm Repair or replace parts
Bent shift shaft (internal) Shift shaft Repair or replace
External shift linkage External shift linkage Repair or replace
binding or damaged
Bent or distorted shift forks Shift fork Replace
Bent or distorted shift fork rails Shift fork rail Replace
Broken transmission Transmission components Repair or replace
components
Transmission Hard to Improper clutch operation Clutch Inspect, repair
Shift Incorrect oil viscosity Oil quality Replace engine oil
Incorrect clutch cable - Adjust
adjustment
Shift shaft damaged Shift shaft components Repair or replace
Sticking pivot point, bent External shift linkage Repair or replace
external shift linkage
Bent or distorted shift forks Shift forks Replace
Damaged shift drum grooves Shift drum Repair or replace
Shift detent plunger stuck Shift detent plunger Repair or replace
Bent/binding shift fork rails Shift fork rails Repair or replace
Transmission Jumps Out Broken / loose stop pin Shift stop pin Replace
of Gear Worn shift drum or shift drum Shift drum or shift linkage Replace
ratchet
Broken shift return spring Shift return spring Replace
Damaged shift drum grooves Shift drum Replace
Bent or worn shift forks Shift forks Replace
Bent/binding shift fork rails Shift fork rails Replace
Worn engagement dogs on Transmission gears Replace
transmission gears
Transmission Noise Drive belt tension incorrect Drive belt Adjust or replace
Clutch plates bind or drag when Clutch plates / hubs Adjust / repair / replace
clutch is disengaged
Gear/bearing wear/damage Transmission components Inspect / replace
TRANSMISSION & CRANKSHAFT
CHAPTER 10
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2
ASSEMBLY VIEWS & TORQUE VALUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4
CRANKCASE COMPONENTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4
CRANKSHAFT / CONNECTING ROD / CRANKCASE TORQUE PATTERN . . . . . . . . 10.5
CRANKCASE BOLT LENGTH AND TORQUE PATTERN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.5
SERVICE PROCEDURES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.6
CRANKCASE SEPARATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.6
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.7
MAINSHAFT / CLUTCH SHAFT ASSEMBLY VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.8
SHIFT DRUM AND SHIFT FORK ASSEMBLY VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.9
POWER DELIVERY (TYPICAL 6-SPEED). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.10
2012 TRANSMISSION INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.11
NSA (NEUTRAL SELECTION ASSIST) TRANSMISSION INFORMATION. . . . . . . . . 10.11
TRANSMISSION REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.13
CLUTCH SHAFT INSPECTION / REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.14
TRANSMISSION INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.14
CRANKSHAFT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.16
CONNECTING ROD SIDE CLEARANCE INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.16
CONNECTING ROD REMOVAL / IDENTIFICATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.16
CONNECTING ROD INSPECTION (BIG END) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.17
CONNECTING ROD BEARING INSPECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.18 10
CONNECTING ROD BEARING CLEARANCE INSPECTION (TYPICAL) . . . . . . . . . . 10.18
CONNECTING ROD BEARING SELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.19
CRANKSHAFT INSPECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.20
CONNECTING ROD INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.20
CRANKSHAFT CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.21
MAIN BEARING INSPECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.21
MAIN BEARING OIL CLEARANCE INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.21
LEFT CRANKCASE ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.22
RIGHT CRANKCASE ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.23
CRANKCASE REED VALVE ASSEMBLY REMOVAL & INSPECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . 10.23
CRANKSHAFT INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.23
TRANSMISSION INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.24
BALANCE SHAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.24
BALANCE SHAFT REMOVAL & INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.24
BALANCE SHAFT INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.25
CRANKCASE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.26
CRANKCASE ASSEMBLY & SEALING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.26
STAKE NUT INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.29
TROUBLESHOOTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.30
GENERAL
Service Information
• Remove engine from frame to service internal transmission and/or crankshaft components (Chapter 6)
• The crankcase must be separated to access internal transmission components and crankshaft. Remove:
•Cylinder heads
•Cylinders & pistons
•Gear shift linkage
•Primary cover and components (as required depending on needed access to other components)
•Regulator / Rectifier and Bracket
•Starter motor
• Label and store parts neatly to speed the assembly process and ensure that matched parts like connecting
rods, camshaft carriers and bearings can be installed in their original location
• Crankshaft main bearing replacement requires line boring. This procedure requires full machine shop
capabilities and specialized knowledge. It is recommended that a qualified machine shop perform this
procedure if it becomes necessary or replace the crankcase assembly
• Crankshafts and connecting rods are color coded for manufacturing tolerances with a white or red paint mark (or
stamped “R” or W”). See page 10.19
• All torque specifications are "dry" unless specified for oil or locking agent. Refer to exploded views
• When locking agents are required, use Loctite Primer N to clean fastener before applying locking agent
Primer N reduces cure time of thread locking agent in addition to preparing the surfaces
SPECIAL TOOLS
Crankcase / Crankshaft / Connecting Rod Special Tools
Crankshaft Main Bearing Protector: PV-47207
Crankcase Separator: PV-47332B (MY11 complete new kit), or PV-47332A & PV-50371 (PV-50371 updates PV-47332A
for MY11 engines).
Crankcase Assembly Tools:
Base Tool: PV-45030
Collar: PV-46299 (M36 x 1.50 thread for use with PV-45030
Assembly Adapter: PVX-47429 (for use with PV-45030)
Drive Sprocket Seal Installer: PV-43505A
Clutch Shaft Installation Tool: PV-47331
SPECIFICATIONS
Drive Train
Item Specifications
Drive Train (General) Transmission 6 Speed (Overdrive)
Primary Reduction Ratio 1.48: 1
Final Reduction Ratio 2.12: 1
Drive Train (Gear Ratios) Gear Ratio: 1st Gear 3.13: 1

Gear Ratio: 2nd Gear 2.02: 1
Gear Ratio: 3rd Gear 1.50: 1
Gear Ratio: 4th Gear 1.20: 1
Gear Ratio: 5th Gear 1.00: 1
Gear Ratio: 6th Gear (Overdrive) 0.87: 1
Connecting Rod and Crankshaft Specifications

CRANKSHAFT and COMPONENTS
Part Part Specific Standard Service Limit
Connecting Rod Connecting Rod to .22 - .42 mm .65 mm
Crankshaft Side Clearance (.0087 - .0165") (.025")
Connecting Rod Bearing to .0254 - .0635 mm .11 mm
Crankshaft Oil Clearance (.001 - .0025") (.0043")
Connecting Rod Small End 22.01 - 22.02 mm 22.09 mm
I.D. (.8665 - .8670") (.8694")
Connecting Rod Width 20.28 - 20.34 mm 20.03 mm
(.798 - .801") (.788")
Connecting Rod Big End I.D. 50.84 - 50.85 mm 50.89 mm
(White) (2.0016 - 2.0020") (2.0031")
Connecting Rod Big End I.D. 50.85 - 50.86 mm 50.89 mm
(Red) (2.0019 - 2.0024") (2.0034")
Crankshaft Main Bearing Connecting Rod Journal 40.00 - 40.58 mm 41.35 mm
/ Rod Journals Width (1.5748 - 1.5976") (1.627")
Crankshaft Rod Journal O.D. 47.970 - 47.978 mm 47.94 mm
(White) (1.888 - 1.889") (1.8871")
Crankshaft Rod Journal O.D. 47.978 - 47.986 mm 47.95 mm
(Red) (1.8888 - 1.8891") (1.8875")
Main Bearing Oil Clearance Left .013 - .060 mm .10 mm
(.0005 - .0023")
Right .014 - .061mm
(.004")
.10 mm
10
(.0005 - .0024") (.004")
Left Main Bearing Journal 64.952 - 64.973 mm 64.93 mm
O.D. (2.5571 - 2.5579") (2.556")
Right Main Bearing Journal 59.952 - 59.973 mm 59.93 mm
O.D. (2.3603 - 2.3611") (2.359")
.05 - .30 mm
Crankshaft End Play -
(.0019 - .0118")
Balance Shaft Journal O.D., Left (Primary 29.980 - 29.992 mm
Side) Journal O.D., Right (Oil 29.969 - 29.979 mm -
Pump Drive Side)
Transmission
Shift Fork Shift Fork I.D. (Dimension A, 12.00 - 12.026 mm 12.05 mm
page 10.9) (.4725 - .4732") (.4744")
Shift Fork Pin O.D. 6.036 - 6.136 mm 6.02 mm
(Dimension B, page 10.9) (.2376 - .2416") (.2370")
C1 5.70 - 5.90 mm C1 5.65 MM
Shift Fork Width (Dimension (.2244 - .2322”) C2 5.05 MM
C1 & C2, page 10.9) C2 5.10 - 5.30 mm
(.2007 -.2086”)
Shift Fork Rail Shift Fork Rail O.D. 11.948 - 11.972 mm 11.92 mm
(Dimension C, page 10.9) (.4704 - .4713") (.4693")
Shift Fork Rail Runout - .025 mm
(.001")
Shift Drum Shift Drum Groove - Replace drum if any wear is
evident

Assembly View - Crankcase
Replace bearing retainer plate screws if removed!
Press bearings by outer race only!
Oil Jet Orientation
Section AA
Pressed in
LH Case with flat surface
facing DOWN
Crankshaft / Connecting Rod / Crankcase Torque Pattern
10
Crankcase Bolt Length And Torque Pattern

Crankcase Bolt Torque: Torque bolts in order 1-14 (shown below) in two steps to 22 ft-lbs (30 Nm).
Repeat 22 ft-lbs (30 Nm) torque.
B A Crankcase Bolt Length:

A = 8 x 135
P clamps B = 8 x 110
for wiring NOTE: Install starter motor
B with bolts #3 & #4
Crankcase Bolt #2 (CPS wire guide):

bolt torque Orient guide as shown below
- END
B Dot faces
Crankcase bolt torque - START OUT
P clamp
RH Case faces case
Flat edge
SERVICE PROCEDURES 9. Loosen remaining crankcase bolts evenly and remove

from case. Note the two different bolt lengths and the
Crankcase Separation locations of each (page 10.5).
10. Install the crankshaft bearing protector over the cam
1. Drain engine oil. chain drive gear on the crankshaft.
2. Remove drive sprocket (Chapter 11). Special Tool: Crankshaft Bearing Protector PV-47207
3. Remove regulator / rectifier to avoid damage. 11. Install crankcase separator tool on crankcase over the
main shaft and tighten screws. Tighten the center
4. Remove engine and mount securely on an engine screw while tapping with a soft faced mallet.
stand (Chapter 6). Special Tool: Crankcase Separator PV-47332B (MY11
5. Remove primary cover (Chapter 9). new kit) or PV-47332A & PV-50371 (PV-50371 updates
PV-47332A for MY11 and newer engines).
6. Remove cylinder heads (Chapter 7), cylinders and
pistons (Chapter 8).
7. Remove shift ratchet, clutch, alt. rotor and starter gear PV-47332B
(Chapter 9).
NOTE: For transmission service only, remove:
• Clutch
• Shift drum star
• Countershaft retaining nut (A). Use clutch shaft
holder PV-45028 to prevent shaft rotation.
PV-47207
This allows transmission removal after cases are split.
12. Lift crankcase off and remove bearing protector from

cam chain drive sprocket.
NOTE: Components such as the crankshaft, oil
pump, balance shaft, transmission and shift drum
can be removed individually for service.
NOTE: For complete engine disassembly, refer to

Chapter 9 to remove:
• Flywheel
• Torque compensator
Refer to the following pages as required:
• Starter gear & one way clutch
• Crankshaft Service: Page 10.16
• Primary drive gear
• Oil Pump Service: Page 4.9
• Starter idler gear and shaft
• Balance Shaft: Page 10.24
• Shift Drum / Transmission: Page 10.13
8. Remove starter motor.
Assembly View - Transmission
10
Assembly View - Mainshaft / Clutch Shaft
MAINSHAFT / CLUTCH SHAFT
Assembly View - Shift Drum and Shift Fork
10
(Left End)
Power Delivery (Typical 6-Speed)
Indicates movement of sliding gear for engagement
1st Gear & Neutral 2nd Gear
1st Gear
Neutral
3rd Gear 4th Gear
5th Gear 6th Gear (O/D)
2012 - 2013 Transmission Information NSA (Neutral Selection Assist) Transmission

Information
• Before replacing any transmission component, it is
important to determine which gear set has been • The NSA system assists the operator by preventing
used. Transmissions with back-cut gear dogs can the unwanted engagement of 2nd gear when trying
be identified by locating the cut v-groove around to locate neutral with the gear shifter. This system
the outer diameter of any gear. also prevents shifting into second gear from a stop
when the vehicle is not moving forward.
NSA System Main Components
Mainshaft Pockets (3)
6th Gear Pockets (3)
• When the transmission is in first gear or neutral, not

rotating or rotating slowly, the ball bearings are
seated into pockets in the mainshaft, preventing 6th
gear from sliding on the mainshaft. As the
transmission speed increases in first gear,
centrifugal force pulls the three ball bearings into 10
pockets in the 6th gear, thus allowing the shift fork
to move the 6th gear to allow engagement into 2nd
gear.
6th Gear Mainshaft Ball Bearing (3)
CAUTION
2012-2013 back-cut gears should not be used in Lubrication

conjunction with previous model year Victory holes (3 large)
transmission gears.
Centrifugal force pulls ball bearings outward
allowing movement of the 6th gear.
• Transmissions with back-cut gears do not require
countershaft shimming upon reassembly.
NSA (Neutral Selection Assist) Transmission
Component Removal.
1. Remove mainshaft as outlined in this chapter and
secure vertically.
2. Remove 4th, 3rd & 2nd gear along with all applicable
retaining rings, thrust washers and needle bearings
from the mainshaft.
3. All three ball bearings need to be seated outward in the NSA (Neutral Selection Assist) Transmission
6th gear pockets for the 6th gear to slide up and off of Component Installation.
the mainshaft. When the ball bearings are properly
seated in the 6th gear for removal, they are visible 1. To reinstall 6th gear onto the mainshaft, lubricate the
through the hole in the gear. This can be accomplished inside 6th gear pockets and splines with Victory
by one of the following: engine oil. Install the three ball bearings into the
• Lift the 6th gear upward with a shift fork approx lubricated 6th gear bearing pockets.
3/8” & spin the mainshaft assembly so centrifugal
force pulls all three of the ball bearings outward into Lubricate with Victory engine
the 6th gear pockets, then lift the gear upward off of oil and install the 3 ball bearings
the mainshaft. into the 6th gear bearing pockets
• Abruptly tilt the main shaft at each 6th gear bearing
pocket location until all three bearings are outward
into the 6th gear pockets. Squirting Victory engine
oil into the 6th gear pocket holes will aid getting the
ball bearings to stay in the outward position.
Ball bearings visible through hole when
positioned outward. Lube all 3 holes,
here, with Victory engine oil, if needed.
2. With the mainshaft secured vertically, rotate 6th gear

so any one of the three bearing holes in the gear and
the bearing pockets on the shaft are in alignment. Note
the alignment notch on one spline of the mainshaft. Be
sure the ball bearings do not fall out of the 6th gear
pockets when positioning the gear onto the splines.
Alignment notch on mainshaft spline
When all 3 ball bearings are visible, slide

6th gear up and off of the mainshaft.
Ball bearing
Bearing pocket
in mainshaft
CAUTION
Only use Victory engine oil to lubricate transmission 3. Slide 6th gear down onto the splines making sure that
components. Using grease or other lubricants may the pocket alignment is correct. If the ball bearings and
cause incorrect operation of the NSA system. mainshaft pockets do not line up, incorrect operation
of the NSA system will result.
4. When 6th gear is fully installed, abruptly rock the 2. Remove shift drum star (B).
mainshaft so the bearings move into the mainshaft
pockets or use a small dowel to push the ball bearings
into the mainshaft pockets. Check for proper NSA
operation by trying to remove the 6th gear from the
main shaft; the gear should not pull up and off of the
mainshaft without performing steps 1-4 of the removal B
process.
5. If NSA operation is correct, reassemble mainshaft as
outlined in this chapter.
Use small dowel
and push balls in,
if necessary.
3. Remove shift fork shafts (C).

4. Disengage shift forks from grooves in the shift drum.
CAUTION
10
Only use Victory engine oil to lubricate transmission
components. Using grease or other lubricants may
cause incorrect operation of the NSA system.
C
Transmission Removal
1. If not removed previously, remove countershaft
locating nut and washer (A). Use clutch shaft holder
PV-45028 to prevent shaft rotation.
5. Remove shift forks, shift drum, mainshaft and
countershaft from crankcase.
6. Carefully lift crankshaft out of left case.
7. Remove oil pump sprocket, chain, oil pipes and pump Transmission Inspection
(Chapter 4).
Refer to exploded views on page 10.7. Standard
8. Pull balance shaft from left case.
specifications for shaft and gears are on page 10.8 (main
and clutch shaft) and page 10.8 (countershaft).
Shafts
1. Measure outside diameter of shafts and bearing areas
for wear and concentricity as shown on page 10.8
Look closely at splines and retaining ring grooves of
shafts for wear. Inspect ends of shafts for signs of
wear:
• Dull finish
• Discoloration
• Rough or uneven surface
• Measurement outside of specification
Gears
1. Visually inspect:
Clutch Shaft Inspection / Removal • Gear internal splines (A)
• Gear teeth (B)
1. The clutch shaft (D) (Mainshaft 5th) is press-fit in the
bearing inner race. Inspect shaft and bearing with • Gear dogs (C) for rounding, cracks, chips
clutch shaft in the crankcase. Rotate gear and check • Gear dog slots (D) for rounding
for smooth movement and no play. Inspect gear,
• Bearing surfaces (E)
bearings, and shaft splines for wear or damage.
Remove clutch shaft if bearing or gear service is • Shift fork grooves (F)
required (Step 2).
C B
D
D
F E
Check each gear for damage, cracks, wear (rounding of

dogs or surfaces), or discoloration.
Clutch Shaft Bearings
1. Inspect clutch shaft needle bearings (inside) that
2. Use an arbor press to push clutch shaft out of bearing
support the mainshaft. The clutch shaft should spin
from clutch side. Support crankcase and protect case
freely and smoothly on the mainshaft. The bearings
mating surface during press operation. Replace
should support the shaft firmly with little or no
bearing if clutch shaft is removed.
detectable lateral movement.
2. Replace clutch shaft assembly if bearings are worn or 7. Slide rails into crankcase holes and check for a good
damaged. snug fit.
8. Visually inspect the shift drum bearing (D) in the left
crankcase for wear or damage. The bearing must be
fully seated in the case and held in position by the
retaining plate. Replace the bearing if it is loose in the
bore, or if any side play is detected.
D
Shift Forks, Shift Fork Rails
Refer to specifications listed on page 10.3 and
page 10.9.
3. Inspect all contact surfaces (A) of each shift fork.
Replace a shift fork if any part is discolored
(overheated), unusually scored, warped, or worn
beyond service limit.
4. Inspect each shift fork pin (B) for wear or damage and
9. Temporarily install shift drum into bearing and rotate,
compare to specifications.
checking for smooth bearing operation. Also, inspect
B shift drum bearing pin in the right crankcase to ensure
it is not loose or worn.
10
SHIFT DRUM INSPECTION
10. Inspect shift drum grooves (E) for wear. Pay close
attention to corners of grooves where forks change
direction.
11. Inspect shift drum star alignment pin (F). It should fit
tightly in drum and shift star.
A
E F
5. Inspect shift fork rails (C) for wear, scoring, or runout.
12. Inspect surface of shift drum star for excessive wear

or damage.
6. Measure shift fork rail O.D. for wear in 3 or 4 places
along the length. The rail O.D. should be consistent
over the entire length.
13. Inspect right side shift drum bearing (G). Connecting Rod Side Clearance Inspection
14. Temporarily install shift drum in right hand case 1. Move connecting rods to one side of crankshaft. Insert
bearing and inspect fit. Spin drum to check for smooth a feeler gauge between one connecting rod and the
bearing operation. crankshaft. Compare measurement to specification
on page 10.3.
2. If clearance recorded exceeds service limit, the
crankshaft, connecting rod or both must be inspected
G and worn parts replaced. Refer to crankshaft
inspection on page 10.20 and specifications on
page 10.3 to determine which part(s) are outside of
specifications.
Crankshaft Removal
1. Separate RH crankcase from LH case (page 10.6).
2. Rotate balance shaft (A) until counterweights are clear
of crankshaft.
Connecting Rod Removal / Identification
NOTE: The connecting rod caps are marked from the
factory, however it is recommended that an additional
reference mark be added for clarity. Caps are matched to
A
rods and must be installed with the proper orientation. DO
NOT strike or stamp the connecting rod.
1. Use a permanent marker to mark orientation of

connecting rods and rod bearing caps. These parts
must be installed in their original locations.
EXAMPLE: Right connecting rod must be assembled
to the right with the bearing cap that was removed
from it. The bearing cap and connecting rod must be
assembled in the same direction as it was removed
using the same bolt.
Label Connecting Rod, Rod Cap & Bolt
3. Lift crankshaft straight up until clear of case.
NOTE: Connecting rod bearings and main bearings are
easily damaged. Be careful not to cause damage to these
parts when servicing items within the crankcase.
2. Remove connecting rod bolts and connecting rod

bearing caps.
NOTE: It may be necessary to lightly tap the caps with a Connecting Rod Inspection (Big end)
plastic mallet to loosen them.
1. Refer to page 8.7 for connecting rod small end
CAUTION inspection.
CAUTION
The mating surface of connecting rod and cap is rough
in appearance, which is a normal condition due to the
Be sure to match connecting rod caps with their
manufacturing process. If rod caps are installed
respective rod and orient the cap properly before
incorrectly and tightened, the precision mating
installing the cap. Secure the big end of rods in a vise
surfaces will be damaged. Replace the connecting rod
equipped with soft, protective jaws before torquing rod
assembly if mating surfaces are damaged.
bolts.
10
2. Remove bearings and install caps on connecting rods.
NOTE: Rods are marked OUT as shown in photo. “OUT” Be sure mating surfaces (A) of rod and cap are clean.
must face toward the left for the left connecting rod and
must face toward the right for the right connecting rod 3. Apply Victory engine oil to threads of rod bolts and
(outside of the engine). nuts. Torque evenly in 2 steps to specification
(page 10.20).
4. Measure I.D. of connecting rod big end for size and out Connecting Rod Bearing Clearance
of round. Compare to specifications on page 10.3. Inspection (Typical)
1. Assemble the connecting rod cap with bearings and
torque to specification below.
=T
Connecting Rod Cap:
5 ft-lbs (7 Nm) (To Seat Bearing)
40 ft-lbs (55 Nm) (Final Torque)
2. Measure the connecting rod big end bearing I.D. with

a dial bore gauge and record.
5. Visually inspect connecting rod upper and lower ends

for scoring, damage, or excessive wear.
Connecting Rod Bearing Inspection

1. Inspect bearing inserts for unusual wear, peeling,
scoring, damage etc. Replace as a set if damage is
noted. Inspect bearing clearance and refer to Bearing
Selection Chart (page 10.19).
3. Measure the connecting rod journal on crankshaft and

record.
4. Subtract the journal diameter from the connecting rod
bearing diameter to calculate oil clearance and
compare to specification (page 10.3).
5. If service limits are exceeded, install new rod bearings
and recheck oil clearance.
6. If service limits are still exceeded, determine if
crankshaft or connecting rods need to be replaced.
Connecting Rod Bearing Selection 3. ...and the color code on the connecting rod.
1. There are 3 sizes of connecting rod bearings

available: Black, Orange and Blue (see chart below).
2. To determine which bearing to use, look at the color
code on RH end of crankshaft...
“R” or “W”
4. Refer to the chart below to select the proper bearing

insert.
FOR EXAMPLE: If the CONNECTING ROD paint mark is
RED and the CRANKSHAFT stamp is W (white) (or not
stamped), use BLUE bearing inserts.
Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Chart

CON ROD COLOR / CRANKSHAFT BEARING COLOR BEARING
(P/N 3514390-xxx) THICKNESS
WHITE Connecting Rod with RED (“R” Stamp) on Crankshaft Black ( - 067 ) 1.409- 1.415 mm 10
WHITE Connecting Rod with WHITE Crankshaft (or not stamped) Orange ( - 159 ) 1.413- 1.419 mm
RED Connecting Rod with RED Crankshaft Orange ( - 159 )
RED Connecting Rod with WHITE Crankshaft (or not stamped) Blue ( - 027 ) 1.417- 1.423 mm
Crankshaft Inspection 5. Measure O.D. of main bearing journals.
Record all measurements and compare to specifications

on page 10.3. Replace crankshaft if any measurement is
worn beyond the service limit.
1. Measure the width of the rod bearing journal. Right

Left
Connecting Rod Installation

1. Make sure proper bearing clearance is achieved by
using the correct colored bearing insert for a given
color combination of connecting rod and crankshaft.
2. Clean all oil off connecting rod, connecting rod cap and
bearing inserts.
2. Measure width of connecting rods at big end.
3. Install bearing inserts into connecting rods and caps.
First, install bearing tab into groove, then press the rest
of the bearing into place.
NOTE: Procedure during disassembly called for marking
of connecting rods and caps. Ensure that each part is
installed in original location including rod cap bolts.
4. Apply assembly lube to connecting rod bearings and
crank pin.
Moly Assembly Paste PN: 2871460
5. Install rods and caps onto the crankshaft, observing
the “OUT” mark on the connecting rods. “OUT” must
3. Visually inspect all bearing journals for scoring,
face toward the left for the left connecting rod and
damage or excessive wear.
must face toward the right for the right connecting rod
4. Crankshaft and connecting rods are identified by color. (outside end of crankshaft). Be sure the I.D. marks
Be sure to compare measurements to specification on made previously are aligned.
page 10.3 for the proper color (or non-marked)
connecting rod or crankshaft.
Measure O.D. of crankshaft rod journal in four places and
compare to specifications.
6. Tighten rod cap bolts: 2. After cleaning passages, apply LoctiteTM 262 to blind
plug threads and install plugs into crankshaft to
specified torque (page 10.5). Plug should be flush with
=T
surface of crankshaft.
Connecting Rod Cap: 3. Install woodruff key(s). Install drive and alignment pins.
5 ft-lbs (7 Nm) (To Seat Bearing)
40 ft-lbs (55 Nm) (Final Torque) Main Bearing Inspection
7. Check that the connecting rods rotate smoothly and 1. Inspect crankcase main bearing surfaces for wear,
freely on crankshaft journal. peeling, scoring, or damage.
8. If a connecting rod or crankshaft was replaced, re- 2. Inspect alignment of bearing lubrication hole (A) in left
measure side clearance (A) to be sure it is within crankcase half or (B) in right case half. Holes must be
specification listed on page 10.3 before assembly. aligned with their respective oil passage in crankcase.
10
Main Bearing Oil Clearance Inspection
1. Measure main bearing I.D. and concentricity with a
Crankshaft Cleaning dial bore gauge for right and left side. Compare to
specification (page 10.3). Subtract crankshaft main
1. Remove blind plugs from crankshaft to ensure that all journal diameter from main bearing diameter to
passages are clear. calculate oil clearance.
CAUTION
Blind plugs are installed with LoctiteTM 262. Use

localized heat (such as a soldering gun) when
removing blind plugs.
Plug: LoctiteTM 262

15 ft-lbs (20 Nm)
2. If crankshaft dimensions are within tolerances and oil

clearances are incorrect, the crankcase set must be
replaced or new main bearings installed and line-
honed by a competent machinist.
NOTE: Replace crankcase halves as a set.
Left Crankcase Assembly 2. Press balance shaft bearing from the primary side
using an arbor press (B).
Prepare LEFT crankcase for assembly:
Refer to exploded view on page 10.4 for torque values,
bearing press depth, and locking agent. B
1. Clean crankcase and oil passage (A) thoroughly.

Rinse and dry with compressed air.
CLUTCH SHAFT INSTALLATION

3. Place clutch shaft support tool press plate on clutch
side of crankcase to support inner race of bearing.
Clutch shaft is a firm press-fit in bearing, and bearing
damage may result if inner race is not supported during
• Install new bearings in crankcase as required the press operation.
• Apply a film of lithium grease to outer race of Special tool:
bearings to prevent galling upon installation Clutch Shaft Bearing Support: PV-47331
• Press on outer race of bearings using an arbor 4. Press clutch shaft until fully seated using an arbor
press and a suitable arbor that is slightly smaller press (C). Check for smooth, quiet operation after shaft
than bearing outside diameter is installed.
• DO NOT press on inner race of ball bearings C
Right Crankcase Assembly Crankcase Reed Valve Assembly Removal &

Inspection
Prepare RIGHT crankcase for assembly:
Refer to exploded view on page 10.4 for torque values, 1. Separate engine cases (page 10.6).
bearing press depth, and locking agent. 2. Remove the retaining screws for the reed valve
1. Clean crankcase oil passages (D) thoroughly. Rinse assembly. Remove breather valve assembly.
and dry with compressed air. 3. Inspect the reed valve for bending, pitting, or other
damage at the sealing surface that would prevent a
good seal.
4. Replace the reed valve as necessary.
D
Plate
Screws
Loctite 262
65 in-lbs (7.5 Nm)
Crankcase
Breather
• Install new bearings in crankcase as required. Reed
• Apply a film of lithium grease to outer race of Left Crankcase
bearings to prevent galling upon installation.
10
• Press on outer race of bearings using an arbor
press and a suitable arbor that is slightly smaller Crankshaft Installation
than bearing outside diameter.
• DO NOT press on inner race of ball bearings. NOTE: Install left engine case onto an engine stand.
1. Apply assembly paste to main bearings.
Moly Assembly Paste PN: 2871460
2. Hold crankshaft over left crankcase and position rods so
that left side rod is in cutout for rear cylinder and right
side rod is in cutout for the front cylinder.
3. Place crankshaft into left crankcase half.
2. If main bearings are replaced, they must be line-honed

with the left side crankcase to proper finished size.
Press operation and fitting must be performed by a
qualified machinist.
Transmission Installation 9. Photo shows transmission installed and shift forks

engaged; shift rails seated.
IMPORTANT: Transmission MUST be in 1st gear
NOTE: Shift transmission into 1ST gear for
before engine case halves are assembled together.
crankcase assembly
1. Be sure all bearing retainer plate screws are installed
and tightened to specification.
2. Be sure clutch shaft (A) is fully seated in bearing.
10. Install balance shaft, oil pump with pipes (Chapter 4),
and crankshaft (page 10.23) if removed.
3. Lubricate parts with Victory engine oil. Apply Moly 11. Refer to Crankcase Assembly on page 10.26
Assembly Paste (PN 2871460) to ends of transmission
shafts. BALANCE SHAFT
4. Install countershaft and mainshaft into the left
crankcase as an assembly, holding mainshaft 4th gear Balance Shaft Removal & Inspection
on shaft during assembly. Make certain both shafts are
1. Remove bolt (A) from oil pump drive sprocket. Use
fully seated and rotate freely.
engine lock tool between balance shaft weight and
5. Install shift drum into case. Then install forks in grooves crankcase to hold shaft.
of sliding gears.
6. Install shift rails through forks.
7. Rotate shift drum to align proper grooves with forks.
2. Remove sprocket & chain from oil pump.

3. Remove chain from balance shaft sprocket.
4. Rotate balance shaft until counterweights are clear of
8. Move shift fork pins into drum grooves and seat rails. crankshaft. Grasp balance shaft and remove it from
case.
5. Inspect sprocket teeth for wear or damage.

6. Check shaft for runout, or twisting.
7. Rotate right and left balance shaft bearings by hand
while observing bearing rotation. Bearings should run
smooth and quiet and shaft should be a snug fit in
bearing.
8. Visually inspect bearings for damage.
Balance Shaft Installation

1. Lubricate balance shaft bearings with engine oil.
2. Insert threaded end of shaft into left crankcase bearing.
3. Install oil pump drive chain onto balance shaft.
4. Install chain and sprocket onto oil pump shaft. Align
flats to seat sprocket.
A
10
5. Install engine lock tool between balance shaft weight

and crankcase (A) to lock balance shaft.
6. Install oil pump sprocket bolt and torque to
specification.
=T
Oil Pump Sprocket Bolt:

85 in-lbs (9.6 Nm)
CRANKCASE 6. Install crankshaft bearing protector over the cam chain

drive sprocket
Crankcase Assembly & Sealing Special Tool: Crankcase Bearing Protector PV-47207
NOTE: Place transmission in 1st gear prior to
crankcase assembly.
1. Clean crankcase mating surfaces to remove all

grease, oil, and old sealant.
2. Check to be sure all shafts are seated, and that all
(new) O-rings, alignment dowel pins, oil pipes, etc. are
in place.
3. Install the clutch shaft holding tool PV-45028.
7. Assemble the Crankcase Installation Tool as shown.

PVX-47429 is required if seal sleeve is not installed on
output shaft.
PVX-47429 PV-45030 PV-46299
4. Apply an even bead of LoctiteTM Ultra Black 598 to

entire case sealing surface.
Tool Assembled
5. Spread out sealer into a thin even layer on entire case
mating surface. Be sure all areas are covered. DO
NOT ALLOW SEALANT TO DRY. CONTINUE
ASSEMBLY UNTIL CASES ARE SEALED AND ALL
BOLTS ARE TIGHT.
8. Install crankcase installation tool onto the output shaft. 11. Install crankcase bolts with starter motor as shown
below.
9. Pull crankcase together by tightening nut and tapping
on crankcase with a soft mallet.
NOTE: The cases will mate before the mainshaft is

drawn fully into bearing. IMPORTANT! Continue to
turn nut and tap case and apply approximately 75-100
ft-lbs (102-136 Nm) torque to the nut.
10. Remove the tool.
12. Tighten crankcase bolts in two steps following the

sequence shown below. Repeat the final torque.
=T
Crankcase Bolts:
(STEP 1) 15 / 22 ft-lbs (20 / 30 Nm)
(STEP 2) 22 ft-lbs (30 Nm) torque
10
13. Clean threads of countershaft. Install the washer and NOTE: Use an 8mm or a 5/16 diameter pin punch in
a NEW stake nut and tighten to specified torque. After timing hole and shift transmission into 1st gear to
assembly, stake the nut with appropriate staking tool hold crankshaft while tightening sprocket nut.
as shown on page 10.29.
=T
Countershaft Stake Nut:
125 ft-lbs (170Nm)
=T
Drive Sprocket Nut:
180 ft-lbs (244 Nm)
14. Remove tool from shaft and assemble shift 85 in-lbs (10 Nm)
mechanism, primary drive, and primary cover. Refer to
Chapter 9.
15. Install a new mainshaft (output) seal in RH crankcase
using seal installer.
Special tool:
Final Drive Seal Installer PV-43505
180 ft-lbs (244 Nm)
16. Inspect output shaft seal sleeve for burrs, nicks or
surface wear. The surfaces that contact bearing race
and drive sprocket must be smooth and flat to prevent 18. Install lock plate screws.
loosening of the drive sprocket. NOTE: The lock plate can be installed in many positions
17. Install O-ring (B), seal sleeve (C) with tapered edge and either side of the plate can be used. If you cannot find
toward O-ring, and drive sprocket. a position that will work, flip the plate over and again try to
install it. If the plate still does not align, tighten the
sprocket nut slightly and try to fit the lock plate again.
B
C 19. Rotate the plate CLOCKWISE until it stops and hold it
firmly against the nut.
20. Tighten the lock plate screws to specified torque.
21. Install CPS timing wheel.
17 ft-lbs (23 Nm)
Stake Nut Installation

• Stake nuts are located on the mainshaft, balance shaft & countershaft
• It is important that they are torqued and staked correctly for proper function
IMPORTANT: Do not reuse or reinstall any previously used stake nut. A new stake nut needs to be installed every
time the nut is removed or loosened.
Use the following procedure to install the stake nuts correctly:

1. Clean threads on shaft so there is no oil or contaminants.
2. Thread NEW stake nut onto shaft finger tight.
3. Torque stake nut to 125 ft-lbs +/- 13 ft-lbs
=T
Stake Nut Torque 125 ft-lbs +/- 13 ft-lbs
4. Stake the stake nut as shown below using round side of punch. Do not crack or tear staking lip. Do not use a sharp
chisel to stake the nut.
Be sure staking lip does not tear/crack in staking area.

Stake nut with round side of punch.
Properly Staked Nut
Do Not Stake Here 10
TROUBLESHOOTING
Troubleshooting
Transmission Will Not Shift Broken Shift Cam Shift Cam Replace shift cam
Bent Shift Forks Shift Fork Replace shift fork(s)
Worn Gearshift Pawl Shift Cam Replace shift cam
Broken Gears Transmission Gears Replace necessary parts
Damaged/Broken Bearings Transmission, Shift Cam Replace necessary parts
Bearings
Worn Gear Shift Ratchet Shifter Ratchet Refer to chapter 9
Mechanism
Broken or out-of-place Shift Ratchet Spring Refer to chapter 9
spring on shift ratchet
Shift Detent Plunger Stuck Shift Detent Plunger Repair as necessary
Seized Pivot Point, Bent External Shift Linkage Repair as necessary
External Shift Linkage
Bent or Distorted Shift Fork Shift Fork Rails Replace Shift Fork Rails
Rails
Debris From Broken Parts Transmission Components Repair as necessary
Locking Transmission
Excessive Noise Related to Worn Main Bearings Crankshaft and/or Repair as necessary
Bottom End of Engine Crankshaft Bearings
Worn Connecting Rod Connecting Rod Bearings Repair as necessary
Bearings and/or Connecting Rod and/
or Rod Bearings
Worn Connecting Rod Connecting Rod, Repair as necessary
Small End Bushing Connecting Rod Bushing,
Piston Pin, Piston
Worn, seized, chipped or Transmission Gears Repair as necessary
broken gear teeth
Worn, seized, chipped or Transmission Bearings Repair as necessary
broken Transmission
Bearings
Originates from Primary Clutch, Torque Refer to chapter(s) 9, 16,
Cover Compensator, Flywheel, 17, 18
Starter Drive Assembly,
Starter Clutch, Starter Motor
Oil Pump Oil Pump, Oil Pump Drive Refer to chapter 4
Cam Drive Cam Chain, Cam Sprocket Refer to chapter 7

Transmission Hard to Shift Improper Clutch Operation Clutch Refer to chapter 9
Incorrect Oil Viscosity Engine oil and filter Refer to chapter 3
Incorrect Clutch Adjustment Clutch Adjustment Refer to chapter 3
Bent, Rubbing, Sticky, Shifter Ratchet Assembly Refer to chapter 9
Broken Shift Shaft
Sticking Pivot Point, Bent External Shift Linkage Repair or replace
External Shift Linkage components as necessary
Bent or Distorted Shift Forks Shift Forks Replace bent shift fork
Damaged Shift Drum Shift Drum Replace damaged shift
Grooves drum
Shift Detent Plunger Stuck Shift Detent Plunger Repair as necessary
Bent or Distorted Shift Fork Shift Fork Rails Replace Shift Fork Rails
Rails
Transmission Jumps Out of Broken Shift Stop Pin Shift Stop Pin Replace stop pin
Gear Worn Shift Drum Pawls or Shift Drum or Shift Linkage Replace damaged shift
Shifter Ratchet drum or shifter ratchet
Broken Shift Ratchet Spring Shift Ratchet Spring Replace spring
Damaged Shift Drum Shift Drum Replace shift drum
Grooves
Bent, Worn, Distorted Shift Shift Forks Replace shift forks
10
Forks
Bent or Distorted Shift Fork Shift Fork Rails Replace shift fork rails
Rails
Worn Engagement Dogs on Transmission Gears Replace necessary parts
Transmission Gears
NOTES
DRIVE LINE / REVERSE SYSTEM
CHAPTER 11
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2
ASSEMBLY VIEWS & TORQUE VALUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2
REAR WHEEL FASTENER TORQUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2
DRIVE SPROCKET FASTENER TORQUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3
BELT SPECIFICATIONS / BELT GUARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4
DRIVE BELT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.5
BELT INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.5
BELT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.5
BELT INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.5
DRIVE SPROCKET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.5
DRIVE SPROCKET AND SEAL REMOVAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.5
DRIVE SPROCKET INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.6
DRIVE SPROCKET AND SEAL INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.6
REAR SPROCKET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.8
REAR SPROCKET REMOVAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.8
REAR SPROCKET INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.8
REAR SPROCKET INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.8
REVERSE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.9
REVERSE DRIVE MECHANISM (IF EQUIPPED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.9
REVERSE GEAR CASE ASSEMBLY VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.10
REVERSE LINKAGE ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.11
REVERSE SYSTEM TEST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.12
REVERSE SYSTEM FUSE LOCATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.12
REVERSE COUPLER SHAFT KEY REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.13
11
SPECIAL TOOLS
Drive Line Special Tools
Output Shaft Seal Installation Tool: PV-43505A
8mm (5/16) Pin Punch (to hold crankshaft for drive sprocket removal / installation): Commercially available
Torque Wrench with 185 ft-lbs (250 Nm) range: Commercially available
CAUTION
Some drive line repair or maintenance involves supporting the machine with the rear end elevated. Take precautions
so that the motorcycle is securely supported while the tire is off the ground to reduce the possibility of personal injury,
or damage to the motorcycle.
• Replace belt and sprockets as a set if the drive system has been in service for 5000 miles or more (8000 Km).
• Refer to Chapter 2 for MAINTENANCE of drive belt.
• Refer to Chapter 14 for TIRE REMOVAL, REPAIR, & BALANCING.
• Refer to Chapter 15 for BRAKE SYSTEM service and repairs.

Rear Wheel Fastener Torques
All surfaces and fasteners must be clean, dry, and oil free before assembly.
See Chapter 13 for Rear Wheel Removal / Installation.
70 ft-lbs
(95 Nm)
Install New
Bolts
Forward
Drive Sprocket Fastener Torques
Inspect surfaces that contact sprocket and bearing. They must be flat
with no galling or rough finish. Slight chamfer on I.D. faces O-ring.
Lock Plate - hold clockwise against Seal Sleeve

nut when tightening plate screws.
O-ring
85 in-lbs (9.5 Nm)

Lock Plate
Isolator
Spacer Inspect sprocket teeth and splines

for wear at specified intervals.
48mm / 1-7/8 in. Refer to Chapter 2
180 ft-lbs (244 Nm) Primer N + LoctiteTM 262.

Refer to page 11.6 for inspection and installation procedure.
Remove timing cover and CPS timing wheel.
Install 5/16” (8 mm) pin in either of the crankshaft TDC lock
11
holes for removal and installation.
Adhesive bead toward cover
85 in-lbs (9.5 Nm) Place transmission in 5th gear.
Apply Victory All

Purpose grease 5/16 or 8mm
Pin
Belt Specifications / Belt Guard
Drive Belt
(Install so VICTORY can be read from RIGHT side of motorcycle)
V
IC
T
O
R
Screws Y
M6 X 12
96 in-lbs (10.8 Nm)
Seal
O-ring
Seal Sleeve
Sprocket Nut
180 ft-lbs (244 Nm)
Locking Plate
Screws
85 in-lbs (9.5 Nm)
Drive Belt Width: 28mm

Drive Belt Pitch: 14mm
Drive Belt Teeth: 154
DRIVE BELT Belt Installation

1. Inspect sprockets and verify sprocket fasteners are
Belt Inspection
tight.
1. Refer to Chapter 2 for belt inspection procedures. 2. Place belt onto drive sprocket and rear sprocket.
2. Inspect belt tension and adjust if necessary. Refer to 3. Install drive sprocket cover. Torque fasteners to
chapter 2. specification (page 11.3).
3. If one or more components are damaged, replace belt 4. Adjust belt tension and verify proper alignment
and both sprockets as a set if the drive system has (Chapter 2). Torque rear wheel axle nut to
been in service for 5000 miles (8000 Km) or more. specification.
5. Install exhaust.
Belt Removal
6. Install right floorboard.
NOTE: If you plan to remove the front sprocket, refer
to Drive Sprocket Removal located in this chapter. DRIVE SPROCKET
NOTE: Always mark the drive belt or note its Drive Sprocket and Seal Removal
orientation for installation in the same rotational 1. Remove drive belt.
direction.
2. Remove drive sprocket cover and gasket.
3. Remove sprocket lock plate screws (A) and lock plate.
WARNING
A mis-aligned rear axle can cause drive line noise
and damage the drive belt, which could cause belt
failure and loss of control of the motorcycle.
A
WARNING
11
1. Secure the front wheel in a wheel vise.
2. Place a jack underneath the engine and lift until the 4. Place transmission in 5th gear.
rear tire is not resting on the surface.
5. Remove right side lower timing cover and CPS timing
3. Remove both mufflers (Chapter 3). wheel.
4. Remove head pipe crossover fasteners as described

in head pipe removal (Chapter 3).
5. Loosen head pipe flange nuts.
6. Loosen rear wheel axle nut and loosen each axle

adjuster an equal amount of turns. Push wheel
forward to slacken belt.
7. Remove front sprocket cover.
8. Pull head pipes outward to gain access to front

sprocket cover bolts and provide clearance for cover
removal.
9. Remove drive belt.
6. Rotate crankshaft (arrow) using Crankshaft Rotation 3. Inspect the back surface of sprocket hub (C) where it
Socket PV-48736 until key way is aligned with one of contacts the seal sleeve. Replace if worn or if surface
the TDC holes in crankcase. is rough.
4. Inspect outer surface (D), inner surface (E), and

sealing surface (F) of seal sleeve. Surfaces must be
flat without wear or galling. Replace the sleeve if worn,
or if the surface appears rough or chafed. The O-ring
sealing surface of slightly chamfered edge must be
smooth to seal the shaft.
Use Tool
PV - 48736
D E
7. Insert an 8mm or 5/16 diameter pin into crankcase
hole and into crankshaft to hold shaft while loosening
sprocket nut.
8. Remove sprocket nut.
9. Loosen rear axle nut. Seal Sleeve
10. Loosen both axle adjusters an equal amount of turns.
11. Push wheel forward until belt is loose.
Drive Sprocket And Seal Installation
12. Pull belt off sprocket.
1. Apply grease to a new O-ring (G) and install on output
13. Remove front sprocket, spacer, and O-ring from
shaft.
output shaft.
14. If required, remove shaft seal using a suitable tool. 2. Install the shaft seal (if removed) using special tool
PV-43505A.
Drive Sprocket Inspection
1. Visually inspect sprocket teeth (A) for excessive
wear, foreign material damage.
Remove drive H G
A
sprocket cover
C
Installation: Tool PV-43505A
B 3. Install seal sleeve (H) with the chamfer on inside

diameter of sleeve facing in, toward O-ring.
2. Inspect splines (B) for a tight fit on output shaft splines.
4. Clean shaft threads and sprocket nut to remove all 9. Install lock plate.
previous thread locking agent and apply Loctite™
NOTE: The lock plate can be installed in many positions
Primer N.
and either side of the plate can be used. If the plate still
does not align, tighten sprocket nut slightly and try to fit
the lock plate again.
10. Install lock plate screws (A).
11. Rotate plate CLOCKWISE (B) until it stops and hold
it firmly against the nut.
B
A
5. Apply a light film of anti-seize compound to splines of

shaft. Place belt onto front sprocket, place sprocket
over splines of output shaft. B
6. Apply Loctite™ 262 to threads of shaft and nut.

7. Install drive sprocket nut.
NOTE: If primary side is disassembled, shift
transmission into 5th gear and install clutch shaft holding
tool PV-45028 on the clutch shaft to tighten sprocket nut. 12. Tighten lock plate screws to 85 in-lbs (9.5 Nm).
11
13. After belt installation, adjust belt tension and wheel
28
50
alignment as instructed in Chapter 2.

-4
PV
14. Install drive sprocket cover with a new gasket

(adhesive side of gasket faces cover). Torque cover
screws to 85 in-lbs (9.5 Nm).
=T
Sprocket Cover Bolt: 85 in-lbs (9.5 Nm)
15. Install / tighten exhaust as outlined in Chapter 3.

Torque all fasteners to specification.
NOTE: If primary side is assembled, follow instructions
to hold shaft as described for Drive Sprocket Removal in
this chapter.
8. Torque nut to specification.
=T
Drive Sprocket Nut: 180 ft-lbs (244 Nm)
REAR SPROCKET 3. Inspect sprocket mating surface (C) for galling,

roughness, or cracks. Surface must be flat, with no
Rear Sprocket Removal burrs or surface irregularities.
1. Remove rear wheel (Chapter 13).

2. Loosen all sprocket bolts evenly in a star pattern and
discard.
3. Remove sprocket.
C
CAUTION
Protect brake disc surface while working on wheel.
Rear Sprocket Inspection

1. Visually inspect sprocket teeth (A) for excessive wear
and damage from foreign material or road debris.
Inspect hub (B) for cracks or damage.
Rear Sprocket Installation
A
1. Clean sprocket bolt threads in hub to remove all
grease or oil residue.
2. Clean mating surfaces of wheel and sprocket.
3. Install sprocket with new bolts. Do not re-use sprocket

bolts.
B
4. Torque bolts in a star pattern to specified torque.
5. Install rear wheel (Chapter 13).
2. Visually inspect sprocket mounting surface on wheel

for wear.
NOTE: If the drive system has been in service for 5000
miles or more, replace both front and rear sprockets
along with the belt if any one item is damaged or worn
beyond a normal polished appearance. Refer to the
Periodic Maintenance Table in chapter 2 for drive system
replacement interval.
70 ft-lbs
(95 Nm)
Install New
Bolts
REVERSE SYSTEM
Reverse Drive Mechanism (If Equipped)
NOTE: See page 19.26 for reverse electrical system function, component location, and diagnostics.
Maintenance (reverse idler shaft lubrication) is in Chapter 2.
Drive Pinion Gear

Idler Gear
Linkage Rod Reverse Switch

Jam Nut
40 in-lbs (4.5 Nm)
19 ft-lbs (26 Nm)

U-Joint
Motor
Gear Case
19 ft-lbs
(26 Nm)
Reverse Lever 11
90 in-lbs (10 Nm)
28 in-lbs
48 in-lbs (3.2 Nm)
(5.4 Nm)
Motor cover Shift Lever Shaft
Motor output shaft Hold shaft

here
In Reverse
Reverse actuator lever is lifted up
Arm of switch is up No continuity Spring
M6 washer
Linkage Rod End
Connected to reverse harness

In Forward - continuity through switch 90 in-lbs (10 Nm)
grounds Pin C of module
Press onto shaft until Press onto shaft until
Pinion Gear
seated against shoulder seated against shoulder
85 in-lbs Key
Idler Gear
(9.6 Nm)
Lockout Switch

50 in-lbs Press in from outside, Press until
15 ft-lbs
(5.6 Nm) flush to surface bottomed 50 in-lbs
(20 Nm)

Press into gear hub from (5.6 Nm)
fork side, flush to surface
Reverse Gear Case Assembly View Cutaway View
11.10
Reverse Gear Case
Reverse Linkage Adjustment 6. Rotate linkage rod to lengthen it until reverse idler
gear lightly bottoms out against gearcase cover. Be
Linkage Rod Adjustment sure lever shaft does not begin to rotate off the fully
DOWN position.
1. Remove reverse lever (A) and motor cover (B).
NOTE: If linkage rod rotated past the point at which
A the gear is bottomed in the cover, the reverse lever
B
will begin to rotate upward. If lever move upward,
48 in-lbs 28 in-lbs
shorten linkage rod until reverse lever is down, then
(5.4 Nm) (3.2 Nm)
repeat adjustment.
7. When adjustment is correct, hold linkage rod and

tighten jam nut firmly against linkage rod. Tighten jam
Align nut.
8. Temporarily install the reverse lever and test the

reverse actuation. Lever should return to a horizontal
position when disengaged.
2. Be sure the reverse lever is down (rotated fully
counterclockwise). 9. Re-assemble cover and reverse lever. Hold lever by
3. Hold linkage rod (C) and loosen jam nut (D). hand to prevent rotation while tightening screw.
10. Perform Reverse System Test.
40 in-lbs (4.5 Nm)
C
11
D
4. Temporarily place reverse lever on lever shaft (E).

5. Verify linkage rod ball joint (F) is tightened securely to
lever shaft (that it did not come loose when jam nut
was loosened in Step 3). If ball joint is loose, hold lever
and tighten ball joint to lever shaft.
F
90 in-lbs
(10 Nm)
Reverse System Test Reverse System Fuse Location

1. Seated in a normal riding position on motorcycle, 1. Remove the left hand saddlebag.
place transmission in Neutral and move reverse lever 2. Remove left hand side cover.
to the DOWN position (reverse disengaged). 3. Locate the Reverse System fuse harness and, gently
lifting the seat skirt, withdraw the Fuse receptacle.
2. Start engine and let it idle.
3. Slowly lift reverse lever toward UP (Reverse) position,

while watching the gear position indicator on the
instrument panel (“N”). The lever should move at least Fuse Harness
1/4 inch (6mm) and no more than 1/2 inch (12mm)
before the gear position indication changes to an “R”
(a slight delay in the display is normal).
Lever travel before “R”

is displayed:
Minimum: 6mm
Maximum: 12mm
“N” “R”
4. Lift reverse to fully UP (Reverse) position. Press the

starter button. The motorcycle should move in
reverse.
5. With Reverse engaged (reverse lever UP) pull in the

clutch and place the transmission in any gear. The
engine should stop immediately.
6. Return lever to Forward (down) position. Verify the

engine will start, and that does not stop when the
transmission is shifted into gear.
7. If reverse system does not operate properly as

described above, see Reverse System Diagnostics
beginning on page 19.26.
Reverse System: 25A Fuse
Reverse Coupler Shaft Key Replacement 14. Assemble remaining parts in reverse order of
disassembly (see page 11.9 for fastener torques).
The reverse gear drive shaft (coupler) has an inner and an
outer drive key. If the reverse motor turns but the 15. Adjust reverse linkage (page 11.11) and perform a
motorcycle does not move in reverse gear, inspect both system test (page 11.12).
drive keys on the shaft.
1. Remove reverse lever.
2. Remove reverse motor cover.
3. Hold linkage rod (A) and loosen jam nut (B). Do not
loosen or remove ball joint at reverse lever shaft (C).
4. Disconnect reverse motor wire harness and reverse

switch wire connector.
5. Remove motor mount bolts.
6. Rotate linkage rod to unscrew the ball joint while

11
moving the motor outward until linkage rod is
separated from ball joint.
7. Pull motor outward to separate coupler from gear

shaft or motor shaft. Set motor assembly aside.
8. Pull coupler off motor shaft (or gear shaft).
9. Inspect drive key at each end and replace if damaged.
10. Lubricate coupler shaft with Moly Assembly Paste

(PN 2871460) and install coupler shaft on gear shaft.
11. Install motor, routing the wire harness smoothly to the

connector, away from mounting boss or moving parts.
12. Screw ball joint into linkage rod and engage motor end
of coupler shaft, aligning key with key way.
13. Start motor mounting bolts and tighten lightly by hand.

Continue to adjust linkage rod until motor mount tabs
mate squarely with the mounting boss on the frame.
NOTE: Be sure motor is flush with frame before
tightening mount bolts!
TROUBLESHOOTING
Troubleshooting
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE POSSIBLE REPAIR NEEDED
Belt Shows Excessive Wear On One Out-of-Alignment Align rear wheel
Side
Belt Squeal / Noise Belt too tight Adjust to 32mm Deflection @ 10 lbs
load
Out-of-Alignment Align rear wheel
Broken Sprocket Teeth Foreign material damage Replace parts or repair as necessary
Loose drive belt or sprocket
Broken or Torn Cogs on Belt Foreign material damage, loose belt or Replace parts as necessary
sprocket
Belt Jumps Sprocket Teeth Worn, damaged or out of adjustment Replace parts as necessary
belt or sprockets
Belt Loose Adjust Belt
Excessive Wear, Binding Suspension Belt Tight Adjust Belt
Broken Belt Belt weakened by foreign
material damage. Replace Belt, Replace Sprockets
Belt run excessively tight or loose for
extended period
Reverse / Starter Motor Inoperative See Chapter 19
Reverse Motor Turns But Vehicle Remove drive motor with shaft and
Reverse drive key(s) sheared.
Does Not Move replace key(s).
FRONT SUSPENSION / CONTROLS
CHAPTER 12
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2
MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2
FORK SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.3
ASSEMBLY VIEWS & TORQUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.4
HANDLEBAR CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.4
HANDLEBAR - CROSS ROADS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5
HANDLEBAR - HARD-BALL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.6
HANDLEBAR - CROSS COUNTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.7
CLUTCH CABLE / LEVER PERCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.8
FRONT FORK ATTACHMENTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.9
FRONT AXLE ASSEMBLY VIEW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.10
FORK TUBE INSTALLATION STEPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.11
STEERING HEAD ADJUSTMENT / TOP TRIPLE CLAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.12
FORK TUBE ASSEMBLY VIEW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.13
ASSEMBLY VIEW, CAST FRONT WHEEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.14
ASSEMBLY VIEW, BILLET FRONT WHEEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.15
ASSEMBLY VIEW, SPOKED FRONT WHEEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.16
HEATED GRIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.17
SERVICE PROCEDURES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.18
HANDLEBAR REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.18
HANDLEBAR ADJUSTMENT - HARD-BALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.21
HANDLEBAR INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.22
CLUTCH CABLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.23
THROTTLE CABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.24
FRONT WHEEL REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.26
FRONT AXLE INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.27
FRONT WHEEL INSPECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.27
12
BRAKE DISC REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.27
BRAKE DISC INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.28
FRONT WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.28
FRONT WHEEL BEARING REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.29
FRONT WHEEL BEARING INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.29
FRONT FORK REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.30
FRONT FORK TUBE INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.31
FRONT FORK DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.32
FORK SEAL REMOVAL / TUBE DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.34
FRONT FORK INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.35
FRONT FORK TUBE ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.36
FORK OIL FILLING / LEVEL SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.38
TRIPLE CLAMP REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.41
STEERING HEAD BEARING INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.43
TRIPLE CLAMP INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.43
STEERING HEAD BEARING REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.45
STEERING HEAD BEARING ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.47
GENERAL SPECIAL TOOLS

Important Information Special Tools
WARNING Fork Spring Compressor PV-49463
Fork Spring Compressor Adaptor PV-49464
Victory motorcycles are produced using the designated
tires listed as original equipment. This includes field Damper Rod Extension Tool PV-49453
testing to ensure stability and superior handling. The Cartridge Holder PV-49452
use of tires other than original equipment may cause
Fork Oil Level Tool PV-59000-A
instability which could lead to a crash, resulting in seri-
ous injury or death. Use only the recommended tires Fork Seal Driver PV-47035
inflated to the recommended tire pressures based on Fork Seal Guide PV-47037
load conditions as listed on the tire inflation decal.
Wheel Bearing / Stem Bearing Race
PV-43515
Tubeless tires are used on certain Victory models. Installation Set
Operating the motorcycle with damaged rims creates a Spanner Socket (Steering Stem) PV-43508
safety hazard including air pressure loss, steering Spanner Wrench (Steering Stem) PV-43509
imbalance and/or reduced steering control. Do not
attempt to repair or straighten damaged rims.
CAUTION MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS

Work performed to the front end of the motorcycle usually Maintenance Products
involves supporting the machine with the front end
elevated. Take precautions so that the motorcycle is
Hand Grip Adhesive - Three Bond
securely supported when the front tire is off the ground. 2872575
1501 (10ml tube)
This reduces the possibility of personal injury or damage
to the motorcycle. Fork Oil, KYB Inverted Cartridge 2877421
Leaking front fork seals are a safety hazard and should be
replaced immediately if a leak is found. Fork oil could Refer to Chapter 2 for a list of maintenance products and
contaminate front brake components which could reduce part numbers.
stopping ability of the motorcycle. Contaminated brake
discs or pads greatly reduce stopping force available &
increase stopping distance. Brake discs can be cleaned
using Victory brake cleaner. NEVER attempt to clean TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
contaminated brake pads. Replace pads as a set.
Fastener Torque Specifications
• Refer to Chapter 2 for MAINTENANCE of front Refer to Assembly Views for fastener torque
end components. specifications.
• Refer to Chapter 14 for TIRE REMOVAL,
REPAIR, & BALANCING
• Refer to Chapter 15 for BRAKE SYSTEM service
and repairs and HYDRAULIC CLUTCH SYSTEM
BLEEDING.
FORK SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications
Cross Roads / Cross Country
Axle Runout - .20 mm (.008")
Front Wheel Runout 2.0 mm (.080”)
Axial .50 mm (.020")
Billet and Cast Type (.80 mm (.031”))
(Spoked Type) 2.0 mm (.080”)
3.5" x 18" Radial .50 mm (.020")
(.80 mm (.031”))
Fork Spring Free Length (Top Spring) 247.6 mm (9.75”) 243.0 mm (9.57”)
Fork Spring Free Length (Bottom Spring) 158.75 mm (6.25”) 154.75 mm (6.05”)
Fork Spring Pre-Load (Total) 58 mm (2.283”)
20.7 N/mm
Fork Spring Rate (Top Spring)
(118 lb./inch)
10.6 N/mm
Fork Spring Rate (Bottom Spring)
(60 lb./inch)
Fork Tube Diameter (Inner Tube) 43 mm Not Applicable
Fork Tube Runout - .20 mm (.008")
Fork Oil Type / Weight Victory Fork Oil (YELLOW) P/N 2877421
Fork Oil Level From Top of Tube 106 mm (4.17") (+1 mm) (+ .040")
(Springs and spring guides
removed, tube fully compressed,
cartridge rod at bottom of travel)
NOTE: Oil level must be measured 481cc ( 3 cc)
Fork Oil Volume (per leg, dry) Not Applicable
and adjusted to specification (16.27 fl.oz. ( .10 fl.oz.)
Steering Bearing Adjustment Refer to page 12.12 or See “Triple Clamp Installation” on page 12.43.
12
ASSEMBLY VIEWS & TORQUE

Handlebar Controls: Cross Roads / Cross Country
End Cap: Twist to remove or Mirror Sleeve

remove screw on models equipped. (EU Models)
84 in-lbs (9 Nm)
Grip Adhesive: 2872575 (Non-heated)
Heated: Apply Loctite 242 to set screws
(located under rim of grip). Align screws with
holes in handlebars. Torque: 18 in-lbs (2 Nm)
Adjusters:
Hand Tighten
Free Play:
2-4mm
(.080-.160)
Apply dielectric grease to bar.

Align peg with hole. View From Below
Tighten rear screw first. Cable Free Play Apply dielectric grease
.5 - 1.5mm (.020 - .060) to handlebar before
25 in-lbs (2.8 Nm) Lever Perch: 80 in-lbs installing switch.
(9 Nm)
Align peg with hole.
Tighten rear screw first Tighten rear screw first.
25 in-lbs (2.8 Nm)
Audio Switch Detail
18 in-lbs (2.0 Nm)
(Cross Country)
Cruise Switch Detail
(If equipped)
18 in-lbs
(2.0 Nm)
18 in-lbs (2.0 Nm)
Handlebar / Handlebar Riser Assembly View: Cross Roads
Align dot with cap surface
Align
66-68mm
25 ft-lbs (34 Nm)

Loctite 262 (Red)
Short end of stud to riser
12
22 ft-lbs (30 Nm)
Riser
Tighten front screw first
Isolator
Sleeve
Isolator
Washer
40 ft-lbs (54 Nm)
Handlebar / Handlebar Riser Assembly View: Hard-ball
22 ft-lbs (30 Nm)

22 ft-lbs (30 Nm)

Riser Stud
Isolator
Sleeve
Isolator
40 ft-lbs (54 Nm)
Handlebar / Handlebar Riser Assembly View: Cross Country

22 ft-lbs (30 Nm)
22 ft-lbs
(30 Nm)
Riser
Riser:
1. Tighten riser bolts to 40 ft-lbs (54 Nm). 12
Isolator 2. Tighten set screw until it stop against riser bolt.
3. Tighten set screw an additional 1/4 turn.
Sleeve
Isolator
Washer
40 ft-lbs (54 Nm)
Clutch Cable / Lever Perch Assembly View: Cross Roads & Cross Country
Torque first
80 in-lbs (9.0 Nm)
Torque last
80 in-lbs (9.0 Nm)
1.8 in-lbs (0.2 Nm)
53 in-lbs (6.0 Nm)
Inside wire harness (between

frame and wire harness)
Clutch cable through

wire harness guide Include clutch cable in
left handlebar tie strap
with wiring.
Strap to engine
mount bracket
48 in-lbs Include clutch and throttle

(5.4 Nm) cables. Do not pull strap tight.
Cables must move freely in
87 in-lbs (8.5 Nm) strap.
Front Fork Attachments: Cross Roads & Cross Country
17 ft-lbs (23.0 Nm)
12
Clip on inner fork tube and

slide against axle housing
40mm Reflector: Clean fork with denatured alcohol.

Apply 20 lbs pressure for 5-10 seconds.
Front Axle Assembly View: Cross Roads & Cross Country
FRONT WHEEL INSTALLATION
1
Grease axle and threads. Do not grease
the clamp surface of the right end.
2
Install axle through right fork, right spacer, wheel,
left spacer. Screw axle into left fork leg.
3
Tighten axle.
52 ft-lbs (70 Nm)
Apply grease to seal

contact area only
5 Hold front brake.

Move suspension through
Tighten pinch bolts. full travel range 4-5 times.
18 ft-lbs (24 Nm)
6
Repeat pinch bolt torque.
Fork Tube Installation Steps: Cross Roads & Cross Country
FORK TUBE INSTALLATION

Note: Adjust steering head (page 12.11)
prior to installing fork tubes.
1 Install tubes to proper height (Fig.1) or install left

and right fork tubes to same height in top clamp
measured as shown in Photo 1 below.
2 Tighten bottom bolts on lower triple clamp
3 Tighten top bolts on lower triple clamp

5 17.0 ft-lbs (23.0 Nm)
4 Repeat Step 2 & Step 3
4 Repeat Steps 2 & 3
5 Tighten upper triple clamp bolts
3 17.0 ft-lbs (23.0 Nm)
2 17.0 ft-lbs (23.0 Nm)
12
1 284.0 - 285.0 mm
TUBE HEIGHT:
Equal both sides
+/- 1.0mm (.040 in.)
Fig. 1
Steering Head Adjustment / Top Triple Clamp: Cross Roads / Cross Country
STEERING HEAD BEARING ADJUSTMENT / TOP TRIPLE CLAMP INSTALLATION*
1 Grease lower bearing and install lower triple clamp to steering head.
2 Install top bearing and steering stem adjustment nut finger tight.
3 Turn lower clamp fully right against steering stop and torque stem nut to 29.0 ft-lbs (39.3 Nm).
4 Turn steering assembly fully left and back to full right 5 times.
9 10 Crown Nut
5 Turn lower clamp fully left against stop. 8 72.0 ft-lbs (97.6 Nm)
6 Place a mark or tape on frame, in direct alignment with

one of the slots of the adjuster nut.
7 Loosen adjuster nut 90 degrees (a new slot of
nut should now be aligned with the mark or tape
placed on the frame in Step 6).
8 Install upper triple clamp and spacer.
9 Grease threads of stem and install crown nut.
10 Torque nut to 72.0 ft-lbs (97.6 Nm).
Adjuster Nut
* To remove or replace top triple clamp when fork tubes are
2 3 29.0 ft-lbs (39.3 Nm)
installed, loosen fork tube pinch bolts and slide both fork
tubes down out of top clamp before removing top clamp.
4 5
Fork Tube Assembly View: Cross Roads & Cross Country
Cap
See Page 12.28 for tube disassembly procedure
11-22 ft-lbs
Nut (Tighten to cap) (15-30 Nm)
9.5-12.0 ft-lbs (13-16 Nm)
O-Ring
Top
Spacer
Upper bushing is
inside outer tube
(replace outer tube if
bushing is worn)
Top
Cartridge Assembly Spring
Bottom
Spacer
12
Lower Bushing Bottom

Spring
Washer
Oil Seal
Retainer
Dust Seal
15-19 ft-lbs (20-26 Nm)
Assembly View, Cast Front Wheel
22 ft-lbs
(30 Nm)
Replace screws if loosened
or removed Apply Victory All
Purpose grease
Seal
Bearing
Spacer
Bearing
Retaining Ring
Seal
ABS Pulse Ring
22 ft-lbs
(30 Nm)
or removed.
45 in-lbs
(5.0 Nm)
O-Ring
Slot
Metal Valve Stem With Slot.

See Chapter 14.
Assembly View, Billet Front Wheel
VICTORY BILLET WHEEL: 55 ft-lbs75 Nm ()

NESS BILLET WHEEL: 65 ft-lbs (88 Nm)
Loctite 262 (Red)
Loctite Primer N to clean
screws and threads in hub
Do not disassemble hub to replace wheel bearings
Refer to wheel bearing replacement procedure this chapter.
Seal
Bearing
Spacer Washer
Retaining Ring
Hub, RH
Hub, RH
Bearing
Seal
FORWARD 12
45 in-lbs
(5.0 Nm)
O-Ring
Slot
Metal Valve Stem With Slot

See Chapter 14.
Assembly View, Spoked Front Wheel
22 ft-lbs
(30 Nm) Seal
Apply Victory All
Replace screws if loosened Purpose grease
or removed Bearing
Bearing
Seal
ABS Pulse Ring

Spacer
Retaining Ring
Tire 22 ft-lbs
(30 Nm)
or removed.
Inner Tube
Protective Strip
Heated Grips
TROUBLESHOOTING:
To Measure Individual Grip Wire Resistance:
Black - Brown: 13 Ohms
Black - Blue: 8 Ohms
(CROSS COUNTRY) Switch
In headlamp housing
or fairing. See jumper
harness to main harness
wiring below.
85 in-lbs Note: White grip wires are

connected together
(9.6 Nm)
TROUBLESHOOTING:
Switch
To Measure Grip Resistance at Switch: (CROSS ROADS)
(This test measures the resistance of both grip heater grids in parallel).
Disconnect DB (High) and BN (Low) wires from switch.
Measure resistance between DB wire and ground: Approx 4 Ohms
Measure resistance between BN wire and ground: Approx 6.5 Ohms
If resistance is out of range, test each grip resistance individually.
12
JUMPER HARNESS TO MAIN HARNESS WIRING
LB = Light Blue; BU = Blue; DB = Dark Blue; BN = Brown;
BK = Black; WH = White; PK = Pink Squeeze tabs
to remove
Jumper Harness
Wire Color
BK LB DB BN
Main Harness CONNECTIONS TO SWITCH
Wire Color
BK Brown
(across from HIGH button)
BU/PK
BU
BN
SWITCH CONTACTS
Wire Color
BN LtBU DB
Light Blue (POWER)
HIGH
OFF
LOW Dark Blue (across from LOW button)
SERVICE PROCEDURES 2. Cut tie straps (A) and (B) on both sides of handlebars
to release wiring and cables. Note location of any
Handlebar Removal (All Models) additional straps (C) if accessories are installed.
A C
WARNING
Control cables must be routed, installed, and
adjusted correctly to function properly. Note the
way each cable is routed and secured before B
removing the cable. If cables are incorrectly routed,
installed, or adjusted, serious injury or death may
occur. Permanent cable damage may result if the
internal cables are bent or twisted during
installation.
CAUTION
Left handlebar grip and grip end may be damaged during
3. Loosen lock nut (D) and turn adjuster (E) toward
removal. Plan on replacing left grip and grip end if grip
switch housing to obtain maximum throttle cable free
must be removed. Cover painted or chrome parts to
play.
prevent damage. Use care to protect fuel tank and front
fender. Tank removal is recommended (Chapter 5).
Secure, set aside, or support parts as they are removed.
1. Cross Country Models: Remove fairing and then

remove fairing support / dash as an assembly to
access handlebar clamps and risers. See Chapter 3
for procedure.
Cross Roads Models: Proceed to Step 2.
E D
Also refer to assembly views on page 12.4 - page 12.8 as

required for the following steps.
4. Cover fuel tank to protect it from damage. Secure all

cables, switches and controls out of the way as they
are removed.
5. Disconnect front brake switch wires.
6. Remove front master cylinder clamp. 8. Remove cruise control switch screws (F) from bracket
(if equipped). Remove bracket screws (G) and slide
bracket away from switch body.
7. Secure master cylinder away from handlebars with

reservoir level. 9. Remove (2) screws (H) from bottom switch plate. Tip
the cable end of the plate downward to release tab (I)
at the grip end and remove the plate. Remove longest
screw (J) from front corner of switch and separate the
switch halves.
H
J
12
NOTICE 10. Slide throttle grip inward and tap right handlebar end
with a soft faced hammer to remove.
Keep brake reservoir in an upright position to NOTE: If end cap is being replaced, grasp it with an
prevent air from entering the system. Bleeding is adjustable pliers and remove with a twisting motion.
required if air enters the system.
Actual end cap may be different from picture
11. Remove cables from throttle grip. Do not kink or bend 15. Disconnect clutch interlock switch wire connector and
the cables. Do not attempt to slide the grip off the end remove clutch lever perch.
of the handlebar with cables attached.
16. Remove audio / com switches (if equipped) and
bracket.
17. Remove left handlebar switch.
18. If handlebar risers will be removed, remove

handlebars / risers as an assembly. If risers will not
be removed, support the handlebars and loosen the
rear handlebar clamp screws, and then the front.
Remove handlebars.
12. Grasp left handlebar end cap by with an adjustable
pliers and twist to remove.
13. Remove left hand grip.

Heated Grips: Fold back edge of grip and remove set-
screws.
Non-heated grips: Insert a thin screw driver between

grip and bar to release adhesive bond. A small
amount of solvent can be used to help loosen the
adhesive. DO NOT ALLOW SOLVENT TO
CONTACT COSMETIC SURFACES!
14. If handlebars will be reinstalled, remove any residual

adhesive from bar with solvent.
Handlebar Adjustment - Hard-ball 1. Taking care not to scratch the gas tank, loosen
handlebar clamp bolts. The handlebar assembly
NOTE: The Victory Hard-Ball handlebar has been should rotate freely in risers.
designed to operate in two different positions. It is
very important that the control levers (clutch, brake)
and switch cubes are repositioned any time the
handlebar position is changed.
High Position
Low Position
2. Carefully rotate handlebar into desired position

making sure index mark is properly aligned with
parting in handlebar clamp.
Handlebar Index Mark
WARNING
Handlebars adjusted to forward position may not be
legal in all states or for all riders. Check state and
local regulations. Consult owner’s manual for
proper procedure when adjusting handlebars. 12
Align with split
WARNING
Control cables must be routed, installed, and
adjusted correctly to function properly. Note the IMPORTANT: Visually inspect to see that the
way each cable is routed and secured before handlebar assembly is centered in the risers.
removing the cable. Permanent cable damage may
result if the inner cables are bent or twisted during
installation. If cables are incorrectly routed,
installed, or adjusted, serious injury or death may
occur.
NOTE: Handlebar index marks indicate high and low

handlebar positions. Index marks should be aligned
with parting in handlebar clamp.
Gap should be same on both sides
3. Tighten the forward handlebar clamp bolts to 22 ft-lbs 10. Paying attention to switch cube dowel pin, align switch
(30 Nm). cube with correct alignment hole and tighten screws
to 25 in-lbs (3 Nm).
4. Tighten the rear handlebar clamp bolts to 22 ft-lbs (30
Nm). Dowel Pin
5. Working from the RH side of the motorcycle, loosen

two screws securing throttle cable access cover to
switch cube and remove cover.
Alignment Holes
Screws
11. Working from the LH side of the motorcycle, remove

screws (2) securing switch cube to handlebar and split
switch cube.
12. Loosen hex-head bolts (2) securing clutch lever

assembly to handlebar. Lever should rotate freely.
6. Locate the Phillips head screw beneath access cover
and remove. 13. Rotate clutch lever into desired position and, starting
with the rear bolt, tighten to 80 in-lbs (9 Nm).
14. Paying attention to switch cube dowel pin, align switch

cube with correct alignment hole and tighten screws
to 25 in-lbs (3 Nm).
15. Check throttle cable free play and ensure handlebar

moves freely from left to right.
16. Adjust side mirrors.
Handlebar Installation
1. Reverse the removal process for installation.
2. For Cross Roads models: See “Handlebar /

7. Split switch cube assembly. Handlebar Riser Assembly View: Cross Roads” on
page 12.5.
8. Using a 5mm hex-head wrench, loosen bolts (2)
securing front brake lever to handlebar. Lever should For Cross Country models: See “Handlebar /
rotate freely. Handlebar Riser Assembly View: Cross Country” on
page 12.7.
9. Rotate front brake lever into desired position and,
starting with the rear bolt, tighten to 80 in-lbs (9 Nm)
Clutch Cable 6. Cut tie strap on rear engine mount plate. Pull lower
end of clutch cable out right side.
Clutch Cable Removal
1. Protect clutch release arm (A) with a shop towel.
Using an adjustable wrench, rotate release arm
inward and disconnect cable from release arm.
7. Note routing of clutch cable through frame and slide

A out through top triple clamp.
Clutch Cable Installation

1. Route clutch cable as shown on page 12.8 (through
2. Remove nut (B) from lower end of cable and remove tie strap at front right side of steering head (with
cable from bracket. throttle cables) and up through left side opening in
upper triple clamp).
2. Install cable in lower bracket and tighten lock nut to
4. Remove fuel tank (Chapter 5). 48 in-lbs (5.4 Nm).
5. Pull clutch cable casing (C) straight out until clear of 3. Apply Moly Assembly Paste (PN 2871460) to both
lever perch and rotate cable outward to align inner cable ends.
cable wire with slot in lever. Do not bend or kink cable.
4. Connect lever end of cable to lever and perch. Do not
12
kink or bend cable.
5. Rotate release arm inward (as in Removal Step 1) and

connect lower end of cable to release arm.
C
6. Secure cable to lower wire harness (only) and to rear
engine mount bracket with a tie strap as shown above
and on page 12.8.
7. Adjust clutch cable free play (page 2.14).
Clutch Cable Free Play

.5 - 1.5mm (.020-.060)
Throttle Cable 5. Loosen nuts (D) on each cable and remove cables
from bracket.
Throttle Cable Removal
1. Remove fuel tank (Chapter 5). 6. Remove cable ends from throttle reel. Do not kink or
bend the cables.
2. Hold upper cable adjuster (A) and loosen knurled lock
nut (B).
3. Turn the adjuster nut fully inward (toward switch block)

to gain maximum cable free play.
NOTE: The dark colored cable is mounted on the

bottom of the bracket.
A B
D
4. Cut upper and lower tie straps (C).

Darker colored “pull” cable on bottom
C
7. Remove (2) screws (F) from bottom switch plate. Tip
the cable end of the plate downward to release tab (G)
at the grip end and remove the plate. Remove longest
screw (H) from front corner of switch and separate the
switch halves.
8. Remove cables from throttle grip. Do not kink or bend Throttle Cable Installation
the cables.
1. CABLE IDENTIFICATION: The throttle opening
(pull) cable is darker in color at the throttle body end.
It is the front-most cable in the switch cube and the
lower-most cable in the throttle body bracket.
On vehicles equipped with cruise control, the throttle

“push” cable can be identified by the cruise-cancel
switch near the throttle body end.
2. Route the cables as noted in Step 10 of Removal

procedure.
9. Remove cables from lower switch.
3. Arrange throttle opening (pull) cable toward the front
10. Take note of the cable routing before removing of the right hand switch cube. Arrange the cables to
cables. route smoothly toward the throttle body without
twisting around each other.
• Through opening in right side of upper triple
clamp.
• Through tie strap on right side of steering head

with clutch cable. This tie strap must not be pulled
tight upon installation. Cables must be able to
move freely in strap. Pull
Push
4. Feed the inner cables up through the switch cube. 12

Cables should lie flat against the switch (switch shown
removed for clarity).
11. Remove cables.
See “Handlebar Controls: Cross Roads / Cross Country” 12. Check throttle operation.
on page 12.4.
• Be sure the throttle opens and closes smoothly in
5. Apply a thin film of Victory Multi-purpose grease to the all steering positions, and returns to the fully
barrel ends of the cables and carefully attach them to closed position when throttle grip is released.
the twist grip. • If throttle grip does not return properly, re-check
cable free play, inspect cables for proper routing,
6. Apply a thin film of Dielectric grease to the switch and be sure cables are attached properly to the
mounting surface of the handlebar. throttle reel.
7. Install upper half of the switch cube and tighten the • Inspect condition of cables for kinks, damage, or
single screw to 25 in-lbs (3 Nm). frayed ends.
8. Be sure the cables are seated properly in the switch • Be sure switch cube and grip are located properly
cube and install the lower cable retaining plate using on handlebar, and that screws are properly
the two screws. Torque screws to 25 in-lbs (3 Nm). torqued.
• Be sure all cable fasteners are tight.

9. Apply a thin film of Victory Multi-purpose grease to the
barrel ends of the lower cable and attach them to the 13. Start engine with transmission in neutral.
throttle body reel.
14. Turn handlebars full right to full left. Idle speed should
10. Place each cable in the bracket with one nut on either not change in any steering position. If idle speed
side of the bracket. Set the adjustment range in the changes, re-check throttle grip free play, inspect
middle. Tighten the nuts against the bracket securely. cables for proper routing, and be sure cables are
attached properly. Replace cable(s) if damaged.
Equal Thread
Front Wheel Removal
1. Also refer to illustration on page 12.10.
2. Remove right or left front brake caliper screws (A) and

caliper.
CAUTION
Dark cable end on bottom is PULL (open) Do not twist the brake hose or brake line. Do not allow
caliper to hang from the brake hose. Secure caliper in
such a way to avoid hose damage.
11. Adjust throttle cable free play to 3-6 mm (1/8-1/4 inch). NOTE: Do not operate the front brake lever with the
caliper or wheel removed.
Throttle Cable Free Play
3 - 6 mm (1/8 - 1/4)
3. Loosen axle pinch bolts on lower right fork leg (B). 3. Position dial indicator to measure axial runout (side to
side) (B) and compare to specifications on page 12.3.
4. Securely support front end of motorcycle so front

wheel is off the ground.
CAUTION
4. Visually inspect wheel for cracks.
Take precautions so that the motorcycle is securely
supported when the tire is off the ground. 5. Replace wheel if it fails visual or measured inspection.
Do not attempt to straighten cast or billet wheels.
5. Support wheel and remove axle. Be prepared to catch
spacers on each side of the wheel and remove wheel. Brake Disc Removal
Front Axle Inspection NOTE: Left side brake disc is installed together with
ABS tone ring. ABS tone ring is secured using 3 of 6
1. Place axle in V-blocks and inspect runout. Compare brake disc bolts.
to specifications on page 12.3. Refer to Chapter 15 for disc inspection.
1. Remove front wheel (page 12.26).
2. Position wheel with brake disc facing up (protect the

other disc and wheel when removing opposite disc. 12
3. If removing the left side brake disc, remove 3 screws
securing ABS tone ring and discard.
4. Remove and discard remaining brake disc screws.
5. Remove brake disc from wheel.
2. Replace axle if it fails inspection. Do not attempt to

straighten a bent axle.
Front Wheel Inspection

1. Install front wheel in truing stand.
NOTE: Bearings must be in good condition to accurately
measure runout.
2. Set up a dial indicator to measure radial runout (up

and down) (A) and compare to specifications on
page 12.3.
Brake Disc Installation Front Wheel Bearing Inspection

1. Clean screw hole threads with Loctite Primer N. NOTE: Inspect bearings installed in the wheel. Do not
remove to inspect. Bearings cannot be repacked.
2. Clean surface of wheel and brake disc with Victory
Replace both wheel bearings if one or both fail
Brake Cleaner.
inspection, or if either bearing was removed. For
3. Install disc on wheel with part number facing OUT. inspection with the wheel installed on the vehicle, refer to
Chapter 2.
4. If installing left side brake disc, move ABS tone ring
into position for installation. 1. Visually inspect bearing seals on each side for wear
or damage.
5. Replace screws with new screws which have pre-
applied locking agent.
A
6. Evenly torque brake disc retaining bolts to
specification.
=T
Brake Disc Mounting Bolts 22 ft-lbs (30 Nm)
WARNING
Do not re-install brake disc screws. Use only new
screws which have a pre-applied locking agent.
2. Check bearings by turning inner race (A) by hand.
• Look for signs of discoloration, scoring, galling, or

contamination from moisture or dirt. Replace
bearings if any of the above are present.
• Turn the inner race of the bearings. The bearings

should turn smoothly and quietly. The inner race
should be firm with minimal side to side movement
and no detectable up and down movement.
3. Discard bearings that fail any of the above

inspections.
CAUTION
Do not reuse bearings after removing them from the
wheel. Removal damages the bearings internally.
4. Inspect bearing fit into wheel hub. The outer race of

the bearing must fit tightly into the bore. You should
not be able to move it (or remove it) by hand. Replace
the wheel if outer race of a new bearing does not fit
tightly in the bore.
Front Wheel Bearing Removal (Typical) Front Wheel Bearing Installation

NOTE: Replace both wheel bearings as a set. Do not NOTE: Refer to illustration below for Steps 3-9.
replace only one wheel bearing.
1. Clean inside of wheel hub and bearing spacer.
1. Place a shop towel over the edge of seal bore. Replace spacer if any wear is evident on the ends.
2. Place new bearing into left hand side of wheel with
(TYPICAL) markings facing up (toward outside of hub).
3. Assemble bearing collar with flat side of 50-51 mm
collar against bearing. Collar must be slightly smaller
than O.D. of bearing and must be flat to support inner
and outer race equally. DO NOT pull or press on inner
race of ball bearings or bearing will be permanently
damaged! Assemble right side of tool as shown and
pull bearing into hub until fully seated.
Bearing installation tool set: PV-43515
NOTE: Use of this special tool is shown with rear
wheel bearing installation in Chapter 13.
2. Carefully remove both seals using a pry-bar and 4. Install bearing spacer.
discard. Be careful not to scratch the seal bore.
5. Place new right wheel bearing onto wheel with
3. Remove retaining ring from left side. markings facing out.
4. Install bearing remover element into left side bearing 6. Install flat side of another 50-51 mm bearing collar
and remove it. against right bearing so both races are supported.
5. Remove bearing spacer from wheel hub, measure the
7. Pull bearing in to right side of wheel until seated
length and compare to specification. Replace spacer
against spacer.
if it is worn beyond the service limit or if the bearing
contact surface is damaged. 8. Remove tool. Check that spacer is centered with
Minimum Spacer Length: 121.80 mm (4.795) ALL bearings. If not, center it by inserting front axle.
Repeat Step 7 to fully seat bearing on spacer.
6. Drive out right side bearing using a suitable drift or
extract the bearing with a bearing puller. 9. Bearings must rotate smoothly after installation. 12
10. Install retaining ring. Be sure it is fully seated in the
groove.
Step 3 - Fully support LH bearing inner Step 4 - Install Spacer Step 7 -Fully support RH bearing inner
and outer race. Press until seated in hub. and outer race. Pull bearing until seated
against spacer
Washer
Threaded Washer
Tool Bearing
Rod
Nut
Nut
Flat side of 50-51 mm
Collar
LEFT RIGHT Flat side of 50-51 mm
Step 9 - Install retaining ring Wheel Bearing Installation Collar
11. Install new seals using a 52mm seal driver. (Fig. 1) 3. Remove bolt (A) securing wheel speed sensor to
Seal Depth 1.5 mm (.059 in.) mounting bracket and withdraw sensor.
Seal NOTE: Be sure to collect wheel speed sensor
adjustment shims from behind sensor if present.
Surface of
Fig. 1 hub bore
12. Rotate inner races of bearings to check for free,

smooth rotation. A
13. Install discs (page 12.28). Wipe discs clean with
Victory Disc Brake Cleaner.
CAUTION
Do not allow brake cleaner to contact painted surfaces.
4. Remove bolts (B) and both front calipers.
WARNING 5. Secure caliper and brake lines out of the way and
support securely.
Grease or oil on the brake disc will increase stopping
distance which may lead to loss of vehicle control or an
accident.
Front Fork Removal

1. Cover front fender to protect it from damage.
B
2. Remove the fairing and fairing support with console as
an assembly (Chapter 3).
CAUTION
Do not twist the brake hose or brake line. Do not allow
caliper to hang from the brake hose. Secure caliper in
such a way to avoid hose damage.
6. Remove front wheel (page 12.26).
7. Remove front fender.
8. If triple clamp will be removed, remove front brake line Front Fork Tube Installation
manifold bolts (C) from lower triple clamp.
See “Fork Tube Installation Steps: Cross Roads & Cross
Country” on page 12.11.
C
9. Loosen upper triple clamp pinch bolt(s) (D) for both left
and right fork tubes.
12
10. Loosen lower triple clamp pinch bolts (D) evenly, 1/4
turn at a time until loose.
11. Slide fork legs down and out of triple clamps.
Front Fork Disassembly FORK SPRING REMOVAL
4. Remove fork spring compressor adaptor tool and

WARNING reposition fork spring compressor per steps 5 & 6.
Springs are compressed during this procedure. 5. Turn drive bolt to adjust tool to proper length, so gaps
Wear a face shield to reduce the chance of injury. in upper spring coils are approximately aligned with
pegs.
NOTE: Also refer to Front Fork Assembly View on
page 12.13. 6. Turn thumb screws (D) inward until retaining slot on
end of screw aligns with spring. Push spring onto
1. Clean fork tubes thoroughly before disassembly. stationary peg, then onto adjustable pegs until spring
coils are captive.
2. Secure fork spring compressor (PV-49463) vertically
in a vise with drive bolt (A) UP and support peg (B) at
the bottom.
D
A
B
WARNING
Wear eye / face protection. Fork components are under
spring pressure. Use hand tools only on spring
compressor tool to apply and release spring pressure.
3. Place fork leg onto spring compressor tool. Install fork
spring compressor adaptor tool (PV-49464) onto fork
cap (C). Loosen fork cap by unscrewing outer fork 7.Turn drive bolt (E) of tool to compress spring just enough
tube. Slide outer tube down to expose spacer. Keep to hold fork in position and expose jam nut.
fork upright.
8. Hold jam nut with open end wrench and remove cap.
TUBE DISASSEMBLY (cont.) 12. Remove fork leg from tool, lifting both inner and outer
tubes together.
9. Remove nut from cartridge shaft. NOTE: Nut can be
removed later if it is not free on the shaft. NOTE: DO NOT lift by outer tube only. Oil will spill if
outer tube slides too far up inner tube.
13. Pour fork oil out of tube and remove lower spring with
lower spacer. Move cartridge shaft through complete
stroke several times to drain cartridge until damping
is gone.
10. Slowly release all spring pressure and remove

spacer.
14. Lower spring has small diameter wire and the coils are
closely spaced. The upper spring has heavier wire
and the coils spacing is wider.
Lower Upper
12
11. Remove upper spring.

Metal Spacer
15. Proceed to Fork Seal Removal / Tube Disassembly.
To change fork oil only, proceed to Fork Oil Filling /

Level Setting (page 12.38).
Fork Seal Removal / Tube Disassembly BUSHING INSPECTION / REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Replace dust seal and fork seal upon 1. Inspect bearing surface of bushings. Replace
assembly. bushing if bronze material appears on more than 1/4
SEAL REMOVAL: (25%) of the entire anti-friction surface coating.
1. Separate tubes. Remove dust seal (by hand) or NOTE: Use a light to visually inspect bushing inside
protect the tube and carefully pry to remove. the outer fork tube. Replace tube assembly if upper
bushing is worn.
Dust Seal
2. Remove seal retaining ring. Do not scratch tube.
Bushing - Upper
(Inside outer tube)
Bushing - Lower
(tap or pull evenly on
opposite sides to remove)
Backing Washer
Seal
3. Protect surface of outer tube. Carefully pry seal from
outer tube. Do not scratch seal bore. Remove seal Retaining
backing washer from outer tube. Ring
Dust Seal
Inner Tube
CARTRIDGE REMOVAL Front Fork Inspection

1. Measure free length (A) of both upper and lower fork
WARNING spring and compare to specifications on page 12.3.
DO NOT disassemble the cartridge. If damaged or

worn, it must be replaced as an assembly.
1. Cartridge removal is not required for fork oil change A

or for seal replacement. To clean cartridge, add clean
fork oil to inner tube and pump damper rod to flush
cartridge. Discard oil.
If cartridge removal is required proceed as follows:
2. Hold cartridge with holder PV-49452 using castellated

end of tool (octagonal end out).
2. Inspect inner fork tube for scoring, heavy scratches,
dents due to rocks or other road debris, or excessive
PV-49452 wear. Replace tube if worn or damaged.
3. Place fork tube in V-blocks or truing stand and

measure runout. Replace tube if runout exceeds
service limit listed on page 12.3.
12
3. Remove cartridge screw and sealing washer using an
extended 8 mm hex socket.
WARNING
Do not attempt to straighten bent fork tubes. Doing so
will weaken the structural integrity of the forks and make
the motorcycle unsafe to operate.
4. Remove cartridge from inner tube.
FRONT FORK INSPECTION (Cont.) Front Fork Tube Assembly

4. DO NOT loosen or remove set screw (B). Also refer to fork assembly view (page 12.13).
1. Be sure screw threads in bottom of cartridge are

WARNING clean and not damaged.
DO NOT disassemble the inner fork tube. If damaged or
2. Place cartridge assembly into inner fork tube. Hold
worn, the inner fork tube / lower casting must be
cartridge with PV-49452.
replaced as an assembly.
Do not disassemble!
1. Install a new cartridge screw (A) and new sealing
5. Inspect outer tube for dents or other damage. Look for washer (B).
cracks in the tube, especially in the clamping zone.
Assemble inner and outer fork tube and move inner
tube through complete travel range. Check for
resistance or binding in suspect area of outer tube. A
Replace outer tube if binding or resistance is evident, B
or if tube is cracked.
6. Inspect cartridge by moving shaft through travel

range. If binding is evident, replace the assembly.
2. Torque cartridge screw. 14.8 - 19.0 ft-lbs (20-26 Nm).
3. To prevent seal damage, install seal guide (C) over If lower bushing was not removed go to Step 10.
end of fork tube as shown lubricate surface of guide. 9. Start the lower bushing into the outer fork tube and
slide the backing washer against it. Use the seal driver
4. Carefully install a new dust seal (D) (external spring to tap the bushing into the outer tube until fully seated.
faces down) and slide it over seal guide.
10. Lubricate outer surface of seal with fork oil.
5. Set new retaining ring (E) on dust seal. 11. Drive seal into outer tube with large side of seal driver
until fully seated (below retaining ring groove).
6. Lubricate and install a new fork seal (F) with marks
facing dust seal and retaining ring.
PV-47037
C
Markings face F
dust seal
E
12. Install retaining ring (H) into groove of fork tube. Be
D sure entire retaining ring is seated in groove.
7. Remove seal guide from inner tube and install seal H

backing washer (G) against seal. Machined face
(flattest edge) should face UP (away from seal).
NOTE: If lower tube bushing was removed from the
12
outer tube for replacement, slide the new bushing
onto the inner tube after backing washer is installed.
G
13. Wipe any excess oil from seal cavity and press dust
seal in (by hand) until fully seated in outer tube.
8. Lubricate lower bushing with fork oil. Assemble the

outer tube to the inner tube.
Fork Oil Filling / Level Setting 4. Set fork leg upright.
5. Lift outer tube up about 100-125mm (4-5 inches) from

1. Slide tubes together lightly to bottom of travel range.
fully compressed position.
100-125mm
6. Seal top of tube firmly with your hand and push

2. Tip fork leg at an angle to reduce bubbles when downward to build air pressure in tube. Hold for 10-
adding fork oil. 15 seconds to force trapped air into the oil. Allow a few
minutes for air to rise to the top of the oil in tube.
ADD: About 500 cc of P/N 2877421 fork oil.
7. Bleed cartridge by moving shaft up and down to purge

3. Slowly add recommended fork oil until holes near the air. Begin with small strokes, increasing stroke length
top of the outer tube are covered by oil. (The holes are until all air is removed and damping is smooth and
located about 35mm (1 1/2 inches) below the top of consistent.
the outer tube).
NOTE: The oil quantity slightly exceeds fork

capacity. Final fork oil level must be adjusted
correctly as outlined later.
OIL LEVEL ADJUSTMENT 10. Insert tool into fork with plate squarely seated on top
of tube. Be sure fork is upright, fully compressed, and
8. Slowly compress fork until it stops with dust seal cartridge rod is at bottom of travel.
against casting (at bottom of travel).
11. Draw excess oil out to set proper oil level.
9. Adjust fork oil level tool (C) to specified level:
FORK OIL LEVEL:
• Springs and spacers removed

• Tube upright and level
• Cartridge rod at bottom of travel
SPECIFICATION: 106mm (4.17") +/- 1mm (.040")
PV-59000-A 12
C
106mm
FORK SPRING INSTALLATION / FINAL ASSEMBLY 9. Install top spacer on spring.
10. Install nut with flattest surface facing up.

WARNING
Springs are compressed during this procedure.
Wear a face shield to reduce the chance of injury.
1. Set axle end of fork tube in spring compressor.
2. Install lower spring (spring is non-directional).
3. Install lower spacer.
4. Install upper spring (A) (spring is non-directional).
11. Screw nut onto cartridge rod at least 17 mm to ensure

cap threads will be fully engaged when installed.
17mm (minimum)
A
5. Engage all 3 pins (B) of compressor tool with coils of

fork spring as done for disassembly.
6. Screw cartridge rod extension tool (C) onto cartridge

rod and pull cartridge up to top of travel range.
12. Install a new O-ring on fork cap and screw cap onto
7. Compress spring. Guide damper rod with extension cartridge rod until bottomed. A gap should exist
tool while spring is being compressed. between cap and nut when cap is bottomed.
C
Bottom cap on
damper rod.
B B
8. Hold damper rod up and remove cartridge shaft tool.
13. Screw nut upward until it contacts the cap. 4. Loosen crown nut (B).
14. Tighten nut against cap. Hold nut and torque cap to 5. Remove headlamp cover screws (C, both sides) and
9.5 - 12.0 ft-lbs (13-16 Nm). cover (Cross Roads).
A
B
6. Remove fuel tank (page 5.15) or cover the tank to

protect it tank from damage from brake fluid, loose
15. Screw cap into outer tube and torque to specification: parts, or handlebar switches (fork stop will not function
11-22 ft-lbs (15-30 Nm). with fork tubes removed).
7. Disconnect clutch cable at handlebar.
8. Disconnect switch wiring inside headlamp.
9. Remove throttle cables from throttle reel bracket and

from throttle reel. Pull cables through top triple clamp.
10. Securely support the vehicle with front wheel

elevated.
12
WARNING
or death could occur if the motorcycle tips or falls.
11. Remove front wheel (page 12.26) and fender

16. Wipe fork clean to remove all oil before installing in (page 12.9).
triple clamp (page 12.11).
12. Remove fork tubes (page 12.30).
Triple Clamp Removal
1. Remove windshield (Cross Roads) or front fairing
assembly (Cross Country).
2. Remove speedometer from top triple clamp (Cross

Roads).
3. Cut tie straps (A) on handlebars.
13. Remove brake line manifold from lower triple clamp. 17. Pull brake line through top triple clamp (do not kink the
brake line) and temporarily re-connect it to the master
cylinder.
18. Slide upper triple clamp off steering stem with spacer
(F).
19. Remove stem adjuster nut (G) with Victory spanner

socket (PV-43508). Support lower triple clamp while
removing the adjuster nut.
Manifold Bolts
F
E
14. Remove headlamp housing by removing nut (D) from

lower triple clamp.
20. Remove upper steering head roller bearing from the

frame.
21. Remove lower triple clamp / steering stem with

bearing.
15. Loosen crown nut (E) on upper triple clamp (30 mm

socket).
16. Remove brake line from front master cylinder. Cover

end of line and master cylinder with a clean, lint-free
cloth to capture any spilled brake fluid.
Steering Head Bearing Inspection (Triple

Clamp Removed)
E
Refer to page 2.32 for inspection if front end is assembled.
D
1. Inspect lower bearing race for pitting, dents, or signs
of wear on the bearing surface. Inspect roller cage for B
cracks or damage. Replace bearing and race as an
assembly if any of the above is evident.
A C
2. Inspect upper bearing for smooth rotation and minimal
movement between the inner and outer race. Replace
bearing if not smooth or if ANY movement can be
detected between the inner and outer race.
Triple Clamp Installation

1. Apply Victory All Purpose grease to lower bearing
Mark frame in
and to bearing surface of lower race. alignment with
slot of nut.
2. Install lower triple clamp / steering stem into frame.
3. Install upper bearing (A) onto stem and push it down 12. Tighten steering stem nut by hand.
until seated in upper bearing race of frame.
NOTE: Crown nut will be tightened in a later step.
4. Screw adjuster nut (B) (shoulder side down) onto the
13. Install fork tubes through lower triple clamp and slide
stem and hand tighten.
upward until tube is (approximately) 75% engaged in
upper clamp.
5. Turn triple clamps fully to the right to place lower triple
clamp against the fork stop. 14. Tighten (4) LOWER triple clamp pinch bolts evenly,
enough to hold tubes in place.
6. Torque stem nut to 29 ft-lbs (39 Nm) using Victory
spanner socket PV-43508. 15. Fully tighten crown nut to72 ft-lbs (97 Nm) using 12
spanner socket PV-43508.
7. Turn lower triple clamp from lock to lock five times.
16. Follow fork tube installation steps on page 12.11 to
install tubes to proper height in triple clamps and to
8. Turn lower triple clamp to the FULL LEFT position
torque pinch bolts to specification in proper sequence.
against the fork stop and hold it in position.
17. Install front fender (page 12.9) and front wheel
9. Place a mark on the frame in alignment with one of the (page 12.14).
slots (C) on the steering stem nut for reference later.
10. Loosen adjuster nut 90 degrees (1/4 turn) so the

reference mark on frame (from Step 9) is aligned with
the next one of the four slots on the stem nut.
11. Set upper triple clamp in place on stem. Install spacer

(D) and crown nut (E).
18. Remove front brake line from master cylinder and 21. Route left handlebar switch wiring through opening in
route through right side opening in top triple clamp. left side of top triple clamp.
Connect brake line to master cylinder using new
sealing washers and torque banjo bolt to 18 ft-lbs
(24.5 Nm).
18 ft-lbs (24.5 Nm)
19. Install brake line manifold to lower triple clamp. 22. Route clutch cable behind other cables and wires,
Torque fasteners (F) to 96 in-lbs (10.8 Nm). across steering head and up through left opening in
top triple clamp to clutch lever perch.
F
20. Route throttle cables and right handlebar switch

wiring through right side opening in top triple clamp.
Throttle cables route between handlebar and brake
line, crossing over the top of the brake line at the
bottom of handlebars as shown below.
23. Secure brake line, cables and switch wiring firmly to Steering Head Bearing Replacement
the handlebars on both left and right sides with new
tie strap through dart (G) on handlebars. Place Lower Race Removal:
another new strap around cables and wiring at the 1. Drive lower bearing race out of frame with a long pin
bottom of the handlebars (H). This strap secures punch through the top steering head opening. Tap
cables and wiring only - do not secure the strap to the alternately on opposite sides to keep the bearing race
handlebars. moving straight out of the steering head.
G Lower Race Installation:

H 1. Clean the bore in the steering head thoroughly.
2. Wipe a light film of Victory all purpose grease on the

outer surface of the new bearing race and on the
surface of the bearing bore in the steering head.
3. Select an arbor that is slightly smaller than the outside

diameter of the new bearing race.
Steering
Head
24. Install a new tie strap in the dart at the front right side
of steering head. Loosely bundle the clutch cable with Bearing Race
the throttle cables (routed on top of clutch cable) as
shown below. DO NOT pull this tie strap tight. The
cables must be able to move freely in this strap. Driver
Do not pull strap tight

4. Drive new race into steering head evenly until fully 12
seated.
5. Wipe any grease from bearing surface and

surrounding area, then apply new Victory All Purpose
Grease liberally to bearing surface of outer race.
25. Refer to illustrations on page 12.4 - 12.13 to re-

assemble any remaining parts. Refer to Chapter 5 to
install fuel tank.
26. When all parts are assembled, verify all fasteners are
installed and properly torqued.
27. Adjust clutch and throttle cable free play and

operation as outlined in Chapter 2.
Lower Bearing Removal: Lower Bearing Installation:
1. Place level blocking on the table of a hydraulic press. A bearing press sleeve with the specifications listed below
is required for bearing installation.
2. Place lower triple clamp on blocking with stem upright.
Material: Standard Steel Pipe (Commercially Available)
3. Move blocks inward so lower triple clamp is supported Ends smooth, square, and de-burred.
as close as possible to the base of the steering stem,
leaving clearance (A) for the stem to pass between the Outside Diameter: 1.5 In. (38 mm)
support blocks when pressed in Step 4. Inside Diameter: 1.25 In. (32 mm)
Length: 10.0 In. (255 mm)
4. Place an aluminum spacer with a minimum thickness Wall Thickness: 1/8 in. (3.2 mm)
of 1/2 inch (12mm) (B) between press ram and
threaded end of steering stem to prevent thread
damage.
10.0 in.
5. Place soft metal shims as required between press
plates and triple clamp so clamp is fully supported and
stable.
B
I.D. 1.25 in. O.D. 1.5 in.
Press Sleeve
A
1. Clean the press surfaces (C) of stem and triple clamp

and apply a thin film of Victory All Purpose Grease
(2872187).
2. Be sure stop ring (D) is in place on the stem and fully

6. The stem may fall when pressed out of the triple
seated in the groove.
clamp. Place shop towels in a wood or cardboard box
under the press area to prevent damage to threads of
stem.
WARNING
A press force of 1000 pounds (454 kg) or greater is
required for stem and bearing removal. Be sure all
protective guards or shields are in place before you C
begin the press operation.
7. Be sure a protective shield or cage door is in place and

secured before pressing the stem. D
8. Move press ram into position firmly against the spacer

to be sure the assembly is stable, then press the stem
downward until bearing is presses off the stem.
9. Remove old bearing from stem and discard. 3. Place stem through triple clamp.
4. Slide a new bearing over the stem with sealed edge 8. Close the cage or place the protective guard over the
toward triple clamp. press.
5. Place bearing press sleeve (E) over stem. Invert the

assembly and center it on the press plate and the ram.
9. Press the stem and bearing assembly until fully

seated.
10. After the press operation is completed, release ram

6. Place a suitable arbor (F) between the press ram and pressure.
the end of the steering stem. The arbor must be
slightly smaller than the O.D. of the stem base. 11. Inspect the stop ring (H) to be sure it is fully seated
against the triple clamp surface.
7. Be sure press sleeve is centered on the inner bearing
race and does not contact the bearing cage (G).
12
F H
12. Install triple clamps. See “Triple Clamp Installation” on

page 12.43.
Steering Head Bearing Adjustment

See “Steering Head Adjustment / Top Triple Clamp: Cross
Roads / Cross Country” on page 12.12. Or refer to the
triple clamp installation procedure on page 12.43.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Troubleshooting
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE REPAIR RECOMMENDED
Heavy Steering Steering Stem Nut Over Tightened Torque to specification
Damaged Steering Stem Bearings or Replace
Races
Bent Steering Stem Replace
Front Tire Damaged or Worn Replace
Low Tire Pressure Inflate to specification
Pulls to One Side or Wanders Damaged Steering Stem Bearings or Replace
Races
Steering Stem Nut Over Tightened or Torque to specification
Under Tightened
Rear Wheel Not Aligned Correctly Align
Bent Front Axle Replace
Damaged or Excessively Worn Front Replace
Tire / Incorrect Tire
Damaged Wheel Bearings Replace
Damaged Swing Arm Bearings Replace
Loose Swing Arm Pivot Nut Torque to specification
Bent Frame or Swingarm Replace
Handlebars Oscillate (Wobble) Bent Front Axle Replace
Wheel Has Excessive Runout Spoke: True or Replace (Billet)
Tire Mounted Incorrectly Check Mounting and Balance
Damaged Tire / Worn Tire Replace
Loose Steering Stem Nut Torque to specification
Incorrect Tire Replace
Incorrect Tire Pressure Correct
Noise Coming From Front Worn Fork Bushings Rebuild Forks
Suspension Low Fork Fluid Determine Cause/Replace Fork Oil
Loose Fasteners Torque to specification
Loose Steering Stem Bearings Determine Cause/Correct
Front Wheel Oscillates (Wobbles) Bent Front Rim Replace
Damaged Front Wheel Bearings Replace
Damaged or Incorrect Tire Replace
Front Wheel Oscillates (Wobbles) Loose Axle or Axle Pinch Bolts Torque to specification
Fork Tube Height Unequal (L&R) Install Correctly
Fork Oil Level Unequal Set Correctly
Fork Spring Free Length Different Replace
Between Right & Left
Wheel Assembly Out-of-Balance Balance
Troubleshooting (Cont.)
Front Suspension Too Soft Weak Fork Springs Replace
Low Fork Oil Level Determine Cause/Replace Fork Oil
Wrong Weight Fork Oil Replace
Contaminated and/or Deteriorated Replace
Fork Oil
Low Tire Pressure Set Correctly
Front Suspension Too Hard Tire Pressure Too High Set Correctly
Bent Fork Tubes Replace
Wrong Weight Fork Oil Replace
Too Much Fork Oil Set Correctly
Plugged Oil Passages Rebuild Front Forks
Damaged Sliders Replace
Forks Binding, Incorrect Assembly Correct
Front Fender and/or Front Wheel
Wheel Turns Hard Damaged Wheel Bearings Replace
Front Axle Bent Replace
Brake Dragging Repair as Necessary
(Hydraulic or Mechanical Problem)
Brake Dragging (Bent Disc) Replace
Improper Assembly After Repairs Correct as Necessary
12
NOTES
REAR WHEEL & SUSPENSION
CHAPTER 13
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.2
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.2
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.3
ASSEMBLY VIEWS & TORQUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.4
ASSEMBLY VIEW - REAR AXLE & ADJUSTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.4
ASSEMBLY VIEW - SWINGARM & SUSPENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.5
ASSEMBLY VIEW, CAST REAR WHEEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.6
ASSEMBLY VIEW, BILLET REAR WHEEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.7
ASSEMBLY VIEW, SPOKED REAR WHEEL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.8
REAR WHEEL SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.9
REAR WHEEL REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.9
REAR AXLE INSPECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.10
REAR WHEEL INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.10
REAR WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.11
WHEEL BEARING REMOVAL (TYPICAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.11
WHEEL BEARING INSTALLATION (TYPICAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.13
BRAKE DISC REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.15
BRAKE DISC INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.15
REAR SPROCKET REMOVAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.15
REAR SPROCKET INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.16
REAR WHEEL INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.16
REAR SHOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.19
REAR SHOCK SERVICE DATA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.19
REAR SHOCK REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.20
REAR SHOCK AND ROCKER INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.22
SHOCK ABSORBER INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.23
SWINGARM SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.25
SWING ARM REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.25
SWING ARM BUSHINGS / BEARING REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.27
SWING ARM INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.28
13
GENERAL INFORMATION SPECIAL TOOLS

Warnings And Precautions Special Tools
Wheel Bearing / Stem Bearing Race

WARNING Installation Set
PV-43515
This motorcycle was produced with the designated tires Commercially

Platform Jack or Hoist
as original equipment. The testing to ensure stability available
and superior handling was done using the OEM tires. Blind Bearing Remover Set (for wheel
PV-43551
Using non-OEM tires could result in poor motorcycle bearings)
stability and handling, which can lead to a crash Lower Shock Spherical Bearing Tool PV-49060
resulting in serious injury or death. Victory Air Pump & Gauge (Rear 2876654 or
Use only the recommended tires inflated to the Shock Air Pressure) PV-48909
recommended tire pressures.
Tubeless tires are used on certain Victory models.

Operating the motorcycle with damaged rims creates a
safety hazard including air pressure loss, steering
imbalance and/or reduced steering control. Do not
attempt to repair or straighten damaged cast or billet rims.
Victory Cross Roads Classic and Hard-Ball models are

equipped with spoked tube-type rims. Small
imperfections in the alignment of these rims can be
corrected using an approved wheel truing stand and
spoke wrench (commercially available). See Chapter 14
for details.
Always use genuine Victory parts or equivalent so that

quality is not compromised. The use of tire valves and valve
cores other than original equipment replacement Victory
parts could cause tire deflation which may lead to loss of
control, resulting in injury or death. Do not allow any
motorcycle to leave your service area without tire valve
caps securely installed.
• The rear shock absorber is a sealed unit and

cannot be re-built.
• Refer to Chapter 2 for maintenance of rear wheel &

suspension components, and suspension ride
height adjustment.
• Refer to Chapter 15 for brake system service.
• Refer to Chapter 14 for tire removal, repair, &

balancing.
SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications - Rear Wheel And Suspension
SPECIFICATIONS
Axle Runout - .20 mm (.008")
Single, Air Adjustable Shock DO NOT EXCEED 72 PSI
Rear Shock Absorber
(Sealed unit not serviceable) operating pressure.
Dunlop Elite 3 - 180/60R16 M/C 80H
Rear Tire Size / Type --
Radial
2.0 mm (.080”)
Rear Wheel Runout Axial .80 mm (.030 inch)
(.80 mm (.030”))
Cast and Billet
2.0 mm (.080”)
(Spoked) Radial .80 mm (.030 inch)
(.80 mm (.030”))
Rear Wheel Size / Type 5.0 x 16 --
Rear Wheel Travel 4.7 in. (12 cm) --
Shock Free Length (Eye to eye center) 325.3 mm (12.8 inch) +/- 3mm (.120 in) --
Perform Air Pressure Adjustment For
DO NOT EXCEED 72 PSI
Suspension Ride Height Measurement Rider Weight and Load with motorcycle
operating pressure.
on side stand. (See Chapter 2)
Swing Arm Pivot Shaft Runout Not Applicable .20 mm (.008")
Swing Arm Pivot Shaft O.D. 16.20 - 16.25 mm (.638 - .640”) 16.08 mm (.633")
Tire Pressure 52 mm --
Wheel bearing O.D. 52 mm --
Wheel bearing I.D. 20 mm --
Less than 171.3 mm
Wheel bearing spacer length 171.3 - 171.5mm (6.744 - 6.752)
(6.744)
Install NEW screws if
loosened or removed. New
Brake Disc Screws 22 ft-lbs (30.0 Nm)
screws have special pre-
13
Clean hub threads, bolt
threads, and mating
Victory Billet Wheels: 55 ft-lbs (75 Nm) surfaces of hub to remove
Hub Bolts (Billet Wheels Only)
Ness Billet Wheels: 65 ft-lbs (88.0 Nm) grease, oil, and old locking
agent. Apply Loctite 262
(Red) to bolt threads.
Rear Axle Nut 65 ft-lbs (88.1 Nm) --
Rear Axle Adjuster Nut 8 ft-lbs (10.8 Nm) --
Rocker Arm Pivot Shaft Retaining Bolts 18 ft-lbs (24.5 Nm) --
Sprocket Bolts 70 ft-lbs (95.0 Nm) Torque in star pattern
Swing Arm Nut, Left Side 24 in-lbs (2.7 Nm) Apply Loctite 262 (Red)
Swing Arm Nut, Right Side 65 ft-lbs (88.1 Nm) --
Shock Mount Bolt (Lower) 60 ft-lbs (81.4 Nm) --
Shock Mount Bolt (Upper) 54 ft-lbs (73.2 Nm) --
Shock Pushrod Bolt (Lower) 60 ft-lbs (81.4 Nm) --
Shock Pushrod Bolt (Upper) 54 ft-lbs (73.2 Nm) --
ASSEMBLY VIEWS & TORQUE

Assembly View - Rear Axle & Adjusters
Apply Victory All

Purpose grease
Retainer
Adjuster
65 ft-lbs (88 Nm)
Forward
8 ft-lbs
(10.8 Nm)
Assembly View - Swingarm & Suspension
Apply Victory All

18 ft-lbs Purpose grease
(24.5 Nm)
Correct
Shaft positioned
between stop bolts
Incorrect
54 ft-lbs End of stop bolt

(73 Nm) should not contact
rocker shaft
Shock Pressure - DO NOT EXCEED

60 ft-lbs
110 PSI when filling
(81.4 Nm) 72 PSI (496 kPa) operating pressure
60 ft-lbs
(81.4 Nm) 13
Spherical Bearing
Spacer Spacer Use PV-49060 or a
Spherical slide hammer to remove.
Bearing Use PV-49060 to install.
65 ft-lbs Spacer
(88 Nm)
Swing Arm Nut

24 in-lbs (2.7 Nm)
Apply Loctite 262
Forward
X
Assembly View - Cast Rear Wheel
LH (Disc)
FORWARD Apply Victory All Purpose Grease
Metal Stem
45 in-lbs
(5.0 Nm)
RH (Sprocket)
O-Ring
Slot
0 - 1mm (0 - .040) 0 - 1mm (0 - .040)
Seal Seal
Disc Side Sprocket Side
Snap Ring
Bearing seated Bearing seated

in hub against spacer
Cutaway View From Rear
Assembly View - Billet Rear Wheel
LH (Disc)
FORWARD Apply Victory All Purpose Grease
Slotted Metal Stem

45 in-lbs
(5.0 Nm)
O-Ring
RH (Sprocket)
No Slot
Metal Stem - No Slot

See Chapter 14 for installation
12 in-lbs
(1.35 Nm)
Seal Washer
0 - 1mm (0 - .040) Disc Sprocket
M8 x 1.25 M12 x 1.75 No Slot
Sprocket Side Bearing 13

seated against spacer
Seal Seal
Clean all threads and hub mating

Snap Ring surfaces. Apply Loctite262 (Red).
Torque in pattern below.
Disc Side Bearing Billet: 55 ft-lbs (75 Nm)
seated in hub Ness Billet: 65 ft-lbs (88 Nm)
4 2
Do not disassemble wheel to No Loctite on hub
replace bearings. See wheel mating surfaces.
bearing replacement procedure.
1 5
3
Hub Torque Pattern
ASSEMBLY VIEW, SPOKED REAR WHEEL
FORWARD
Apply Victory All Purpose Grease
RH (Sprocket)
Bearing
Seal
Spacer
Seal
LH (Disc)
Bearing
Snap Ring
Cutaway View From Rear
Disc Side Sprocket Side
REAR WHEEL SERVICE

Rear Wheel Removal
Both sides
Both sides
Fig.1 Platform jack
WARNING
Rear wheel removal involves supporting the machine with the rear end elevated. Take precautions so that the
motorcycle is securely supported while the rear tire is off the ground. Severe personal injury or death can occur if the
motorcycle tips or falls.
1. Secure motorcycle in a stand with straps (Fig. 1). 3. Remove the lower shock bolt and lower pushrod bolts
(B) from the swingarm.
2. Place a platform jack (A) under the engine. Elevate the
motorcycle enough to take the weight off the rear
wheel, but still leave the wheel touching the platform.
NOTE: Muffler removal is not required.
13
4. Raise the motorcycle high enough to gain access to the

axle nut. Remove axle nut.
5. Using a soft-faced mallet, tap axle to the right until
retaining plate is clear of the swingarm and remove
A plate.
6. Remove axle from right side of swing arm.
NOTE: Axle adjuster nuts do not have to be loosened or
removed, however, belt tension and alignment must be
inspected after assembly.
7. Elevate the motorcycle until the swingarm shock Rear Axle Inspection
mount is raised a minimum of 12 inches (305 mm).
1. Place rear axle in V-blocks and measure runout.
Compare to service limit on page 13.3
2. Axle diameter should be measured on bearing

surfaces at (D).
18 X 1.5 thread 19.97 - 19.99 mm
12” (305mm)
D
8. Remove the drive belt-side wheel spacer and
disengage drive belt from rear sprocket.
9. Remove rear caliper carrier assembly from swing arm.
CAUTION
Do not allow rear brake caliper brake line or wheel Rear Wheel Inspection
speed sensor harness to hang or twist, damage may
result. NOTE: Wheel bearings must be in good condition.
10. Secure brake caliper assembly to swing arm with tie 1. Set up a dial indicator to measure axial and radial
strap or support it so it does not hang by the brake line. runout of the wheel. Refer to Chapter 14 for
procedure. Compare measurements to service limits.
11. Remove rear wheel from left side of the motorcycle.
2. Visually inspect wheel for cracks or other damage.
NOTE: Do not apply rear brake pedal once the brake
caliper has been removed. 3. Replace wheel if it fails visual or measured inspection.
Rear Wheel Bearing Inspection Wheel Bearing Removal (Typical)
NOTE: If possible, also inspect wheel bearings before CAUTION

removing the wheel from the vehicle (Chapter 2). Do not
remove bearings from wheel to inspect. Bearings cannot Do not reuse bearings that have been removed.
be reinstalled. Replace both bearings if one or both fail
inspection, or if either bearing was removed. NOTE: These instructions depict typical procedures
to use the wheel bearing removal and installation
1. Visually inspect integral bearing seal for damage. tools. Also refer to instructions included with tool.
2. Inspect bearing fit in wheel hub. Outer race of bearing

must fit tightly in bore. 1. Remove wheel speed sensor tone ring and brake disc
(page 13.15).
3. Slide axle into wheel. Check for smooth rotation and
tight fit.
NOTE: Due to extremely close tolerances, the bearings
must be inspected visually, and by feel. Look for signs of
discoloration, scoring, galling, or contamination from
moisture or dirt. Replace bearings if any of the above are
present. Turn the inner race of the bearings. The bearings
should turn smoothly and quietly. The inner race should
be firm with minimal side to side movement and no
detectable up and down movement.
2. Remove sprocket (page 13.15).
13
WHEEL BEARING REMOVAL - TYPICAL (Cont.) 6. Remove bearing by tightening lower nut.
3. Protect hub. Pry seals out of hub on both sides.
7. Remove spacer.
4. Remove snap ring from disc side.
5. Install bearing remover element into bearing. Tighten 8. Extract or drive the opposite side bearing.
bearing remover until firm. Do not over-tighten or tool
may be damaged.
Wheel Bearing Installation (Typical) 5. Install the other 51mm bearing tool (F) in bearing bore
on right side of hub with flat washer and nut. Pull left
1. Clean inside of wheel hub and bearing spacer. bearing into hub by tightening nut on left side of tool
Replace spacer if worn beyond the service limit. until left bearing is fully seated in hub.
Standard: 171.30 - 171.50 mm (6.744 - 6.752)

Service Limit: Less than 171.30mm (6.744)
F
Cast, Billet and Spoked
Wheel Bearing Installation Set PV-43515

NOTE: DO NOT install retaining ring at this time.
2. Slide threaded rod from PV-43515 through wheel hub.
Place new wheel bearing (A) into left (disc) side of 6. Turn wheel over and install bearing spacer (G). Be sure
wheel with markings facing out (toward outside of hub). spacer is centered on bearing.
3. Assemble tool with flat side of 51mm wheel bearing

collar (B) against wheel bearing. This tool must be
slightly smaller than O.D. of bearing and must be flat
to support both inner and outer race equally. DO NOT
pull or press on inner race of ball bearings or bearing
G
will be permanently damaged!
4. Install tool bearing (C), washer (D), and nut (E) on

threaded shaft.
13
E D C B A
7. Assemble tool through left side with backing disc (or 12. Remove tool and check that the spacer is centered and
bearing tool) flat against left bearing. Be sure the tool firmly trapped between bearing inner races. If it is not,
supports both inner and outer race. center it using the rear wheel axle and repeat Steps
9 - 11 to fully seat the bearing against spacer.
Left Side 13. Install snap ring. Be sure it is fully seated in groove.
8. Place new wheel bearing (H) on threaded shaft

(markings out) and start it squarely in the hub.
9. Install 51 mm wheel bearing installation tool with flat
side against bearing, followed by tool bearing, flat 14. Rotate inner races of bearings to check for free,
washer, and nut. smooth rotation.
15. Install new seals using a 52 mm seal driver.
H Right Side
1.5 mm (.059 in.)
Seal Depth
16. Install brake disc (page 13.15). Clean discs with

10. Keep the wheel positioned as shown to keep spacer
Victory Disc Brake Cleaner.
centered during installation of right bearing.
CAUTION
Do not allow brake cleaner to contact painted surfaces.
WARNING
Typical Wheel Assembly Shown
Grease or oil on the brake disc or pads will increase
stopping distance which could cause a loss of control
or a crash.
11. Pull bearing in to right side of wheel until seated against 17. Install rear sprocket (page 13.16).
spacer.
Brake Disc Removal

NOTE: Brake disc is installed together with ABS tone WARNING
ring. ABS tone ring is secured using 3 of 6 brake disc
bolts. Do not re-install brake disc screws. Use only new
Refer to Chapter 15 for disc inspection. screws which have a pre-applied locking agent.
1. Remove rear wheel (page 13.9).
2. Position wheel with brake disc facing up. Support

wheel so as not to damage the belt sprocket. 22 ft-lbs (30 Nm)
7. Install rear wheel (page 13.16).
Rear Sprocket Removal

3. Remove 3 screws securing ABS tone ring and discard.
1. Securely support rear of motorcycle off floor.
4. Remove and discard remaining brake disc screws.
5. Remove brake disc from wheel.
3. Remove sprocket bolts.
4. Remove rear sprocket from wheel.

Brake Disc Installation
13
1. Clean screw hole threads with Loctite Primer N.
2. Clean surface of wheel and brake disc with Victory

Brake Cleaner.
3. Install disc on wheel with part number facing OUT.
4. Move ABS tone ring into position for installation.
5. Replace screws with new screws which have pre-

6. Evenly torque brake disc retaining bolts to

specification.
=T
Brake Disc Mounting Bolts 22 ft-lbs (30 Nm)
Rear Sprocket Installation 4. Prepare the caliper for installation by slightly spreading
the brake pads. Place the caliper into position on the
1. Clean bolt threads in hub to remove all grease or oil brake disc. Verify caliper bracket tab (A) inserts into the
residue. slot on the left inside of swingarm once you start to
lower it into position.
2. Clean mating surfaces of wheel and sprocket.
3. Tighten nuts in a star pattern to specified torque. Apply Victory All

Purpose grease
4. Install sprocket and new sprocket bolts.
5. Torque bolts in a star pattern to specified torque.
6. Install rear wheel (page 13.16).
Replace Bolts
71 ft-lbs
(95 Nm)
TORQUE PATTERN
Rear Wheel Installation

1. Place rear wheel into position underneath the wheel
well.
2. Install the rear wheel spacers in their correct locations.

Long spacer on sprocket side and short spacer on disc
side of wheel.
3. Verify that the rear sprocket is aligned into the belt

guard and install the drive belt. Verify the teeth are
engaged completely on both the front and rear
sprockets.
5. Using the platform jack, lower the swingarm over the 11. Torque rear axle nut to 65 ft-lbs (88 Nm).
wheel assembly while guiding the brake caliper, belt
adjusters and wheel spacers into alignment. 12. Inspect lower shock mount spherical bearing and
spacers. Inspect lower pushrod bushing. Replace
worn parts using bushing / bearing tool PV-49060.
13. Lower the motorcycle with the platform jack until the
shock eyelet (arrow) is aligned with the spherical
bearing in the swingarm. Install spacers on each side
of spherical bearing. Align parts and install bolt with nut
on the inside. Torque nut to 60 ft-lbs (81.4 Nm).
6. Apply a thin film of grease to axle surface.
7. Insert axle through right side swingarm and axle

adjuster, right spacer, and into wheel. Push axle
through entire wheel assembly, left wheel spacer, left
axle adjuster, caliper carrier and swingarm leaving
enough room to slide axle retaining plate into groove
on right end of axle. (wheel alignment marks on plate
facing OUT).
14. Continue to lower the motorcycle with the platform jack
8. Tap or pull axle toward left side until plate is engaged until the lower shock pushrod eyelet is aligned with the
in swingarm. Install washer and axle nut on left side of swingarm. Install bolt with nut on the inside. Torque the
axle (if removed). nut to 60 ft-lbs (81.4 Nm).
13
65 ft-lbs (88 Nm)
9. Verify the tab of caliper bracket is still engaged in slot

on left side of swingarm.
15. Adjust belt tension and wheel alignment (Chapter 2).
10. Tighten axle nut until seated and back off one full turn.
Tap axle forward on each side to be sure adjuster nuts
are seated against swingarm.
16. Apply rear brake pedal 2-3 times to re-set brake pads.
firmly against the disc. You should feel firm resistance
when applying pressure to the brake pedal. If pedal
feels spongy, verify proper assembly of rear wheel and
caliper bracket. I correctly assembled, bleed brake
system as described in Chapter 15.
17. Rotate the rear wheel and check for smooth rotation
without brake drag. If drag is evident, verify brake pedal
clearance is within specified 1-2mm range. (Ch. 15)
18. Inspect wheel speed sensor air gap and adjust if

necessary.
19. Lower the motorcycle and test drive to ensure proper

operation.
REAR SHOCK
Rear Shock Service Data
The rear shock is not serviceable. Use dry compressed air or Victory Air Pump and Gauge (2876654 or PV-48909)
to pressurize the shock. Set ride height by performing air pressure adjustment (see Chapter 2).
Do not store the shock horizontally. If left horizontal for a period of time, cycle shock at least 10 times in upright
position before installation.
DO NOT EXCEED 72 PSI operating pressure.
Shock Air
DO NOT EXCEED 110 PSI when filling. Line Routing
54 ft-lbs
13
(73.0 Nm)
Eye-to-eye
free length:
325.3mm
(12.8 in)
60 ft-lbs
(81.4 Nm)
60.0mm
Rear Shock Removal 5. Lower the inner rear fender (B) and detach shock air
line and vent hose from plastic clips.
WARNING
Shock absorber removal involves supporting the
machine with the rear end elevated. Take precautions so
that the motorcycle is securely supported while the rear
tire is off the ground. Severe personal injury or death can B
occur if the motorcycle tips or falls.
1. Secure the front tire in the wheel vise of a motorcycle

table lift and stabilize with tie-downs.
2. Remove seat, both side covers, and both saddlebags

(Chapter 3).
3. Place a wide-based platform jack under rear of engine.

6. Disconnect purge valve lines (C), purge valve
Elevate the jack slightly until weight is removed from
connector (D), flasher harness (E) and detach fuse box
rear wheel, but tire still contacts the table surface.
(F) from right subpanel.
D
F
4. Remove lower shock and push-rod bolts (A) from 7. Remove jam nut (G) securing air valve to subpanel and
swingarm. cut tie strap (H). Withdraw air valve from subpanel.
A G
8. Remove subpanel. 12. Remove upper shock bolt (J) from rocker assembly.
9. Remove the rear rocker shaft stop bolt (I).

J
13. Remove rear shock and rocker assembly separately.

10. Using platform jack, raise frame to provide enough
room to access upper push-rod and shock bolts.
13
11. Remove rocker shaft and lower the shock assembly
through the hole in swingarm far enough to access
upper shock bolt.
Rear Shock And Rocker Inspection 8. Inspect pivot mechanism and shaft. Bearing needles
should turn freely and be free of corrosion or
WARNING contamination. Thrust bearings should be free of
cracks or wear. Inspect surface of shaft for roughness,
The rear shock absorber is air pressurized and is not galling or uneven surface. Replace rocker and shaft as
rebuildable. DO NOT attempt to disassemble or service an assembly if either is worn or rough.
the shock.
Needle Bearings
1. Inspect shock for signs of oil seepage around the

shock body. If leakage is suspected replace the shock
absorber assembly.
2. Inspect eyelets (A) for cracks or damage. Replace

shock if either eyelet is cracked.
Seals
Thrust
A Bearings
9. Assemble shock, rocker arm, and push-rod assembly.

Torque upper fasteners to 54 ft-lbs (73 Nm). Torque
lower fasteners to 60 ft-lbs (81.4 Nm).See page 13.5.
=T
Shock & Push-rod To Rocker Arm:
54 ft-lbs (73 Nm)
A 10. Inspect lower push-rod spherical bearing and spacers.
11. Inspect spherical bearings (B) and spacers (C) for

3. Clean shock thoroughly. wear. Replace worn parts before installing shock and
push-rod. Use PV-49060 to remove and install
4. Inspect for corrosion, pitting, or damage. Replace bearings. Follow instructions provided with tool.
shock if any of the above is evident. Replacement can be performed with swingarm
installed.
5. Depressurize the shock.
NOTE: A slide hammer puller can be used to remove
spherical bearings. Installation requires PV-49060.
6. With shock upright, cycle through entire travel range.
Shock should move smoothly with consistent damping
through the entire travel range, and return to the fully Use PV-49060
B
extended position when released. Replace shock
assembly if damping is inconsistent, oil leakage has
occurred, or if the damper rod does not fully extend
when released.
7. Inspect shock spring for cracks or coil distortion.

Measure free length and compare to specification.
Shock Absorber Installation 4. Lift the shock / rocker assembly into position and install
the rocker shaft and stop bolt. Torque the stop bolt to
1. Grease rocker shaft and needle bearings with Victory specification.
All Purpose Grease (2872187).
2. Position shock in swingarm so that the lower shock 18 ft-lbs (24.5 Nm)
mount drops through the hole in the swingarm, and
move rocker / push-rod assembly into position.

CORRECT
Shaft seated firmly

against front bolt
3. Attach shock to rocker arm and torque bolt to
specification.
INCORRECT
Rear bolt could contact

shaft when installed.
FRONT Shaft not seated.

13
54 ft-lbs (73 Nm)
5. Lower the motorcycle slowly with the platform jack 8. Route air line in fender channel and secure the loop (B)
making sure the lower shock and push-rod bolt holes in the upper detent.
line up properly with the swingarm.
B
Nut
84 in-lbs
(9.5 Nm)
6. Install lower push-rod and shock bolts and torque to

specification.
Cutaway View
60 ft-lbs (81.4 Nm)
7. Secure air line and vent hose in clips (A) of inner rear
fender (debris flap).
9. Lift debris flap into position and engage top tab (C) in SWINGARM SERVICE
slot (D) of frame.
Swing Arm Removal
D
WARNING
Swingarm removal involves supporting the machine with
the rear end elevated. Take precautions so that the
motorcycle is securely supported while the rear tire is off
the ground. Severe personal injury or death can occur if
the motorcycle tips or falls.
1. Secure front tire in the wheel vise of a motorcycle

C
table lift.
2. Remove seat, both side covers, and both saddlebags

10. Route air line fitting between fender and frame on right (Chapter 3).
side.
3. Place a wide-based platform jack under rear of engine.
11. Lift bottom edge of inner fender up and push it forward Elevate the jack slightly until weight is removed from
until corner tabs (E) are engaged with notches in the rear wheel.
frame. Do not push lower tabs past the frame notches.
Be sure the top tab is still properly engaged on top of
rear frame opening.
13
E
4. Loosen left muffler crossover pipe clamp and left
muffler with shields attached.
12. Install subpanel and reconnect purge valve lines,
purge valve connector, flasher harness and fuse box. 5. Remove left passenger footrest bracket and remove
brake line guide from swingarm.
13. Route the air line fitting through the hole in the right
sub-panel, install nut and torque to 84 in-lbs (9.5 Nm).
14. Install seat, side covers and saddlebags. (Chapter 3)
15. Bounce test suspension to check for proper operation

before test ride.
6. Remove right muffler shield (A) and right muffler. 11. Loosen right (driver) footrest mounting bolts to gain
clearance at head pipes.
8. Loosen front exhaust head pipe flange nuts (B) and

remove rear head pipe flange nuts.
9. Remove lower head pipe fasteners (C) and loosen

clamp (D).
12. Pull head pipe outward and slide passenger footrest

bracket off swingarm pivot shaft.
13. Remove swingarm pivot shaft nut and washer (F).
D C
F
10. Remove right passenger footrest bracket fasteners

(E).
14. Push swingarm shaft out from right to left.
15. Remove swingarm.
Swing Arm Bushings / Bearing Replacement 5. Support the inside left edge of the swingarm pivot on
a pressing surface.
1. Remove sleeve (A) from right side of swingarm.
2. Remove seals (B) and bearing (C) from right side of Apply Victory All
Purpose grease
swingarm.
A
C
E
D
B
6. Grease outside surface of new bearings (F) and press
into bore until seated, using a 41.5mm drive adaptor
or a suitable arbor. Press on the OUTER RACE only.
3. Remove bushing (D) from left side of swingarm.
7. Install snap ring (E) and be sure it is seated properly
in groove.
CAUTION
8. Install bushing (D) into left side of swingarm. Left side
Do not reuse bearings that have been removed. bearings are pre-lubricated. Do not apply grease to this
bushing.
4. Remove snap ring (E) and drive bearings (F) out from
inside to outside. 9. Support inside right edge of swingarm.
10. Grease surface of a new bearing (C) and press into

bore until centered. Use a 31.5mm drive adaptor or a
suitable arbor.
13
11. Apply grease to inner lip of seals (B) and install seals
flush with outside of swingarm.
E A
C
D
12. Grease right side bearing sleeve (A) and install with a
twisting motion until centered in the seals and bearing.
Swing Arm Installation 10. Move swingarm through travel range to be sure it
pivots smoothly and freely.
1. Clean inside of pivot shaft bore in frame (A).
11. Replace rear brake line clamp to left side of swingarm
and torque screw to 8 ft-lbs (10.8 Nm).
12. Install shock and pushrod to swingarm. Install bolts

from outside to inside and install nuts. Torque nut side
of fastener to 54 ft-lbs (73 Nm).
A 13. Install rear wheel assembly (page 13.16).
14. Raise rear of motorcycle again and check to make sure

that the following applies:
• The rear wheel turns freely, without any
interference between the belt guard, the tire, and
2. Grease swingarm pivot shaft (B). the swingarm.
3. Apply Loctite 262 (Red) to threads on left end of shaft • Brake line is properly routed and secured.
and install left side nut (C) until outer surface is even
• The left and right axle adjusters are aligned
with end of shaft.
properly (wheel is in alignment).
4. Install washer (D) onto shaft. • The rear brake functions properly. It is critical that
the peg on the caliper mount rides inside the
5. Place swingarm assembly with bearings, seals, and channel in the swingarm. If brake pedal does not
bushings installed into position on frame. feel firm refer to Chapter 15 for brake inspection
and bleeding procedure.
6. Install pivot shaft from left to right. Be sure right-hand
sleeve (E) is in place and does not get pushed out of • All fasteners have been tightened correctly.
swingarm when shaft is installed.
• There is adequate clearance between swingarm
and exhaust mufflers and mounting.
7. Install right side washer (F) and nut (G) hand tight.
• The swingarm is not loose, it doesn’t wobble from
Apply Victory All
side to side, and it doesn’t move up and down when
Purpose grease pushed and pulled firmly.
B
E 15. Test ride motorcycle to be sure rear suspension
F operates smoothly without binding or abnormal noises.
16. Adjust air pressure for rider weight and load (see
Chapter 2). DO NOT EXCEED 72 PSI operating
pressure.
G
65 ft-lbs (88.7 Nm).
D
24 in-lbs
(2.7 Nm). C
8. Torque LEFT side nut to 24 in-lbs (2.7 Nm).
9. Torque RIGHT side nut to 65 ft-lbs (88.7 Nm).
TROUBLESHOOTING
Troubleshooting
Rear Wheel Feels “Loose” or Wobbles Low tire pressure Inflate to specification
Worn or damaged wheel bearings Replace wheel bearings
Worn or damaged swing arm, rocker, Replace bushings or bearings
pushrod, or shock bushings/bearings.
Damaged or incorrect rear tire Replace rear tire
Unbalanced rear wheel assembly Balance tire/wheel
Distorted (bent) rear wheel Replace wheel
Loose swing arm, axle or suspension Torque to specifications
fasteners.
Rear Suspension Bent / corroded shock damper rod Replace shock
Too Hard Dry, seized, damaged, corroded Correct as necessary
suspension bushing(s) / bearing(s)
Incorrect preload adjustment Adjust to rider & load
Damaged, dry, or corroded swingarm, Lubricate or Replace
rocker, pushrod, or shock bushings,
bearings, or shaft
High tire pressure Deflate to specification
Drive belt adjustment too tight Adjust drive belt tension
Rear Suspension Shock leaking air / oil Replace shock / repair line leak
Too Soft Weak shock spring Replace shock spring
Incorrect air pressure adjustment Adjust to rider & load
Excessive load placed on motorcycle Educate rider / operator
Low tire pressure Inflate to specification
Rear Suspension Loose fasteners Torque to specifications
13
Noisy Worn wheel bearings Replace
Worn swing arm, rocker arm, pushrod, Replace
or strut bushing / bearings
Damaged shock absorber Replace as necessary
Check all swingarm, wheel, and
brake system components for contact
Contact between moving and
with frame, exhaust, body, etc. Check
stationary parts
routing and the all fasteners are in
place and tight
Rear Wheel Drag (Turns Hard) Incorrect drive belt adjustment Adjust drive belt tension
Tire contact with object or chassis Determine point of contact and correct
Bent rear axle Replace
Damaged wheel bearings Replace
Brake problem Refer to chapter 15
NOTES
TIRES / WHEELS
CHAPTER 14
TIRES / WHEELS
GENERAL / SAFETY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.2
WARNINGS / PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.2
TIRE DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.3
TIRE PRESSURE / LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.3
WHEEL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.3
WHEEL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.3
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.3
TIRE INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.4
TIRE WEAR PATTERNS & GENERAL CAUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.4
OZONE CRACKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.4
FRONT TIRE CUPPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.4
TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.5
TIRE REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.6
WHEEL INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.7
VISUAL INSPECTION & RUNOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.7
TIRE REPAIR PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.8
VALVE STEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.8
TIRE VALVE AND STEM INSPECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.8
VALVE STEM INSTALLATION - RUBBER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.8
VALVE STEM INSTALLATION - METAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.8
TIRE INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.9
TIRE BALANCING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.11
SPOKED WHEEL OFFSET MEASUREMENT AND ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.13
SPOKED WHEEL OFFSET ADJUSTMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.14
WHEEL TRUING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.14
FINAL TIGHTENING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.15
WHEEL LACING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.15
SPOKE MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.17
14
TIRES / WHEELS
GENERAL / SAFETY
Warnings / Precautions
WARNING
If a consumer wishes to replace the Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires with another brand of tire, Victory
recommends contacting the tech-line department of the tire manufacturer being considered to ensure compatibility.
Victory makes no other recommendation other than the OEM tires. Tires other than OEM may or may not adversely
affect the handling characteristics of the motorcycle or may not have adequate clearance between tire and various
parts of the motorcycle.
WARNING
Victory motorcycles are produced using the designated tires listed as original equipment. This includes field testing
to ensure stability and superior handling. The use of tires other than original equipment may cause instability which
can lead to a crash resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the recommended tires inflated to the recom-
mended tire pressures.
Operating the motorcycle with damaged rims creates a safety hazard including air pressure loss, steering imbal-
ance and/or reduced steering control. Do not attempt to repair or straighten damaged rims.
The use of tire valves and valve cores other than original equipment replacement Victory parts could cause tire
deflation during driving. Always use genuine Victory parts or their equivalent. Be certain to install the valve stem
caps securely. Do not allow the motorcycle to be ridden without properly installed valve stem caps.
WARNING
Do not attempt to repair tires that have:
- Punctures with a diameter of greater than 6mm (0.240").
- Cuts with a length of greater than 6mm (0.240").
- Any punctures or cuts on the sidewall of the tire.
- Tread depth of less than 1.6mm (.063") for the front tire.
- Tread depth of less than 1.6mm (.063") for the rear tire.
- Ply separation
- Tread separation
- Severe tread cupping.
- Cuts, gouges or scratches on the sealing surface of the bead.
- Flat spots on the tread.
- Bubbles, separation or any unusual damage to the inner liner of the tire.
- Chemical sealants or balance additives added to the tire.
WARNING
All repairs must be made from inside the tire. Victory recommends the use of “head-type” plugs such as: Tech Tire
RepairTM Uni-Seals. Complete Tech Tire RepairTM kits are commonly available at most automotive parts outlets.
WARNING
No form of temporary repair should ever be attempted. Secondary damage caused by a penetrating object may not
be detected and tire or tube deflation may occur at a later date.
TIRES / WHEELS
WARNING
It is dangerous to ride with a worn tire. When a tire reaches the minimum tread depth listed below, replace
the tire immediately.
FRONT TIRE MINIMUM TREAD DEPTH REAR TIRE MINIMUM TREAD DEPTH
1.6 mm (.063") (1/16 inch) 1.6 mm (.063") (1/16 inch)
CAUTION
Two of the biggest factors contributing to premature tire wear are overloading and under-inflation. Do not deviate
from the specifications for loading or inflation.
TIRE DATA
Tire Pressure / Loading
Refer to page 2.10 or to the decal on the motorcycle for tire pressure and loading information.
WHEEL DATA
Wheel Specifications
Refer to Chapter 12 (Front Wheel and Suspension) or Chapter 13 (Rear Wheel and Suspension) for wheel
specifications.
SPECIAL TOOLS
Special Tools
Rim Protectors: PV-43536
Tire Irons (for manual tire changing): Commercially available

14
TIRES / WHEELS
TIRE INSPECTION
Tire Wear Patterns & General Causes
WEAR PATTERNS AND GENERAL CAUSES
SYMPTOM CAUSE
Wear on Left Side Riding on Crowned Roads
Edges Worn Underinflation or Excessive Loads
Excess Wear in the Middle of Tire Over-inflation or Tire Abuse
Cracks in Tread Grooves Underinflation, Excessive Loads, Suspension Bottoming
Tread Block Cupping (Usually Front Tire -See Below) Normal Braking Wear
Ozone Cracking
Ozone cracking usually shows up on the sidewalls of tires and is caused by sunlight, electric motor emissions, smog,
or other environmental factors. Ozone cracking does not pose a problem unless the cracks reach the cords. If this occurs,
moisture may penetrate the carcass of the tire causing cord separation. Tires showing signs of severe ozone cracking
(cords visible at the bottom of the cracks) must be replaced.
Front Tire Cupping

Front of tread block worn more than rear of tread block:
• The cupping of front tires is somewhat normal.
• Rear tires are subjected to forces in both directions. The forces of braking and acceleration result in even tire
wear.
• Front tires are subjected only to the forces of braking. When the brakes are applied, tire deflection is increased
and wear occurs in only one direction.
• Incorrect tire pressure is the number one cause of excessive tire cupping. Too little tire pressure causes the tire
to over-deflect which increases the amount of scrubbing and causes more tire cupping.
• Binding or improperly assembled front forks can also contribute to excessive tire cupping. If the front forks do
not react as they should the tire acts as the sole suspension component and tread deflection increases.
TIRES / WHEELS
TIRE CHANGING
General
There are three generally acceptable methods to dismount and mount a tubeless motorcycle tire from its rim. For each
of the three methods, there are countless variations.
The three general methods are:
• Pneumatic or electrically operated tire machine

• Manually operated tire machine
• Manual manipulation of tire irons
The seal between the tire and rim is one of the most critical factors that contribute to the safe operation of the wheel/
tire assembly. Victory permits and recommends all three of the general methods, but realizes that careless or improper
work habits can damage both the tire and rim no matter which method is used. With any of the methods, care must still
be taken to avoid damaging the rim., tire, inner tube, brake disc or sprocket.
The pneumatic or electrically operated tire machine is preferred because it is the most efficient method to dismount and
mount tires.
The manually operated tire machine method is the next preferred method. It can be just as efficient as a power assisted
tire machine but with some of the machines it may be necessary to remove the belt driven sprocket in order to gain
sufficient clearance for tire removal.
Manual manipulation is the least preferred method since it will generally not deliver the same efficiency as the other
methods and greater care needs to be taken when performed. Care must be taken when using tire irons to not damage
or stress the tire bead. Also, the opposite bead needs to be in drop center of the wheel during mounting and dismounting
of the tire.
The following method describes the procedure using manually manipulated tire irons. Other than the actual operation
of various tools, the general concept is the same regardless of which method is used.
The following procedure shows the front tire being removed from its rim. Other than the possibility of interference of the
sprocket, the procedure is the same for the rear tire.
NOTE: Rear sprocket bolts and brake rotor bolts have a pre-applied locking agent and bolts should either be replaced
or a locking agent applied upon assembly. Refer to Chapter 11 for rear sprocket removal and installation. Refer to
Chapter 13 for rear brake rotor removal and installation. Brake rotor bolts should not be re-used. 14
TIRES / WHEELS
TIRE REMOVAL NOTE: This procedure can be performed on an empty

drum or similar fixture. The top lip of the drum should be
Tire Removal (Typical) covered with protective material or split hose to protect
the rim. (Fig. 3)
1. Remove wheel / tire assembly from motorcycle (front
refer to Chapter 12, rear refer to Chapter 13).
Fig. 3
Fig. 1 5. Position wheel assembly so brake disc will not be

damaged and rim will not be scratched.
2. Remove valve core from valve stem and let all air
escape. (Fig. 1) 6. Push tire down and lubricate tire bead with tire lubricant
on both sides of tire. (Fig. 4)
CAUTION
If the tires have a directional arrow it must be observed
and the tire installed correctly.
3. Mount the wheel assembly into a tire bead breaker and

break the bead. (Fig. 2)
Fig. 4
7. Install rim protectors at 12:00 and 2:00 positions.

(Fig. 5)
PV-43536
Fig. 2
4. Flip the wheel assembly over and break the bead on

the other side.
CAUTION
IMPORTANT: Take great care not to bend or otherwise
damage the brake disc and/or belt driven sprocket. If the
bead breaker being used interferes with either the brake
disk and/or belt driven sprocket, remove the disc or
Fig. 5
sprocket as required.
Rim protectors PV-43536
TIRES / WHEELS
8. Stand opposite of rim protectors. Use your knee to WHEEL INSPECTION

push tire bead down into the rim’s drop center at
location (Fig. 6, A) while pulling bottom bead up into Visual Inspection & Runout
drop center. Beads must be kept in drop center during
following steps. 1. Refer to chapter 12 for complete front wheel
inspection procedures.
9. With both beads in the drop center, slide a tire iron
between tire bead and 12 o’clock rim protector (Fig. 6, 2. Refer to chapter 13 for complete rear wheel inspection
B), lift the bead up with the tire iron, and hold. procedures.
3. Clean the rim of all rubber particles and corrosion.
B WARNING
A
If any of the following problems are discovered, replace
the wheel.
4. Inspect wheel for cracks and/or distortion.

5. Inspect bead seating area of scratches, gouges,
distortion or any damage that could create a sealing
problem.
Fig. 6
6. Inspect wheel for axial runout, measured on the inner
10. Using another tire iron to lift the bead at the 2 o’clock bead-sealing surface of wheel as shown in Fig. 7 (B).
position.
7. Measure wheel for radial runout Fig. 7 (A).
11. Remove the 2 o’clock tire iron and slide rim protector
to the 4 o’clock position, and lever the bead up.
IMPORTANT: The top and bottom tire beads that are
opposite the area being worked with the tire irons must
continually be pushed into the drop center of the wheel, or
bead removal will be difficult and tire could be damaged.
12. Continue going around the tire in small steps, until one
side of the tire is off the rim.
13. Turn the tire and wheel assembly over on the drum, so
the removed bead is on the bottom side. Fig. 7
TUBE TYPE TIRES: NOTE: Measure runout on the inside tire bead sealing 14
surface of wheel. Be sure surface is clean before
Remove valve stem nut, push stem through rim. measuring
Remove tube and inspect tube carefully for signs
of abrasion or other damage. 8. Compare measurements of axial and radial runout to
specifications listed on page 14.3. Replace wheel if
Replace tube and rim band whenever a tire is
any measurement exceeds Service Limit. Cast or Billet
removed.
wheels cannot be straightened.
14. Push the tire away from you so the remaining bead is 9. Clean the sealing surfaces of the rim thoroughly. Use
in the drop center of the rim. a soft brush (nylon) soap and water if necessary.
15. Lubricate the bead and start it over the rim with a tire
iron. WARNING
16. In most cases the tire can be forced off of the rim by
hand. Continue to work around the tire until the tire is Do not scratch or damage sealing surfaces of rim. Loss
completely dismounted. of air pressure can cause a loss of control and an
accident, resulting in serious injury or death.
TIRES / WHEELS
Tire Repair Precautions Valve Stem Installation - Metal

1. Remove tire from wheel and remove old stem.
WARNING 2. Clean gasket or O-ring seal surface of wheel.
Only permanent plug-patch repairs of small tread area 3. Place tire valve (with seal washer or O-ring installed)
punctures from inside the unmounted tire are through hole in rim and secure it hand tight with nut.
recommended. Never perform an exterior repair and 4. Refer to Fig. 10. On Type 2 valve stems (with no
never use an inner tube as a substitute for a proper holding slot) tighten upper nut (A) to stem cap (B).
repair. Speed should not exceed 50 MPH for the first 24
hours after repair and the repaired tire should never be 5. Hold nut (A) to prevent valve stem rotation, and torque
used over 80 MPH. Inspect inflation pressure after the lower stem nut (C) to 12 in-lbs (1.35 Nm) using an open
tire cools for at least three hours following initial end torque wrench.
operation.
6. Release upper nut from cap and screw it down against
stem nut.
VALVE STEM 7. Hold stem nut and tighten lock nut to 12 in-lbs (1.35
Nm).
Tire Valve And Stem Inspection
1. Remove and inspect valve core (Fig. 8). Replace if
seal is worn, deformed or otherwise damaged. Inspect
tire valve for cracks or visible damage and replace if
necessary.
NOTE: Valve stem replacement is recommended when
tire is being replaced.
Valve Stem Installation - Rubber TYPE 1 TYPE 2

1. Remove tire from wheel and cut valve stem with a
diagonal cutter to remove. TYPE 1 (HOLDING SLOT)
2. Clean tire valve hole and sealing area thoroughly.
3. Lubricate tire valve and hole with P-80 rubber lubricant
or equivalent.
45 in-lbs
4. Place tire valve into hole and screw a tire valve (5.0 Nm)
installation tool (commercially available) onto valve.
5. Place a small wood block (B) against the rim to improve
leverage point and keep the pulling angle as straight
as possible. (Fig. 9)
6. Pull the valve (A) until fully seated and remove tool.
Fig. 8
TYPE 2 (NO HOLDING SLOT)
A B
C
B 12 in-lbs
A (1.35 Nm)
Fig. 9
Fig. 10
TIRES / WHEELS
TIRE INSTALLATION The wheel assemblies must be free of foreign debris that
would affect balancing.
Tire Mounting Carefully inspect the wheel bearings, seals and axle for
1. Lubricate both tire beads with rubber lubricant. damage or corrosion.
(Fig. 11). Ensure that bead is correctly seated.
TUBE TYPE TIRES:
Install new rim band (rim flap) on rim with hole
oriented over valve stem hole in rim.
1. Place tire on drum.
CAUTION
Support tire assembly in such a way that brake disk or
belt drive sprocket will not be damaged.
Fig. 11 2. Lubricate the bead.
WARNING 3. Orient tire correctly as to the balance dot and

directional arrow.
Never apply grease, oil, gasoline, spray type lubricants
or anything other than rubber lubricant or a neutral soap 4. Push tire on to rim until one bead is installed. It
and water solution to the tire bead. Doing so can shouldn’t be necessary to use tire irons to put one side
damage the tire. of the tire onto the rim. Remember to keep bead(s) in
the drop center of the wheel whenever possible.
Balance Dots
5. Turn the tire / wheel over on the drum so the un-
Dunlop tires have a yellow dot on the sidewall which installed portion of tire is facing up.
corresponds to the lightest part of the tire. This dot is meant
to line-up with the tire valve which often is the heaviest part NOTE: Confirm tire is positioned correctly by observing
of the rim (although this is not always the case). directional arrows. (Fig. 12)
WARNING
Victory does not recommend the use of liquid balancer/

sealers. These are a form of temporary repair which
14
may adversely affect ply material and mask secondary Valve Stem
damage caused by the penetrating object. Reliance
upon sealants can result in sudden tire failure and
accident.
Directional Arrows Directional Arrow: Balance Dot: Align

Corresponds to tire with valve stem
If tires have directional arrows, they must be observed and rotation direction.
tires installed correctly. When tires are manufactured, tread
rubber is laid down as a strip and its ends connect as Fig. 12
overlapping joints. When the tire is mounted correctly the
scrubbing forces of acceleration (rear) or braking (front)
press the lap joints together rather than try to separate the
joint.
TIRES / WHEELS
6. For tube type tires, also observe the following: 15. Bounce tire on the floor several times while rotating
tire. This will expand tire bead outward slightly which
Tube Type Tires: will make tire inflation easier. (Fig. 13)
Apply baby powder to new (deflated) tube and install by

inserting valve stem through the rim band and rim.
Install and turn the valve stem lock nut a few threads, but
do not tighten at this time.
Install the tube in the tire starting at the valve stem and
working around until the entire tube is laying inside the
tire in a natural position.
Arrange the tube, if necessary, to remove kinks or

bends, making sure that the valve stem projects straight
out and forms a 90 degree angle with the rim. Fig. 13
Tighten the lock nut by hand to hold the stem in position. 16. Inflate tire observing the precautions listed below and
on page 14.10.
CAUTION Tire Inflation & Precautions

Make sure your tire irons are smooth and free of • Wear approved eye protection.
scratches or any sharp edges. Polish them if necessary.
Do not slide the tire iron in any more than is necessary. • Lubricate the tire beads with a tire mounting
When installing tube type tires, avoid lifting the tire iron lubricant before inflation.
past vertical to minimize the chance of pinching the
• Before inflating a tube type tire, check to be sure
tube.
valve stem is still straight. If not, rotate tire slightly
7. Lubricate the tire bead. on rim (in the direction the stem is pointing) to align
(Fig. 14).
8. With your hands, push as much of the remaining tire
bead as possible into the rim, pinching both upper and
lower beads into the drop center.
9. When no more of tire can be installed by hand, press
down on portion of tire in front of you with your knee to
keep the top bead in the drop center.
10. Carefully slide a tire iron between the rim and tire at the
other side of the un-installed portion of the tire.
NOTE: Be sure both beads are forced as far as
possible into the drop center of the rim. Valve Stem Alignment (Tube Tires)
Fig. 14
11. Lever the tire iron over and install that portion of tire.
Continue to move tire iron in small increments until tire • Lock assembly on mounting machine or place in
is completely installed. safety cage before inflating to seat beads.
12. Install valve core if it was removed. • Use extension gauge and hose with slip-on air
13. Line up balance dot. chuck.
• Stand back with no part of your body within the
14. Confirm that the directional arrows are pointing in the perimeter of the assembled tire and rim.
correct direction.
• Inflate with core in valve stem.
• Never inflate above 42 psi to seat beads.
TIRES / WHEELS
1. Inspect the line molded onto the tire side walls. It must TIRE BALANCING
be the same distance from the rim all the way around
the tire. If the distance varies it indicates that tire is not Tire Balancing
seated properly. (Fig. 15)
WARNING
It is essential that the wheel assembly be balanced

Tire Molding Line before use and rebalanced each time the tire is
removed.
Wheel balance affects stability, handling and overall

safety of the motorcycle.
All Dunlop street tires should be installed with the yellow
Edge of Run
balance dot at the tire valve.
Fig. 15
The use of liquid balancer/sealer is not recommended.
2. If tire is not seated correctly, deflate and unseat the tire, This procedure will outline balancing wheel assembly in a
relubricate the tire beads and repeat inflation gravity balance stand. If a pendulum or spin type balancer
procedure. is being used, reference the manufacturer’s instructions
3. Install wheel assembly onto balance stand and spin. that came with the equipment.
Observe the wheel assembly while it is spinning to 1. Mount wheel assembly in a balance stand.
make sure the tire is seated properly.
Typical Balance Stand (Commercially available)
4. Adjust tire pressures to specifications. (Fig. 16)
5. Balance tire / wheel assembly. Refer to page 14.11.
WARNING
FOR REPAIRED TIRES: Speed should not exceed 50

MPH for the first 24 hours after repair and repaired tire
should never be used over 80 MPH. Inspect inflation
pressure after tire cools for at least three hours follow-
ing run-in.
FOR NEW TIRES: Replacement of OEM tires or

14
replacement with differently constructed tires will not Fig. 16
immediately produce improved reactions the same as
the original tires when new. When new tires are 2. Remove all balance weights. Clean tire and rim
installed, they should not be subjected to maximum thoroughly.
power or hard cornering until a reasonable “scrub” NOTE: While it is possible to balance a wheel assembly
period of approximately 100 miles has been covered. with axle and grease-free wheel bearings as the pivot
This will permit the rider to become accustomed to point, it is not recommended. Use an inspection stand
“feel” of new tires or tire combination, and achieve that has knife edge bearings and its own axle.
optimum road grip. 3. Spin the wheel assembly. Allow it to stop on its own and
mark the highest (lightest) part of the wheel.
Inspect and adjust tire inflation pressure after tire cools
down for at least three hours following “run-in”.
TIRES / WHEELS
4. Repeat the spinning process to verify the heaviest part 8. Install wheel / tire assembly tire on motorcycle.
of the wheel. (Fig. 17)
Front wheel installation: Chapter 12
Rear wheel installation: Chapter 13
Mark lightest
part of tire
CAUTION
Do not add more than 85 grams (3.0 oz.) of weight to
the rear wheel.
Do not add more than 85 grams (3.0 oz.) of weight to

the front wheel
1. Spin tire.
2. Allow tire to stop If more than the recommended weight is necessary to
on its own. balance the wheel, dismount the tire and rotate it 90o
3. Mark lightest without regard to the yellow balance dot, and re-balance
part of tire the wheel / tire.
Fig. 17 Adhesive Weight P/N 1520253
NOTE: If the bearings are totally free to rotate and the
wheel does not stop in the same place each time, the
wheel is in balance.
5. Place balance weights at the lightest portion of wheel
in small increments. (Fig. 18)
Add small amounts

of weight to the
lightest part of the
rim.
Fig. 18
6. After each addition of weight, spin the wheel assembly

and allow it to stop by itself.
7. When correct amount of weight has been added to

wheel, it will no longer stop in the same location and
the wheel assembly is balanced.
TIRES / WHEELS
SPOKED WHEEL OFFSET MEASUREMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
EXAMPLE CALCULATION
14
EXAMPLE CALCULATION
TIRES / WHEELS
Spoked Wheel Offset Adjustment NOTE: Axial runout is side to side movement
(wobble) of the rim. Radial runout is the up and down
1. Lay a straight edge on the brake disc mounting movement (hop) of the rim.
surface and measure the offset distance to outermost
edge of rim (A).
2. If the offset measurement is too large, loosen spokes

on the opposite side of the rim and tighten spokes on
the measurement side to decrease the wheel offset.
Reverse this process to increase wheel offset.
3. Initially tighten spokes in 3 steps to the specified torque
while maintaining distance A. This is a starting torque
only. Final torque is listed on page 4.14
=T
Initial Spoke Torque: 69 in-lbs (8 Nm)
4. Place straight edge on disc mounting surface and

measure to edge of rim. Verify that wheel offset is
correct after tightening spokes.
NOTE: All spokes must be loosened or tightened the
same amount to maintain minimum axial and radial
runout.
Wheel Truing
1. Inspect wheel offset as outlined on page 4.12 before
truing the wheel
2. Measure axial and radial runout.
TIRES / WHEELS
3. First, adjust radial runout by loosening spokes around WHEEL LACING

any high spots, rotate wheel 1/2 turn and tighten
spokes directly opposite the high spot. Wheel Lacing
4. Adjust axial runout. NOTE: If an assembled wheel is available it can be
NOTE: It’s important to work slowly and make referenced for proper spoke pattern.
adjustments in small increments. Alternate between
radial and axial adjustments until runout is within 1. Before disassembly, select a “starting spoke” and
make index marks at its anchor points on the hub and
specification.
rim. This will help ensure the spokes are installed and
grouped correctly upon assembly.
Final Tightening
1. Using tape, divide wheel into four quadrants to
perform final spoke torque sequence. Tighten each
spoke equally. (Tightening Sequence 1,3,2,4)
=T
Final Spoke Torque: 69 in-lbs (8 Nm)
2. Maintain proper runout adjustment during final

tightening of spokes.
2. Organize 20 inside spokes and nipples on a clean work

surface. Lubricate spoke threads and rim nipple-holes
with a light oil.
14
TIRES / WHEELS
Offset Measurement
TIRES / WHEELS
3. Using the index marks from step one, insert all inside SPOKE MAINTENANCE
spokes skipping one hole between each.
WARNING
Spokes that have been improperly installed or

adjusted could distort the wheel and result in a loss
of vehicle control.
Maintenance - Check Wheel Spokes

If your motorcycle is equipped with spoked wheels, inspect
both wheels for loose, bent, broken or missing spokes. To
identify loose spokes, grasp each spoke and try to move it
side to side or up and down. All spokes should be equally
NOTE: Inside spokes are not installed directly across tight and have the same amount of flex. Tighten loose
from each other on the different hub flanges. Install spokes or replace bent, broken or missing spokes.
inside spokes on the opposite flange one hole to the
right or left.
Inspect spokes after first 500
miles, then again every 5,000
4. Lay rim in position around the hub assembly making miles.
sure the valve stem hole and spoke index marks are
correctly located.
14
5. Thread the “starting spoke” into the corresponding
nipple and continue to thread inside spokes until they
are all finger tight.
6. Install outside spokes and screw on nipples. Work your
way around the wheel, installing spokes on alternate
sides of wheel. Continue until all spokes and nipples
are installed. Tighten nipples equally by hand.
7. With all nipples installed, evenly snug all nipples using
a spoke wrench. Tighten until one thread shows above
each nipple. Work your way around the wheel
tightening spokes equally.
8. Place wheel assembly onto a truing stand for rim offset
adjustment, final spoke tightening and wheel truing of
wheel.
TIRES / WHEELS
TROUBLESHOOTING
Troubleshooting
Rear Wheel (Wobbles) Bent rim Replace
Worn or damaged wheel bearings Replace as a set
Worn or damaged swing arm Replace as a set
bushings.
Damaged or incorrect tire Replace rear tire
Wheel assembly out-of-balance Balance wheel
Low tire pressure Inflate to specification
Loose swing arm, axle or suspension Torque to specification
fasteners.
Handlebars Oscillate (Wobble) Bent front axle Replace
Tire mounted incorrectly Inspect and re-mount tire
Damaged tire Replace
Loose steering stem nut Adjust to specification
Incorrect tire Replace
Incorrect tire pressure Inflate to specification
Front Wheel Oscillates (Wobbles) Bent rim Replace
Damaged or incorrect tire Replace
Loose axle or axle pinch bolts Torque to specification
Right and left fork not installed at Repair
same height
Fork oil level incorrect Fill to specification
Fork spring free length different Replace spring that does not meet
between right & left specification
Wheel assembly out-of-balance Balance wheel
BRAKES
CHAPTER 15
BRAKES
BRAKE SYSTEM SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.2
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.4
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.4
ABS SYSTEM SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.4
ABS GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.4
ABS SYSTEM COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.5
ABS OVERVIEW OF OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.5
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.6
FRONT BRAKE (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.6
REAR BRAKE (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.7
MASTER CYLINDERS / ASSEMBLY VIEW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.8
ABS MODULE / ASSEMBLY VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.9
WHEEL SPEED SENSOR - FRONT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.10
WHEEL SPEED SENSOR - REAR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.11
FRONT BRAKE CALIPERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.12
REAR BRAKE CALIPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.13
ABS SYSTEM CIRCUIT DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.14
ABS SYSTEM SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.15
WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.15
WHEEL SPEED SENSOR AIRGAP ADJUSTMENT (FRONT & REAR) . . . . . . . . . . . 15.15
ABS MODULE SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.16
ABS BRAKE SYSTEM BLEEDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.17
BRAKE FLUID REPLACEMENT & BLEEDING PRECAUTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.17
ABS BRAKE VACUUM BLEEDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.18
ABS FLUID CHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.18
ABS REAR BRAKE BLEEDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.18
ABS FRONT BRAKE SYSTEM BLEEDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.19
BRAKE LEVER RESERVE INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.20
BRAKE SYSTEM SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.21
FRONT BRAKE PAD REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.21
REAR BRAKE PAD REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.23
BRAKE DISC INSPECTION (FRONT & REAR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.25
FRONT MASTER CYLINDER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.25
FRONT MASTER CYLINDER INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.28
FRONT CALIPER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.29
FRONT CALIPER SERVICE (CONT). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.30 15
FRONT CALIPER INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.31
REAR MASTER CYLINDER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.32
REAR MASTER CYLINDER INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.35
REAR CALIPER SERVICE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.35
REAR CALIPER INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.37
ABS TROUBLE CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.38
BRAKE SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.39
ABS SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.41
BRAKES
BRAKE SYSTEM SAFETY

General
Use only genuine VICTORY replacement parts when servicing the brake system. Clean all system components prior
to disassembly, including the fluid reservoir cover(s) to reduce the chance of debris entering the system during repair
or maintenance work. Start with a clean work area away from dust, water or other contamination. Cleanliness is very
important for proper brake system maintenance and repair. Follow procedure outlined in this manual carefully,
including fastener torques and the application of special lubricant in required areas. Special lubricants are included
with service kits.
WARNING
Contaminated brake discs or pads greatly reduce the amount of stopping force available & increase stopping distance.
Brake discs can be cleaned using a commercially available brake disc cleaner. Follow the manufacturer instructions
printed on the container. NEVER attempt to clean contaminated brake pads. Always replace pads as a set.
WARNING
The brake system uses ethylene-glycol based fluid (DOT 4). Do not use or mix with different types of fluid such as
silicone-based (DOT 5) or any petroleum-based fluid.
Do not let water or moisture enter the master cylinder when refilling. Water significantly lowers the boiling point of the
fluid and can result in poor braking.
Do not use brake fluid taken from old, used or unsealed containers. Never reuse brake fluid.
Keep brake fluid containers completely sealed and out of reach of children.
Brake fluid should be completely replaced every 24 months or 12,500 miles.
Brake hoses should be replaced whenever the exterior shows signs of deterioration or damage. Brake hoses should
be replaced every four (4) years regardless of their exterior condition.
Bleed the brake system any time it is disassembled or when the brake action is spongy.
Always inspect the operation of the brakes before riding the motorcycle.
Replace sealing washers whenever brake lines are removed.
Always remove the master cylinder fluid reservoir cover and inspect the fluid level when brake pads are replaced.
NOTICE: Brake fluid and some types of brake cleaners will damage paint, plastics and some rubber compounds.
Cover or remove plastic and painted parts before working on the brake system. If brake fluid is spilled on cosmetic
surfaces, immediately rinse the area with a mild solution of soap and water until all traces of brake fluid are removed.
Make sure the master cylinder reservoir being worked on is level and clean before removing the cap.
BRAKES
SPECIFICATIONS
General Specifications
BRAKE SYSTEM
Specified Brake Fluid DOT 4 Replace every 24 months or 12,500 miles
Brake Disc Thickness, Front 5 mm 4.5 mm (.177") (Min)
Brake Disc Thickness, Rear 7 mm 6.5 mm (.256") (Min)
Brake Disc Runout - .30 mm (.012") (Max)
Brake Pad Wear Limit (Front & Rear) - When wear limit groove is no longer visible
Brake Pedal Free Play (Pedal Clearance) Floorboards: 1 - 2 mm (.040 - .080") -
Brake Lever Freeplay (Front) No Adjustment -
Wheel Speed Sensor Air gap (ABS) 1 mm (±.25 mm) -
Lever Reserve Specification (Front) 35 lbf (lever adjusted to position 5) clearance present between lever and grip
Pedal Travel Specification (Rear) 45 lbf applied to pedal results in maximum travel of 31 mm
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Brake System Torque Specifications
Refer to the assembly views in this chapter for components not listed here.
Torque ft-lbs (in-
Description Torque N-m NOTES
lbs)
Bleed Screw, Caliper (Front and Rear Caliper) 5.4 N-m (48 in-lbs)
Brake Pad Retaining Pin (Front and Rear Caliper) 17.0 N-m 12.5 ft-lbs
Footrest Support to Frame 47.5 N-m 35 ft-lbs
Front Brake Caliper to Fork Leg 42 N-m 31 ft-lbs
Loctite 242 (Blue)
Front Brake Caliper Body Screws 27 N-m 20 ft-lbs
E12 Reverse TORX
Front Brake Disc to Wheel Hub 30 N-m 22 ft-lbs See Chapter 12
Front Brake Lever Pivot Screw 1.0 N-m (9.0 in-lbs)
Front Brake Lever Pivot Screw Nut 6.0 Nm (52 in-lbs)
Front Brake Light Switch Screw 1.2 N-m (11.0 in-lbs)
Front Brake Line Banjo Bolt (All) 24.5 N-m 18 ft-lbs
Front Brake Master Cylinder to Handlebar 10.8 N-m (96 in-lbs) Tighten rear screw first
Front Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir Cover
Rear Brake Disc to Wheel Hub
1.5 N-m
30 N-m
(14 in-lbs)
22 ft-lbs See Chapter 13
15
Rear Brake Line Banjo Bolt (All) 24.5 N-m 18 ft-lbs
Rear Brake Master Cylinder Mounting Screws 10 N-m (84 in-lbs)
Rear Brake Pressure Switch to Manifold 13.5 N-m 10 ft-lbs
Rear Brake Pressure Switch Manifold to Battery Box 11 N-m (96 in-lbs)
Rear Brake Reservoir Mounting Screw 11 N-m (96 in-lbs)
ABS Tone Ring to Brake Disc 30 N-m 22 ft-lbs
ABS Module Bracket to Chassis 10.8 N-m 8 ft-lbs
ABS Module to Bracket 10.8 N-m 8 ft-lbs
BRAKES
SPECIAL TOOLS
Brake Service Special Tools
Front Master Cylinder Snap Ring Pliers . . . . . . . . . . Commercially Available
Caliper Piston Pliers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Commercially Available
Front Brake Lever Reserve Inspection Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PV-50104
Vacuum Brake Bleeder (not required). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Commercially Available
Pressure / Vacuum Pump (not required). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PV-43545
Wheel Speed Sensor Shim Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2204661
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) • The anti-lock braking system does not compensate
for or reduce the risk associated with:
ABS System Safety Precautions
• excessive speed
Before working on a Victory motorcycle equipped with anti-
lock brakes, review and understand all general brake • reduced traction on rough, uneven or loose
system and brake fluid precautions on page 15.2, and the surfaces
following ABS specific precautions and system
• poor judgement
information. Do not attempt maintenance or repair of the
anti-lock brake system without the proper tools. • improper operation
Troubleshooting specific to ABS is on page 15.41.
ABS General Information
WARNING The Anti-Lock Brake System is a safety feature designed

to prevent wheel lock-up and improve control of the
Proper brake system bleeding is extremely important to motorcycle during extreme braking events, including:
ensure adequate lever reserve in the system. Always • Panic braking
perform the Brake Lever Reserve test described in this
• Slick surface braking (such as wet road surfaces)
manual after bleeding the anti-lock brake system.
• Surface transitions (from asphalt to oily asphalt or
• Operating with non-recommended tires or improper cobblestone, etc.)
tire pressure may reduce the effectiveness of the
Here are a few general points to note about ABS:
anti-lock brake system.
• The anti-lock brake system cannot be turned OFF.
• Always install the recommended size and type of • The ABS indicator lamp (located on the Instrument
tires specified for the vehicle. Cluster) always illuminates when the key is in the
ON position and remains on until the anti-lock
• Always maintain the recommended tire pressure.
system activates, which occurs when vehicle speed
• Victory DOT 4 Brake Fluid is recommended. exceeds 6 mph (10 kph).
Change every 2 years or more often if • If the lamp is not illuminated when the key is ON,
contaminated. connect Digital Wrench and perform an ABS
System inspection to determine the cause.
• The anti-lock brake system will not prevent wheel
lock-up, loss of traction, or loss of control under all • When the ABS lamp is illuminated, the anti-lock
conditions. Always adhere to all safe motorcycle- brakes will not activate, but the conventional brake
riding practices as recommended. system will continue to operate normally.
• It is not unusual to leave tire marks on the road • If the lamp continues to illuminate after the vehicle
surface during a hard braking event. speed exceeds 6 mph (10 kph), the system is not
functioning. Connect Digital Wrench and perform
an ABS System inspection to determine the cause.
BRAKES
• When the anti-lock brakes engage during a braking • ABS Related Wiring
event, the rider will feel pulsing at the brake lever or
• ABS Indicator Lamp
pedal. Continue to apply steady pressure to the
brakes for the best stopping performance. ABS Overview Of Operation
• The wheel speed sensor-to-pulse ring air gap is
The ABS system is active and available when vehicle
adjustable. Shims can be added or removed to
speed exceeds 6 mph (10 kph).
bring the air-gap into specification. See adjustment
procedure outlined in this chapter. The system uses two independent Hall-Effect Wheel
• The ABS system is not re-programmable. Speed Sensors. One sensor is mounted to the front left fork
leg and one is mounted to the rear brake caliper bracket.
• The ABS light is controlled by the ECM via CAN BUS. Two Pulse Rings are also used, one mounted to the left
• Diagnostic codes are unique to ABS and can only front brake disc hub and one to the rear brake disc hub,
be viewed with Digital Wrench. ABS Trouble Codes which rotate with the wheels. When the vehicle is in motion,
will not appear on the Instrument Cluster display as the multiple reluctor segments on each pulse ring pass by
an SPN / FMI code. the center pole of the respective wheel speed sensor,
generating an electrical pulse signal in the sensor which is
• Wheel speed sensors are used only for ABS. The sent to the ABS Module which is located under the rear
Vehicle Speed Sensor is used for vehicle speed. fender.
• If fuse is open or removed, ABS light will remain
ON after 6 mph (10 kph). ABS will not be active. The ABS Module interprets wheel speed signal pulses to
Normal (conventional) braking will be available determine speed, rate-of-change, and front / rear wheel
provided the system components (master cylinder, speed differential to determine if wheel lock-up is about to
lines, calipers, etc.) are in working order. occur. When wheel lock-up is imminent during a braking
event, the ABS Module controls the operation of solenoids
and a pressure pump (located inside the ABS Module) to
ABS System Components
regulate the amount of line pressure and cycles (length of
The following parts function in the same manner as the time) applied to the caliper pistons and brake pads. This
same component in a non-ABS system, although parts are pressure / time modulation can often be felt at the brake
not necessarily interchangeable. Always refer to the lever or the brake pedal during an ABS braking event and
appropriate ABS parts information when replacing a is a normal condition. Note that the brake fluid is not
component or component parts. Refer to the non-ABS diverted inside the module and does not “flow” in the
portion of this chapter for removal, installation, operational system any more than occurs in a conventional (non-ABS)
overview, and repair of these components. Refer to brake system.
page 15.6 for ABS System Component Diagram.
If the surface coefficient changes (such as moving from wet
• Front Brake Calipers pavement to dry pavement) the ABS system will
recalculate (in a matter of milliseconds) and adjust
• Rear Brake Caliper pressure output to caliper(s) as required.
• Front Master Cylinder
• Rear Master Cylinder
In the event of a system fault, the ECM turns on the ABS
indicator lamp (via the CAN BUS) and leaves it on even
15
• Brake Light Switch after vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph (10 kph) activation
speed.
• Brake Lines
If a system fault occurs, the light will remain on (and ABS
In addition to the brake system components listed above,
will not be active) until the ignition key is turned to OFF
the following are used on ABS equipped vehicles:
position and back to ON.
• Wheel Speed Sensors (Front located on front left The ABS Module Assembly is serviceable only as an
fork leg; Rear mounted on rear caliper bracket) assembly. The module itself is not rebuildable.
• Wheel Speed Sensor Pulse Rings (Front and Rear
Disconnect negative (-) battery cable from battery before
mounted to wheel with 3 disc bolts)
servicing ABS brake lines or system components.
• ABS Module Assembly
BRAKES
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM OVERVIEW

Front Brake (ABS)
BRAKES
Rear Brake (ABS)
15
BRAKES
Master Cylinders / Assembly View
BRAKES
ABS Module / Assembly View
15
BRAKES
Wheel Speed Sensor - Front
BRAKES
Wheel Speed Sensor - Rear
15
BRAKES
Front Brake Calipers

This symbol indicates special lubricant from Refer to assembly views and rebuild procedure
Brake service kit must be applied to this part. for detailed application of special lubricants.
Brake
KS62F
CCI OIL (009-Z00-313) Brake
Application: Internal: Caliper pistons.

SILICONE GREASE (009-Z00-111) KS62F
Application: Internal: Caliper piston seals,
piston dust seals.
External: O-ring at tip of pad retaining pin.
Brake
O-Ring
LH CALIPER SHOWN (009-Z00-111)
Piston Seal
Brake
Brake
(009-Z00-111)
Piston Dust Seal
Apply special assembly OIL
FRONT (009-Z00-313)
(included with parts kit)
Pad Spring
Bleeder Screw
48 in-lbs (5.4 Nm)
Clean all grooves
Brake
Inner Pad
(009-Z00-111)
Outer Pad
Brake
Piston
(009-Z00-313)
Piston Seal Dust Seal

Brake Brake
Caliper Body Bolt (009-Z00-111) (009-Z00-111)
20 ft-lbs (27 Nm)
Pad Retaining Pin Loctite 242 (Blue)
120 in-lbs (13.5 Nm) E12 Reverse TORX
BRAKES
Rear Brake Caliper
This symbol indicates special lubricant from

Brake service kit must be applied to this part.
KS62F
Brake
SILICONE GREASE (009-Z00-111) KS62F

Application: Internal: Caliper piston seals,
piston dust seals. External: O-ring at the tip of the
brake pad retaining pin.
Brake CCI OIL (009-Z00-313)
Application: Internal: Caliper pistons.
Pad Retaining Pin Brake
120 in-lbs (13.5 Nm)

Bleeder Screw SPECIAL GREASE (009-Z00-115)
48 in-lbs (5.4 Nm) Application: External: Rear caliper guide pins / boots.
O-Ring
Brake
Boot Guide Pin Refer to assembly views and rebuild procedure

(009-Z00-111) for special oil and grease application
Brake Brake
(009-Z00-115) (009-Z00-115)
Piston Seal
Brake
Dust Seal
(009-Z00-111)
Brake
(009-Z00-111)
Pad Spring
Clean all grooves
15
Piston
Brake

(009-Z00-313)
Pads
Pad Backing Plate
Must not protrude past
edge of pad
Boot and Pin
Brake
Pad Guide Plate
Pad Insulator (009-Z00-115)
BRAKES
ABS System Circuit Diagram
BRAKES
ABS SYSTEM SERVICE Removal - Rear

1. Remove left hand saddlebag as outlined in Chapter 3.
Wheel Speed Sensor Service
2. Remove bolt (A) securing the Wheel Speed Sensor to
Removal - Front the bracket.
1. Remove bolt (A) securing the Wheel Speed Sensor to
bracket.
A
3. Withdraw speed sensor and remove any existing
shims.
2. Withdraw speed sensor and remove any existing 4. Remove left hand side cover as outlined in Chapter 3
shims. to access speed sensor plug, and disconnect.
3. Remove headlamp assembly as outlined in Chapter 3 Installation - Rear
to access speed sensor plug, and disconnect.
• Cross Country speed sensor connector is 6. Verify speed sensor air gap is within specification.
located behind the headlamp assembly. Refer Perform adjustment procedure if necessary.
to Chapter 3 for headlamp removal.
• Cross Roads speed sensor connector is Wheel Speed Sensor Airgap Adjustment
located in headlamp bucket. Refer to Chapter 3 (Front & Rear)
for disassembly.
Installation - Front = In. / mm.

5. Verify speed sensor air gap is within specification. Wheel Speed Sensor Air gap = .040” (± .010”) /
Perform adjustment procedure if necessary. 1 mm (± .25 mm)
15
IMPORTANT: Wheel Speed Sensor air gap is adjusted
by adding and removing shims. Shims are added to
increase gap and removed to decrease gap. No more
than 3 shims (per Wheel Speed Sensor) should be
used at one time.
BRAKES
1. Using a suitable feeler gauge, measure the air gap ABS Module Service
between the ABS Pulse Ring and the Wheel Speed
Sensor. NOTE: Do not disassemble the ABS module. The
ABS module is serviceable only as a sealed (pre-
bled) assembly. If ABS module has failed internally,
replace complete assembly.
WARNING
The hydraulic brake system MUST be completely
bled following removal or replacement of the ABS
module. Follow the brake bleeding procedure
outlined in this chapter after ABS module service.
Removal
.040” (±.010”)
1mm (± .25 mm) 1. Remove saddlebags. (Chapter 3)
2. Remove trunk if applicable. (Chapter 3)
2. If the Wheel Speed Sensor air gap is out of 3. Remove rear fender. (Chapter 3)
specification, proceed to step 3. 4. Disconnect hydraulic lines (4) from ABS module and
3. Remove Wheel Speed Sensor from bracket. cap off lines to prevent contamination.
4. Withdraw the speed sensor and remove any existing 5. Remove screws securing ABS module to bracket and
shims. disconnect multi plug.
5. Based on air gap measurement, add or remove shims 6. Remove ABS module.
to achieve the specified air gap.
Installation
2. Bleed brake system as outlined in this chapter.
3. Attach Digital Wrench and check for ABS trouble
codes.
6. Reinstall Wheel Speed Sensor and torque to

specification.
=T
Wheel Speed Sensor: 8 ft-lbs (10.8 Nm)
BRAKES
ABS BRAKE SYSTEM BLEEDING

Brake Fluid Replacement & Bleeding Precautions
WARNING
Contaminated brake discs or brake pads greatly reduce braking performance and increase stopping distance. Do not
attempt to clean contaminated pads. Replace them. Clean the brake disc with brake cleaner.
WARNING
This brake system requires ethylene-glycol based fluid (DOT 4). Do not use or mix different types of fluid such as
silicone-based or petroleum-based.
WARNING
Do not use brake fluid taken from old, used or unsealed containers. Never reuse brake fluid. Brake fluid can
accumulate moisture, reducing it’s performance.
WARNING
Brake fluid is poisonous. Keep brake fluid tightly sealed and out of reach of children.
WARNING
A soft, spongy feeling in the brake lever and/or brake pedal could indicate a hazardous condition in the brake system.
Do not operate the motorcycle until the failure in the brake system is corrected.
WARNING
An unsafe condition exists when air is trapped in the hydraulic brake system. Air in the brake hydraulic system acts
like a soft spring and absorbs a large percentage of the pressure developed by the master cylinder. Without this
pressure, the braking system cannot develop full braking force to allow for safe, controlled stops. It is extremely
important to bleed the brakes properly after any brake system work has been performed or when inspection reveals
spongy brakes.
Keep these points in mind when bleeding hydraulic • Small amounts of air can become trapped in the
brakes: banjo bolt fittings at the master cylinder(s) and
junction points of brake lines. These fittings can be
• The master cylinder reservoirs have limited purged of air by following a standard bleeding
capacities. It is easy to empty them during the
bleeding procedure. This introduces air into the
procedure at these fittings (instead of the bleed
screw on caliper) if necessary to speed the
15
system which you are trying to purge. Watch the bleeding process. This is usually only needed if
reservoir closely and add fluid when necessary to system was completely drained of fluid. Bleed each
keep the level above the LOW mark and prevent air line connection, starting with the fitting closest to
from re-entering the system. the master cylinder, working toward the caliper, and
• Apply only light to moderate pressure to the lever or ending with the bleed screw.
pedal when bleeding the brake system. Extreme
• Always torque banjo bolts and other brake system
pressure or rapid movement will cause a surge of
fasteners and components to specified torque.
fluid through the small orifices of the brake system
when the bleeder screw is opened and could • Always install NEW genuine Victory replacement
introduce air into the system by means of parts and rubber parts upon assembly. Apply
cavitation. special lubricant where indicated (included in
service kits).
BRAKES
ABS Brake Vacuum Bleeder ABS Rear Brake Bleeding

A vacuum bleeder is recommended for ABS system NOTE: The use of a vacuum bleeder is
bleeding and can also be used to bleed conventional (non- recommended. DO NOT allow fluid level in reservoir
ABS) brake systems. One style of bleeder is shown below. to drop below the LOW mark at any time during the
bleeding procedure.
Pressure / Vacuum Pump PV-43545 can also be used as NOTE: Repeat entire bleed procedure at least once.
a vacuum source.
1. Remove rubber cap from rear caliper bleed screw (A)
and place a box end wrench on the screw.
2. Attach a tight-fitting clear hose from the vacuum
bleeder to the bleed screw and apply vacuum.
Commercially Available
ABS FLUID CHANGE

Review Brake Fluid Replacement and Bleeding
Precautions on page 15.17 before working with brake fluid.
NOTE: When bleeding or flushing the system, 3. Fill rear brake fluid reservoir and leave cover off so fluid
monitor fluid level in master cylinder reservoir can be added as it is drawn through the system.
constantly. DO NOT allow fluid level to fall below the
LOW level. 4. Open bleed screw about 1/4 turn.
Use only DOT 4 brake fluid from a sealed container. 5. Pump brake pedal repeatedly with smooth full strokes
while adding brake fluid to the reservoir as required.
NOTE: EMPTY LINES - If system is dry or very low on For best results pump the pedal at a fairly rapid rate
fluid due to parts replacement or disassembly, fill but avoid pumping too fast or fluid may become
reservoir and pump lever or pedal slowly through aerated. After about 2 cups of fluid have been run
stroke range until air bubbles no longer rise through through the system, the bleeder hose should have
the fluid into the reservoir. clear, bubble-free fluid running through it.
NOTE: FLUSHING THE SYSTEM - Brake systems 6. Close bleeder screw and fill the brake fluid reservoir.
should be flushed every 2 years or more often if the
7. Repeat the entire bleeding process to be sure all air
fluid is discolored. To flush the system, follow normal
is purged from the system.
brake bleeding process, and pump fluid through the
system until fluid moving through the bleeder hose is
clear. Do not allow reservoir level to fall below the
LOW level or complete system bleeding will be
required.
BRAKES
NOTE: A properly bled rear brake system should not ABS FRONT BRAKE SYSTEM BLEEDING
allow the brake pedal to travel more than 31 mm
(1.2”) with 45 lbf. (20.4 kgf) of force applied. NOTE: Bleed left front caliper first then right caliper.
NOTE: Repeat the bleeding procedure at least once.
1. Pull brake lever forward and rotate reach adjustment

dial to the “1” position (longest reach) to maximize
lever stroke for bleeding.
Position “1”
8. Torque all bleed screws to 48 in-lbs (5.4 Nm) and install

the rubber caps.
9. After completing the bleeding procedure a second

time, inspect brake fluid level and add if necessary.
10. Clean the reservoir cover, diaphragm, and reservoir

sealing surface. If diaphragm is extended, return it to 2. Remove front brake fluid reservoir cover and leave it
normal (flat) position. Install diaphragm and cover. off so fluid can be added as it is drawn through the
system.
11. If pedal is not firm, repeat bleeding procedure and
insect brake system. See Troubleshooting at the end 3. Remove rubber cap from bleeder screw on front left
of this chapter. caliper and place a box end wrench (A) on the screw.
4. Attach tight fitting clear hose from vacuum bleeder to
bleed screw and apply vacuum.
15
5. Hold lever to handlebar or hold firm pressure on lever,

then open bleed screw about 1/4 turn.
BRAKES
6. Pump brake lever repeatedly with smooth full strokes Brake Lever Reserve Inspection
For best results pump the lever at a fairly rapid rate but 1. Turn handlebars fully LEFT.
avoid pumping too fast or fluid may become aerated.
After about 2 cups of fluid have been run through the 2. On levers with adjustable reach, set lever reach to
system, the bleeder hose should have clear, bubble- position 5 (closest to handlebar).
free fluid running through it.
7. Close bleeder screw and fill the brake fluid reservoir.
8. Proceed to Step 9 to bleed the right front brake caliper.
9. Remove rubber cap from bleeder screw (A) on front

right caliper and place a box end wrench on the screw.
10. Connect vacuum bleeder hose to the bleed screw and 5

start vacuum.
3. Place grommet of Brake Lever Reserve Inspection

Tool PV-50104 on ball end of front brake lever.
Grommet
11. Hold lever to handlebar or hold firm pressure on lever, Scale end
then open bleed screw about 1/4 turn.
12. Pump brake lever repeatedly with smooth full strokes
For best results pump the lever at a fairly rapid rate but
avoid pumping too fast or fluid may become aerated. PV-50104
After about 2 cups of fluid have been run through the
system, the bleeder hose should have clear, bubble-
free fluid running through it.
13. Close bleed screw. 4. Connect a scale (commercially available) with a
14. Once both front calipers have been bled, repeat minimum of 25 kg / 50 lb capacity to end of tool.
procedure again on left caliper, then right to ensure all
air has been purged.
15. Fill fluid reservoir and install diaphragm and cover.
Torque screws to 13 in-lbs (1.5 Nm).
16. Perform Brake Lever Reserve Inspection on
page 15.20.
BRAKES
5. Keep tool centered so it does not touch hand grip. BRAKE SYSTEM SERVICE
Pull on scale to specified force.
Front Brake Pad Replacement
NOTE: Always replace brake pads as a set. Pads can
be changed with caliper installed on the motorcycle.
Hold handlebar forward Refer to page 2.16 for front pad inspection.
1. Remove brake pad pin (A).
A
Tool not touching grip
Front Brake Lever Reserve Pull Force

MODEL PULL FORCE (MINIMUM)
Cross Country, Cross
Roads, Cross 15.5 kg (35 lbs).
Country Tour 2. Push inward on spring (B) and remove pin. Note
orientation of sprint plate for assembly.
6. Have an assistant verify brake lever does not contact
hand grip. Clearance must exist at specified pull force
as shown.
Specified pull force
Clearance
15
3. Push each pad back toward outside of caliper by hand
or use a non-marring wedge to gain clearance for new
pads.
NOTE: Brake fluid will be forced back into the
7. If lever makes contact with hand grip or bar end, bleed
reservoir when pads / pistons are pushed back.
the front brake system (page 15.19).
Remove reservoir cover and monitor fluid level, or
8. See troubleshooting if bleeding problems persist. attach a hose to brake bleeder screw (as described in
Brake Bleeding on page 15.19) and open the bleed
screw while pushing the pads and pistons back.
BRAKES
4. Slide inner and outer pad out of the caliper. 9. Slide the outer pad into place with friction material
toward disc, align pin hole and star pin through pad to
hold it in place.
5. Wipe brake disc clean with a shop towel sprayed with

Victory Brake Cleaner. 10. Install inner pad with friction material toward disc.
6. Inspect caliper piston seals for any sign of fluid

leakage.
7. Install isolator on new brake pads. Be sure isolator

plate (C) does not protrude from the brake backing
plate.
11. Lay spring in place over pads and press on center arm
of spring (D) while sliding pin over the top of center arm.
8. Apply a small amount of Silicone Grease (009-Z00-

111) to O-ring on the end of the pad retaining pin.
D
BRAKES
12. Align hole of inner pad and push pin through until Rear Brake Pad Replacement
threads of pin contact the caliper. Center arm of spring
is below pin (E). Always replace brake pads as a set. The rear pads can be
changed with the caliper installed on the motorcycle.
Refer to page 2.16 for rear brake pad inspection.

12.5 ft-lbs (17 Nm)
Do not attempt to remove the caliper from the bracket with
E
bracket installed.
NOTE: Brake fluid will be forced back into the
reservoir when pads are pushed back. Remove
reservoir cover and monitor fluid level, or attach a
hose to the brake bleeder screw (as described in
Brake Bleeding on page 15.18) and open the bleed
screw while pushing the pads and pistons back.
1. Push caliper toward wheel to push pad and pistons
back and provide clearance for new pad installation.
13. Torque pin to 12.5 ft-lbs (17 Nm).
14. Inspect brake fluid in reservoir and set to proper level.
15. Slowly pump lever to set brake pads against disc.

Lever should be firm, not spongy. If lever is spongy,
inspect pad installation, bleed brake lines and inspect
brake disc. If lever is still not firm, refer to
Troubleshooting at the end of this chapter.
16. Install reservoir cover. Torque screws to 13 in-lbs (1.5

Nm).
17. Operate brake lever several times until lever is firm and
pressure can be felt. NOTE: The caliper should move freely on the guide pins.
2. Remove pad retaining pin (A).
WARNING
After pad installation or any brake system repair, safely
elevate wheel, apply and release brake pedal or lever 2-
3 times and release. Elevate wheel and verify wheel A
turns freely without drag. If brake drag is evident, do not 15
operate the motorcycle. Inspect vehicle to determine
cause and then repair as necessary.
BRAKES
3. Slide pads out front edge of rear caliper. 7. Apply Silicone Grease (009-Z00-111) to O-ring on pad
retaining pin.
8. Install new outer pad with friction material against disc.
Be sure tab is engaged with caliper as for inner pad.
4. Wipe brake disc clean with a shop towel sprayed with

Victory Brake Cleaner.
5. Be sure backing plate (B) is properly installed on new 9. Start pin in caliper. Align hole in outer pad (push pad
inner pad with insulating material (C) between brake inward against spring pressure) and push pin through.
pad and plate.
10. Align hole of inner pad and push pin through until
6. Slide pad into place with friction material against disc threads of pin contact the caliper.
and engage tab (E) in the back of the caliper. This can
be viewed from the right side (through the wheel).
No protrusion of insulator plate

from pad backing plate.
C E
B
Metal plate against floating side
of caliper (not against pistons).
12.5 ft-lbs(17 Nm )
11. Tighten the pin and torque to 12.5 ft-lbs (17 Nm).
12. Inspect fluid level in the reservoir and adjust as

necessary (page 15.17).
13. Pump brake pedal slowly several times to set new pads
against disc, until lever is firm and pressure can be felt.
14. Bleed brake system if necessary (page 15.18).
BRAKES
NOTE: Replace the brake disc if any measurement is

worn beyond the service limit.
WARNING 3. With disc mounted to wheel, inspect for runout or
warpage with a dial indicator and compare to
After pad installation or any brake system repair, safely specifications found on page 15.3. Runout should be
elevate wheel, apply and release brake pedal or lever measured 2-4mm in from outside edge of disc.
2-3 times and release. Verify wheel turns freely without
4. If runout is excessive, refer to Troubleshooting at the
drag. If rear brake drag is evident, inspect pedal
end of this Chapter. Replace brake disc if dial indicator
clearance as outlined on page 2.16. Do not operate the
reading displays excessive brake disc runout and other
motorcycle if drag is still evident after clearance
possible causes have been eliminated.
adjustment. Inspect vehicle to determine cause and
repair as necessary. 5. Refer to Chapter 12 for front brake disc removal and
installation. Refer to Chapter 13 for rear brake disc
Brake Disc Inspection (Front & Rear) removal & installation.
1. Visually inspect disc for cracks or damage.
2. Measure brake disc thickness in several locations Front Master Cylinder Service
around disc with a micrometer, and along wear surface
and compare to specifications found on page 15.3. NOTICE: Brake fluid and brake cleaners could
damage paint, plastics and some rubber compounds.
Cover or remove plastic and painted parts before
2 mm working on the brake system. If brake fluid is spilled
on cosmetic surfaces, immediately rinse the area
with a mild solution of soap and water until all traces
of brake fluid are removed. Be sure master cylinder
reservoir is level before removing cover.
Measure runout here IMPORTANT: Replace all rubber parts upon assembly.
1. Clean the master cylinder. Attach a drain hose to

caliper bleed screw and place the end in a suitable
container. Drain brake fluid from the front brake
system (each caliper on dual front disc models) by
slowly pumping brake lever.
2. Remove mirror (A).
Measure thickness at 4 points around

disc and 2 spots at each point. A
15
BRAKES
3. Disconnect front brake light switch wires at switch (B). 10. Slide piston out with spring. Note spring orientation for
assembly of new spring (new parts).
4. Remove switch (C) and brake lever nut (D), brake lever
pivot screw, lever and bushing.
5. Remove brake line from master cylinder (E).
6. Remove screws (F), clamp, and master cylinder.
11. Clean master cylinder with isopropyl alcohol and dry

with compressed air. DO NOT soak in alcohol for more
than 30 seconds. DO NOT aim pressurized air directly
E C D at the level sight glass.
F
12. Inspect bore (G) and chamfer of bore (H) for corrosion,
scratches, scoring, or pitting. Replace master cylinder
7. Remove reservoir cover and diaphragm. if any of these conditions are evident.
8. Pull dust boot off piston and out of cylinder bore.
9. Remove snap ring.

H
BRAKES
13. Measure the diameter of the bore. Replace master 15. Remove deflector (I) from reservoir.
cylinder if worn beyond the service limit.
Master Cylinder Bore Diameter
Service Limit: 15.913mm (.6265 in.) 16. Clean the compensating port (J) and supply port (K)
with compressed air to be sure they are clean and
unobstructed. Re-install the deflector.
14. Measure the diameter of the master cylinder piston in
two places as shown below. Replace piston if worn
beyond the Service Limit.
J K
17. Apply a light film of special lubricant from piston kit to

each piston seal cup.
15
Master Cylinder Piston Diameter
Service Limit: 15.72mm (.6189 in.)
BRAKES
18. Assemble spring to new piston assembly as shown 21. Be sure retaining ring is fully seated in the groove.
with small end to piston. Large diameter of beveled
edge on piston seals (L) face toward spring. Install a 22. Clean the bore from the retaining ring outward, so the
new retaining ring on end of piston with machined edge outer edge of the new dust boot adheres properly and
(sharpest of the two edges) facing out (M). will not dislodge from the bore.
23. Install new boot, seating the outer edge fully in the bore
L and engage outer lip of boot in piston groove.
24. Apply special lubricant from kit to brake lever contact

surface.
25. Install master cylinder on handlebar. See page 15.28.
Brake M Front Master Cylinder Installation

Apply special assembly oil Also refer to handlebar illustration on page 12.4.
to cups (included with parts kit)
1. Clean mounting surface on handlebar.
19. Carefully install spring / piston assembly into master 2. Loosely install master cylinder, clamp, and screws.
cylinder bore. Work the front piston seal carefully past Rotate clamp on handlebar until parting line of clamp
the chamfer and into bore. Use care not to damage or is aligned with parting line of right bar switch or position
fold the seal when working it past the chamfer. so top of reservoir is level with bars in the straight
ahead position.
20. Continue to install the piston until the rear seal is past
the chamfer. Push and hold the piston in far enough to 3. Torque rear clamp screw first then torque front screw
allow the retaining ring to be installed. to 80 in-lbs (9 Nm).
4. Connect brake hose to master cylinder with banjo bolt

and new sealing washers. Torque banjo bolt to18 ft-lbs
(24.5 Nm).
5. Install brake light switch. Torque screws to 11 in-lbs

(1.2 Nm). Connect switch wires.
6. Lubricate brake lever bushing with special lubricant

from kit and install lever. Torque pivot screw to 9 in-
lbs (1.0 Nm). Hold screw and torque nut to 52 in-lbs
(6 Nm).
7. Install mirror, adjust to proper angle, hold in position

and tighten nut securely.
Brake
BRAKES
8. Turn handlebars until top of reservoir is level. Fill Front Caliper Service
reservoir with Victory DOT 4 Brake Fluid and bleed the
front hydraulic brake system (see page 15.18). NOTICE: Brake fluid and brake cleaners will damage
paint, plastics and some rubber compounds. Cover or
remove plastic and painted parts before working on the
WARNING brake system. If brake fluid is spilled on cosmetic
surfaces, immediately rinse the area with a mild solution
of soap and water until all traces of brake fluid are
elevate the wheel, apply and release the brake pedal
removed. Make sure the master cylinder reservoir being
or lever 2-3 times and release. Verify the wheel turns
worked on is level before removing the cap. Replace all
freely without drag. If brake drag is evident, do not
rubber parts upon assembly.
operate the motorcycle. Inspect the vehicle to
determine the cause and then repair as necessary. IMPORTANT: Replace all rubber parts upon assembly.
Keep parts in order for assembly. The top and bottom
pistons in the caliper are not the same size.
1. Remove banjo bolt (A), sealing washers, and brake

hose from caliper assembly and allow it to drain into a
container.
2. Remove front caliper mounting bolts (B) and remove
the caliper.
B
A
3. Cover the end of brake line(s) to prevent debris from

entering.
15
4. Cover the brake hose connection on the caliper and
clean the outer surfaces of caliper assembly with
Victory brake cleaner or isopropyl alcohol. Dry with
compressed air.
BRAKES
Front Caliper Service (cont) 8. Keep parts in order for assembly in the same bore. Top
and bottom pistons (in each caliper half) have different
5. Remove brake pads. Pads contaminated with oil or diameters.
grease must be replaced as a set.
9. Remove each piston with a caliper piston pliers. If a
caliper piston pliers is not available, wrap the caliper
in a shop towel and apply short bursts of compressed
air through the brake line hole and through the transfer
passage to force the pistons out of the bore.
6. Remove the 4 caliper body bolts (A) using

an E12 reverse Torx socket (B).
10. Remove dust seals and piston seals. Use care not to
damage the seal bores.
B
11. Clean all parts thoroughly with isopropyl alcohol. Be
sure the seal bores are clean, removing all traces of dirt
or dried brake fluid.
12. Clean piston seal and dust seal bores (D) to remove
residue that could cause the pistons to stick, resulting
in brake drag.
7. Separate the halves. Note the O-ring (C) used to seal

the fluid passage. This O-ring must be replace along
with all rubber parts during assembly.
13. Inspect each piston bore for corrosion, scratches,

scoring, or pitting. Replace caliper if any of these
conditions are evident.
BRAKES
14. Measure the diameter of each caliper bore. Replace 18. Install piston seals and dust seals in caliper body.
caliper if any is worn beyond the service limit.
19. Install pistons in their respective bores.
Large bore Transfer Passage O-Ring

Disc rotation
Brake
FRONT
LH CALIPER
Small
bore
Apply special
assembly oil
(from kit)
20 ft-lbs (27 Nm)
Loctite 242 (Blue)
Front Caliper Bore Diameter
SERVICE LIMITS 20. Clean threads of each caliper body bolt. Be sure
Std Bore 30.23mm: Limit = 30.31mm (1.1933 in) threads are free from any oil, grease, or brake fluid.
Std Bore 33.96mm: Limit = 34.04mm (1.3401 in) Apply a few drops of Loctite 242 (Blue) non permanent
locking agent to the threads of each bolt.
15. Measure the outside diameter of each piston in two 21. Install a new O-ring on fluid transfer passage,
spots 90 apart, 5mm from outer edge. Repeat assemble halves of caliper and start (4) bolts while
measurement 5mm from inner edge. Replace piston if holding pressure on halves to keep O-ring in place.
worn beyond service limit at any measuring point. 22. Evenly tighten bolts by hand until halves are secured.
23. Torque bolts to 20 ft-lbs (27 Nm).
24. Install brake pads. Torque pin to 12.5 ft-lbs (17 Nm).
Front Caliper Installation

1. Clean mounting surfaces of caliper and fork leg.
2. Apply Victory brake cleaner or isopropyl alcohol to a
clean shop towel and wipe brake disc(s) clean.
3. Separate brake pads and install caliper assembly over
brake disc.
4. Install caliper mounting bolts. Torque to 31 ft-lbs
(42 Nm).
Front Caliper Piston Outside Diameter

5. Connect brake hose to caliper with banjo bolt and new 15
sealing washers.
SERVICE LIMITS
Std Size 30.15mm: Limit = 30.09mm (1.1846 in) 6. Fill and bleed the front brake hydraulic system
Std Size 33.91mm: Limit = 33.85mm (1.3327 in) (page 15.17).
WARNING
IMPORTANT: Install all new rubber parts during
assembly. Do not reuse old seals or boots. After pad installation or brake system repair, safely
elevate wheel. Apply and release brake pedal or lever
16. Apply special lubricant from service kit to new piston 2-3 times and release. Verify wheel turns freely without
seals and dust seals. drag. If brake drag is evident, do not operate the
motorcycle. Inspect vehicle to determine cause and
17. Apply special assembly oil (included in kit) to outer then repair as necessary
surface of all pistons.
BRAKES
Rear Master Cylinder Service 4. Remove reservoir hose clamps at master cylinder and
disconnect fluid supply hose.
NOTICE: Brake fluid and brake cleaners will damage paint,
plastics and some rubber compounds. Cover or remove 5. Remove brake line banjo bolt, sealing washers, and
plastic and painted parts before working on the brake brake line from master cylinder.
system. If brake fluid is spilled on cosmetic surfaces,
immediately rinse the area with a mild solution of soap and 6. Compress pushrod and remove retaining ring. Slide
water until all traces of brake fluid are removed. Make sure the assembly out of master cylinder.
the master cylinder reservoir being worked on is level
before removing the cap.
IMPORTANT: Replace all rubber parts upon assembly.
1. To reduce spills when lines are disconnected, draw

fluid from master cylinder reservoir with a clean
syringe or pump fluid from system through the brake
caliper bleed screw (see brake bleeding procedure
page 15.17).
2. Remove pushrod clevis pin (A) and reservoir mount
screw (B).
3. Loosen footrest support bolts to access master
cylinder mounting bolts (C) and remove master
cylinder.
Internal stop washer
B
A
7. Pull boot back from fluid supply fitting and remove

retaining ring.
BRAKES
8. Pull fitting from master cylinder with a twisting motion. 14. DUST BOOT REPLACEMENT
Measure the length of the pushrod assembly as shown
9. Inspect cylinder bore (D) and chamfer (E) on the front below or count exposed threads above the nut inside
of the bore for corrosion, scratches, scoring, or the clevis prior to disassembly so pushrod length can
pitting. Replace master cylinder if any of these be returned to an approximate adjustment after
conditions are evident. installing the dust boot.
NOTE: Pedal free play (clearance) must be inspected
and adjusted before operating the vehicle.
Boot Replacement
D
E Do not loosen this nut J I
Count exposed threads and record

before disassembly.
10. Measure the bore diameter (F, above). Replace if worn

beyond the service limit.
15. Hold clevis (I) and loosen lock nut (J) with a 12mm
Master Cylinder Bore Diameter wrench (turn lock nut clockwise as viewed from the
clevis end).
Service Limit: 12.743 (.5017 in)
11. Clean compensating port (G) and supply port (H) with
compressed air to be sure they are clean and
unobstructed.
G H
15
16. Rotate clevis counterclockwise to remove it from the
12. Clean all parts with clean Victory DOT 4 brake fluid or pushrod with the adjuster nut inside.
isopropyl alcohol.
17. Remove lock nut from pushrod and remove old boot.
13. Replace ALL RUBBER PARTS with new.
18. Install new boot and new piston retaining ring, and
assemble the clevis.
BRAKES
19. Set the rod length back to the length recorded before 24. Assemble spring to new piston with small end to piston.
disassembly. Large diameter of beveled edge on piston seals (M)
face toward spring. Install a new retaining ring on end
of piston with machined edge (sharpest of the two
edges) facing out (N).
N
Brake
20. Hold clevis and tighten lock nut against it. Torque to Brake
12.5 ft-lbs (17 Nm). Apply special assembly oil

to cups (included with parts kit)
21. Apply Victory DOT 4 brake fluid to the O-ring (K) for the
supply fitting and install it in the master cylinder.
25. Apply special lubricants from service kit to the seal
cups, pushrod and backing washer.
26. Carefully install spring / piston assembly into master
cylinder bore. Work the front piston seal carefully past
the chamfer and into bore. Use care not to damage or
K fold the seal when working it past the chamfer.
27. Continue to install the piston until the rear seal is past
the chamfer. Push and hold the piston in far enough to
allow the pushrod assembly and retaining ring to be
installed.
28. Align the pushrod and install the retaining ring. Be sure
it is fully seated in the groove.
22. Install supply fitting and retaining ring.

23. Press seal (L) into place until seated.
29. Press outer edge of boot into the bore. The outer edge
of boot and the bore should be dry so boot does not
dislodge.
30. Pull the inner edge of the boot into place on the boot
retainer nut on the pushrod.
BRAKES
Rear Master Cylinder Installation 9. Fill reservoir with Victory DOT 4 brake fluid and bleed
Also refer to the appropriate Assembly View at the the system as outlined on page 15.17.
beginning of this chapter.
WARNING
1. Install master cylinder on footrest support, engaging
clevis with brake pedal.
elevate the wheel, apply and release the brake pedal
or lever 2-3 times and release. Verify the wheel turns
2. Apply a light film of grease to clevis pin and install from
freely without drag. If brake drag is evident, do not
outside to inside. Install a new retaining ring on pin.
operate the motorcycle. Inspect the vehicle to
determine the cause and then repair as necessary.
3. Position pedal return spring behind upper mounting
post and install cylinder mounting screws. Torque
mounting screws to 84 in-lbs (10 Nm). Rear Caliper Service
4. Verify the pushrod length adjustment. 1. Remove banjo bolt and sealing washers from rear
There must be 1-2 mm (.040 - .080) clearance caliper and allow fluid to drain into a container.
between pedal (A) and pedal stop (B) when pedal is in
fully released position and master cylinder piston is 2. Remove rear wheel (Chapter 13). Caliper and bracket
against its internal stop. must be removed as an assembly.
5. Re-adjust pushrod length to provide specified 3. Remove pin (A) and brake pads. Note orientation of
clearance if necessary. spring plate (B) for assembly.
A
Pedal Clearance
Measurement
1.0 - 2.0 mm
(.040 - .080 in.)
A
B
B
FLOORBOARDS
4. Slide caliper bracket off pins and remove spring plate.
6. Assemble footrest support to the vehicle. Torque bolts

to 35 ft-lbs (47.5 Nm) 15
7. Attach fluid supply hose to master cylinder supply
fitting using new clamps.
8. Install brake line with new sealing washers and torque

banjo bolt to 18 ft-lbs (24.5 Nm).
BRAKES
5. Remove caliper pistons. Keep pistons in order for 9. Measure diameter of each bore and piston. Replace
installation in their respective bores. caliper assembly or parts if worn beyond service limit.
Caliper Piston Bore Diameter
Service Limit: 27.05mm (1.0649 in)

6. Remove dust seals and piston seals. Use care not to
damage the seal bores.
7. Clean caliper thoroughly with isopropyl alcohol. Dry

with compressed air. Clean seal grooves thoroughly. Caliper Piston Diameter
Any residue left behind in the grooves could cause
caliper pistons to stick and result in brake drag. Service Limit: 26.935mm (1.0604 in)
8. Inspect each bore and surface of each piston for

10. Install all new rubber parts during assembly. Do not
corrosion, scratches, scoring, or pitting. Replace
reuse old seals or boots. Apply special lubricant from
caliper assembly if any of these conditions are evident.
service kit to new piston seals and dust seals.
11. Apply special assembly oil to outer surface of all

pistons.
Pistons:
Apply special
OIL included
with parts kit.
Seals:
Brake Apply special
grease included
with parts kit.
12. Install piston seals and dust seals in caliper body.
13. Install pistons in their respective bore.
BRAKES
14. Replace caliper pin boot (C) on bracket and (D) on 18. Install inner pad with insulator and backing plate.
caliper. Apply special lubricant from service kit to
boots and both pins.
Brake
15. Be sure brake pad guide plate is in place on bracket

with arrow (E) pointed up. 19. Torque brake pad pin to 12.5 ft-lbs (17 Nm).
E 20. Be sure end tabs of pads are both fully engaged in the
heel plate (F) on bracket.
16. Assemble bracket to caliper. Remove excess lubricant.
17. Install spring plate and outer brake pad. Start pad pin
through outer pad.
Rear Caliper Installation
1. Install caliper and bracket. See “Rear Wheel
Installation” on page 13.16.
15
2. Install brake hose and banjo bolt with new seal
washers.
3. Torque banjo bolt to 18 ft-lbs (24.5 Nm)
4. Fill and bleed the rear hydraulic brake system. Refer
to page 15.17.
WARNING
After pad installation or brake system repair, safely elevate
wheel, apply and release brake pedal or lever 2-3 times and
release. Verify wheel turns freely without drag. If brake drag
is evident, do not operate the motorcycle. Inspect vehicle to
determine the cause and then repair as necessary.
BRAKES
ABS Trouble Codes

ABS CODE
DESCRIPTION
NUMBER
C0020 ABS Motor Lock
C1020 ABS Motor Stuck OFF
C1021 ABS Motor Stuck ON
C1022 ABS Pulsar Front

C1023 ABS Pulsar Rear
C1024 ABS Solenoid (RRI) Open or Shorted
C1025 ABS Solenoid (RRO) Open or Shorted
C1026 ABS Solenoid (FFI) Open or Shorted

C1027 ABS Solenoid (FFO) Open or Shorted
C1028 ABS Solenoid (RFI) Open or Shorted
C1029 ABS Solenoid (RFO) Open or Shorted
C1030 ABS Front Wheel Speed Sensor Open or Shorted to

Ground
C1031 ABS Front Wheel Speed Signal Failure
C1032 ABS Actuator (Front) Wheel Lock or VSS Failure
C1033 ABS Actuator (Rear) Wheel Lock or VSS Failure
C1034 ABS Failsafe Relay Fault

C1036 ABS Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Open or Shorted to
Ground
C1037 ABS Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Signal Failure
C1038 ABS Source Voltage Low
C1039 ABS Source Voltage High

C1040 ABS Tire Size Mismatch
C1041 ABS Module Fault
C1042 ABS Incomplete Evacuation and Fill
C1045 Trip Sudden Deceleration - Open / Short
BRAKES
TROUBLESHOOTING
Brake System Troubleshooting
Problem Symptom and/or Possible Cause Possible Repair

Weak Brakes or Fluid Leakage (External) Repair or Replace Leaking Component
Erratic Braking Fluid Leakage (Internal of Master Cylinder) Replace Master Cylinder
Action Worn Pads Replace Brake Pads
Oil Contamination of Brake Pads and/or Brake Disc Pads Must Be Replaced. Disc May Be Cleaned.
Air In System Bleed Air From System
Low Brake Fluid Level In Reservoir Fill Reservoir, Bleed Brakes, Top Off Fluid Level.
Excessive Brake Disc Runout Replace Brake Disc.
Worn or Damaged Wheel Bearings. Replace Wheel Bearings.
Loose Front Axle Nut or Clamps or Loose Rear Axle Torque Correctly, See Chapter 12 & 13
Caliper Mount Surface Uneven Or Misaligned; Missing Inspect / Repair

or Damaged Fasteners
Clogged or Restricted Hydraulic Line Replace Line(s)

Caliper Bracket Misaligned, Bent or Distorted Replace Bracket
Loose Brake Disc Install New Screws. Torque to Specification
Brake Pads Glazed Replace Pads. Avoid Needless Heavy Braking for
100-200 miles (Burnish New Brake Pads).
Poor Brakes or No Air In System Bleed Air From System
Brakes When First Low Brake Fluid Level In Reservoir Fill Reservoir, Bleed Brakes, Top Off Fluid Level.
Applied. Brake Brake Disc is Bent or Warped Replace Brake Disc
Lever Pressure Caliper Misalignment Determine Cause and Correct
Present If Lever Is External Leak Repair or Replace Damaged Component
“Pumped”. Internal Leak (master cylinder) Repair or Replace Master Cylinder
Faulty Brake Hose Inspect for Bulges / Replace
Brake Pedal or Brake Disc Bent or Warped Replace Brake Disc
Brake Lever Mounting Surface of Brake Disc Uneven / Disc Loose Repair or Replace as Necessary
Pulsates
Caliper Mount Surface Uneven Or Misaligned; Missing Repair or Replace as Necessary
or Damaged Fasteners
Excessive Lever or Air in System Bleed Air From System
Pedal Travel / Loose Mounting Hardware Repair as Necessary
Spongy Brake Feel. Low Brake Fluid Level In Reservoir Fill Reservoir, Bleed Brakes, Top Off Fluid Level.
Incorrect Brake Fluid Used Flush System and Replace With Correct Fluid
See “Weak / Erratic Brakes” and Poor Brakes” possible

causes above. 15
Fluid Leakage Loose Banjo Fittings Tighten to Specified Torque
Damaged Banjo Fitting Sealing Washers Replace
Cracked / Damaged Hose Replace
Worn Master Cylinder Piston, Caliper Piston(s) or Repair / Replace Master Cylinder or Wheel
Seals Caliper.
Diaphragm (master Cylinder reservoir) Leaking Inspect / Replace Cover, Cap, Diaphragm or
Reservoir as Required
Fluid level too high (new brake pads installed without Correct fluid level
removing added fluid)
BRAKES
Brake System Troubleshooting (Cont.)

Reservoir Over Filled Adjust Level As Necessary
Brakes Drag Excessively or
Self-Apply Brake Pedal Or Lever Not Returning Completely Inspect Linkage, Pivots and Mechanism For
(Brakes Overheat) To Rest Position Cause Of Binding Or Restricted Movement;
Inadequate Freeplay Measure Pedal Clearance / Adjust
Compensating Port Plugged Repair or Replace Master Cylinder
Internal Corrosion of Components (Master Replace Damaged Component

Cylinder / Caliper)
Rear Caliper: Corrosion of Sliding Parts, Bent or Repair or Replace As Necessary

Damaged Parts
Contaminated Brake Fluid Flush System, Install Correct Fluid
Caliper Pistons Sticking Repair / Replace Caliper (Corrosion / Buildup of

Residue In Caliper Piston Seal Grooves)
Rider Error (Operator Riding Brakes) Educate Operator

Brake Squeal/Squeak If noise is minor and inconsistent, some brake Apply non oil-based solvent (such as Victory
squeak / squeal is characteristic of disc brakes Brake Cleaner or isopropyl alcohol) to a clean
and usually caused by dust / dirt on pads and / or shop towel and wipe dust / dirt from brake disc.
brake disc.
Pad Not Secure in Caliper Repair as Necessary. Inspect Pad Installation
Aftermarket (not genuine Victory) Parts Install Genuine Victory Parts
Worn or Damaged Wheel Bearing(s) Replace
Worn Pads / Disc Replace
BRAKES
ABS System Troubleshooting

ABS SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING
ABS light on at all Blown Fuse (ABS Fuse Open) Replace Fuse; Inspect wiring for cause
times
System Fault (Fault Code Active) Connect Digital Wrench - View Code(s)
Sensor Fault; Loose sensor; Damaged sensor or Inspect wheel speed sensor / pulse ring for debris or
pulse ring. Improperly assembled fork, brake, damage. Inspect sensor mounting. Inspect front fork,
wheel, or axle. both brake calipers, wheels and axles for proper
assembly, and wheel bearings. Inspect all ABS wiring
connections.
ABS light on Wire Connection Fault Inspect connector at ABS module for loose, broken, or
intermittently corroded wiring or connector pins. Check power supply
(fuses) and ground.
Sensor Fault; Loose sensor; Damaged sensor or Inspect wheel speed sensor / pulse ring for debris or
pulse ring. damage. Inspect sensor mount, ABS wiring
connections, and wheel bearings.
ABS Noise When Transmission or Drive Line Noise Some drive line noise may be evident and is normal
Active depending on conditions / road surfaces. Inspect brake
pads, brake discs, caliper mounts, tire pressure, tread
wear, and tire type. Pulsation at lever or pedal normal
when ABS active.
ABS Pulsation at Normal System Operation Pulsation at lever or pedal is normal when ABS is active
Lever or Pedal due to feedback in the brake lines from pressure
modulation at the ABS module. If pulsation can be felt
during normal system braking (non-ABS active
braking) inspect the brake system as you would for a
non-ABS equipped vehicle (brake pads, brake discs,
caliper mounts, tire pressure, tread wear, and tire type,
etc.)
ABS Poor System not properly bled (air in system). Bleed system properly as described on page 15.18 and
Performance perform Front Brake Lever Reserve test on page 15.20
to verify all air is purged from the system. Inspect brake
system components (discs, pads, etc.)
ABS Light On After Rear wheel loss of traction was initiated below 6 Careless or reckless driving not recommended. Bring
Rear Wheel Spin mph (10 kph) and exceeded maximum time motorcycle to a safe stop. Cycle ignition key OFF / ON
allowance parameter of system. to reset system. Light should go off when vehicle speed
exceeds 6 mph / 10 kph.
Careless or reckless driving not recommended.

15
Rear wheel loss of traction initiated above 6 mph System Fault Code logged immediately due to wheel
(10 kph). speed differential when ABS is active (above 6 mph / 10
kph). Bring motorcycle to a safe stop. Cycle ignition key
OFF / ON to reset system. Light should go off when
vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph / 10 kph.
BRAKES
NOTES
BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM
CHAPTER 16
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.2
GENERAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.2
CHARGING SYSTEM & ALTERNATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.2
FASTENER TORQUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.2
BATTERY BOX AND ATTACHMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.3
FASTENER TORQUE REFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.3
REGULATOR / RECTIFIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.4
IMPORTANT INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.5
GENERAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.5
BATTERY SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.5
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.6
BATTERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.7
BATTERY REMOVAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.7
BATTERY CHARGING - NEW BATTERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.7
BATTERY CHARGING - GENERAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.7
DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.8
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.8
BATTERY LOAD TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.9
CURRENT DRAW INSPECTION (KEY OFF). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.9
BATTERY TESTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.9
REGULATED VOLTAGE / AMPERAGE OUTPUT INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.10
STATOR NO-LOAD AC VOLTAGE OUTPUT INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.11
STATOR RESISTANCE INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.12
STATOR WINDINGS TO GROUND INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.12
VOLTAGE DROP: RECTIFIER / REGULATOR TO BATTERY(+) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.13
RECTIFIER / REGULATOR CONNECTOR INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.13
DIODE LEAKAGE TEST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.14
REGULATOR / RECTIFIER TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.15
RECTIFIER / REGULATOR REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.16
STATOR REMOVAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.17
STATOR INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.17
FLYWHEEL REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.17
16
SPECIFICATIONS
General
Item Specifications
Starting System Electric
Electrical Charging System Permanent Magnet / 3 Phase / Full Wave Rectification
(General) Regulator/Rectifier Solid State Three Phase Voltage Regulator/Rectifier
Lighting System 12 V DC
Charging System & Alternator

Item Specifications
Alternator No Load AC Output @ Idle (Minimum, Engine Cool) 17.5-21 V AC @ Idle
Alternator No Load AC Output @ 2000 RPM (Minimum) 44 V AC @ 2000 RPM
Stator Coil Resistance (@ 21oC / 70oF) (stator Black wire to other Black wire) Less than 1 ohm
Stator Coil Resistance To Ground (each stator Black wire to ground) Infinite (no continuity)
Regulator/Rectifier Regulated Voltage 14.3-14.7 V DC
Alternator Output (Amps / Watts) 48 A 13VDC @ 3500 RPM
Type Yuasa: YTX20HL-BS
Voltage 12 Volts DC
Nominal Capacity @ 10 Hr Rate 18 AH
Battery (P/N 4011374)
Recommended Battery
STD: 1.85 A for 5 to 10 hrs
Charging Current
Cold Cranking Amp Rating 310
Fastener Torque
Charging System
Description Torque Nm Torque ft-lbs (in-lb)
Battery Cover Screw 10 Nm (85 in-lbs)
Battery Terminal Screws 4.5 Nm (40 in-lbs)
Circuit Breaker Terminal Nuts 2.8 Nm (25 in-lbs)
Flywheel (Rotor) Bolt 102 Nm 75 ft-lbs
Primary Cover Screws 13 Nm (115 in-lbs)
Regulator/Rectifier to Bracket 10 Nm (85 in-lbs)
Regulator/Rectifier Bracket to
10 Nm (85 in-lbs)
Crankcase
Stator Mounting Screws 11 Nm (100 in-lbs) Loctite™ 242
BATTERY BOX AND ATTACHMENTS

Fastener Torque Reference
19 ft-lbs
(26.0 Nm)
36 in-lbs (4.0 Nm)
36 in-lbs (4.0 Nm)

Remove screws. Slide
center chin fairing to one
side and pivot opposite
side forward to remove.
40 in-lbs
(4.5 Nm)
85 in-lbs
(9.6 Nm)
16
19 ft-lbs
(25.7 Nm)
Regulator / Rectifier
Apply Di-electric grease

P/N 2871329
BLACK (Ground
to engine case).
85 in-lbs 85 in-lbs (9.6 Nm)
BLACK/RED
(9.6 Nm )
(to battery side of
circuit breaker)
25 in-lbs (2.8 Nm)
60 in-lbs BK BK BK
(6.8 Nm)
3 Pin Connector
(To Stator Phase Wires)
BK BK
BK
40 in-lbs (4.5 Nm)
BK RD
40A
Circuit
BK/RD 85 in-lbs (9.6 Nm)
Breaker
25 in-lbs (2.8 Nm)

LOADS
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
General
WARNING
All electrical system and component service can be
performed with the engine in the frame. Battery electrolyte is poisonous. It contains sulfuric
acid. Serious burns can result from contact with skin,
eyes or clothing. Antidote:
CAUTIONS TO OBSERVE
DURING ELECTRICAL SYSTEM SERVICE:
External: Flush with water.
Connectors Internal: Drink large quantities of water or milk. Follow

with milk of magnesia, beaten egg, or vegetable oil.
Always turn off ignition switch before disconnecting any Call physician immediately.
electrical component.
Eyes: Flush with water for 15 minutes. Call physician
Always verify that bullet-type connectors are free of
immediately.
corrosion, contamination or breaks when troubleshooting
electrical problems.
Batteries produce explosive gases. Keep sparks,
Verify that bullet-type connectors are firmly seated. Listen flame, cigarettes, etc. away. Ventilate when charging
and/or feel for a click when connecting them. or using in an enclosed space. Always shield eyes
when working near batteries.
Ensure to release the lock on lock-type couplers before
disconnecting them to avoid damaging the connector. KEEP BATTERIES AND BATTERY ACID
OUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN.
Pulling on the wires when disconnecting couplers can
introduce problems. Hold the connectors themselves when
disconnecting them, not their associated wires. CAUTION
The charging system used on the motorcycle is
Inspect each male and female terminal of multi-pin
calibrated for the maintenance free battery that is
connectors for corrosion, contamination, loose or bent
installed as original equipment. Do not replace with
pins.
a conventional lead-acid battery.
Battery Safety Before troubleshooting the charging system, inspect
the battery thoroughly. A discharged, poorly charged
or faulty battery will make the readings obtained
BATTERY LABEL during charging system troubleshooting erroneous
or difficult to interpret.
NOTICE
Even with a good battery, battery voltage can

recover after charging, but under excessive loads 16
the battery voltage will drop quickly and eventually
“die”. Often the charging system is suspect when it
is not the cause of the problem. Always inspect for
excessive loads if the battery continues to lose its
charge. Items such as incorrect wattage bulbs,
sticking brake light switch(s), continuous low rpm
operation or leaving the lights on without the engine
running for long periods of time can drain a battery
even if the charging system is operating correctly.
A battery will self-discharge when the motorcycle is not in

use. Make sure to properly store the battery as outlined CAUTION
later in this section.
ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS
Maximum voltage and service life is only achieved when Semiconductor parts used in electronic components
the battery is properly serviced initially. Make sure to follow will not withstand careless handling.
instructions outlined later in this section.
Do not drop or strike parts that contain
Overcharging can be caused by a faulty battery (shorted semiconductors such as the ECM or rectifier/
cell). Test system with a known good battery when regulator. Dropping electronic components can
diagnosing an overcharge condition. cause damage to the component.
New batteries must be properly maintained as outlined in Follow instructions supplied in this chapter, including
this section to ensure proper service life. chapter 5 (Fuel Injection) and chapter 17 (Ignition
System), very carefully when working on electronic
components. Failure to follow instructions may
CAUTION cause irreparable damage to the part being
CONNECTING AND DISCONNECTING THE inspected.
BATTERY
Always disconnect the negative battery cable first SPECIAL TOOLS
when removing the battery.
The following tools are available for purchase from our tool
supplier, SPX:
Always connect the positive battery cable first when
connecting the battery. Engine Stop Tool: PV-43502
If corrosion is found on terminals, remove battery Flywheel Puller: PV-43533

and clean terminals with a solution of baking soda
and water. Finish the process by cleaning terminals Digital Multi-Meter: PV-43546
(both battery and battery cables) with a wire brush. Connector Test Kit: PV-43526
Once connections are secured, apply a thin film of Battery / Conductance Tester: MDX - 610P
Nyogel™ grease to the terminals.
Verify the positive terminal has it’s protective boot in

place.
CAUTION
WIRE ROUTING
Make sure that all wires are routed correctly.
CAUTION
FUSES
Fuses are in place to protect circuit wiring and
components. Always determine the cause of an
open fuse before installing a new fuse.
Do not increase the value of the fuse to correct the

problem.
Do not use wire, tin foil or other substitutes for fuses.
BATTERY Battery Charging - General
Battery Removal
1. See page 2.21.
Battery Charging - New Battery

1. Charge the battery at 1.8 amps for 5 to 10 hours. use
a straight rate charger (not load sensing or battery
tender type) for the initial charge of a new battery.
CAUTION
Do not attempt to quick charge the battery at any
time.
1. Measure battery voltage with a digital multimeter. The
reading should be above 12.5 Vdc. If battery voltage
is lower than 12.5 Vdc, battery must be charged
+ 12.5 Vdc according to the instructions given below.
CAUTION
Do not remove caps on battery while recharging. Do
not attempt to inspect or add fluid to a maintenance
free battery.
2. Charge battery at 1.8 amps for 5 to 10 hours.
Battery Charging Specification:

2. Remove battery from charger and let it sit for 30
minutes or longer. 1.8 A for 5-10 hours
3. Measure voltage with a digital multimeter. If lower than
12.5 Vdc, battery must be recharged again in 3. Remove battery from charger and let it sit for 30
accordance with step 1 and 2 above. minutes or longer.
4. After charging battery and letting it sit for 30 minutes 4. Measure battery voltage with a digital multimeter. If
or more, check battery voltage again. If battery voltage battery voltage is lower than 12.5 Vdc, battery must be
is still below 12.5 Vdc, replace the battery. recharged again in accordance with step 1 and 2
above.
5. After charging battery and letting it sit for 30 minutes
or more, check the battery voltage again. If battery
voltage is still below 12.5 Vdc, replace battery.
NOTE: When motorcycle is not used for one (1) month or 16
more, remove battery and store it in a cool, dry area.
Inspect voltage monthly and charge according to above
instructions if necessary.
DIAGNOSTICS
Troubleshooting
NOTICE: The battery must be fully charged and in good condition to obtain accurate readings. Battery charging
current is automatically reduced by the regulator / rectifier if the regulator / rectifier unit reaches a critical temperature
(overheated). The system should be cool when testing DC charging output or when testing the regulator / rectifier to
ensure accurate readings. Refer to test procedure for individual charging system components for more information.
START
Excessive Loads (Accy draw)
Shorted Wiring
Measure Current Drain Shorted Components**
Incorrect
(Page 1611) ** Disconnect any accessory items
to see if load disappears
Correct
Inspect Regulated Voltage &

Amperage Output (Page 16.12)
13.8 - 14.7 V DC Inspect Battery & Battery Connections

or
Charging System O.K., check
Less Than 13.8 or above Operator Driving Habits, ACC draw, etc.
14.7 V DC Perform battery Load Test
Inspect Voltage Reg/Rect 2-pin

and 3 pin connector. Inspect
BK wire (ground) path and
BK/R wire current path back to Stator Faulty Replace stator
Battery +. Repair wiring as required
Inspect Stator (Page 16.13 - 16.14)
Stator OK Faulty Wiring or Connectors;

Damaged Flywheel Magnet
Test Regulator/Rectifier Unit Replace Regulator/Rectifier Unit

(Page 16.16)
Regulator / Rectifier Faulty
Battery Load Test
Perform a battery load test using a battery load tester. Current Draw Inspection
Follow the load tester manufacturer’s instructions carefully. (Key Off)
An alternate (less accurate) method is shown in the

illustration below if a load tester is not available.
NOTE: This test is a general indicator of battery condition

and is not valid for battery replacement under warranty. If
charging system problems are suspected, perform the
system tests outlined in this chapter.
Less than 5 mA
1. Fully charge the battery.
2. Allow battery voltage to stabilize by waiting at least 5 2. Disconnect ground cable (-) from battery.
minutes after charging is complete.
3. Connect digital multi-meter red (+) probe to ground
3. Connect a digital DC volt meter as shown below. cable and connect black DMM (-) probe to battery
4. Record the voltage reading. negative (-) terminal.
5. Turn headlight on and monitor the voltage for 1 Hour.
Fluke™ 73 Multimeter PV-43546
Voltage should be within .5 volts of the value recorded
in Step 4. 4. Read current draw (be sure 30 seconds has passed
6. If the battery fails the load test, fully charge the battery since key was turned OFF).
again and repeat the test. Replace the battery if it does 5. If current draw exceeds specifications, inspect wiring
not pass the test after a second charge. and components for short to ground.
Specification: Less than 5 mA
Headlight Load Test
Headlight on for 6. Locate the faulty component or wiring by disconnecting
one hour
wiring connections one-at-a-time while observing
current draw. Use the wiring diagram to locate possible
current draws from battery. When current draw falls
within specifications, the last connection disconnected
shows which circuit or component is affected.
Battery Testing
The recommended battery tester for all Victory batteries is
Voltage should be within
.5 volts of the recorded special tool: PU-50296 / MDX - 610P.
voltage in step 4.
Current Draw Inspection (Key Off)

Current draw is suspect if battery discharges when
motorcycle is not in operation (short periods of storage). 16
1. Turn key OFF and wait at least 30 seconds for all
powered circuits to disconnect before performing the
key-off current draw test.
Battery Conductance Analyzer 5. Start engine and warm to operating temperature.
Conductance describes the ability of a battery to conduct 6. At 1000 RPM or slightly above; the ammeter should
current. A conductance tester functions by sending a low reach the “break-even” point (no amperage leaving the
frequency AC signal through the battery and a portion of battery).
the current response is captured, from this output a
7. The voltmeter should be rising toward 14 VDC.
conductance measurement is calculated. Conductance
testing is more accurate than voltage, specific gravity, or Specification:
load testing. Break-even point for charging
Authorized Polaris dealers / distributors are required to use System: 1500 RPM
the conductance analyzer when testing 12V Polaris
batteries. 8. Increase engine RPM to 2500. The ammeter should
rise a slight amount, then stabilize. Volt meter should
Regulated Voltage / Amperage Output read above 14 V DC.
Inspection
9. Use results obtained from preceding tests and the
1. Remove center chin fairing (page 16.3). following descriptions to determine if charging system
is functioning properly.
2. Remove negative battery leads and connect a 12V
shunt as outlined in the instructions provided with
CHARGING SYSTEM OPERATING CORRECTLY:
shunt or use an inductive amperage clamp.
Ammeter goes up a small amount, then stabilizes slightly
above +0 amps. Volt meter rises toward 14.8 V DC, drops
NOTICE: Current can easily exceed the measuring
off a little and starts to stabilize.
limits of your ammeter or its internal fuse.
An inductive ammeter clamp or a suitable shunt LOW BATTERY:
must be used to avoid meter or fuse damage.
Amperage continues to rise, voltage levels off as battery
is absorbing voltage. Need to charge battery fully or use a
good battery and repeat test.
CHARGING SYSTEM UNDERCHARGING:

Ammeter drops to 0 or remains below 0 (negative
reading) at all rpm, volt meter remains the same or goes
down. Go to voltage drop inspection.
CHARGING SYSTEM OVERCHARGING:

Ammeter rises well above 0 and remains there or
continues to rise. Volt meter goes well above 14.8 V DC
and may continue to rise. Go to voltage regulator/rectifier
inspection.
EXCESSIVE LOAD:
Amperage levels off or starts to drop, voltage continues to
rise. Load may be excessive (accessories or shorted
components). Determine if excessive loads are present
(disconnect accessories and re-test).
Voltage
10. Turn ignition key off.
11. Remove ammeter shunt or inductive clamp.
12. Re-connect negative battery cables to battery.

3. Set digital multimeter (DMM) to V DC scale.
13. Install center chin fairing.
4. Connect DMM red (+) lead to battery (+) terminal and
DMM black (-) lead to battery (-) terminal.
Stator No-load AC Voltage Output Inspection 3. Set Digital Multimeter (DMM) to AC Volts scale (if
meter has a Vrms selection use Vrms).
NOTE: Engine must be started during this test. Be
sure to heed the following Warnings and Cautions. 4. Connect one meter lead to Pin A on wire connector that
comes from stator and the other lead to Pin B.
~
WARNING Meter Set To AC volts: V
HOT COMPONENTS Retainer Clip

The engine and exhaust system become very hot
during operation and remain hot for a period of time
after the engine is shut off. Wear insulated
protection for hands and arms or wait until the
engine and exhaust system have cooled sufficiently A B C
before working on the machine. Front View
Male Connector
WARNING From Stator
(Female Pins)
CARBON MONOXIDE
Never run an engine in an enclosed area. Exhaust
contains poisonous carbon monoxide gas that can 5. Start engine and let it idle. Observe DMM reading.
cause loss of consciousness and may lead to
6. The meter should indicate a minimum reading of 17.5-
death. If you must run the engine to do some
21VAC at idle.
repairs, do so in an open area or with an exhaust
evacuation system operating. 7. If using a meter other than the Fluke, be sure your
meter reads rms volts.
CAUTION 8. Repeat test for pins A & C.
VOLTAGE / ARCING
Use caution not to touch any of the connections or 9. Repeat test for pins B & C.
allow the exposed terminals to come close to any
Specification:
other part of the vehicle or other objects, as an arc
No load AC Volts @ 900 RPM:
may occur.
48A Alternator - Approx ~ 17.5-21 VAC @ 900 RPM
1. Be sure engine is cool or well below operating

temperature prior to testing. NOTE: The test results in steps 7, 8 and 9 can read
more than specified VAC, but it is important that the
2. Lift tab (A) and push the 3-Pin stator connector toward reading for each pair of wires is approximately equal.
the front of the vehicle to disconnect.
10. Increase RPM to 2000. Repeat Steps 4-9.
Specification:
No load AC Volts @ 2000 RPM:
16
FRONT
48A Alternator - Approx ~ 44 VAC @ 2000 RPM
NOTE: The test results obtained in step 11 can read

A more than specified VAC, but it is important that they
are all approximately equal.
Stator Resistance Inspection Stator Windings To Ground Inspection

NOTE: Engine OFF and cool.
NOTICE
1. Disconnect 3-pin stator connector as described in
Engine must be OFF while performing this test. Step 2 of No-Load AC Volts Inspection (page 16.11).
NOTE: Engine OFF and cool. 2. Set meter to OHMs scale.
Meter Set To Ohms: 3. Connect one meter lead to Pin A and the other to a
good engine ground.
Retainer Clip
 4. Observe meter reading. There should be no continuity
to ground.
A B C
Meter Set To Ohms:
Front View Retainer Clip
Male Connector
From Stator
(Female Pins)
A B C
1. Disconnect 3-pin stator connector as described in Front View
Step 2 of No-Load AC Volts Inspection (page 16.11). Male Connector
From Stator
2. Set meter to OHMs scale. (Female Pins)
3. Connect one lead of meter to any pin in multi-connector
leading from stator and the other lead to any other pin.
STATOR WINDING TO GROUND: Open Circuit (OL)
4. Observe meter reading.
STATOR RESISTANCE: 0.1-0.5  (see below) 5. Repeat test for other two stator leads (Pin B and Pin C).
NOTICE
Do not allow your hands or fingers to touch meter leads

or one meter lead and any grounded portion of the
motorcycle or reading obtained will be inaccurate.
NOTE: 0.3 to 0.5 ohms may be less than the

internal resistance of your meter. Before measuring
stator resistance, connect meter leads together and
record the resistance. Subtract meter resistance from
stator resistance readings.
EXAMPLE: True reading is:

.7 ohms (observed reading when checking stator)
- 0.3 ohms (meter/lead resistance)
= 0.4 ohms (true stator winding resistance
5. Repeat resistance test on all remaining combinations

of the three pins A, B, and C (three measurements
total).
Voltage Drop: Rectifier / Regulator To Rectifier / Regulator Connector Inspection

Battery(+)
1. Disconnect 3 pin connector.
NOTE: Leave regulator / rectifier connected for this test.
RED (to battery side of

From stator (connected) 40A circuit breaker)
Red lead to ring Black (BK)
terminal at circuit
breaker
BK (Ground to
engine case)
A B C
BK BK BK
3-Pin Stator Leads
2. Inspect male and female pins in the 3-pin connector

and the ring terminals of the positive (red) and negative
(black) regulator / rectifier leads. Check for corrosion,
1. Remove the electrical cover (below the oil cooler). loose pins, poor connections, or evidence of
overheating or other damage.
2. Set Digital Multi-Meter (DMM) to DC Volts scale (or 300
mV scale). 3. If the wiring and connectors are undamaged and
appear to be clean and tight, inspect the battery, stator,
3. Connect red lead (+) of DMM to the ring terminal of the
and related wiring. Test the regulator / rectifier as
Red regulator / rectifier lead at the circuit breaker.
described in the following tests.
4. Connect black lead (-) of DMM to positive (+) battery
NOTE: Do not touch the meter leads when testing the
cable at battery.
regulator rectifier. Readings in the following chart are
5. DMM must read below 0.1 volts DC (100 mV). If it does correct for a Fluke™ 73 multimeter. Use of other
read 0.1 V DC or less the circuit is O.K. meters may affect test results.
16
Specification: 0.1 V DC
6. If DMM reads above 0.1 volts DC there is excessive
resistance in the circuit that must be corrected.
7. Possible problem areas could be the battery cable,
cable end connections, cable to battery terminal
connection, the ring terminal connection to the
regulator rectifier red wire. Visual inspections or
continued voltage drop inspections are necessary to
determine the cause.
Diode Leakage Test

NOTE: Engine must be OFF and engine cool.
NOTE: Do not touch meter leads when testing the
regulator rectifier. Readings in the following chart are
correct for a Fluke™ multimeter. Use of other meters
may produce different results.
Diode Leakage Test
DC Amps, 300 mA scale
Leave 3-Pin
Connected
Red BK/RD
Blk
Circuit Breaker
Terminal
Blk
Reg/Rect
Leave ground connected to engine
1. Disconnect regulator / rectifier (BK/RD) wire from the

40A circuit breaker terminal (battery side).
2. Reinstall nut on circuit breaker and torque to25 in-lbs

(2.8 Nm).
3. Leave ground wire connected to engine.
4. Connect black meter lead to the BK/RD wire from the

regulator / rectifier, and the red (+) meter lead to the
circuit breaker terminal.
5. Compare leakage to specification below.
DIODE LEAKAGE: Less than 1.0 mA
REGULATOR / RECTIFIER TEST • Use DIODE CHECK function on the Fluke 73 DMM
• Remove regulator / rectifier or completely • Perform all tests described in test table below. Test
disconnect all wires (3-Pin stator connector, ground results describe a properly functioning part.
(black) from engine case, and BK/RD wire from
circuit breaker terminal). Unit must be cool for
accurate testing.
Case 3-Pin
BK/RD
Stator AC Phase Leads
(Black with red stripe)
BK (Black)
A B C
BK BK BK
Regulator / Rectifier Test Table - Set DMM to DIODE CHECK Function
DMM RED LEAD DMM BLACK LEAD RESULT
AC Phase 1 (Pin A of 3-pin) AC Phase 2 (Pin B of 3-pin) Open Circuit
AC Phase 2 (Pin B of 3-pin) AC Phase 3 (Pin C of 3-pin) Open Circuit
AC Phase 1 (Pin A of 3-pin) AC Phase 3 (Pin C of 3-pin) Open Circuit
AC Phase 2 (Pin B of 3-pin) AC Phase 1 (Pin A of 3-pin) Open Circuit
AC Phase 3 (Pin C of 3-pin) AC Phase 1 (Pin A of 3-pin) Open Circuit
AC Phase 3 (Pin C of 3-pin) AC Phase 2 (Pin B of 3-pin) Open Circuit
Battery + Lead (Ring terminal of BK/R wire) Ground Lead (Ring terminal of Black wire) Open Circuit
Ground Lead (Ring terminal of Black wire) Battery + Lead (Ring terminal of Red wire) Open Circuit
Ground Lead (Ring terminal of Black wire) Case Closed Circuit (continuity) 16
Ground Lead (Ring terminal of Black wire) Any Phase Open Circuit
Any Phase Ground Lead (Ring terminal of Black wire) Open Circuit
Battery + Lead (Ring terminal of Red wire) Any Phase Open Circuit
AC Phase 1 (Pin A of 3-pin) Battery + Lead (Ring terminal of Red wire) 365mV to 515mV
AC Phase 2 (Pin B of 3-pin) Battery + Lead (Ring terminal of Red wire) 365mV to 515mV
AC Phase 3 (Pin C of 3-pin) Battery + Lead (Ring terminal of Red wire) 365mV to 515mV
Rectifier / Regulator Replacement 7. Reverse order of removal to install. Be sure mounting

bracket is clean and all connections are clean and tight.
1. Remove center chin fairing (page 16.3) and electrical Secure wires and connectors, and torque all screws.
cover.
8. Torque circuit breaker nuts to 25 in-lbs (2.8 Nm).
2. Lift cover off circuit breaker and remove positive
regulator / rectifier lead from battery side terminal of
breaker.
3. Remove ground screw from left front of crankcase and

remove negative regulator / rectifier lead.
60 in-lbs (7 Nm)
4. Lift tab (A) and push forward to separate the 3-pin
connector.
5. Remove regulator / rectifier mounting screws (B).
FRONT
85 in-lbs (9.6 Nm)
6. Remove wires from wire guides.
Stator Removal Stator Installation

1. Remove primary cover (page 9.9). 1. Clean stator mounting surface and screw holes in
primary cover.
2. Place primary cover on bench with padded material
between primary cover and bench top. 2. Place stator in primary cover taking care to route wires
correctly in the channel.
3. Remove wiring retainer plate (A).
3. Install screws and torque 100 in-lbs(12 Nm ).
4. Remove three (3) socket head screws (B).
4. Install grommet (C) into groove in cover and then install
5. Remove stator from primary cover. retainer plate. Torque screws to 50 in-lbs (5.7 Nm).
5. Pull wires to remove any slack or loop at point (D).

Wires must not protrude into flywheel rotor area.
B A
C
PULL
D
Flywheel Removal
Refer to page 9.24.
16
NOTES
IGNITION
CHAPTER 17
IGNITION
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.2
SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.2
IGNITION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.2
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.3
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.3
TROUBLESHOOTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.3
BASICS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.3
IGNITION CIRCUIT DIAGRAM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.4
TEST LEAD ADAPTER KIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.5
ECM CONNECTOR MAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.5
IGNITION SYSTEM TEST FLOWCHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.6
BATTERY VOLTAGE INSPECTION - TEST 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.7
SPARK INSPECTION - TEST 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.7
COIL HIGH TENSION LEADS - TEST 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.8
IGNITION COIL SIGNAL - TEST 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.8
IGNITION COIL RESISTANCE - TEST 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.9
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (CPS) RESISTANCE INSPECTION - TEST 6 . 17.10
CRANK POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT AND SIGNAL TEST 6A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.11
CRANK POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT CONTINUITY TEST 6B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.11
GROUND CIRCUIT INSPECTION - TEST 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.11
IGNITION COIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.12
IGNITION COIL REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.12
IGNITION COIL INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.12
IGNITION SWITCH REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.12
17
IGNITION
GENERAL INFORMATION
Safety Information
There are many hazards present when working on or around the ignition system. Read and pay close attention to the
following warnings and cautions when working on any component in this section.
Never run an engine in an enclosed area. Exhaust The engine and exhaust system become very hot
contains poisonous carbon monoxide gas that can during operation and remain hot for a period of
cause loss of consciousness and may lead to death. time after the engine is shut off. Wear insulated
If you must run the engine to do some repairs, do protection for hands and arms or wait until the
so in an open area or with an exhaust evacuation engine and exhaust system have cooled before
system operating. working on the machine.
Some procedures call for the engine to be run in Parts containing semi-conductors can be
order to warm the engine to operating temperature. easily damaged if handled carelessly. Do not
If this is done the exhaust pipes can “blue" if a drop or subject the electronic components
cooling air stream is not provided by means of a to shock loads.
shop fan directed at the exhaust system
(particularly the head pipes).
Follow the instructions closely when troubleshooting Using incorrect heat range spark plugs can
items in this section. Some electrical components damage the engine. Always follow the
can be damaged if they are connected or discon- manufacturer's recommendations for spark
-nected while the ignition switch is ON and plug heat range.
current is present.
GENERAL CAUTIONS TO OBSERVE WHEN WORKING ON IGNITION SYSTEM
• This ignition system is controlled electronically and no provisions are available to inspect or change ignition
timing. A timing light is still valuable as a diagnostic tool.
• Poor connections are the most common cause of ignition problems. Inspect all connections and replace the
spark plugs before doing extensive ignition system troubleshooting.
• Make sure the battery is fully charged and that the charging system is operating correctly.
• A signal from the Crankshaft Position Sensor must be present for spark to occur.
Ignition System Specifications

Ignition Specifications
Item Specifications
Spark Plug NGK DCPR6E
Spark Plug Gap 0.8 mm (.032 in.)
Primary 0.3 - 0.6 Ohms ± 20%
Secondary See coil test page 17.9
Ignition Coil Resistance
Plug Wire (with cap*)
Front: 4360 - 5780 Ohms** / Rear 4080 - 5050 Ohms**
Crank Position Sensor Resistance 280 Ohms ± 10% (No short to ground)
* Spark plug end caps are not removable ** See page 17.8 for test procedure
IGNITION
Torque Specifications
Fastener Torque Specifications - Ignition System
Description Torque Nm Torque ft-lbs (in-lbs) Notes
CPS Screws (to cover) 6.8 Nm (60 in-lbs)
Ignition Coil to Frame 11 Nm (100 in-lbs)
Spark Plug 11 Nm (100 in-lbs) Apply Anti-Seize
Timing Wheel Bolt (on RH 28 Nm 17 ft-lbs
end of crankshaft)
Rotor (Flywheel) Bolt 102 Nm 75 ft-lbs
Special Tools
SPECIAL TOOL PART NUMBER
Connector Test Lead Adapter Kit PV-43526
Fluke 73™ Digital Multimeter PV-43546
Inductive Timing Light PV-43537
TROUBLESHOOTING
Basics
Before troubleshooting the ignition system, ensure that the engine stop switch is in the run position, that the battery is
fully charged, and that system related fuses are not open (blown). Check visually for corroded, loose, or broken
connections in critical areas such as the sensor connector itself, or at the engine-to-chassis harness 14 pin connector.
Check for loose wire pins in the individual sensor connectors and at the ECM (under the seat).
The Ignition System Troubleshooting flow chart (and the accompanying text) is designed to help you troubleshoot
ignition system problems. It will not lead you to faulty or fouled spark plugs. Always inspect spark plug condition first
(and replace if necessary) when troubleshooting ignition system problems.
Be sure that the spark plugs are the correct heat range and are the specified resistor spark plugs. Non-resistor spark
plugs can introduce electrical problems due to increased Radio Frequency Interference (RFI).
WARNING
Extremely high voltage is present in the ignition system. Do not touch the ignition coil, wires or spark plugs during test
procedures.
17
IGNITION
Ignition Circuit Diagram
WH / BK
WH / DG
VT/YE
RD / BK
VT / BK
GY
RED
IGNITION
Test Lead Adapter Kit

1. Tests in this section may include the testing of voltage and / or resistance at the connectors for various sensor and
system components. Use the appropriate test adapter lead when performing these tests at connector pin(s).
2. Forcing an incorrect or oversized probe into a connector may damage, misalign, or expand the connector pin or
socket. It can also damage the connector housing, creating another problem which greatly complicates the
diagnostic process. Extreme care must be taken not to introduce problems while probing a connector.
Test Lead Adapter Kit: PV-43526 or suitable Fluke test adapter leads.
CAUTION
Once the ECM connector has been separated from the ECM, do not touch the ECM pins. Static electricity from your
body can damage the ECM. Do not attempt to perform tests on the ECM. Tests are done on socket side of the
connector. Views of the 60 pin connector in this Chapter are from the WIRE side of the connector.
3. The ECM connector is marked 1, 30, 31, and 60 on the wire side of the connector. Refer to the diagram below for
a description of wire location / function, and wire colors.
4. Use the information on the following pages to perform ignition system related tests at ECM connector or component.
ECM Connector Map

Refer to page 5.39 to remove connector from ECM.
TOP VIEW - ECM CONNECTOR (WIRE SIDE SHOWN)

IGNITION RELATED ECM CONNECTOR MAP
System related wire color & pin number shown. Refer to wiring diagram for complete information.
1 2 3 4 5 27 28 29
VIO/PK OPEN W / BK W / GN OPEN OPEN GY OPEN
IG COIL IG COIL SIGNAL FUEL PUMP RELAY
VPWR SIGNAL (FRONT) GROUND
(REAR) ECM CONTROLLED
BN = Brown; GN = Green; BK = Black; GY = Gray; PK = Pink; R = Red; VIO = Violet; W = White
31
VIO/PK
32
OPEN
33
BK/W
34
R/BK
35
OPEN
56
OPEN
57
R
58
BK
59
OPEN
17
ECM IGN
VPWR GROUND SNS CPS + CPS -
VERIFY TERMINAL PINS ARE NOT LOOSE IN CONNECTOR AND WIRE CONNECTION TO TERMINAL PIN IS
SECURE. NOTE: CONNECTOR IS MARKED WITH NUMBERS 1, 30, 31, and 60 ONLY.
IGNITION
Ignition System Test Flowchart
Before proceeding: 1) Verify battery voltage is at least 12.5 Vdc (Test 1).
2) Check fuel pump fuse (10A) and engine fuse (15A)
3) Turn ignition key ON and engine stop switch to RUN. Listen for fuel pump. Pump should run
for 2-3 seconds at initial power up. If fuel pump does not run, see Chapter 5.
Check Spark Inspect Compression,

Good Spark
Test 2 Engine & Fuel System
No Spark, Intermittent, or Poor Spark Remove Spark Plug Wires - Test Resistance
OK Front: 4360-5780 Ohms / Rear: 4080-5050 Ohms (Test 3)
Test Ignition Coil Power Supply (Test 4) No, battery voltage not present during fuel pump cycle
Yes, battery voltage present The Vio/Y wire powers ignition coil and fuel pump. Does the pump run momentarily
(about 2-3 seconds) when ignition key and engine stop switch are first turned ON?
during fuel pump cycle
Check fuel pump power

Yes No
Test ECM Ground Signal to Ignition Coil (Test 4) supply circuit (Chapter 5)
Check for battery voltage on Pin D of the Engine Harness Connector during fuel
pump cycle (remember - voltage will only be present on Vio/Y for 2-3 seconds after
Signal OK No Signal key and stop switches are turned ON).
If voltage is present, repair Vio/Y circuit between Engine Connector & coil connector.
If no battery voltage is present, check Vio/Y splice in Engine Harness (see schematic)
Test Ignition Coil (Test 5)
Inspect Crank Position Sensor and Is resistance within specified range?

Ignition Coil OK Circuit Resistance (Tests 6, 6A, 6B) Is sensor undamaged?
Clean debris from sensor pole.

Check timing wheel on crankshaft Yes No
for damaged teeth.
Re-check all wiring connectors
and harness for damage or poor
connection and re-test for signal. Replace CPS
Incorrect Repair Wiring and/or

Inspect Ground Circuit Connectors
Test 7
Inspect for moisture at 60 pin ECM connector,

Ground Circuit Correct clean and dry if moisture is found
Replace ECM
Note: ECMs rarely fail.
Verify all troubleshooting steps
again before replacing ECM
IGNITION
Battery Voltage Inspection - Test 1 Spark Inspection - Test 2

1. Connect an inductive timing light to one spark plug
1. Access battery area at front of motorcycle.
wire.
2. Set Digital Multimeter (DMM) to DC Volts. Inductive timing light PV-33277-A
2. Turn ignition switch and engine stop switch ON.

> 12.50 Vdc
3. Shift transmission into neutral and pull in clutch lever.
4. Depress starter button and observe timing light.
5. Determine if timing light flashes without interruption

for both cylinders.
6. Consistent flashes indicate some secondary voltage

is present. The likelihood of an ignition related
problem is reduced but not eliminated. Keep the
following points in mind:
3. Inspect battery voltage. • There is a threshold voltage and current required

for timing lights below which they will not trigger
4. If the battery voltage is below 12.5 Vdc, charge or and therefore, not flash.
replace the battery with a fully charged battery. Refer
to Chapter 16 for battery inspection, battery charging • Fouled spark plugs may drop secondary voltage
and charging system inspection. so low that a timing light will not trigger.
NOTE: When operating the starter with a low battery, • With no current flowing (open secondary side of
the voltage available for the ignition coils can drop below the ignition coil) the timing light will not flash.
the minimum required to produce spark.
• A faulty high tension lead (plug wire) or poor
connection is one example of an open secondary.
7. Replace spark plugs, connects plug wires and re-test.
8. If timing light does not flash consistently for one or

both cylinders, test high tension leads (Test 3).
NOTE: The plug caps or coil ends are NOT
removable. Wire must be replaced as an assembly.
17
IGNITION
Coil High Tension Leads - Test 3 Ignition Coil Signal - Test 4

Power To Ignition Coil
CAUTION Battery voltage must be present at the ignition coil during
fuel pump initial cycle, during cranking, and with the
Do not attempt to remove the spark plug caps from the engine running.
spark plug high tension leads. Spark plug caps are 1. Remove ignition switch cover (Chapter 3).
molded to plug wires and available only as an assembly.
Wire resistance specifications includes the resistance of 2. Press tab (A) and disconnect coil harness.
the spark plug caps.
1. Remove high tension leads (HTL) by pulling firmly on A

the boots at the coil and spark plug. DO NOT pull on
the wire or HTL may be permanently damaged.
NOTE: The ignition coil end of the wire is coated
with a film of dielectric powder. Apply dielectric
grease to this connection if powder film is cleaned
or removed.
FRONT TOP VIEW
3. Place DMM selector dial on Volts DC scale.

4. Connect black lead to ground (on engine).
5. Connect a small thin test adapter lead to center
terminal of ignition coil primary connector and positive
(+) meter lead to the test adapter.
2. Test each high tension lead with an ohmmeter and VIO / Y

A B C
compare to specification. Move wire to detect internal
breaks or poor connections at terminal ends.
VDC
Test adapter
Engine Ground
6. With engine stop switch OFF, turn ignition key ON.

7. Turn engine stop switch to RUN. Battery voltage
2871329
should appear on center terminal of connector for 2-
3 seconds until the pump completes its prime cycle.
High Tension Lead Resistance 8. With transmission in Neutral, crank the engine.
Front: 4360 - 5780  Battery voltage should again be present on the
Rear: 4080 - 5050  terminal.
IGNITION
Test 4 (Cont.) Ignition Coil Resistance - Test 5

ECM (Ground) Signal To Ignition Coil
Ignition Coil Primary Winding
ECM ground signal must be present at each outer
terminal of the connector. The signal will appear as a
1. Remove ignition coil (page 17.12).
pulse on the meter bar graph with DMM selector in the
OHMs position. 2. Select OHMS function of DMM.
1. Place the DMM selector dial on the OHMS scale. 3. Measure resistance between terminal 3 and terminal
2. Place a small thin test adapter into one outer terminal 2 on the coil. Compare to specification.
of the connector (either WH/BK or WH/DG wire) and 4. Measure resistance between terminal 1 and terminal
connect one meter lead to the test adapter (B). 2 on the coil. Compare to specification.
WH / BK Primary Windings of
A B C Ignition Coil
Test each outside
terminal to center
terminal

B
3. Connect the other meter lead to engine ground.

4. Place transmission in Neutral.
5. Turn ignition key ON and engine stop switch to RUN.
6. Crank engine with electric starter and watch bar graph Primary Resistance: 0.4 - 0.6 
on the Fluke 73 DMM. Bar graph should pulse while (Be sure to subtract meter lead resistance
engine cranks, indicating a ground signal is present. from measurement
Ignition Coil Secondary Windings
Bar Graph Pulse 1. Remove ignition coil (page 17.12).

2. Select DIODE CHECK function of DMM.
7. Repeat test on other outside wire of connector.
3. Place red DMM lead on center terminal (#2) of coil
• If no pulse is present, test Crankshaft Position
Sensor (Test 6).
primary and black lead on secondary terminal and 17
record.
• If signal is present on one wire and not the other,
4. Move black DMM lead to the other secondary terminal
test related wiring and connections.
and record. (Reading should be the same for both
• If both signals are present and there was battery secondary windings).
voltage on the VIO/Y wire (center terminal) but still
no spark, test ignition coil windings. (Test 5). (Cont.)
IGNITION
Ignition Coil Secondary Windings (TEST 5. Cont.) Crankshaft Position Sensor (CPS)
Resistance Inspection - Test 6
5. Repeat measurements on each secondary coil with
meter leads reversed. NOTE: This test can also be performed at the ECM
6. Compare readings to specification. Resistance connector, to test the entire circuit with the sensor.
should be low with leads one way and OL with leads See test 6A (page 17.11).
reversed.
1. Disconnect Crankshaft Position Sensor (connector is
located at rear of engine).
Secondary Windings 2. Visually inspect sensor wire harness for damage, and
of Ignition Coil loose or broken wires or connector pins.
Test each secondary
3. Select OHMS function of DMM.
coil in DIODE CHECK
mode with meter leads 4. Measure resistance through CPS coil by connecting
one way, then reverse a test adapter lead (C) to sensor wires and to meter
the leads. leads (D).
Specification: 280 @ 20oC, 68oF (+/- 20%)
5. Remove lower right engine cover (timing cover).

6. Visually inspect center pole (E) of crankshaft position
sensor for damage or metal particles clinging to the
magnet. Be sure dowel pins (F) are in place on the
cover (or crankcase) and check for physical damage
Diode inside secondary coil
requires diode check function of DMM to sensor or timing wheel that may affect air gap.
SECONDARY COIL RESISTANCE

USE DIODE CHECK FUNCTION ON DMM
2.0-2.5 Vdc
Open or “OL” with leads reversed F
IGNITION
Crank Position Sensor Circuit And SignaL 10. Remove spark plugs from engine. Install spark plugs
Test 6A into spark plug caps and ground the spark plug
electrodes securely to the engine.
NOTE: A test lead adapter kit is required to prevent 11. Measure AC voltage signal from crank position sensor
connector pin, socket, or case damage. while turning engine over using electric starter with
Connector Test Lead Adapter Kit PV-43526 or spark plugs out and compare to specification.
suitable Fluke test adapter leads
Specification: 2-5 V AC (Spark Plugs Out)
1. Turn ignition key OFF.
2. Remove left side cover.
3. Remove ECM connector from ECM (page 5.39).
Crank Position Sensor Circuit Continuity
Test 6B
4. Select OHMS function on the DMM (
1. Check all pin connectors between sensor and ECM
5. Connect test adapter leads to the DMM leads.
for a good mechanical connection.
6. Place one test adapter lead in pin 57 and the other in
2. Inspect wiring for damage causing an open circuit.
pin 58 of the ECM connector (not the ECM). Compare
resistance to specification.
Ground Circuit Inspection - Test 7
1. Set DMM to OHMS.
2. Connect one meter lead to negative (-) post of battery.
3. Connect other meter lead to main ground locations.
Refer to electrical schematic for locations.
4. At each ground test point, resistance should be less
Red 57 than .5 OHMS.
58 Black
(+) (-)
Specification: 280 @ 20oC, 68oF (+/- 20%)
CPS AC Signal Test

7. With leads connected as for the resistance test (pin
57 and 58 of the ECM connector), select Volts AC
function on the DMM.
8. Turn engine over with electric starter and observe
DMM display.
9. With spark plugs installed voltage reading will be
erratic due to low rpm and pulsing nature of the signal.
The numerical display will be erratic. Watch bar (A) at
bottom of display to determine if a signal exists. Any
fluctuating AC signal is correct for this test.
17
A
Meter on AC Volts Scale
IGNITION
IGNITION COIL Ignition Coil Installation
Ignition Coil Removal 1. Installation procedure is the reverse of removal

procedures.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and remove key. 2. Apply light film of dielectric grease inside the spark
2. Pull ignition coil cover (A) straight outward to remove. plug boot of high tension leads.
3. Remove both high tension leads (B) from coil. 3. Torque coil mount screw (or screws if coil was
removed with bracket attached) to 84 in-lbs (9 Nm).
84 in-lbs (9 Nm)
C
Ignition Switch Removal
84 in-lbs 1. Turn ignition switch OFF and remove key.
(9 Nm)
B 2. Pull ignition coil cover straight outward to remove.
3. Remove mounting screw from face of switch bracket.
4. Open or cut any tie straps that secure the harness.
5. Separate ignition switch connector from main wire
harness by pushing the tab to release.
4. Remove screw (C) and ignition coil. To remove coil

with bracket, remove 2 screws (D).
5. Press tab (E) to remove primary connector.
84 in-lbs (9 Nm)
FRONT TOP VIEW
6. Remove ignition coil.
ELECTRIC STARTER
CHAPTER 18
ELECTRIC STARTER
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.2
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.2
STARTER SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.2
FASTENER TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.2
SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.3
DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.3
TROUBLESHOOTING FLOW CHART MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.3
STARTER CIRCUIT DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.4
TROUBLESHOOTING FLOW CHART 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.5
TROUBLESHOOTING FLOW CHART 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.6
TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.6
BATTERY INSPECTION & CHARGING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.7
BATTERY LOAD TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.7
CIRCUIT & SWITCH TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.7
STARTER RELAY GROUND BYPASS CIRCUIT TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.7
NEUTRAL SWITCH BYPASS TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.8
CLUTCH SWITCH / CIRCUIT TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.9
CLUTCH SWITCH REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.10
CLUTCH SWITCH INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.10
STARTER RELAY TO STARTER MOTOR POSITIVE CABLE BYPASS TEST . . . . . 18.10
STARTER RELAY POSITIVE CIRCUIT TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.11
STARTER RELAY BYPASS TEST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.11
STARTER RELAY TO STARTER MOTOR POSITIVE CABLE BYPASS TEST . . . . . 18.12
POSITIVE SIDE VOLTAGE DROP TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.13
NEGATIVE CABLE BYPASS TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.15
NEGATIVE SIDE VOLTAGE DROP TEST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.16
STARTER CURRENT DRAW TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.18
STARTER MOTOR REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.19
STARTER MOTOR INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.19
STARTER CLUTCH REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.19
18
ELECTRIC STARTER
GENERAL
Safety Information
WARNING
Always disconnect the battery (negative terminal first) before servicing the starter motor.
• Inspect the condition of the battery before troubleshooting the starter system. Also inspect main engine ground
(on crankcase - upper left rear corner) and battery cable connections.
SPECIFICATIONS
Starter Specifications
ELECTRIC STARTER & STARTER CLUTCH
Battery Voltage (Open Circuit Voltage) Above 12.5 Vdc -
Commutator Resistance:
Between Any Two Bars Continuity (0 Ohms) -
Any Commutator Bar to Armature Shaft Infinity (OL on Fluke™ 73) -
Battery Input Terminal Resistance to Insulated Brush Continuity (0 Ohms) -
Battery Cable Terminal Resistance to Motor Case Infinity (OL on Fluke™ 73) -
Starter Motor Brush Length 13 mm ± 0.5 mm 6.5 mm
(0.512 ± 0.020") (0.255")
Starter Motor Operating Amp Draw 90-120 Amps Use inductive ammeter
Starter Motor No Load Amp Draw (Bench Test) 30-40 Amps after initial surge -
Starter Torque Limit Clutch Break-Away Torque 50 ft-lbs when new 35-45 ft-lbs after break-in
Voltage Drop Allowed: Each Connection - Pos Circuit 0.2 V DC (200 millivolts) -
Voltage Drop Allowed: Each Connection - Neg Circuit 0.2 V DC (200 millivolts) -
Total Voltage Drop Allowed - Pos Side Of Starter 0.3 V DC (300 millivolts) -
Total Voltage Drop Allowed - Neg Side Of Starter 0.3 V DC (300 millivolts) -
Fastener Torque Specifications

TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS - STARTER SYSTEM
Description Torque Nm Torque ft-lbs (in-lb) & Notes
Bearing Cover Screws (starter gear cover) 10 Nm (85 in-lb)
Electrical Terminal (+) to Starter Motor 6.8 Nm (60 in-lb)
Gear Position Switch (to crankcase) 2.8 Nm (25 in-lb)
Positive Cable (+) to Motor Terminal 6.8 Nm (60 in-lb)
Primary Drive Gear Bolts (to Crankshaft) 41 Nm 30 ft-lbs Clean crankshaft threads
thoroughly. Install new bolts.
Regulator / Rectifier Screws 10 Nm (85 in-lb)
Rotor Bolt (Flywheel) 102 Nm 75 ft-lbs
Starter Motor to Crankcase Bolts 30 Nm 22 ft-lbs
Starter Motor Case Screws 10 Nm (85 in-lb)
ELECTRIC STARTER
SPECIAL TOOLS
Starter System Special Tools
SPECIAL TOOL PART NUMBER
Digital Multi-Meter PV-43546
Optional Amp Meter Inductive Clamp PV-39617
Rotor Puller (Flywheel) PV-43533
Engine Stop Tool PV-43502
Connector Test Adapter Kit PV-43526
DIAGNOSTICS
Troubleshooting Flow Chart Menu
Symptom Possible Cause Refer To:
Starter motor does not turn with Neutral switch or circuit malfunction Test Neutral Switch (page 18.8)
transmission in neutral. Turns with
clutch pulled in.
Starter motor does not turn with Clutch switch or circuit malfunction, Test Clutch Switch (page 18.9) and
transmission in gear and clutch lever Reverse Switch (if equipped) or reverse switch (Chapter 19).
pulled in. Turns with transmission in circuit malfunction.
neutral.
Starter motor will not turn Low battery voltage. Starter button See Troubleshooting Flow Chart 1
faulty. Poor cable connections. Main (page 18.5)
engine ground loose (front left corner
of crankcase under the electrical
cover).
Starter motor turns slowly. Low battery. Faulty starter motor or See Troubleshooting Flow Chart 2
Engine may or may not start. drive mechanism. (page 18.6)
Engine mechanical problem.
Starter motor turns, but engine does Starter torque limit clutch slipping See Troubleshooting Flow Chart 3
not turn. (Chapter 9). (page 18.6)
Starter motor turns at normal speed, Ignition Problem Chapter 17

but engine does not start. Engine Problem Chapter 7-10
Fuel Delivery Problem Chapter 5
18
ELECTRIC STARTER
Starter Circuit Diagram

Reverse equipped see Chapter 19
Located at rear of
engine near speed
sensor harness
BK/PK
YE/BK
DB/YE
PK PK
RD/BK
YE/WH
OG
YE/WH
RD
DB/YE DB/YE
YE/WH
DB/YE
BK/PK
ELECTRIC STARTER
Troubleshooting Flow Chart 1

Starter Motor Does Not Turn
Inspect Battery Service battery or replace with known

Battery Condition Poor good battery. Inspect Charging
(page 18.7)
System (Chapter 16)
Battery Condition Good
Does Starter Relay Click Yes

When Button Is Pushed? No
Perform Neutral Switch Test (page 18.8) Starter turns Repair or Replace Switch
& Clutch Switch test (page 18.9)
Bypass starter relay

Starter turns Problem is not in high current portion of starter system.
switch circuit
Inspect switching circuit.
(page 18.11)
Starter doesn’t turn
Bypass starter relay

Starter turns Replace starter relay
(page 18.11)
Bypass positive starter cable Perform voltage drop tests for positive
Starter turns
(page 18.12) high current side of starter system.(page 18.13)
Bypass ground side of starter system Perform voltage drop tests for negative
Starter turns high current side of starter system (page 18.16).
(page 18.15)

Engine or starter drive gears are
Inspect starter motor Starter motor O.K. locked up. (High amp draw with no
internal starter problems)
WARNING
Ensure that motorcycle is secure and transmission is in neutral for all tests.
18
CAUTION
Inspect fuses and make sure battery is fully charged before inspecting starter system.
ELECTRIC STARTER
Troubleshooting Flow Chart 2

Starter Motor Turns Slowly, Engine May or May Not Start
Inspect battery: Service battery or replace with

Battery condition poor known good battery. Inspect
(page 18.7)
Charging System (Chapter 16.)
Battery condition good
Perform starter current draw Lower than normal cranking speed

(page 18.18) and lower than normal amp draw
Lower than normal cranking speed Internal starter problem. Remove starter
and high amp draw and inspect.
Perform positive side voltage Voltage drop above Correct problem &
drop. (page 18.13) allowable retest amp draw
Voltage drop within allowable
Perform negative side voltage Voltage drop above Correct problem &
drop. (page 18.16) allowable retest amp draw
Volt drop within allowable
Internal starter problem:

bearings, bushings, shorted Internal starter problem found.
windings, poor brush contact, Rebuild/replace starter motor.
etc. Remove starter & inspect retest amp draw
No internal starter problems found
Carbon build-up in combustion chamber

Engine compression excessive Incorrect valve timing
or internal engine problems Incorrect ignition timing
not allowing parts to rotate freely Internal engine problem
See Engine, Ignition, or Maintenance
chapter
NOTE: Diagnostics require a Digital Multi Meter with a high current shunt or an inductive ammeter clamp.
Troubleshooting Chart 3
Symptom Possible Cause Possible Reason and/or Inspection
Needed
Starter motor turns, but engine Starter clutch malfunction. Refer To Procedure Chapter 9.
does not turn. The starter motor can Starter torque limit clutch slipping. Refer To Procedure Chapter 9.
be heard spinning. Starter gears damage. Refer To Procedure Chapter 9.
ELECTRIC STARTER
Battery Inspection & Charging Procedures CIRCUIT & SWITCH TESTING

1. Refer to Chapter 16. Starter Relay Ground Bypass Circuit Test
Battery Load Test
WARNING
1. Load test battery using a commercially available
battery load tester. Follow the battery load tester Verify that motorcycle is secure and that
manufacturer instructions. transmission is in neutral for the following
NOTE: Although not as conclusive, the following inspection.
test can be used to direct troubleshooting efforts if a
battery load tester is not readily available.
2. Charge battery until open circuit voltage is above 12.5

Vdc (page 18.7).
3. Install battery and connect battery cables.
A
4. Connect digital multimeter to battery and keep it
connected for duration of test.
5. Turn ignition key on and move head light high beam
switch to High Beam for 1 minute (without the engine
running).
1. Shift transmission to Neutral.

NOTE: Shifting transmission to neutral or pulling in
the clutch lever provides a ground path for the starter
relay. This test will temporarily bypass these
components. Refer to Starter Circuit Diagram on
page 18.4.
2. Back-probe the Blue / Yellow wire (A) at the solenoid
V DC > 10.5 after connector (shown disconnected) and connect it to a
1 minute ground (Solenoid connector must remain assembled).
3. Turn ignition switch ON and place engine stop switch
in RUN position.
6. Turn ignition off. Measure battery voltage.
4. Press starter button. If starter motor turns, inspect
7. If battery voltage drops below 10.5 Vdc, re-charge and clutch switch (page 18.9) and gear position switch
re-test battery or replace it. page 18.8).
5. If starter motor does not turn, inspect button by
performing the STARTER RELAY POSITIVE
CIRCUIT TEST on 18.11.
18
ELECTRIC STARTER
Neutral Switch Bypass Test 5. If the neutral lamp comes on, the neutral indicator
switch or wiring between connector and switch is at
The symptom of a faulty neutral indicator switch / circuit fault. Continue to Step 6 to test the neutral indicator
is: switch.
6. Set meter to measure resistance.
• Starter motor does not operate when transmission
is in neutral with clutch lever released but does 7. Place one meter lead on Black/Pink wire on switch side
operate with the clutch lever pulled in. of connector.
1. Turn ignition switch on and place engine stop switch

in the RUN position.
2. Shift transmission into Neutral.
B
3. Observe neutral indicator light.
4. If indicator is not working with transmission in neutral:
• Disconnect neutral indicator switch (B).

NOTE: When the Neutral Indicator Switch is
disconnected, the multi-function display (MFD) will
display (---) regardless of gear position (with Key
ON).
• Connect Black/Pink of harness side connector pin

to ground on engine (not switch side of connector) 8. Connect the other lead to engine ground.
with a jumper lead. This provides a path to ground 9. Compare reading to Table 1 below.
for the neutral light.
10. Replace neutral switch or repair wiring as necessary.
11. If neutral switch is working correctly and neutral
indicator did not light with the harness wire grounded,
inspect neutral lamp circuit wiring and connectors for
B an open circuit.
If switch is faulty, refer to Neutral Indicator Switch
Removal / Installation (Chapter 19).
TABLE 1 - TESTING NEUTRAL PORTION OF NEUTRAL INDICATOR SWITCH
Gear Position Meter Probe # 1 Meter Probe # 2 Ohmmeter Reading*
Neutral Black/Pink Crankcase (ground) < .5 

(switch side of connector)
Any Gear - Other Than Black/Pink Crankcase (ground) OL

Neutral (switch side of connector)
* Be sure to subtract meter probe resistance from resistance reading
ELECTRIC STARTER
Clutch Switch / Circuit Test 7. If clutch switch does not test as described, inspect
clutch switch, clutch switch wiring or mounting of
Refer to Starter Circuit Diagram on page 18.4. switch to clutch lever for faults.
8. Disconnect switch wiring connector at handlebar.
Symptom of a faulty clutch switch circuit:
• Starter motor will not operate with transmission in
gear and clutch lever pulled in. Starter operates
with transmission in neutral.
Use an ohmmeter to determine if continuity is present
when the switch is closed (lever pulled in).
1. Transmission can be in neutral or in any gear.
2. Separate the 2 pin connector (A) from starter solenoid.
3. Set meter to measure ohms ().
4. Connect red (+) lead of DMM to Blue/Yellow wire in
connector on harness side using a test probe (A) from
Victory Connector Test Kit PV-43526. 9. Connect ohmmeter across the outer 2 terminals of
clutch switch:
5. Connect black meter lead to battery negative post or
ground. • Test for continuity when clutch lever is pulled to
handlebar.
6. Operate clutch lever while observing meter display:
• Pull clutch lever to the handlebar. Meter should • Test for high resistance with lever released.
display continuity or very low resistance (less than
1 ohm) when the clutch switch closes.
• Release clutch lever, meter should display OL

(open line). 10. If switch tests correctly at connector, check circuit
between clutch lever switch and starter relay, including
the LH bar switch connector.
11. If switch fails test, inspect mounting of switch.
12. If switch is mounted correctly and physically operates
but does not open and close electrically, replace switch.
A 18
OL
ELECTRIC STARTER
Clutch Switch Removal 2. Connect one clamp of a heavy-duty, automotive

1. Disconnect wire harness at the switch (B). remote starter switch to positive terminal lug at starter
motor.
2. Remove retaining screw (C). Pull clutch lever and
secure it to the handlebar. Remove switch.
2 pin connector
Starter
B Relay
C 9 in-lbs (1 Nm)
Clutch Switch Installation

1. Pull clutch lever and secure to handlebar.
2. Install switch and retaining screw. Torque to
Remote Starter Switch
specification.
3. Connect wire harness.
3. Connect other clamp of remote starter switch to
4. Release clutch handle. positive terminal of battery.
5. Verify proper operation.
WARNING
Do not allow any part of the jumper cable clamp to
Starter Relay To Starter Motor Positive Cable touch the chassis or any other ground. Be sure
Bypass Test transmission is in neutral.
4. Make sure transmission is in neutral, key switch off and

WARNING stop switch off.
5. Pull in clutch lever and depress the remote starter
Secure motorcycle and place transmission in
switch momentarily.
neutral for the following test.
6. If starter turns, there is excessive resistance in the
positive, high current side of the starter system. Go to
WARNING Positive Side Voltage Drop Test.
The following test involves high current, heat and 7. If starter does not turn, go to Negative Cable Bypass
possible sparks. Wear a face shield and approved Test.
safety glasses while doing the following test.
1. Place the transmission in neutral.
ELECTRIC STARTER
Starter Relay Positive Circuit Test Starter Relay Bypass Test
WARNING WARNING
Secure motorcycle and place transmission in Secure motorcycle and place transmission in
neutral for the following test. neutral for the following test. Be sure the
transmission is in neutral!
Refer to Starter Circuit Diagram on page 18.4.
1. Place the transmission in neutral. WARNING

2. Remove electrical cover. The following test involves high current, heat and
3. Separate connector at starter relay. possible sparks. Wear a face shield and approved
safety glasses while doing the following test. Only
4. Set DMM to DC Volts. use the tool recommended to prevent excessive
5. Check battery voltage by testing across battery heat and possible burns.
terminals. Voltage reading should be at or above 12.5
Vdc.
6. Connect red (+) lead of DMM to the Yellow / White wire
of the starter relay wiring harness connector (A) using
a test probe from Victory Connector Test Kit PV 43526.
Remote Starter Switch
2. Remove the electrical cover to access the solenoid on

the back of the battery box.
7. Connect DMM black lead to battery negative post.
3. Connect one lead of a remote starter switch to one of
8. Turn ignition key ON and Engine Stop Switch to RUN the main battery terminal posts on the relay and the
position. other lead to the other main terminal post on the relay.
9. Press starter button. The meter should display battery
voltage. If voltage is more than .2 volts below battery CAUTION
voltage, inspect the power supply circuit.
Do not allow the metal clips of the remote starter relay
10. If no voltage is present on the wire, check for power on switch to touch each other and short out.
pin 3 of the right handlebar switch connector (located
under the console in front of the handlebars). 4. Depress button on remote starter switch.
11. If power is present on the BK/R wire (pin 3) press the
start button to determine if power is supplied to the
5. If starter motor operates, and the Positive Circuit Test, 18
Clutch Switch Test, and Neutral Switch Test have
Y/W wire. Check for good continuity through the start passed inspection, replace the relay.
button (pin 3 to pin 4 on the switch side connector) and
for good continuity from switch to starter relay 6. If the starter motor does not operate, inspect cables by
connector on the Y/W wire. performing tests on following pages.
ELECTRIC STARTER
Starter Relay To Starter Motor Positive Cable 3. Connect other clamp of remote starter switch to
Bypass Test positive terminal of battery.
WARNING
WARNING
Do not allow any part of the jumper cable clamp to
Secure motorcycle and place transmission in touch the chassis or any other ground. Be sure
neutral for the following test. transmission is in neutral.
4. Make sure transmission is in neutral, key switch off and

WARNING stop switch off.
The following test involves high current, heat and 5. Pull in clutch lever and depress the remote starter
possible sparks. Wear a face shield and approved switch momentarily.
safety glasses while doing the following test.
6. If starter turns, there is excessive resistance in the
positive, high current side of the starter system. Go to
Positive Side Voltage Drop Test.
7. If starter does not turn, go to Negative Cable Bypass
Test.
2 pin connector
Starter
Relay
2. Connect one clamp of a heavy-duty, automotive

remote starter switch to positive terminal lug at starter
motor.
ELECTRIC STARTER
Positive Side Voltage Drop Test 1. Remove spark plug caps.
Symptoms: Starter motor does not turn or turns slowly 2. Install test spark plugs or plugs with the gap CLOSED
when starter relay is bypassed. Starter motor works into plug caps.
correctly when performing Starter Relay Positive Cable 3. Ground spark plug center electrode to engine.
Bypass Test.
NOTE: *The total voltage drop between the battery (+)
and starter motor must not exceed 0.3 Vdc (300 mV).
CAUTION
The ignition system must be disabled when doing
voltage drop tests, if engine starts it will be difficult to
measure voltage drop. To disable ignition system
quickly and safely, observe the following steps.
POSITIVE SIDE VOLTAGE DROP TESTS

Location Allowable Voltage Drop
Battery (+) To Starter (+) 0.3 Vdc (300 mV)
Battery (+) to Battery Side of Relay 0.2 Vdc (200 mV)*
Across Relay 0.2 Vdc (200 mV)*
Starter (+) to Starter Side of Relay 0.2 Vdc (200 mV)*
CAUTION
Only operate starter long enough to stabilize the reading on the DMM (less than 10 seconds). Let starter motor cool
down between each voltage drop test to prevent damage to starter motor.
4. Place transmission in neutral. 7. Place the other lead of the DMM to starter motor
positive terminal screw.
2 pin connector
8. Turn ignition switch on, turn engine stop switch to run
Starter position. Pull in clutch lever.
9. Operate the starter normally (no jumper cables in

place) and observe meter display.
Relay
10. If DMM reads more than 0.3 Vdc (300 mV DC) when
the starter motor is engaged, it indicates that there is
excessive resistance in the starter’s battery positive
path. Continue with the following tests to isolate each
section of the positive path and observe the voltage
drop with DMM leads placed as indicated.
(Cont.)
18
5. Set DMM to DC Volts.
6. Place one lead of DMM to positive battery post.
ELECTRIC STARTER
11. Place one lead of DMM to positive battery post. Ensure 19. If corrosion is found, wash all connections with a
DMM is set to read DC Volts. solution of baking soda and water, wire brush all
contact areas, apply a light film of dielectric grease to
the hardware and tighten connections. Retest to verify
problem has been corrected.
2 pin connector
Starter
2 pin connector
Starter
Relay
Relay
12. Place other lead of DMM to relay terminal leading to

battery.
13. Engage starter and observe meter display, it should
read less than 0.2 Vdc (200 mV DC). 20. Place one lead of DMM to battery side of relay. Reset
DMM to read DC Volts if necessary.
14. If voltage drop is observed, the cable, connection at the
battery or connection at the relay is causing resistance 21. Place other lead to starter motor side of relay.
and must be corrected. 22. Engage starter and observe meter display; it should
15. Inspect cable ends for corrosion where cable is read less than 0.2 Vdc (200 mV DC).
connected to terminal lugs. 23. If voltage drop is observed, remove cables and clean
16. Remove cable. Set the DMM to read Ohms. cable terminals and relay terminals. Reattach cables.
Retest voltage drop.
17. Place DMM leads at both ends of the cable and
measure the cable’s resistance. The resistance should 24. If voltage drop is still observed through the relay,
be 0 ohms. Replace cable if necessary. replace relay.
18. Inspect battery post, battery cable lug and relay lug for (Cont.)
corrosion or looseness.
NOTE: Corrosion has resistance that limits or stops the
flow of current to the starter motor.
ELECTRIC STARTER
25. Place one lead of DMM to starter motor side of relay. Negative Cable Bypass Test
Ensure DMM is set to read Volts DC.
1. Place transmission in neutral.
Starter 2 pin connector Starter 2 pin connector
Relay
Relay
Jumper Cable
Starter Motor Case
26. Place other lead of DMM to starter motor positive 2. Remove electrical cover.
terminal.
3. Connect one clamp of an automotive type jumper cable
27. Engage starter and observe meter display. (heavy gauge jumper cable) to battery negative post.
28. If voltage drop is observed, cable connection at relay 4. Connect other end of jumper cable to a good ground
or connection at starter motor is causing resistance location on starter motor body.
and must be corrected.
5. Make sure transmission is in neutral. Turn ignition key
29. Inspect cable ends for corrosion where cable is and stop switch on. Pull clutch lever in and attempt to
connected to terminal lugs. start motorcycle.
30. Remove cable. Set DMM to read Ohms. 6. If starter motor turns, there is excessive resistance in
31. Place DMM leads at both ends of cable and measure the negative, high current side of the starter system.
cable resistance. The resistance should be 0 ohms. Perform Negative Side Voltage Drop Test.
Replace cable if necessary. Remember to subtract test 7. If starter does not turn and all troubleshooting steps
lead resistance. have led to this test, replace starter motor.
32. Inspect starter cable lug and relay lug for corrosion or
looseness.
33. If corrosion is found, wash all connections with a
solution of baking soda and water, wire brush all
hardware and tighten connections. Retest to verify 18
ELECTRIC STARTER
Negative Side Voltage Drop Test

NEGATIVE SIDE VOLTAGE DROP TESTS
Location Allowable Voltage Drop
Battery (-) To Starter Body (-) 0.3 Volts DC (300 mV)
Battery (-) to Battery Cable Ground Connection At Engine 0.2 Volts DC (200 mV)*
Battery Cable Ground Connection To Starter Body (-) 0.2 Volts DC (200 mV)*
NOTE: *The total voltage drop of these two items must 4. Place other lead of DMM to a clean ground on starter
not exceed 0.3 Volts DC (300 mV). motor body.
5. Turn ignition switch ON and engine stop switch to RUN
CAUTION position. Pull clutch lever in.
Only operate the starter long enough to stabilize the 6. Operate starter normally (no jumper cables in place)
reading on the DMM (less than 10 seconds running time). and observe meter display.
Let starter motor cool down between each voltage drop 7. If DMM reads more than 0.3 Volts DC when starter
tests to prevent damage to starter motor. motor is engaged, it indicates that there is excessive
resistance in the starter’s battery negative path.
Disable the ignition system so engine will not start during Continue with the following tests to isolate each section
this test. of the negative path and observe the voltage drop with
• Remove spark plug caps. DMM leads placed as indicated.
8. Place one lead of the DMM to the negative battery post.
• Install test spark plugs or plugs with the gap closed Ensure that the DMM is set to read DC Volts.
into plug caps.
9. Place the other lead of the DMM to the battery cable
• Ground center electrode of spark plugs to engine. engine ground connection.
1. Place transmission in neutral. (Cont.)
2 pin connector
Starter
Relay
2. Set DMM to DC Volts.

3. Place one lead of DMM to negative battery post.
ELECTRIC STARTER
10. Engage the starter and observe the meter display, it 18. Place the other lead on starter motor body.
should read less than 0.2 Volts DC (200 mV DC).
19. Engage the starter and observe the meter display, it
should read less than 0.2 Volts DC (200 mV DC).
20. If voltage drop is observed, there is resistance between
Starter 2 pin connector the battery cable connection at engine and the
mounting surfaces of the starter motor. While this
would be unusual, it is possible.
Relay
Starter 2 pin connector
Relay
Battery Ground Located at rear

left side of engine.
11. If voltage drop is observed, the cable, connection at the

battery, connection at the engine or mounting surface
of the starter motor body is causing resistance and
must be corrected.
12. Inspect the cable ends for corrosion where cable is Battery Ground Located at rear
left side of engine.
connected to battery or engine.
13. Remove the cable. Set the DMM to read Ohms. 21. Remove and clean the connection between ground
battery cable and engine.
14. Place the DMM leads at both ends of the cable and
measure the cable’s resistance. The resistance should 22. Remove the starter and ensure that the starter is
be 0 ohms. Remember to subtract meter lead making firm contact with engine. Ensure that the starter
resistance. Replace the cable if necessary. mounting bolts are tight.
15. Inspect the battery post, battery cable lug and engine 23. If corrosion is found, wash all connections with a
battery cable mount for corrosion or looseness. solution of baking soda and water, wire brush all
16. If corrosion is found, wash all connections with a the hardware and tighten connections. Retest to verify
solution of baking soda and water, wire brush all problem has been corrected.
contact areas, apply a light film of dielectric grease to 18
the hardware and tighten connections. Retest to verify
17. Place one lead of DMM to battery cable mount at
engine. Reset the DMM to read DC Volts if necessary.
ELECTRIC STARTER
Starter Current Draw Test 4. Set DMM to Volts DC scale and connect red lead of
meter to positive post of battery.
WARNING 5. Connect black lead of meter to negative post of battery.

6. Turn ignition switch on and observe ammeter. It should
Do not allow any part of the jumper cable clamp to register negative amps. If it does not, turn the ammeter
touch the chassis or any other ground. probe around.
7. Make sure ignition switch is on, engine stop switch is
CAUTION in the run position, transmission is in neutral, clutch
lever pulled in and that the ignition system is disabled.
Disable the ignition system so that the engine will not
8. Press starter switch and crank starter for about 5
start during this test. seconds and observe both meters and the tachometer.
Remove spark plug caps. 9. The battery voltage should remain above 9.6 volts.
10. The amperage draw of the starter should not exceed
Install test spark plugs into plug caps. 130 amps. See page 18.18 for Starter Current Draw
chart.
Ground spark plugs against engine.
1. Inspect the battery (see procedure). Charge or

replace battery as necessary before proceeding.
2. Place transmission in neutral.
3. Position an inductive ammeter clamp on battery
positive cable.
Starter
< 130 amps
ELECTRIC STARTER
STARTER CURRENT DRAW RESULTS (Good Battery Condition Verified)

Amperage Draw Battery Voltage Engine RPM Possible Problem
90 to 120 amps 9.6 Volts DC or Greater Greater Than 400 rpm Normal
Less Than 90 amps 9.6 Volts DC or Greater Less Than 400 rpm Internal starter problems
Greater Than 130 amps Less Than 9.6 Volts DC Less Than 400 rpm Inspect for voltage drops on
positive or negative side of starter
circuit.
Greater Than 130 amps Less Than 9.6 Volts DC Less Than 400 rpm Voltage drops within acceptable
limits.
Remove starter & inspect.
Greater Than 130 amps Less Than 9.6 Volts DC Less Than 400 rpm Voltage drops within acceptable
limits.
No internal starter problem.
Engine compression is excessive
or internal engine problems not
allowing parts to rotate freely.
Starter Motor Removal Starter Motor Installation
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the ignition switch is turned off. Make sure that the ignition switch is turned off and
Remove the negative cable at the battery before that the negative cable is disconnected from the
removing the starter motor. battery before installing the starter.
1. Remove exhaust system. (Refer to Chapter 3) 1. Place starter into the engine case while aligning the
starter mounting lugs as closely as possible during the
2. Remove regulator/rectifier assembly.
installation process.
3. Remove cable from starter terminal.
2. Rotate the starter to align starter mounting lugs with
bolt holes in engine cases.
3. Install starter mounting bolts and tighten to
specification.
22 ft-lbs (30 Nm)
4. Connect starter motor cable and cable nut. Torque
cable nut to specification.
60 in-lbs (6.8 Nm)
5. Install regulator/rectifier assembly.
85 in-lbs (10 Nm)
6. Install exhaust system. Refer to Chapter 3.
4. Place drain pan under starter.
7. Connect negative battery cable.
5. Remove 2 starter motor mounting bolts and remove
starter.
Starter Clutch Removal 18
1. Refer to Chapter 9.
ELECTRIC STARTER
NOTES
WIRING / LIGHTING SYSTEMS
CHAPTER 19
HEADLAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.2
HEADLAMP / TURN SIGNAL ASSEMBLY VIEW - CROSS ROADS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.2
HEADLAMP ASSEMBLY VIEW - CROSS COUNTRY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.3
HEADLAMP (HID) - CROSS COUNTRY TOUR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.4
HEADLAMP SYSTEM WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.5
TAIL LAMP / BRAKE LAMP SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.6
TURN SIGNAL / HAZARD SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.7
TURN SIGNAL SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.7
TURN SIGNAL FLASHER MODULE - INPUT / OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.8
TURN SIGNAL SYSTEM OVERVIEW AND DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.9
SPEEDOMETER / TACHOMETER SIGNALS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.10
SPEED SENSOR TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.10
TACHOMETER SIGNAL TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.11
SPEEDOMETER GEAR POSITION INDICATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.11
SWITCH TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.12
REAR BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.12
FRONT BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.12
NEUTRAL INDICATOR SWITCH INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.13
NEUTRAL INDICATOR SWITCH REMOVAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.13
CLUTCH SWITCH TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.13
TIPOVER SENSOR (ANGLE SENSOR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.14
SIDE STAND SWITCH INFORMATION (EU MODELS ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.15
SIDE STAND SWITCH TESTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.15
HORN RELAY CIRCUITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.16
SYSTEM DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.16
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER CONNECTOR INPUT / OUTPUT (CROSS COUNTRY) . . 19.17
HEATERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.18
HEATED SEAT / HAND GRIP WIRING DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.18
HEATED GRIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.19
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LOCATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.20
COMPONENT LOCATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.20
GROUND LOCATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.21
CONNECTOR PIN INSPECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.21
CRUISE CONTROL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.22
OPERATION OVERVIEW - SETTING SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.22
OPERATION OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.22
CRUISE CONTROL DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.23
CRUISE MODULE INPUT / OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.24
REVERSE SYSTEM (ACCESSORY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.25
WIRING DIAGRAM / REVERSE HARNESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.25
REVERSE SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.26
REVERSE SYSTEM SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.28
OPERATING THE REVERSE SYSTEM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.28
REVERSE MODULE / FUSE ACCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.28
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM BREAKOUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.29
SPEEDOMETER (CROSS COUNTRY / CROSS COUNTRY TOUR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.29
SPEEDOMETER (CROSS ROADS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.30
TRUNK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.31
FAIRING (CROSS COUNTRY / CROSS COUNTRY TOUR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.32
19
HEADLAMP
Headlamp / Turn Signal Assembly View - Cross Roads & Hard-Ball
Apply Victory All Purpose 48 in-lbs (5.4 Nm)

Grease 2872187

(LOW BEAM)
Battery voltage should be present
on Yellow/Pink wire with key ON.

48 in-lbs
(HIGH BEAM)
(5.4 Nm)

48 in-lbs
(5.4 Nm) Turn Handlebars FULL RIGHT
before tightening left P-Clamp
48 in-lbs
(5.4 Nm)
36 in-lbs
(4.0 Nm)
28 ft-lbs 17 ft-lbs
(38 Nm) (23 Nm)
Headlamp Assembly View - Cross Country


(HIGH BEAM)
Aim Adjusters
85 in-lbs
(9.6 Nm)
48 in-lbs
(5.4 Nm)

(LOW BEAM)
Europe Battery voltage should be present
on Yellow/Pink wire with key ON.
(EXCEPT HID)
85 in-lbs
(9.6 Nm)
19
19
Headlamp (Hid) - Cross Country Tour

Headlamp System Wiring
19
19
Tail Lamp / Brake Lamp System Wiring Diagram
Lamps are internally regulated and can
be powered directly to test.
TURN SIGNAL / HAZARD SYSTEM
Turn Signal System Wiring Diagram
NOTE: To operate turn signals, ECM must be
Turn signal units are internally regulated Simplified Wiring Diagram powered. Turn ignition key ON and Engine Stop
and can be powered directly to test. switch to RUN.
19
19
Turn Signal Flasher Module - Input / Output

The flasher module is under the right side cover. Ignition must be ON and Engine Stop switch set to RUN for T/S function.
FLASHER MODULE PIN FUNCTION
Pin Function / Name Wire Color Overview of Operation
Turn Signal Indicator DARK BLUE / Module sends power to the turn signal indicator lamp on this wire when a turn
1
Light Output VIOLET signal or hazard is selected (Cross Roads only).
Switched Power Input DARK GREEN / +12VDC From Turn Signal / Horn relay. This wire supplies battery voltage to
2
(+12VDC) PINK the flasher module.
This wire receives a left turn ground input from Pin 14 of ECM (auto cancel
circuit). Ground signal must pass through Pin 15 of Chassis-to-Engine
BLACK / DARK
3 Left Turn Input harness connector. When ECM auto-cancels a turn signal (or if manually
BLUE
cancelled by the operator at the turn signal switch) this ground is taken away
from the flasher module by the ECM.
This wire receives a right turn ground input from Pin 15 of ECM (auto-cancel
circuit). Ground signal must pass through Pin 16 of the Chassis-to-Engine
4 Right Turn Input BLACK / RED harness connector. When ECM auto cancels a turn signal (or if manually
cancelled by the operator at the turn signal switch) this ground is taken away
from the flasher module by the ECM.
5 Ground BLACK / WHITE Flasher module ground.
This wire is grounded through the hazard switch when the switch is closed,
DARK BLUE /
6 Hazard Switch Input and the module flashes all turn signals (module sends 12V to Pin 7 and Pin
WHITE
12 of the module for distribution to both left and right side turn signals)
DARK BLUE / Module sends power to right turn signals on this wire when it receives a RH
7 Right Turn Signal Output
RED turn signal input (ground) on module Pin 4 (BK/RD) (from ECM Pin 15)
8 Engine Diode Anode RED / WHITE “Negative” side of ECM Protection Diode. Prevents voltage spikes to ECM
9 Engine Diode Cathode ORANGE +12VDC side of ECM Protection Diode. Prevents voltage spikes to ECM
Grounded when clutch lever switch is closed so engine can be started in gear
Neutral Light Diode
10 BLUE /YELLOW when lever is pulled in. Diode prevents Neutral light from illuminating when
Anode
clutch lever is pulled in with transmission in gear
Neutral Light Diode

11 BROWN / PINK Ground path through neutral light switch when transmission is in neutral
Cathode
Module sends power to left turn signals on this wire when it receives a LH turn
12 Left Turn Signal Output DARK BLUE
signal input (ground) on module Pin 3 (BK/BU) (from ECM Pin 14)
Turn Signal System Overview And Diagnostics
Refer to system wiring diagram on page 19.7. For all testing / troubleshooting, remember to turn the ignition key ON
and the engine stop switch to RUN. LED signals are internally regulated and can be powered directly to test signal
unit.
OVERVIEW OF OPERATION:
The Auto-Cancel function of the turn signal system is controlled by the ECM (located under the LH side cover). When
the left or right turn signal switch is activated, the switch connects the BK/WH ground wire at the switch to either ECM
Pin 20 (for a LEFT signal) or ECM Pin 30 (for a RIGHT signal). Note that this connection travels through either Pin 17
(for left turn) or Pin 18 (for right turn) of the Engine-to-Chassis Harness connector under the seat.
When the ECM receives a ground signal from the switch on Pin 20 or 30, it then relays this ground signal to the Flasher
Module Pin 3 (for left) or Pin 4 (for right) and maintains the ground connection until automatically or manually cancelled.
When the flasher module receives a ground input from the ECM, it sends an intermittent (flashing) 12VDC to the
appropriate turn signal.
When time / distance criteria for signal cancellation is achieved, the ECM takes away the ground from the Flasher Module,
and the turn signal is canceled. The signal can also be manually cancelled by pushing the turn signal button straight
inward. This connects both turn signal switch wires to ground at the same time, and the ECM sees this as a “manual
cancel” input.
Note that because the Hazard system requires no cancel function, the ECM is not part of the Hazard circuit. A HAZARD
input (a ground) goes directly from the Hazard Switch to Pin 6 of the Flasher Module. The module sees the ground on
Pin 6 and sends flashing 12VDC to BOTH left and right turn signals. The hazard function overrides a turn signal input.
GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING: Turn signal diagnostics can be accomplished by manually connecting the
appropriate wires to ground at various points in the system (most easily performed at the Engine-to-Chassis harness
connector) and by verifying wire and switch continuity with an Ohmmeter. As with any electrical malfunction, ALWAYS
verify FIRST that all wire connections are clean and tight. Look at the wires where they enter connectors or at the fuse
box. Pull lightly on wires to be sure they are secured in the connector and not loose. TIP: If turn signal(s) function when
Hazard switch is ON, turn signal wire connections, signal lamp, and related wiring from Flasher Module are all in working
order. Check ground inputs from switch to ECM and ground outputs from ECM to Flasher Module as described below.
CONNECTOR AND COMPONENT LOCATION: The turn signal switch connector is located inside the headlamp housing
(Cross Roads) or inside the fairing (Cross Country). The Flasher Module is located under the right side cover.
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH BYPASS TEST:

1. Locate Engine-to-Chassis harness connector under the left side cover and leave it connected.
2. On engine harness side of connector, jump VT/DB wire (Pin 17) to test left turn, or VT/RD (Pin 18) for right turn to
ground at battery negative (-) post.
NOTE: If piercing probes are used, use care not to damage the wire. Seal probe marks on wire insulation
when test is completed.
3. Turn ignition key ON and Stop switch to RUN. If turn signal works, inspect turn signal switch continuity and the path
between switch and engine harness connector (to test Engine-to-Chassis harness connection perform Step 2 on
the chassis side of connector).
4. The same basic test outlined above for the ground inputs from the switch can be performed on the ground output
wires that supply the ground from the ECM to the to the flasher module (BK/BU Pin 15 and BK/R Pin 16). If turn
signal function is restored when the output wire is grounded, the Flasher Module (and connection to the Flasher)
is in working order. If signal does not flash with out put wire grounded, inspect Flasher Module connection and
continuity of BK/DB or BK/RD wire to ECM.
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH CONTINUITY TEST:

1. Remove headlamp housing cover (or headlamp on Cross Country models). Locate LH switch 14 Pin connector.
2. Separate connector. Connect ohmmeter to Pin 4 and Pin 5 (RH turn) or Pin 4 and Pin 6 (LH turn) on switch side of
19
19
connector. Hold switch to left or right and verify good continuity in each position.
SPEEDOMETER / TACHOMETER SIGNALS

Speed Sensor Test
The speed sensor signal can be tested at various points on the vehicle depending on accessibility and preference, or if
equipped with Cruise Control, follow the self-diagnostic procedure on page 19.23.
.
Test points include:
• The cruise control harness connector (under the seat in the front frame opening).
• The speedometer connector (inside the headlamp or fairing).
NOTE: The signal from the speed sensor is supplied to the ECM on Pin 42, and distributed or used by the
ECM to operate the speedometer, the cruise control module (whether equipped with cruise or not, the
connector is there). If any one of these components is functioning properly (for example, the speedometer
works or the cruise control will accept a set speed) then the speed sensor itself is functional and supplying a
signal to the ECM. Diagnostics should be focused on the non functional circuit, not on the speed sensor itself.
1. Remove the seat.

2. Disconnect the cruise control connector (A) and locate the Dark Green/Dark Blue wire on Pin K. (Cross Country
shown below, Cross Roads similar).
3. Safely elevate the rear wheel so it can be rotated for the test.
4. Set digital multimeter to measure DC voltage.
5. Connect red meter lead to the DG/DB wire in pin K.
6. Connect the black meter lead to engine or battery ground.
7. Turn ignition key ON and rotate rear wheel slowly while observing the bar graph below the digital display on the
meter. Note: The bar graph updates much faster than the number display and will make it easier to see a voltage
swing.
8. Voltage should toggle between approximately .06 volts and battery voltage if a speed signal is present.
NOTE: Look for a voltage swing - not a specific voltage.
9. If no speed signal is present, inspect all connections and the related wires in the connectors.
10. Test speed sensor using Speedometer Signal Tester PV-43544 and adaptor harness PV-47303.
Tachometer Signal Test

• The Tachometer signal is delivered on the CAN bus 6 pin connector to the gauge. This test will verify that the
tachometer signal is getting to the gauge. To test for tach signal:
1. Turn the ignition key ON.

2. Turn the cruise control OFF (Press OFF button).
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
4. Be sure transmission is in NEUTRAL.
5. Turn the ignition key to the ON position and start the engine. Hold the RES/ACC button down while you press the
cruise control ON button.
6. Release both buttons. If a tachometer signal is present, the cruise indicator lamp should flash at a rate based on
engine RPM. Rev the engine. The rate of flash should increase with RPM.
Speedometer Gear Position Indicator

For model years 2011-2013, ALL Victory Motorcycles with a gear indicator display will show dashes (---) if the clutch lever
is pulled in (clutch disengaged). The gear indicator system uses multiple inputs to show the gear number 1 through 6.
ALL of the following items must be present for gear indicator function:
• Vehicle ignition and run / stop switch are powered and the engine is running.
• Vehicle is in motion.
• Vehicle clutch lever is released (clutch engaged).
• Vehicle transmission is in gear 1 through 6 (not neutral).

19
19
SWITCH TESTING Front Brake Light Switch Test

1. Disconnect wires (A) from switch.
Rear Brake Light Switch Test
NOTE: The rear brake switch can also be tested by 2. Connect ohmmeter to switch contacts and test for good
following the cruise control self-diagnostic procedure on continuity through switch when front brake is applied.
page 19.23 (if equipped with cruise).
SPECIFICATION: Continuity When Brake Applied
1. Remove left highway bar and left outer chin fairing.
NOTE: The front brake switch can also be tested by
2. Disconnect rear brake light switch wires (B).
following the cruise control self-diagnostic procedure on
3. Connect ohmmeter to switch contacts. page 19.23(if equipped with cruise).
4. Apply light pressure to rear brake.
5. The switch should become conductive (resistance less
than 2 Ohms) as soon as brake pedal resistance is felt.
SPECIFICATION: Continuity When Brake Applied
Rear brake
A Front brake hydraulic
micro switch pressure
located on front switch
brake lever perch located above oil filter
Neutral Indicator Switch Inspection 4. Connect the other meter lead to the BK / PK (Neutral
switch) wire in the switch side of the connector. Shift
1. Disconnect Neutral switch 2 pin connector located at transmission into Neutral. There should be low
the rear of engine by the vertical frame down-tube. resistance to ground.
2. Set DMM selector to Ohms. Neutral Switch Test
3. Connect one meter lead to battery negative terminal. 5. Shift transmission into Neutral.
6. Compare resistance to Table 1.
TABLE 1 - TESTING NEUTRAL SIDE OF GEAR POSITION SWITCH
Gear Meter lead connections Ohmmeter Reading*
Neutral Black / Pink Crankcase < 1.0 
Any gear (except Neutral)  (OL)
* Be sure to subtract meter lead resistance from resistance reading
NEUTRAL INDICATOR SWITCH REMOVAL

1. Remove exhaust system and drive sprocket cover.
2. Remove 2 screws.
3. Disconnect 2-pin connector located near rear top of
crankcase (follow wires from switch to connector).
4. Remove wire harness from P-clips on crankcase.
5. Remove switch.
6. Remove pin and spring from shift drum.
7. Remove sealing O-ring.
8. Assemble in reverse order with a new O-ring. Torque
screws to 43 in-lbs (4.9 Nm) and P-clamp screws to 87
in-lbs (9.8 Nm).
Clutch Switch Testing

1. Refer to page 18.9 to test the clutch switch and circuit.
19
19
Tipover Sensor (Angle Sensor)

OVERVIEW OF OPERATION
The Tipover Sensor (TOS) is used to disable the fuel pump, fuel injector, and ignition circuits in the event of a crash or
tipover condition.
The ECM sends a 5VDC reference to the sensor and monitors the output voltage. From the output signal, the ECM can
tell whether the TOS system is in normal operation, if the vehicle is tipped over, or if there is an open or short in the
system wiring. Only a tipover voltage from the sensor will cause the ECM to disable the fuel pump and ignition circuits.
If the TOS system wiring is disconnected (open / high) the ECM will set a fault code (and subsequent CHK ENG light)
but will not disable the engine’s operational circuits. The same is true for a TOS system short to ground (low).
Only in the event of an actual tipover condition is the voltage output

within a range that will cause the ECM to disconnect the fuel and
ignition circuits as well as the internal drivers that control them.
TIPOVER SENSOR RESET

After a Tipover Condition Has Occurred:
1. Return the motorcycle to the upright position and place it on Actual tipover condition code
the side stand.
2. Be sure the Engine Stop (kill) switch is in the RUN position.
3. Turn the ignition key OFF and wait 15 seconds.
4. Turn the ignition key ON. The fuel pump should cycle and the
system should return to normal operation.
SENSOR LOCATION
The tipover sensor is mounted on the rear inner fender debris flap
behind the rear shock absorber. The sensor and wire connector can
be accessed by removing the right side cover.
Sensor Location
DIAGNOSTICS
1. If the tipover sensor was activated (vehicle was actually tipped
over) reset the system as outlined above. If the system fault is
still present, continue.
2. Remove the right side cover.
3. Visually inspect the sensor. Be sure it is securely mounted to
the debris flap and the debris flap is secure in the chassis. The
word “UP” must be visible on the top of the sensor and the
sensor should be level relative to the motorcycle.
4. Disconnect the sensor from the main wire harness and look at
connector pins for signs of corrosion or misalignment that would “UP”
cause a poor connection.
5. Connect Digital Wrench for further diagnosis of the tipover
sensor circuit.
Side Stand Switch Information (EU Models

Only)
NOTE: The Side Stand Safety System is only used on
EU model Victory Motorcycles.
• The Side Stand Safety System is in place on EU

models to prevent driving or starting the motorcycle
with the side stand in the lowered position while the
transmission is in gear. This system will shut the
engine off when transmission is in gear with the
side stand down. This system will also prevent the
engine from starting with the side stand in the
lowered position and the transmission in gear with
the clutch lever pulled in (the engine will crank, but
not start).
• The Side Stand Safety System uses a magnetic

switch mounted on the frame above the side stand
pivot point. The EU side stand has a magnet
mounted near the pivot point that activates the
switch. The switch relays the side stand position to
the ECM.
• Be sure to choose the correct calibration when

reflashing the ECM on ALL Victory Motorcycles and
verify the VIN information is correct in the ECM
after the reflash. A no start condition could exist if
the VIN information is not correct.
Side Stand Switch Testing

1. Inspect side stand. Be sure the side stand magnet is
still attached to the side stand by the pivot point. Also
clean any large debris off of the side stand magnet.
2. Disconnect the connector for the side stand switch.
Turn key on. Place the red lead of a volt meter on pin
1 (VT/PK) of the engine harness connector and place
the black lead of the volt meter on battery ground.
Battery voltage should be present. If battery voltage is
not present, check related wires and connections.
Refer to the engine wire harness wire diagram. Turn
key off.
3. With an ohm meter or continuity tester, check pin 2
(BN/DB) for good continuity to battery ground. There
should be good continuity to ground (0.5 ohms or less).
4. Disconnect the ECM connector. With an ohm meter or
continuity tester, check for continuity between pin 3
(BK/OG) of the side stand switch harness connector
and pin 32 of the ECM connector. There should be
good continuity (0.5 ohms or less). If there is high
resistance or no continuity, check related wires and
connectors. 19
19
5. Check pins 1-3 on the side stand switch connector for
shorts/grounds. If found, replace switch.
HORN RELAY CIRCUITS

System Diagram
Battery voltage with key on and

horn button pressed.
Power directly
to test horn.
Ground horn with a
jumper to test ground
connection and circuit.
Instrument Cluster Connector Input / Output (Cross Country)
19
19
HEATERS
Heated Seat / Hand Grip Wiring Diagram
HEATED SEAT GRID TROUBLESHOOTING:
Disconnect 2-Pin connector (under seat).
Connect Ohmmeter to LB/PK and BK wires on seat side
of 2-Pin connector. Turn both seat heater switches OFF.
Test each switch / grid separately (turn other switch OFF).
Compare to specifications below (all specs +/- 20%).
NOTE: High and low grid resistance measured
will be the same approximate value.
GRIP RESISTANCE
(EACH)
Driver
OFF: O.L. () Passenger
HIGH or LOW: OFF: O.L. ()
2M -12M HIGH or LOW:
2M -12M
HEATED SEAT POWER SUPPLY TROUBLESHOOTING: Disconnect 2-Pin connector (under seat).
Turn key ON. Check for battery voltage on DB/PK wire on main harness side of connector.
Turn key OFF. Check for a good ground (less than 1 Ohm) on BK wire (on main harness side of 2-Pin).
SWITCH CONTACT
Wire Color BN LB/PK DB
HIGH
OFF
LOW
Heated Grips
TROUBLESHOOTING:
To Measure Individual Grip Wire Resistance:
Black - Brown: 13 Ohms
Black - Blue: 8 Ohms
Note: White grip wires are
connected together
(CROSS COUNTRY) Switch
In headlamp housing
or fairing. See jumper
harness to main harness
wiring below.
TROUBLESHOOTING:
Switch
To Measure Grip Resistance at Switch: (CROSS ROADS)
(This test measures the resistance of both grip heater grids in parallel).
Disconnect DB (High) and BN (Low) wires from switch.
Measure resistance between DB wire and ground: Approx 4 Ohms
Measure resistance between BN wire and ground: Approx 6.5 Ohms
If resistance is out of range, test each grip resistance individually.
JUMPER HARNESS TO MAIN HARNESS WIRING

LB = Light Blue; BU = Blue; DB = Dark Blue; BN = Brown;
BK = Black; WH = White; PK = Pink Squeeze tabs
to remove
Jumper Harness
Wire Color
BK LB DB BN
Main Harness CONNECTIONS TO SWITCH
Wire Color
BK Brown
(across from HIGH button)
BU/PK
BU
BN
SWITCH CONTACTS
Wire Color
BN LB DB
Light Blue (POWER)
HIGH
OFF
LOW Dark Blue (across from LOW button)
19
19
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LOCATIONS

Component Locations
4 2 1 7
6
5 8
9
10
3
ECM (1) LEFT SIDE COVER RIGHT SIDE COVER

Engine-to-Chassis Harness Connector (2) Fuse Box (7)
Diagnostic Connector (3) EVAP Purge Connector (8)
Reverse (Accy) Connector (4) Flasher Module (9)
Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) (5) Fuse - Accy (Powerlet GY/RD) (10)
Gear Position Switch Connector (6)
CROSS COUNTRY GENERAL HARNESS AND CONNECTOR ROUTING / LOCATION
Radio Fuse (11) 11

Ambient Air Temp (12)
Radio Antenna (13)
NAV Connector (14) 12
(if equipped) 13
Chassis to Fairing
Harness Connector(15)
19
Cruise Switch 14
Connector (16) 18
Handlebar Switch
Connectors (17)
Fairing Harness 16
Connector (18)
LCD Display
Connector (19)
15
17
Ground Locations Connector Pin Inspection

Symptoms of a loose, corroded, or broken ground wire vary Thorough inspection of an electrical connection should
depending on the wire and the location. Most often, a include a visual inspection of pin and socket condition,
problem with a main ground wire location will affect multiple cleanliness, alignment AND SECURITY. The photo below
circuits. Inspect the grounds to be sure they are clean and is an example of a wire at the fuse box that is pushed past
tight. the lock tab (the lock is in place). Always pull lightly on
connector wires in a suspect circuit to be sure they are
Engine ground (A). secured in the connector, and do not move when the
Left rear corner of crankcase. mating halves are re-connected or when fuses, relays, or
breakers are re-installed in their respective sockets.
Connector Pin
A
Forced From Socket
Chassis harness grounds are located under the right side

cover, behind the inner panel.
The ECM ground is located on the frame behind the ECM.
19
19
CRUISE CONTROL Operation Overview

Operation Overview - Setting Speed Resume
Review Cruise Control Safety & Operation in the Rider’s Manual
before operating the Cruise Control. NOTE THAT YOU MUST
WAIT AT LEAST 3 SECONDS AFTER TURNING THE CRUISE
SWITCH ON BEFORE IT WILL ENGAGE!
To set the cruise control (if equipped):
Accelerate Decelerate
RESUME
Right Handlebar Pressing the Resume button (RES) will reset the cruise to
the memorized speed after braking or disengaging the
cruise control with either brake, throttle, or clutch.
On Set
NOTE: If the RES button is pressed within 3 seconds
of disengaging, the cruise control may not engage,
EVEN IF THE CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR
ILLUMINATES. This is a safety feature that prevents
cruise control from engaging if a button is stuck. To
continue using cruise control, disengage it. Wait at
OFF least 3 seconds, then press the RES button.
1. Press the ON button to activate Cruise Control. Note NOTE: Turning the cruise control master switch off
the cruise indicator on the instrument cluster will will erase the set speed from memory and disengage
illuminate every time the ON/OFF button is pressed. the cruise control.
2. Accelerate to desired speed and press SET button
ACCELERATE
(wait at least 3 seconds after the cruise ON button was
pressed). This speed will be logged in memory. Tap and release the ACC button to increase speeds in
3. The CRUISE indicator lamp on the instrument cluster approximately 1 mph (1-2 km/h) increments. Press and
will illuminate. hold ACC button to accelerate to a new SET speed
(resets when button is released).
NOTE: If you use throttle to accelerate and then
release it, cruise will resume original SET speed.
DECELERATE
Tap and release Decelerate (DEC) button to decrease
• Cruise control can be set in any gear. speeds in approximately 1 mph (1-2 km/h) increments.
• The cruise control can be activated at speeds Press and hold DEC button to decelerate to a new SET
above 25 mph (40 kph). speed (resets when button is released), or to the
• Set speed will vary slightly in hilly terrain. minimum of 25 mph (40 km/h).
• The cruise control will not resume a pre-set speed if TO CANCEL THE CRUISE CONTROL
the resulting accel / decel rate is too high or too low. To temporarily cancel cruise control and allow use of the
Example: If you are in 6th gear and try to resume a resume feature:
set speed from 40 mph, the cruise may disengage.
• Apply brakes, close the throttle, or pull the clutch lever in.
• Brake lights must be working properly.
4. Push the OFF button to turn the cruise control system To cancel the cruise control and erase the set speed from
off and erase the memory set speed. memory, press OFF.
Cruise Control Diagnostics 7. Press and release the RES/ACC button. The cruise
indicator lamp should illuminate every time a button is
The sensors and switches that supply information to the pushed and go out when released.
cruise control module can be tested to verify proper
operation using the self-diagnostic function built in to the Brake Light Switch Test
cruise control system. 8. Pull the front brake lever or push the rear brake pedal.
The cruise indicator lamp should illuminate every time
NOTE: The ENGINE STOP SWITCH must be in the RUN
a brake is applied and go out when released.
position during the entire procedure. The LED indicator
light on the ON/OFF switch must be illuminated when the Throttle Safety Switch Test
key, stop switch, and cruise are ON. (Check power supply
9. Close the throttle firmly with the twist grip. The cruise
on Pin 1 (DG/PK wire) at the cruise switch connector in the
indicator lamp should illuminate every time the throttle
fairing if the LED is not lit.
is closed and go out when the throttle grip is released.
To enter the diagnostic mode:
Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Test
1. Turn the cruise control OFF.
10. Roll the motorcycle forward or backward for at least 2
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. meters while observing the cruise indicator lamp. If the
speed signal is present, the cruise indicator lamp
3. Turn the ignition key ON, but do not start the engine. should flash and continue to flash at the same rate.
4. Press and HOLD the RESUME / ACC button while you Tachometer Signal Test
press the cruise control ON/OFF button. The cruise
11. Turn the cruise control OFF (press the OFF button).
control indicator should illuminate on the instrument
cluster. 12. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
5. Release both buttons. The cruise control indicator 13. Be sure the transmission is in NEUTRAL.
should go OFF. If it does NOT go off when the buttons
are released, refer to the Troubleshooting Chart at the 14. Turn the ignition key to the ON position and start the
end of this procedure. engine. Hold the RES/ACC button down while you
press the cruise control ON button.
The system is now in self-diagnostic mode.
15. Release both buttons. If a tachometer signal is present,
Switch Button Test
the cruise indicator lamp should flash at a rate based
6. Press and release the SET/DEC button. The cruise on engine RPM. Rev the engine. The rate of flash
indicator lamp should illuminate every time the button should increase with RPM.
is pushed and go out when released.
16. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position. All tests are
complete.
Cruise Control Self-Diagnostic Troubleshooting

SYMPTOM POSSIBLE PROBLEM REMEDY / DIAGNOSTIC TEST
Enter diagnostic mode. Disconnect each switch, one

at a time, while watching the cruise indicator. If the
cruise light goes out when a switch is disconnected,
inspect the switch and related circuit wiring. If the
throttle switch is suspect, adjust throttle cable free
Cruise indicator lights but does Front brake switch, rear
play as described in Chapter 2 and test the switch.
not go off when buttons are brake switch, or throttle
Disconnect the switch and connect an Ohmmeter to
released in Step 5. switch is closed.
the switch contacts (on the throttle close cable). The
throttle switch should have continuity only when the
throttle is closed firmly, and no continuity when throttle
is released (Pin 4 of module should not be powered
when throttle is released).
19
19
Cruise Module Input / Output Cruise Module Connector / Jumper Harness Location (A).
The self-diagnostic test on page 19.23 will test the

following signal inputs to the module:
A
• SET/DEC Button on the handlebar switch.
• RES/ACC button on the handlebar switch.
• Front and rear brake light switch.
• Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS).
• Tachometer Signal.
If the red LED on the handlebar switch is on when powered,

but the self diagnostics will not function, disconnect the
harness from the module (located in the frame opening
under the seat) and verify that battery voltage is reaching
the module on Pin A (White / Dark Blue wire).
NOTE: The red LED only indicates that power is

reaching the handlebar control and does not indicate
that power is reaching the module. If the self
diagnostic function performs normally (page 19.23)
power is reaching the module and the inputs listed
above are present and functional.
Disconnect harness from module. Test Input / Outputs with

a 12V test light or a multimeter and compare to table. Verify
Pin E (Black wire) has a good ground to the rear frame. The
ground connection is located under the right inner panel
under the right side cover.
Cruise Module Wire Harness Connector

WIRE
PIN CRUISE CONTROL FUNCTION
COLOR
A WH / DB ON / OFF (+12 Vdc)
B WH / OG SET / DECEL INPUT (+12 Vdc)
C WH / VT RESUME / ACCEL INPUT (+12 Vdc)
D WH / RD THROTTLE SAFETY SW IN (+12 Vdc)
E BK GROUND
F DB / PK SWITCHED POWER (+12 Vdc)
G WH / PK STOP LAMP INPUT (+12 Vdc)
ENGINE RPM INPUT (TACH SIGNAL

H DG / WH FROM PIN 22 of ECM)
J WH / BN IDICATOR LAMP OUTPUT
VEHICLE SPEED INPUT (FROM PIN

K DG / DB 21 ECM)
Wiring Diagram / Reverse Harness
REVERSE SYSTEM (ACCESSORY)
YE
WH DG/WH
WH
DG
Reverse
Harness PK
DB/YE
GY/RD
Chassis DB
Harness
PK
Y/W
RD/BK
OG RD
IC = Instrument Cluster

Under seat / left side inner saddlebag
Under seat / left side cover
Wire Color Note:

BU/Y = DB/YE
GN = DG
Under electrical cover R = RD
19.25
(front of engine) W = WH
Y = YE
BU = DB
19
19
Reverse System Diagnostics

OVERVIEW OF OPERATION
In a Reverse system, the electric starter button serves a dual purpose. When the starter button is pressed, battery
voltage is sent through the Reverse wiring harness to the Reverse Module. The module then decides whether to send
power to the electric starter solenoid (for engine starting) or to the Reverse Drive Motor (for reverse operation). This
decision is based on information the module receives from the reverse switch and a few other inputs such as the
neutral switch and tachometer signal.
MECHANICAL SYSTEM BASIC FUNCTION
When the Reverse Lever is lifted UP (Reverse) a cam-actuated linkage rod pulls the Reverse Idler Gear inward,
directly coupling the Pinion Gear to the Reverse Driven gear (mounted to the belt drive sprocket). The Reverse Switch
is now OPEN, which takes the ground away from Pin C of the module, and the module will supply power to the
Reverse motor when the starter button is pressed.
REVERSE MODULE INPUT TESTING
To test the various inputs to the reverse module, disconnect the harness from the module (page 19.28) and test with a
12V test light or multimeter. Tests are outlined in the table below.
NOTE: The engine must be running to test the tachometer signal to the module on Pin A. If the tachometer
works, perform tests on the other inputs first, then if necessary, test the tach input on Pin A.
REVERSE MODULE INPUT / OUTPUT
Pin Wire Pin Function / Test Connections / Normal Result
Function / Name
Number Color (All input tests performed on connector pins; harness disconnected from module)
SIGNAL: 9Hz square wave. FUNCTION: tells module engine is running.
TEST: Set meter to Hz A/C or Vdc. Start engine first, then disconnect harness
connector from module. Connect red (+) meter lead to PIN A. Connect black (-)
A Tachometer Input DG
meter lead to engine ground or Pin F (if ground at Pin F has been tested).
RESULT: Approximately 9 Hz or a pulsating DC indicated on the bar graph of the
meter, indicating that a signal is present (voltage reading will vary).
SIGNAL: +12 Vdc. FUNCTION: Battery voltage into module when starter button
is pressed. TEST: Set meter to Vdc. Connect red (+) meter lead to PIN B. Connect
B Start Switch Input DB / YE
black (-) meter lead to engine ground (or Pin F). Turn ignition switch ON and stop
switch to RUN. RESULT: Battery voltage present when starter button is pressed.
SIGNAL: Open to ground. FUNCTION: Tells module Reverse has been selected
(Pin C has no ground). TEST: Set meter to (Ohms). Connect one meter lead to
C Reverse Switch Input WH PIN C. Connect other meter lead to engine ground (or Pin F). Move reverse lever
to Reverse. RESULT: OPEN (OL) with lever in Reverse (UP). Good continuity to
ground ( 1)with lever in Forward (down).
D Not Used - Pin D not used
SIGNAL: +12 Vdc. FUNCTION: Battery voltage into module.
TEST: Set meter to Vdc. Connect red (+) meter lead to PIN E. Connect black (-)
E Switched Power PK
meter lead to engine ground (or Pin F). Turn ignition switch ON and stop switch
to RUN. RESULT: Battery voltage present when key is turned ON.
Module ground. TEST: Set meter to (Ohms). Connect one meter lead to PIN F.
F Ground BK
Connect other meter lead to engine ground. RESULT: Continuity to ground ( 1)
SIGNAL: +12 Vdc. FUNCTION: Power supply from load side of 40A circuit
G Battery Voltage RD
breaker. Module switches power to Pin J in Reverse. TEST: +12 Vdc constant.
Power out of module to engine starter solenoid when starter button is pressed
H Starter Output YE
(and reverse lever is not in Reverse).
Power out of module to reverse drive motor when starter button is pressed (and
J Reverse Output GY/RD
reverse lever is in Reverse).
K Not Used - Pin K not used
Reverse System Diagnostics (Cont.)
REVERSE SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem Possible Cause / Remedy Reference
Reverse switch contacts closed.

See below for switch contact test.
Check reverse switch function and
Adjust linkage rod.
linkage adjustment.
Reverse system inoperative.
25A fuse open (blown). Replace fuse
“R” not indicated on display. See page 19.28
and determine cause.
Poor wiring connection. Verify all

wiring is connected and clean.
Reverse lever in “Reverse” position

Engine starter inoperative* (UP). Move lever to forward (DOWN)
position.*
*NOTE: If the 25A fuse is blown, the
25A fuse open (blown). Replace fuse.
engine starter motor will not operate See page 19.28
Determine cause of failure.
even if the reverse lever is in the
forward (down) position. Poor wiring connection. Verify all
wiring is connected and clean.
Reverse linkage adjustment incorrect.

“R” Displayed too early or too late in See below for switch contact test.
reverse lever travel range Reverse switch malfunction or switch Adjust linkage rod.
mounting bracket bent.
Reverse switch contacts open (no

Move lever back to the Forward
Engine kills when transmission shifted ground on Pin C at module). Reverse
position (down) or adjust shift
into gear. lever in Reverse position or linkage
linkage.
adjustment incorrect.
Difficulty moving lever into or out of Reverse gear idler shaft dirty.
Lubricate idler shaft.
Reverse position Lubricate shaft at every oil change.
Reverse Switch Inspection
In Reverse (switch arm is up) - No continuity 1. Disconnect switch (under left side cover).
Switch mounted
2. Connect one lead of Ohmmeter to switch
in reverse gear case
wire and the other to engine ground.
3. Place Reverse lever in forward (Down).
4. Resistance should be less than 1 Ohm
to ground (good continuity).
5. Slowly lift reverse lever while observing
the Ohmmeter reading. Lever must move
In Forward - continuity through switch at least 6mm (1/4 inch) and no more than
Connected to reverse harness grounds Pin C of module 12mm (1/2 inch) before the switch opens
(under LH side cover)
(no continuity).
6. If switch opens and closes out of the range
above, adjust linkage rod (Chapter 11). 19
19
Replace switch if always grounded or open.
Reverse System Safety

NOTE: Do not attempt to engage or disengage the reverse system when the motorcycle is moving.
BEFORE operating in reverse NEVER operate in reverse
Always sit on the motorcycle with legs astride and both When not properly seated.
feet on the ground.
When in an area where obstacles or bystanders are
Always check for obstacles or people behind the present.
motorcycle.
With a passenger on board. A passenger can obstruct
Always retract the sidestand fully. your view and maneuverability.
Always make sure the motorcycle is completely stopped. On loose or slippery surfaces. Loss of foot traction could
cause a tip-over.
While the motorcycle is moving forward.
When on a grade or uneven surfaces.
Operating The Reverse System Reverse Module / Fuse Access

1. Check the area behind and around the motorcycle for
1. Remove left saddlebag.
obstacles or people. Be aware that the front wheel
may travel outward and require a larger operating
2. The reverse module and the reverse system fuse are
area.
located on the rear fender debris flap.
2. Make sure the motorcycle is stationary.
3. Lift tab and separate connector from module.
3. Dismount any passenger.
4. Straddle the motorcycle and bring it to the fully upright NOTE: The starter system will not function with the
position. Sit in a normal riding position with legs astride reverse module disconnected, or if the 25A fuse is
and both feet on the ground. open (blown). On models equipped with Reverse, the
tachometer signal test (page 19.11) can be performed
5. Retract the sidestand.
at this connector, but the engine must be started
6. Place the transmission in neutral. Start the engine and BEFORE disconnecting the harness from the reverse
allow it to idle. module.
7. Lift the reverse lever and verify that the reverse
indicator (R) displays in the Information Display.
8. Recheck the area behind and around the motorcycle
to ensure a clear operating area.
9. While balancing the motorcycle with your legs and feet,
press and hold the START button to begin moving in
reverse. Release the button to stop moving.
10. When completely stopped, move the reverse lever
down to the disengaged position. Verify that the neutral
indicator (N) displays before stopping the engine.
NOTE: The engine will stop if you shift into forward gear
before disengaging the reverse lever.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM BREAKOUTS
Speedometer (Cross Country / Cross Country Tour)
19
19
Speedometer (Cross Roads)
Trunk
19
19
Fairing (Cross Country / Cross Country Tour)
COLOR I
BE I GE ., , ,. .,
BL,ACK
2012-2013 Cross Roads, Cross Country & Cross Country Tour
Engine Harness
E*ilE
WIRE COLOR LEGEND

BG BEIGE (TAN)
BK BLACK
BU L l GHT BLUE
DB DARK BLUE
BN BROWN
GY GRAY
GN L I G H T GREEN
DG DARK GREEN
OG ORANGE
PK PINK
RD RED
VT VIOLET (PURPLE)
WH WH 1TE
YE YELLOW
TWO WIRE COLORS ARE SHOWN
WlTH MAIN/TRACE COLORS.
EXAMPLE:RD/YE = RED WlTH
YFI I OW TRACF.

Victory 2012-2013 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document informationCross Roads Classic Cross Country Cross Country Tour Hardball

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

Victory 2012-2013 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Victory 2012-2013 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SPECIFICATIONS / GAUGE / AUDIO

Polaris acknowledges the following products mentioned in this manual:

XM, a registered trademark of XM Satellite Radio, Inc.

• Always stop the engine and refuel outdoors or in a

Care should be taken to be sure the motorcycle

Cross Roads Classic Hard-Ball

2012-2013 Cross Roads Classic™ / Hard-Ball™

2012-2013 Cross Country® / Cross Country Tour® / NESS Specifications 1

2012-2013 Cross Country® / Cross Country Tour® / NESS

•operator body weight

MODEL ENGINE PREMIUM

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) Designation

Vehicle Descriptors Vehicle Identifiers

Individual Serial No.

VIN Number / Manufacturer Label

• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

Engine Number Location

Saddlebag Warning Label

Rear Shock Air Pressure Label

PUBLICATIONS & TECHNICAL LITERATURE

MODEL Service Manua l PN Owner’s Manual PN

The 9th letter of the model number designates the color.

2013 VICTORY CROSS ROADS CLASSIC / HARD-BALL 1

Paint Color Codes

The general break-in guidelines are as follows:

Noise Emission Control System

Crankcase Emission Control

Evaporative Emission Control

SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS

Tune Up & Maintenance Tools

Steering & Suspension Tools

Fuel System & Fuel Injection

Tool Ordering Information

TRANSPORTING, ELEVATING, AND SECURING THE MOTORCYCLE 1

If you must transport the motorcycle or secure it to a lift table:

Platform jack To swing arm (both sides)

Ignition Switch Function

CROSS ROADS SPEEDOMETER / 1

Speedometer (A) Speedometer Gear position Indicator

Cross Roads Instrument Cluster

Indicator Lamp Function Indicator Lamp Function

Multi Function Display (MFD) Engine Error Codes (Cross Country)

Suspect Parameter Number (SPN)

Gear Position (Cross Country)

CONSOLE SWITCHES (CROSS

Odometer (Cross Country)

Changing Information Display Units (Cross

NOTE: To exit set-up mode at any time, wait 10

1. Turn the key OFF.

2. When the display flashes the DISTANCE setting, tap

LEFT HANDLEBAR SWITCHES Headlamp High / Low Beam Switch

Refer to the individual display feature throughout this

A Turn Signal Switch

Turn Signal Momentary Feature RIGHT HANDLEBAR CONTROLS

CAUTION Front Brake Lever Reach Adjustment

Front brake lever “reach” or distance to the hand grip is

iPodis a registered trademark of Apple Inc.

Not all motorcycles are equipped with all components